Home

1336E-UM001 - Rockwell Automation

1. n P EE Language 3 fo Jumper Module i T A O L Option Board Connector O O GG0008000008 L Option Board TB10 Connector Spares SCANport 2 Connections m 1 6 Overview Figure 1 2 Control Board for All Other Frames O O a Spares O Gateway Connector EE Jumper all Language Module Sa L Option pli 3 Ja SCANport 1 Connectors B3 Pulse Input d q4 SCANport 2 Jumper J4 x Coss 7 TB10 TB11 Where Do I Go From Here The installation and mounting instructions for your 1336 IMPACT drive are provided in Chapter 2 Mounting and Wiring Your 1336 IMPACT Drive Some information is frame specific For frame specific information refer to the appropriate chapter If your drive frame reference is Then go to A1 A2 A3 or A4 Chapter 3 B C D E F G or H Chapter 4 Chapter Objectives Chapter 2 Mounting and Wiring
2. 11 6 Parameters No Name Page 142 Data In B1 11 45 143 Data In B2 11 45 144 Data In C1 11 46 145 Data In C2 11 46 146 Data In D1 11 46 147 Data In D2 11 46 148 Data Out A1 11 46 149 Data Out A2 11 46 150 Data Out B1 11 47 151 Data Out B2 11 47 152 Data Out C1 11 47 153 Data Out C2 11 47 154 Data Out D1 11 47 155 Data Out D2 11 47 156 Autotune Status 11 48 157 Total Inertia 11 48 158 Ki Speed Loop 11 48 159 Kp Speed Loop 11 48 160 Kf Speed Loop 11 49 161 Spd Desired BW 11 49 162 Error Filtr BW 11 49 163 Reserved 11 49 164 Autotune Torque 11 49 165 Autotune Speed 11 50 166 Stator Resistnce 11 50 167 Leak Inductance 11 50 168 Flux Current 11 50 169 Slip Gain 11 50 170 Vd Max 11 51 171 Vq Max 11 51 172 Trans Dgn Config 11 51 173 Autotune Dgn Sel 11 51 174 Inverter Dgn1 11 52 175 Inverter Dgn2 11 52 176 Autotune Errors 11 53 177 Ki Freq Reg 11 53 178 Kp Freq Reg 11 53 179 Kf Freq Reg 11 53 180 Freq Track Filtr 11 54 181 SP 2 Wire Enable 11 54 182 An In1 Filter BW 11 54 183 An In2 Filter BW 11 54 184 mA In Filter BW 11 54 185 Notch Filtr Freq 11 55 186 Notch Filtr Q 11 55 187 Relay Config 2 11 56 188 Relay Setpoint 2 11 56 189 Relay Config 3 11 57 190 Relay Setpoint 3 11 57 191 Relay Config 4 11 58 192 Relay Setpoint 4 11
3. Figure 2 6 Gateway Connection Location oO O Connect Your Communications a Here l Refer to the documentation that came with your gateway for installation information If you need additional SCANport connections the 1203 SG2 and 1203 SG4 SCANport expanders are available If you are using an L Option board refer to Chapter 5 Using the L Option for installation instructions The terminal blocks used to connect the L Option board accept wire with the following specifications Wire information Description Minimum wire size 0 06 mm 30 AWG Maximum wire size 3 3 mm 12 AWG Maximum torque 0 79 N m 7 Ib in Wire type Use only copper wire AC Supply Source 1336 IMPACT drives are suitable for use on a circuit that can deliver up to a maximum of 200 000 rms symmetrical amperes when used with the AC input line fuses specified in the tables in the frame specific chapters The 1336 IMPACT drive does not contain input power short circuit fusing Specifications for the recommended size and type to provide drive input power protection against short circuits are on the following pages 2 26 Mounting and Wiring Your 1336 IMPACT Drive ATTENTION To guard against personal injury and or equipm
4. This catalog number Is shown in 1336E AQF05 50 Figure D 1 1336E A010 Figure D 2 1336E A015 Figure D 3 1336E A020 Figure D 4 1336E A025 Figure D 5 1336E A040 Figure D 6 1336E A050 Figure D 7 1336E A060 Figure D 8 1336E A075 Figure D 9 1336E A100 Figure D 10 1336E BRF05 100 Figure D 1 1336E B015 Figure D 11 1336E B020 Figure D 2 1336E B025 Figure D 12 1336E B030 Figure D 3 1336E B040 Figure D 4 1336E BX040 Figure D 13 1336E B050 Figure D 5 1336E BX060 Figure D 5 1336E B075 Figure D 14 1336E B100 Figure D 15 1336E B125 Figure D 16 1336E B150 Figure D 9 1336E BX150 Figure D 16 1336E B200 Figure D 10 1336E B250 Figure D 17 1336E BP300 Figure D 18 1336E BP350 Flgure D 19 1336E BP400 Figure D 20 1336E BP450 Figure D 21 1336E B500 Figure D 22 1336E B600 Figure D 23 1336E B700C Figure D 24 1336E B800C Figure D 24 1336E C075 Figure D 25 1336E C100 Figure D 26 1336E C125 Figure D 27 1336E C150 Figure D 28 1336E C200 Figure D 29 1336E C250 Figure D 30 1336E CP350 Figure D 38 1336E C400 Figure D 31 1336E CP400 Figure D 39 1336E C450 Figure D 32 1336E C500 Figure D 37 1336E C600 Figure D 38 1336E C650 Figure D 39 1336E C700C Figure D 39 1336E C800C Figure D 39 D 2 Derating Guidelines Derating Guidelines Gm Standard rating for enclosed drive in 40 C ambient and open drive in 50 C ambient Derating factor for enclosed drive in ambient between 41
5. A 301 2 11 86 l I A 1 l l 225 9 1 8 89 l l 1 ne Cutout l l 150 6 i 5 93 l l l I I All Dimensions in Millimeters and Inches Yy y 14 Required 4 3 0 171 Dia for 10 32 x 12 7 0 5 Self Tap 4 0 0 159 for 10 32 x 12 7 0 5 Threaded Back of Enclosure 1 Shading indicates approximate size of drive inside enclosure 3 10 Mounting and Wiring Information Specific to Frames A1 A2 A3 and A4 Notes Chapter Objectives Wiring the Power Chapter 4 Mounting and Wiring Information Specific to Frames B C D E F G and H Chapter 4 provides the mounting and wiring information specific to frames B H This Topic Starts on Page Wiring the power 4 1 Selecting the proper lug kit for your system 4 6 Hard wiring your I O 4 8 Selecting verifying fan voltage 4 10 Input fusing requirements 4 11 Dimensions 4 12 Important If your 1336 IMPACT drive is not a B H frame size skip this chapter and read the mounting and wiring instructions specific to your frame size If you do not know what your frame size is refer to Chapter 1 Overview The location of the input and output connections depend on the size of your drive Then the input and output connections need to be If your drive is niad Through an 11 position terminal block TB1 located on the 15 to 30 hp G
6. Step Step Step Step Step Enabled Run Sequence Hold Active Step If there were more steps the first five bits bits 0 4 of parameter 236 would reflect the present commanded step as a binary value Bits 5 and 6 of the status word reflect the present state of the profile Enable bit 0 and the Run Sequence bit 1 of the command word Profile Enable P235 The Run Sequence bit is latched while the Enable bit is Not This means that once a sequence has begun and the Run Sequence bit 1 of P235 has been set clearing of the Sequence bit will be ignored because it is latched Beginning a Sequence At this point the system should be ready to run the Speed Profile program To begin Profile Execution 1 Set the Enable bit 0 1st bit of parameter 235 2 Press the Green Button On HIM or GPT terminal to start the drive 3 Set the Run Cycle bit 1 of the Profile Enable parameter 235 to execute profile control Using the TB3 Inputs Applications 9 23 The digital inputs of the L Option Card can be used with the speed profile control Two input modes were added specifically for this purpose modes 31 and 32 Mode 31 makes six inputs available for controlling transition from one speed profile step to another Mode 32 duplicates some of the command functions of the Profile Enable parameter 235 These L Option input modes can be selected by adjusting the value of parameter 116
7. To Motor 1 Required Input Fusing Required Branch Circuit Disconnect T 7 AC Input Line 1 User supplied Mounting and Wiring Information Specific to Frames B C D E F G and H Figure 4 4 Drive Connections for Frames E F and G 200 240V 56 75 kW 75 100 HP Terminal Designations 380 480V 112 187 kW 150 250 HP Terminal Designations 500 600V 112 224 kW 150 300 HP Terminal Designations me pen PTET TST TET Tet Te Tet Set Tet Te er TE DC DC PE PE R L1 S L2 TL3 U M1 V M2 W M3 ae BUS dies ds INPUT OUTPU i SE r E E E To Motor 1 To Motor Required 1 Required Branch Input Fusing Circuit Disconnect T T AC Input Line 380 480V 187 336 kW 250 450 HP Terminal Designations ollollo a i Input Fusing Supplied To Motor 1 Required Branch Circuit Disconnect T T T AC Input Line 9101010 Ole typical
8. NOTE Analog O is differential non isolated I O A negative does not Indicate common Mounting and Wiring Information Specific to Frames B C D E F G and H 4 9 The terminal blocks provide the following TIS Provides these terminal terminal Which provide access to this signal block numbers 6 9 12 17 20 Shield ground 1 2 3 DC power supply 10V DC 50 mA per voltage 4 5 7 8 0 to 10V DC Input Input impedance 20K Ohms 10 11 4 20 mA input Input impedance 130 Ohms TB10 13 14 Pulse input for frequency reference 5V DC Jumper J4 Set to 1 2 12V DC Jumper J4 Set to 2 3 Scale Factor Pulse PPR must be set 10mA minimum 15 16 18 19 0 to 10V DC output Output impedance 100 Ohms 10mA maximum 21 22 4 20 mA DC output Output impedance 20 Ohms 10 Logic Earth Ground Shield TE 1 2 3 Programmable contacts 4 5 6 Resistive rating 115VAC 30VDC 5 0A 7 8 9 Inductive rating 115VAC 30VDC 2 0A The voltage clearance provides physical space between the logic earth ground and other signals on the terminal block 4 10 Mounting and Wiring Information Specific to Frames B C D E F G and H 1336 IMPACT drives 45 kW 60 hp to 448 kW 600 hp that have cooling fans use a transformer to match the input line voltage to the proper fan voltage If you are using an input voltage other than the standard 240 480 or 600V AC you may need to chang
9. Mounting Hole Detail E h ___ 7 0 0 28 127 050 li m A 12 7 0 50 I rae j a a LW y a l iN lt CC gt Three Phase Rating Frame Mounting Holes 4 See Detail 200 240V 380 480V 500 600V Reference 0 37 0 75 kW 0 37 1 2 kW M Bottom View Will Vary with HP See Bottom View Dimensions tee THE Dene 1 2 1 5 kW 1 5 2 2 kW A2 1 5 2 HP 2 3 HP 2 2 3 7 kW 3 7 kW _ A3 3 5 HP 5 HP _ 5 5 7 5kW 0 75 7 5 kW AA 7 5 10 HP 1 10 HP 5 5 11 kW 11 22 kW 41 15 kW B 7 5 15 HP 15 30 HP 15 20 HP 15 22 kW 30 45 kW 18 5 45 kW c 20 30 HP 40 60 HP 25 60 HP 30 45 kw 45 112kW 56 93 kW D 40 60 HP 60 150HP 75 125 HP 56 93 kW 112 187kW 112 187 kW E 75 125 HP 150 250 HP 150 250 HP 187 448 kW 224 448 kW G 250 600 HP 300 600 HP exist in another frame size Use care when choosing Frame Reference some ratings may Frame Shipping Ref re ce B C Max D E Y Z AA BB cc Weight A1 215 9 290 0 160 0 185 2 275 0 15 35 7 5 130 0 76 2 85 3 4 31 kg 8 50 11 42 6 30 7 29 10 83 0 60 0 30 5 12 3 00 3 36 9 5 Ibs A2 215 9 290 0 180 5 185 2 275 0 15 35 7 5 130 0 76 2 85 3 5 49 kg 8 50 11 42 7 10 7 29 10 83 0 60 0 30 5 12 3 00 3 36 12 1 Ibs A3 215 9 290 0 20
10. This parameter Is represented And has group by parameters this function 28 29 and 31 Supplies the speed references that the drive Speed Reference through 36 should use Speed Scale 30 and 37 Sets the gain multiplier that is used to scale Factor the speed references Jog Speed 38 and 39 Sets the jog speed reference When determining the speed reference bits 12 13 and 14 of Logic Input Sts parameter 14 identify which speed reference or preset speed parameter is used file Monitor group Drive Inv Status If bit 14 is And bit 13 is And bit 12 is Then the speed reference is 0 Zero 1 Speed Ref 1 0 Speed Ref 2 1 Speed Ref 3 0 Speed Ref 4 1 0 1 Speed Ref 5 Speed Ref 6 Speed Ref 7 a olo A o Likewise when determining the jog reference bits 2 and 6 of Logic Input Sts identify which jog speed parameter is used Using a Start Dwell You can use Start Dwell Spd parameter 193 and Start Dwell Time parameter 194 to set the speed and the length of time that the drive should immediately output when a start command is issued Once the specified time has elapsed the drive ramps to the speed you selected in speed reference through 7 d Speed Start Dwell Time parameter 194 Start Dwell Spd _y parameter 193 0 Time 0 Start Command B 6 Control Block Diagrams Choosing a Stop Command You need to s
11. Chapter Setting Up the Input Output Chapter Objective Chapter 7 provides information to help you set up the standard I O for the 1336 IMPACT drive This topic Starts on page A description of drive units 7 1 Setting up the analog I O 7 1 Setting up the 4 20 mA I O 7 8 Using the SCANport capabilities 7 10 Configuring the output relays 7 10 Configuring the pulse input 7 11 Configuring the L option I O 7 12 What Are Drive Units The drive uses internal drive units to represent input and output values Each parameter is a 16 bit word that allows a range of 32767 or 65535 internal units The drive is scaled so that 4096 is equal to one per unit or 100 of the quantity being regulated For analog inputs 5V converts to a digital value of 1024 Therefore if you have a 10V DC signal you have a total range of 2048 internal drive units For the analog outputs 1024 converts to an analog output voltage of 5V Setting Up the Analog I O Before you can use analog I O you need to do the following 1 Hard wire the analog I O to the board terminals This is covered in the mounting and wiring chapter 2 Set up the analog input and output configuration parameters in the drive This can be performed during the start up sequence 3 Create any user links if appropriate gt The 1336 IMPACT drive has been pre configured for your convenience Refer to Chapter 6 Starting Up Your System for a complete list of the
12. Status Password Display Process Program Link Start Up Save Values Recall Values Parameters Reset Defaults Links Drive to HIM HIM to Drive Not available before Version 1 06 Series B Control Logic Reset Drive 1 Fault Queue Warning Queue Login Logout Modify Process Display Parameter Files Parameter Groups Parameters Set Links Clear All Links File Level Group Level Element Level Starting Up Your System 6 7 Starting Up Your System Once you are familiar with the HIM you can begin the start up procedure ATTENTION During the start up procedures the motor will rotate Hazard of personal injury exists due to unexpected starts rotation in the wrong direction or contact with the motor shaft If possible uncouple the motor from the load and place a guard around the motor shaft Make sure the motor is securely mounted before beginning this procedure Figure 6 4 shows the outline for the start up procedure for the 1336 IMPACT drive Figure 6 4 Start Up Procedure Quick Motor Tune Enter Motor Data Regen Brake Configure Digital Section Relay Output Configure Analog Section Phase Rotation Autotune Inductance Resistance Flux Current Inertia This start up procedure is designed to be a fast basic start up It does not addres
13. Using Bus Brake Opts to Change Precharge Ridethrough Options You can use Bus Brake Opts parameter 13 to change how precharge and ridethrough work Bus Brake Opts is a bit encoded word that disables the following functions when the appropriate bit is set 1 This bit Has this definition 0 Sets the bus voltage tracker slew rate to 10 volts second 1 Sets the bus voltage tracker slew rate to 5 volts second 2 Sets the bus voltage tracker slew rate to 0 5 volts second 3 Sets the bus voltage tracker slew rate to 0 05 volts second 4 Sets the bus voltage tracker slew rate to 0 005 volts second 5 Reserved Leave zero 6 Enables flux braking This is covered in more detail in Chapter 9 Applications 7 Enables the DC hold feature This is covered in more detail in Chapter 9 Applications 8 Enables fast flux up This is covered in more detail later in this chapter 9 Enables DC braking This is covered in more detail in Chapter 9 Applications 10 Indicates that a chopper brake or other regenerative device is present 11 Forces an exit from precharge after the precharge timeout 12 Identifies the drive as a common bus converter Disables faults or warnings while the drive is disabled This allows power up and down the bus for a common bus system without faulting even if the 13 faults or warnings are enabled For example faults or warnings only occur if the drive is running This
14. Name No Page Absolute Overspd 24 11 10 Accel Time 1 42 11 20 Accel Time 2 43 11 20 An In 1 Offset 97 11 33 An In 1 Scale 98 11 33 An In 1 Value 96 11 33 An In 2 Offset 100 11 34 An In 2 Scale 101 11 34 An In 2 Value 99 11 33 An In1 Filter BW 182 11 54 An In2 Filter BW 183 11 54 An Out 1 Offset 106 11 35 An Out 1 Scale 107 11 35 An Out 1 Value 105 11 34 An Out 2 Offset 109 11 35 An Out 2 Scale 110 11 35 An Out 2 Value 108 11 35 Autotune Errors 176 11 53 Autotune Speed 165 11 50 Autotune Status 156 11 48 Autotune Torque 164 11 49 Autotune Dgn Sel 173 11 51 Bus Brake Opts 13 11 12 Clr Flt Res Mask 127 11 41 Command Spd Sts 82 11 28 Counts Per Unit 245 11 75 Current Rate Lim 77 11 28 Data In A1 140 11 45 Data In A2 141 11 45 Data In B1 142 11 45 Data In B2 143 11 45 Data In C1 144 11 46 Data In C2 145 11 46 Data In D1 146 11 46 Data In D2 147 11 46 Data Out A1 148 11 46 Data Out A2 149 11 46 Data Out B1 150 11 47 Data Out B2 151 11 47 Data Out C1 152 11 47 Data Out C2 153 11 47 Data Out D1 154 11 47 Data Out D2 155 11 47 DC Brake Current 79 11 28 DC Brake Time 80 11 28 DC Bus Voltage 84 11 29 Decel Time 1 44 11 20 Decel Time 2 45 11 20 Dir Ref Mask 125 11 40 Dir Ref Owner 128 11 41 Parameters 11 7 The following is an alphabetical listing of the parameters Name No Page Name No Page Drive Inv Status 15 11 13 Inverter Amps 11 11 11 Drive Inv Sts 2 196 11 60 Inverter Dg
15. gt arn AR FIF wa p lt ALLEN BRADLEY i 37 9 1 49 ta I i A Pee AA vi Mounting Hole Detail ae y a Dia 10 2 0 40 y S E ere w r 17 0 0 67 _ C A Dia 19 1 0 75 BB See Bottom View Dimensions for Details a lt CC gt Mounting Holes 4 See Detail All Dimensions in Milimeters and Inches All Weights in Kilograms and Pounds Frame Shipping Fetsrehes A B C Max D E Y Z AA BB cc Weight E Enclosed 511 0 1498 6 424 4 477 5 1447 8 16 8 40 1 195 0 901 4 151 9 186 kg 20 12 59 00 16 71 18 80 57 00 0 66 1 61 7 68 35 49 5 98 410 Ibs 511 0 1498 6 372 6 477 5 1447 8 16 8 40 1 138 4 680 0 126 3 163 kg E Open 20 12 69 00 14 67 18 80 57 00 0 66 1 61 5 45 26 77 4 97 360 Ibs 4 14 Mounting and Wiring Information Specific to Frames B C D E F G and H Dimensions for Frame F Allen Bradley 27 50 274 8 10 82 2 698 5 2286 0 90 00 Conduit Access Area Bottom View 635 0 eo 252 7 9 95 I 37 9 1 49 gt 1219 2 48 00 All Dimensions in Millimeters
16. In this example An In 1 Offset parameter 97 is set to 0 and An In 1 Scale parameter 98 is set to 2 This lets the drive use the full 4096 internal drive units A link was also made so that Speed Ref 1 parameter 28 would receive the value of An In 1 Value parameter 96 as its speed reference The second example is shown in Figure 9 7 In this example a 0 10V pot is wired to a D frame drive to provide speed control This example could also apply to any B H frame drive Figure 9 7 An Example of a Remote 0 10V Pot Wired to a D Frame Drive An In 1 Offset An In1 Scale An In1 Filter An In1 Value Link Torque Ref 1 _ 0 2 0 10 4096 10 4096 Ce ee ee ee ole JS000000e 0000000000 10V oV Remote Pot 2 5K Minimum 9 14 Applications Using MOP Using Flying Start In this example the remote pot is set to use the 10V input You could also set it up to use the 10V input An In 1 Offset parameter 97 is set to 0 and An In I Scale parameter 98 is set to 2 to provide the full 4096 to 0 or 0 to 4096 internal drive units based on the switch position A link was also made so that Torque Ref 1 parameter 69 would receive the value of An In I Value parameter 96 as its torque reference The MOP or Manually Operated Potentiometer feature lets you use inputs to the L Option board to control the speed or torque of the drive You must have
17. Parameters 11 51 170 Vd Max Parameter number 170 Vd M h D axi i ii d h File group none Use ax to view the maximum axis voltage allowed on the Parameter type desinauon motor The auto tune routine calculates the value of Vd Max You Display LVE should not change this value Factory default ealoulate Vd is short for flux axis voltage Minimum value 0 0 volts Maximum value 468 8 volts Conversion 16 1 0 171 Vq Max Parameter number 171 Va M h i hich th File group none Use q ax to view the Q axis vo tage at which the motor enters Parameter type esien field weakening The auto tune routine calculates the value of Vq Display ANGIE Max You should not change this value Factory default ealedined Vq is short for torque axis voltage Minimum value 0 0 volts Maximum value 468 8 volts Conversion 16 1 0 172 Trans Dgn Config Parameter number 172 Use Ti Don Conti disabl di f File group Autotune Autotune Setup se Trans Dgn Config to disable certain transistor diagnostic Parameter type iere clasiinatien tests Display bits Factory default 00000000 00000000 Minimum value 00000000 00000000 Maximum value 00001111 11011111 The bits are defined as follows Conversion 1 1 Refer to Chapter 13 Understanding the Auto tuning Procedure for more information Bit Disables Bit Disables Bit Disables 0 Cur Fdbk U 5 Reserved 9 Trans V Lo feedback phase U offset Leave 0 Power trans V lower for all tests 1 Cur Fdbk W 6 Trans U Up 10 Trans W Up feedb
18. This topic Starts on page An overview of function blocks 10 1 Evaluating the inputs 10 4 Using the timer delay function 10 5 Using the state machine function 10 8 Using the add subtract function 10 10 Using the maximum minimum function 10 12 Using the up down counter function 10 14 Using the multiply divide function 10 18 Using the scale function 10 20 Using the hysteresis function 10 23 Using the band function 10 26 Using the logical add subtract function 10 26 Using the logical multiply divide function 10 27 A function block is a group of parameters that work together to add flexibility to the 1336 IMPACT drive The function block that is provided with the 1336 IMPACT drive lets you set up a timer delay state machine multiply divide add subtract scale an up down counter or a maximum minimum function by using a combination of 17 parameters Because these functions use the same parameters you can only use one of the function blocks such as the timer delay in your application Figure 10 1 provides an overview of the function block 10 2 Using the Function Block Figure 10 1 Function Block Overview Function Sel Timer Delay Ini Or In2 Ind Nor In2 Int And In2 In4 Off Time Ind Nand In2 Ind OnTime Ind Or In2 And In3 Ind And In2 Or In3 If Then In4 Off Time 6 In1 Timer Or In2 And In3 True In6 gt Out 1 n5 On Time 7 Int Timer And In2 Or In3 False In7 gt Out 1 Func 1 Eval
19. Login Logout Modify Process Display Parameter Files Parameter Groups Parameters Set Links Clear All Links File Level Group Level Element Level Using the Human Interface Module HIM C 5 Using the Program and Display Modes The Display and Program modes let you view and program parameters To use these modes follow these steps 1 Press any key from the status display Choose Mode is shown 2 Press INC or DEC to show Program if you want to change the value of a parameter or Display if you only want to view the value of a parameter 3 Press ENTER 4 Press INC or DEC to scroll through the available files You may choose among the following files Monitor Control Fault Setup Interface Comm Motor Inverter Application or Autotune 5 Press ENTER 6 Press INC or DEC to scroll through the available groups Chapter 11 Parameters lists the groups that are available for each file 7 Press ENTER 8 Press INC or DEC to scroll through the parameters for the group you chose Viewing and Changing Bit Definitions Some parameters such as Fault Select 1 parameter 20 have associated bits that you can view and in some cases change If you have a Series A software version 3 0 or Series B HIM you can use your HIM to see what each bit means For example if you want your 1336 IMPACT drive to report a fault when a bus undervoltage condition occurs you
20. 28 6 34 9 1 13 1 38 Conduit Knockout 3 Plecs 22 2 0 88 Conduit Knockout 1 Plc A All Dimensions in Millimeters and Inches it i Y Frame L M P Q R S Reference B 181 6 167 1 112 8 163 6 214 4 249 9 7 15 6 58 4 44 6 44 8 44 9 84 c 181 6 167 1 119 1 182 6 227 1 275 3 7 45 6 58 4 69 7 19 8 94 10 84 Frame D 62 7 76 2 2 47 3 00 lt 343 9 13 54 gt Conduit Knockout 2 Pics 261 4 10 29 otal 144 0 5 67 9 1 52 1 2 05 lt Conduit Knockout 3 Ples 34 9 50 0 1 38 1 97 Conduit Knockout 1 Plc Ue OO m 198 1 7 80 reg A O4 204 5 169 4 3 E Z Ae 8 05 All Dimensions in Millimeters and Inches oo ate 153 7 hers 6 05 Frame E l lt 432 3 17 02 gt lt 305 3 12 02 gt 178 3 7 02 4 88 9 101 6 3 50 4 00 38 6 1 52 gt 50 8 2 0 Conduit Knockout 3 Pics 12 7 0 50 Conduit Knockout 6 Pics p 260 4 10 25 209 6 8 25 y Frame G 431 8 660 4 26 00 gt a 50 8 2 00 700 My 29 0 1 14 EJ i Conduit 254 0 431 8 547 6 Access Area 10 00 2 S 17 00 21 86 out Condu
21. 60 55 55 50 50 45 45 40 I I I I I i s 1 2 3 4 5 Carrier Frequency in kHz Carrier Frequency in kHz Figure D 31 100 Figure D 32 100 C400 95 C450 95 90 90 of Drive 85 of Drive 85 Rated Amps g0 Rated Amps go 75 75 70 70 65 i i 65 F i i 1 Carrier Frequency in kHz Y ox a Carrier Frequency in kHz Derating Guidelines D 7 QE Standard rating for enclosed drive in 40 C ambient and open drive in 50 C ambient Derating factor for enclosed drive in ambient between 41 C and 50 C Figure Figure Catalog No Derate Catalog No Derate Figure D 33 100 Figure D 34 100 CP350 90 CP400 90 of Drive 80 of Drive 80 Rated Amps 70 Rated Amps 70 _ 60 60 50 i i 50 i 1 2 4 6 2 4 6 Carrier Frequency in kHz Carrier Frequency in kHz Figure D 35 100 Figure D 36 100 CPR450 90 C500 anti of Drive 80 90 Rated Amps jg of Drive 35 60 Rated Amps go 50 F 7 Sh 2 4 6 70 Carrier Frequency in kHz 65 1 1 2 3 4 Carrier Frequency in kHz Figure D 37 100 Figure D 38 400 C600 95 C650 95 90 90 of Drive 85 of Drive 85 Rated Amps g0 Rated Amps 80 75 Gg mks 70 65 65 60 60 55 a ema 1 1 1 1 2 3 35 1 1 1
22. mA for each input Important The series B 115V AC Interface Board L6 is equivalent to the 115V AC Interface Board L9E Refer to page 5 16 for a description 5 14 Using the L Option Requirements for the Contact Figure 5 7 shows the wiring diagram for the L7E Option board Closure Interface Board L7E Figure 5 7 L7E Option Board Wiring Diagram Pi e Typical Typical Z 0 1uf y 0 1 uf e 1a e e114 ee 3 o ai 3S Current 10 7k 10 7k Een J12 Feedback Isolated We wo 0 5A ant aw 0 1 uf lt S m Sm T tow org pea ae LEELEE oe tasted atte er ee IGND 49 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 w PePPe eepe Circuits used with the L7E Option board must be able to operate with low true logic Reed type input devices are recommended In this state External circuits must iw Be capable of a sinking current of approximately 10 mA to pull the terminal voltage low to 3 0V DC or less high Let the terminal voltage rise to a voltage of 4 0 5 0V DC Using the L Option 5 15 Requirements for the Figure 5 8 shows the wiring diagram for the L8E Option board 24V AC DC Interface Board Figure 5 8 Requirements L8E L8E Option Board Wiring Diagram x Typical 44 eae pf 140 Me Typical 681 yp mZ Current 5V O Limit o lt J1 J2 Feedback 0 5A ttlettlitilittt h lg B
23. 7 1 0 28 Fale 7 4 0 28 t 12 7 0 50 lt gt 12 7 0 50 2 1 Mounting Hole Detail Frame D BB j Y oo R 5 2 0 20 I 14 7 0 58 2 7 v rw y aoa g a C lt CC gt Mounting Holes 4 See Detail a q Bottom View Will Vary with HP See Bottom View Dimensions All Dimensions in Milimeters and Inches All Weights in Kilograms and Pounds Frame Shipping Reference A B C Max D E Y Z AA BB cc Weight B 276 4 476 3 225 0 212 6 461 0 32 00 7 6 131 1 18 08 71 9 22 7 kg 10 88 18 75 8 86 837 18 15 1 26 0 30 5 16 7 12 2 83 50 lbs c 301 8 701 0 225 0 238 0 685 8 32 00 7 6 131 1 374 7 71 9 38 6 kg 11 88 27 60 8 86 9 37 27 00 1 26 0 30 5 16 14 75 2 83 85 Ibs D 381 5 1240 0 270 8 325 9 1216 2 27 94 11 94 131 1 688 6 83 6 108 9 kg 15 02 48 82 10 66 12 83 47 88 1 10 0 47 5 16 27 11 3 29 240 Ibs Mounting and Wiring Information Specific to Frames B C D E F G and H 4 13 Dimensions for Frame E lt A gt Z ly D gt C Max
24. Parameters 11 75 24 Parameter number 240 J End Action Go To File group Profile End Actions Parameter 240 sets the step to proceed to when P238 1 Parameter type Setup Display x Step Factory default 1 Minimum value 0 Maximum value 16 Conversion None 241 Parameter number 241 End Action Input File group Profile End Actions Parameter 241 selects the TB3 terminal used when P238 2 Parameter type Setup Mode 31 Mode 32 Display x 0 TB3 22 0 TB3 22 Factory default 0 1 TB3 23 1 TB3 23 Minimum value 0 2 Reserved Maximum value 5 2 1B3 19 3 Reserved Conversion None 3 TB3 26 4 Reserved 5 Reserved 4 TB3 27 6 Reserved 5 TB3 28 6 Reserved 242 A Parameter number 242 End Action Comp File group Profile End Actions Parameter 242 sets the parameter used as a comparison value Parameter type Setup to compare against EA value P243 The compare EA is selected Display x by setting P238 3 Factory default 1 Minimum value 1 Maximum value 296 Conversion None 243 Parameter number 243 End Action Value File group Profile End Actions Parameter 243 is used when end action is set to compare Parameter type Setup This is the value the parameter selected in P242 will be Display x compared against to determine the end of the profile sequence Factory default 0 Minimum value 32767 Maximum value 32767 Conversion None 244 Parameter number 244 Value Tolerance File group Profile Commands Sets the tolerance window for an End of Step
25. of Drive 85 Rated Amps go Rated Amps g0 75 75 70 70 65 65 F i 7 i 1 2 3 4 Carrier Frequency in kHz Carrier Frequency in kHz Figure D 24 100 B700C and 90 B800C es of Drive 70 Rated Amps 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 Ti l 0 1000 1 1 2000 3000 Carrier Frequency in Hz I 1 5000 6000 I 4000 of Drive Rating 700 HP of Drive Rating 800 HP D 6 Derating Guidelines Ga Standard rating for enclosed drive in 40 C ambient and open drive in 50 C ambient Derating factor for enclosed drive in ambient between 41 C and 50 C Figure Figure Catalog No Derate Catalog No Derate Figure D 25 100 Figure D 26 100 c075 of Drive 98 C100 98 Rated Amps g6 of Drive 96 tae Rated Amps g4 92 92 90 i 90 i i 2 4 6 2 4 6 Carrier Frequency in kHz Carrier Frequency in kHz Figure D 27 100 Figure D 28 100 C125 95 C150 95 of Drive 90 90 Rated Amps g5 _ of Drive 85 80 Rated Amps g0 75 75 70 70 ei 1 1 65 1 1 1 1 1 2 4 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 Carrier Frequency in kHz Carrier Frequency in kHz Figure D 29 100 Figure D 30 100 C200 95 C250 95 90 90 of Drive 35 of Drive 85 Rated Amps goo Rated Amps g0 75 75 70 70 65 65 60
26. Carrier Frequency in kHz Figure D 14 B075 of Drive Rated Amps 100 98 96 94 92 90 2 4 6 Carrier Frequency in kHz Figure D 15 B100 of Drive Rated Amps 100 95 90 85 80 75 70 65 t Carrier Frequency in kHz Derating Guidelines D 5 Gm Standard rating for enclosed drive in 40 C ambient and open drive in 50 C ambient Derating factor for enclosed drive in ambient between 41 C and 50 C Figure Figure Catalog No Derate Catalog No Derate Figure D 16 100 Figure D 17 ae B125 and 95 B250 95 BX150 90 90 of Drive 35 of Drive 85 Rated Amps g0 Rated Amps g0 75 75 70 70 65 i 65 R So 7 I I I I Carrier Frequency in kHz 2 8 4 5 8 Carrier Frequency in kHz Figure D 18 100 Figure D 19 100 BP300 aie BP350 ns of Drive 80 of Drive 30 Rated Amps 70 Rated Amps gy 60 60 50 7 50 7 H 2 4 2 4 Carrier Frequency in kHz Carrier Frequency in kHz Figure D 20 100 Figure D 21 100 BP400 90 BP450 90 of Drive 80 of Drive 80 Rated Amps igo _ Rated Amps 70 60 60 50 t 50 i i 2 4 6 2 4 6 Carrier Frequency in kHz Carrier Frequency in kHz Figure D 22 100 Figure D 23 100 B500 oe B600 PoE 90 90 of Drive 85
27. SCANport 4 SCANport 5 SCANport 6 Logic Evaluation Block Parameter 14 B B B Bi Bi B B B Normal Stop Start Jogi Clear Fault Forward Reverse Jog 2 Current Limit Stop Coast Stop Ramp Disable it10 Flux Enable it11 Process Trim Enable It12 Speed Ref A it13 Speed Ref B it14 Speed Ref C it15 Reset Drive L Option Board Logic Cmd Input parameter 197 o oyu You can attach any combination of Human Interface Modules HIMs Graphic Programming Terminals GPTs and or SCANport gateway communications modules to any of the six SCANports In addition you can use Logic Cmd Input parameter 197 Logic Cmd Input has the same bit definitions as Logic Input Sts You can access ports 1 and 2 on frames Al A4 and ports 1 2 and 6 on frames B H directly from the main control board To access ports 3 4 and 5 you need to plug a Port Expander into port 2 Normally port 1 is connected to a HIM and port 6 is used for connecting to gateways Using the SCANport Capabilities 8 3 Figure 8 2 shows the parameter interactions involved with Logic SCANport 1 SCANport 2 SCANport 3 SCANport 4 SCANport 5 SCANport 6 Gateway L Option Board Logic Cmd Input gt Par 197 Configuring the SCANport Controls Input Sts Figure 8 2 Parameter Interactions SP Enable Mask Par 124 Logic Input Sts Par 14 it 0 Normal Stop it 1 Start it2 Jo
28. i 1 I i I I I 0 i Li Accel Time Decel 0 Time Time B 8 Control Block Diagrams file Control group Accel Decel Acceleration and deceleration are relative terms Acceleration refers to a change in speed away from 0 rpm and deceleration is a change in speed towards 0 rpm For example the acceleration time could be used to get the speed more negative 0 Accel Decel Reverse Direction A Time Time Speed Constant Speed acceleration Time deceleration You can use Accel Time 1 parameter 42 and Accel Time 2 parameter 43 to change the acceleration ramp and Decel Time 1 parameter 44 and Decel Time 2 parameter 45 to change the deceleration ramp If your system does not have a brake the bus regulator limits Decel Time I to prevent a bus overvoltage situation from occurring Accel Time 2 and Decel Time 2 are only available if you have an L Option board and you have set L Option Mode parameter 116 to 4 11 or 14 You can use S Curve Percent parameter 47 to control the level of filtering that is applied to the acceleration and deceleration ramps If S Curve Percent is set to wher No S curve is used Speed Ramp Out 0 0 0 Time in seconds The S curve is applied to 10 of the ramp time speed Ramp Out 10 0 Time in seconds Control Block Diagrams B 9 If S Curve Percent is set to Then The S curve
29. of fault Has the following definition Trips the drive causing it to stop Hard You cannot regain control until you reset the drive Perform a Drive Reset command or cycle drive power 1 Address the condition that caused the fault Soft Trips the drive causing it to stop 2 Perform a Clear Faults command 1 Address the condition that Warning Indicates an undesirable condition caused the warning The drive will not stop 2 Perform a Clear Faults command Faults are annunciated on the Human Interface Module HIM at the time they occur Warnings are not annunciated on the HIM To help troubleshoot your 1336 IMPACT drive the drive logs any faults or warnings in either the fault or warning queue The faults and warnings that are contained in the queues are of either a configurable type or a non configurable type This fault type Refers to faults that you Can set up to either trip the drive or provide only a visual Configurable warning while the drive continues to operate Cannot disable These faults are the result of a condition Non onfigurabig that could damage the drive if allowed to persist You can reset the faults by pressing the stop button on the HIM Several bit encoded parameters are also available to help troubleshoot your drive These parameters are covered later in this chapter and in the auto tuning chapter When viewing these parameters from a HIM you should under
30. 45 BRF10 296 28 183 23 CWF30 AQF15 3 86 73 239 60 BRFI5 3 86 35 239 30 CWF50 AQF20 5 14 97 319 80 BRF20 5 14 48 3 19 40 CWF75 AQF30 771 143 478 120 BRF30 771 72 478 60 CWF100 AQF50 11 57 21 3 717 180 BRF50 11 57 120 717 104 C015 aoo7 10 12 28 11 27 2 BRF75 19 92 14 13 94 139 aoio 12 14 35 14 337 BRF100 28 46 25 19 92 240 aois 17 20 49 19 482 Bois 18 23 28 22 27 2 ao20 23 28 67 26 645 Bo20 23 29 35 27 337 ao2s 25 30 73 31 78 2 Bo25 23 26 43 33 418 A030 27 30 79 32 80 0 Bo30 32 41 49 38 48 2 ao4zo 43 51 123 48 120 3 BX040 40 50 62 47 587 73 88 aoso 53 64 154 60 1492 B040 41 52 63 52 645 94 112 Ao60 60 72 174 72 1804 B050 48 60 75 61 78 2 118 142 ao7s 82 99 238 96 240 0 BX060 62 75 61 78 2 136 163 A100 100 120 289 116 291 4 B060 61 77 93 76 969 217 261 A125 112 135 325 130 327 4 B075 78 99 119 96 1203 244 293 B100 98 124 149 120 1492 c300 256 307 B125 117 148 178 143 1804 CX300 256 307 BX150 148 178 143 180 4 C350 304 364 B150 157 198 238 191 240 0 CP350 301 361 B200 191 241 290 233 201 4 CPR350 301 361 B250 212 268 322 259 327 4 C400 349 419 B BP300 265 335 403 324 406 4 CP400 343 412 BPR300 265 334 402 324 4064 CPR400 343 412 B BP350 300 379 455 366
31. 600 75 600 12 2 335 114 3 914 30 5 130 5 61 0 61 0 182 9 22 9 182 9 1 2 1 5 40 410 875 300 Terminator 100 100 200 200 600 75 600 1 2 1 5 0 75 1 12 2 335 114 3 914 30 5 30 5 61 0 61 0 182 9 22 9 182 9 40 110 375 300 100 100 200 200 600 75 600 0 37 0 5 12 2 335 114 3 121 9 30 5 30 5 61 0 61 0 182 9 229 182 9 40 110 375 400 100 100 200 200 600 75 600 15 2 7 6 12 2 114 3 914 91 4 91 4 91 4 30 5 305 91 4 61 0 182 9 22 9 182 9 25 40 375 300 300 300 300 100 100 300 200 600 75 600 12 15 7 6 12 2 114 3 182 9 91 4 1829 1829 305 305 91 4 61 0 182 9 22 9 182 9 15 2 25 40 375 600 300 600 600 100 100 300 200 600 75 600 ie 0 75 1 7 6 12 2 114 3 182 9 182 9 182 9 1829 305 305 91 4 61 0 182 9 22 9 182 9 25 40 375 600 600 600 600 100 100 300 200 600 75 600 0 3705 78 12 2 114 3 182 9 182 9 182 9 1829 305 305 91 4 61 0 182 9 22 9 182 9 25 40 375 600 600 600 600 100 100 300 200 600 75 _ 600 2 2 3 7 6 12 2 114 3 91 4 182 9 182 9 182 9 22 9 182 9 25 40 375 300 600 600 600 75 600 15 2 7 6 12 2 114 3 182 9 182 9 182 9 182 9
32. Supply Analog Supply Tolerance Filtered Drive Inv Not Drive Stopped Speed Status 15 J10 Feedback Absolute Overspd i Fwd Motor Speed Limit QD Rev Motor Speed Limit C40 Fault Code 3025 100 msec Delay Power Transistor Heat Temperature C A Fault Code 2049 a alae Table Power Transistor Inverter Overtemp Pending file Fault Setup You can configure how you want some situations reported drive fault warning or ignored while other situations are always reported ae eFoulomg as faults For the configurable faults four parameters are provided Fault Select I parameter 20 Warning Select I parameter 21 Fault Select 2 parameter 22 and Warning Select 2 parameter 23 For information about these parameters refer to Chapter 12 Troubleshooting This section explains how some of the faults are caused and detected Control Block Diagrams B 29 The SpdFdbk Loss Fault SpdFdbk Loss is a configurable fault controlled through bit 0 of Fault Select 2 and Warning Select 2 You can only get a SpdFdbk Loss fault warning if you have an encoder on your system which is indicated when Fdbk Device Type parameter 64 is set to 2 A SpdFdbk Loss fault warning occurs when the hardware detects a loss of encoder input This can occur for two reasons This type of Occurs when loss There is a loss of quadrature The most likely cause is a high level of noise on one or both encoder channel
33. _ i See Soe MN Auto tune i Inhibit Complete Fail I Abort 0 1 Wait Start Spd Desired BW Flux Active x xx Rad Sec Not Ready Auto tune Active Not Zero Speed Total Inertia Gs x xx Sec Running 12 Profile Timeout 13 Torque Limit Ki Speed Loop C158 Speed Loop Auto tune States Kp Speed Loop Gain Calculations Kf Speed Loop Fdbk Error Current Filter Filter Rate Sel BW Lim The speed loop auto tune test basically measures inertia To do this the test cycles through five states file Autotune In this state The test is group Autotune Setup Waiting for bit 5 in Autotune Dgn Sel parameter 173 to be set This 0 Wait normally happens when you run auto tune from the Quick Motor Tune routine 1 Start Waiting for you to press start 2 Dwell Waiting for a fixed time period that lets the flux in the motor settle down 3 Measure Measuring the amount of inertia by applying the amount of torque specified in Autotune Torque parameter 164 to the motor 4 Stop Stopping B 36 Control Block Diagrams file Application group Bus Reg Control Measuring the Inertia To measure the inertia the speed loop auto tune test 1 Applies the amount of torque specified in Autotune Torque parameter 164 to the motor 2 Ramps the speed up to the speed specified in Autotune Speed parameter 165 3 Decreases
34. ed with input 2 and AND with input 3 Then use the result for the add sub input And Or Add Take the result of input 1 AND input 2 and OR with input 3 Then use the result for the add sub input Or Mult Take the OR of input 1 and input 2 and use the result for the mult div input Nor Mult Take the NOR of input 1 and input 2 and use the result for the mult div input And Mult Take the AND of input 1 and input 2 and use the result for the mult div input Nand Mult Take the NAND of input 1 and input 2 and use the result for the mult div input Or And Mult Take the result of input 1 OR ed with input 2 and AND with input 3 Then use the result for the mult div input And Or Mult Take the result of input 1 AND input 2 and OR with input 3 Then use the result for the mult div input 11 69 213 Function Output 1 Parameter number 213 File group Application Prog Function Use Function Output 1 to view the results of the function block Parameter type source Function Output 1 is either a word value or the upper byte of a Factory default not applicable double word depending on the value of Function Sel Conversion 1 1 parameter 212 If Function Sel parameter 212 is 0 8 then 1 Function Output 1 was added in Version 2 xx Display bits Minimum value 00000000 00000000 Maximum value 11111111 11111111 If Function Sel parameter 212 is 9 10 12 or 13 then Display x Minimum value 327
35. f File group Interface Comm Gateway Data Out Use Data Out B1 to view the drive to SCANport image that is Parameter type eee destination sent to some device on SCANport This image may be referred to Display iy as the SCANport Rae or a datalink in the manual for your Factory default 40 communications module Minimurmivalie 32767 Maximum value 32767 Conversion 1 1 151 Data Out B2 Parameter number 151 File grou Interface Comm Gateway Data Out Use Data Out B2 to view the drive to SCANport image that is Tesk sin das F mg Parameter type linkable destination sent to some device on SCANport This image may be referred to Display as the SCANport eee or a datalink in the manual for your Factory default 40 communications module Minimnim vale 32767 Maximum value 32767 Conversion 1 1 152 Data Out C1 Parameter number 152 i File group Interface Comm Gateway Data Out Use Data Out c1 to view the drive to SCANport image that is Parameter type linkable desiran sent to some device on SCANport This image may be referred to Display is as the SCANport ae or a datalink in the manual for your Factory default 40 communications module Minimum wale 32767 Maximum value 32767 Conversion 1 1 153 Data Out C2 Parameter number 153 File grou Interface Comm Gateway Data Out Use Data Out C2 to view the drive to SCANport image that is ae seein i mae Parameter type linkable destination sent to some device on SCANport This image may be referred to Display n
36. u dake A Sen Ge kG ea Mes 6 1 Before Applying Power to Your Drive 6 6 eee eee eeeee 6 1 Applying Power to Your Drive 0 0 ccc eet 6 3 Recording Your Drive and Motor Information cece eee eee eee 6 3 Understanding the Basics of the Human Interface Module HIM 6 4 Starting Up Your System 0 cece cece e eee eee 6 7 Running the Quick Motor Tune Procedure 0c cece cece e ee eee ee 6 8 Configuring the Digital Section 0 00 0 cece cece eee eee 6 10 Configuring the Analog Section 0 ccc cece eee eee eee eee 6 11 Understanding LINKS anero ia eaa aah e end a hy 6 12 Where Do Go From Here n 6 14 Chapter 7 Chapter Objective ik n unnan 7 1 What Are Drive Units 2 00 7 1 Setting Up the Analog O 0 6 cece eee eens 7 1 Setting Up the 4 20 mA Input Output 0 eee eee 7 8 Using the SCANport Capabilities 0 cece 7 10 Configuring the Output Relay 0 eee eee ee 7 10 Configuring the Pulse Input 0 0 0 2 cece eee eee eae 7 11 Configuring the L Option VO nuaa 7 12 Chapter 8 Chapter Objectives 00 cece cece nee eee aes 8 1 Understanding the Logic Input Sts Parameter 0 0 0c cee eee 8 1 SCANport Definitions a isis eenaa i pa aS a a e ened 8 1 Configuring the SCANport Controls 2 0 0 cece cece eee 8 3 Setting the SCANport Faults 0 0 00 c cece eee eee eens 8 7 Using the SCANport I O Image 0 c cece eee e eens 8 8
37. 0 75 1 600 182 9 0 37 0 5 600 182 9 2 2 3 600 15 2 182 9 335 3 61 0 182 9 Not A4 o 1 5 2 NR NR 50 NR 600 1100 NR 200 600 Recommended i 182 9 0 75 1 600 182 9 0 37 0 5 600 182 9 3 7 5 600 182 9 2 2 3 600 182 9 3 7 5 1 5 2 600 15 2 182 9 335 3 61 0 182 9 OAL NR NR fo NR 00 aio INR 200 600 182 9 0 37 0 5 600 5 5 15 55 15 182 9 30 5 91 4 182 9 7 5 20 7 5 20 600 100 300 600 c 18 5 45 18 5 45 182 9 30 5 91 4 182 9 25 60 25 60 600 100 300 600 D 56 93 56 93 182 9 61 0 91 4 182 9 75 125 75 125 600 200 300 600 112 224 112 224 182 9 182 9 182 9 182 9 150 X300 150 X300 600 600 600 600 224 336 224 336 NR 9 1 41 1 91 4 182 9 182 9 Np 61 0 182 9 182 9 182 9 182 9 300 450 300 450 30 135 300 600 600 200 600 600 600 600 G 224 448 224 448 NR 9 1 41 1 91 4 182 9 182 9 Wp 61 0 182 9 182 9 182 9 182 9 300 600 300 600 30 135 300 600 600 200 600 600 600 600 4 522 597 522 597 NR 9 1 41 1 91 4 182 9 182 9 Np 61 0 182 9 182 9 182 9 182 9 700 800 700 800 30 135 300 600 600 200 600 600 600 600 1 A3 reactor reduces motor and cable stress but may cause a degradation of motor w
38. 1 Clear bit 10 Brake Regen in Bus Brake Opts 1 Clear bit 5 Bus High Lim in Bus Brake Opts As the motor is decelerated or as regeneration occurs energy is transferred from the motor to the drive This increases the bus voltage When the bus voltage becomes high enough the bus voltage regulator becomes active and reduces the regeneration power limit to control the bus voltage The maximum regeneration power limit is controlled in Regen Power Lim parameter 76 and the bus voltage regulator automatically further reduces this level as needed to limit the bus voltage When enabled flux braking automatically increases the motor flux resulting in an increase of motor losses The flux current is only increased when the bus voltage regulator is active When the bus voltage regulator is not active the flux current is returned to normal The maximum flux current is equal to rated motor current but may be further reduced depending on the load level IT protection or current limits In general the flux current is not increased when the motor is at or above rated speed At higher speeds field weakening is active and the motor flux current cannot be increased As the speed decreases below base speed the flux current increases until there is enough voltage margin to run rated motor current 9 6 Applications file Application group DC Braking Hold Using DC Hold In a few applications typically greater than 200HP the flux braking
39. 1 and Accel Time 1 Decel Time 1 are selected when this input is low 0 1 When multiple source inputs are used a separate Accel Decel 1 and 2 are used These inputs increase or decrease the drive commanded speed when MOP Manually Operated Potentiometer is MOP chosen as the speed command source You can program the rate of increase or decrease Enable Removing this input disables the inverter and the motor coasts to a stop Flux enable This input fluxes up the motor In single source modes applying this input commands reverse direction and removing this input commands forward Fwd Reverse direction In multiple source modes a separate forward and reverse are used This input is a maintained unlatched start that follows the jog speed When the jog input is removed the motor stops Jog by a ramp current limit or coast stop based on how you set Logic Options parameter 17 Note All starts must be low to jog Local control Applying this input gives exclusive control of drive logic to the inputs at the L Option No other devices may issue logic commands excluding stop to the drive Not Ext Fit This input is intended to fault the drive via external devices such as motor thermoswitch and O L relays Removing this input faults the drive and the motor stops according to how the stop type 1 bit is set in Logic Options parameter 17 Process trim Applying this input enables the process trim functio
40. 1 2 control interface option See L Option current limits explained B 23 Current Rate Lim 11 28 B 37 D Data In A1 11 45 Data In A2 11 45 Data In B1 11 45 Data In B2 11 45 Data In C1 11 46 Data In C2 11 46 Data In D1 11 46 Data In D2 11 46 Data Out A1 11 46 Data Out A2 11 46 Data Out B1 11 47 Data Out B2 11 47 Data Out C1 11 47 Data Out C2 11 47 Data Out D1 11 47 Data Out D2 11 47 datalinks 8 10 to 8 13 11 45 to 11 47 DC Brake Current 9 6 9 7 11 28 DC Brake Time 9 6 11 28 DC braking 9 6 enabling 11 12 DC Bus Voltage 11 29 DC hold 9 6 enable 11 12 Decel Time 1 11 20 B 8 Decel Time 2 11 20 B 8 decelerating methods 9 3 to 9 6 definitions 1 3 derating guidelines D 1 dimensions A1 A4 3 5 to 3 6 B H 4 12 to 4 18 Dir Ref Mask 11 40 Dir Ref Owner 11 41 drive fault detection overview B 27 drive units converting to rpm 10 22 Drive Inv Status 11 13 Drive Inv Sts 2 11 60 Droop Percent 11 21 B 18 dwell start speed 11 59 B 5 start time 11 59 B 5 stop time 11 14 dynamic braking 9 3 E electrical interference 2 28 Enc Pos Fdbk Hi 11 72 Enc Pos Fdbk Low 11 72 encoder 5 11 making connections 2 16 encoder feedback 9 2 selecting 11 24 Encoder PPR 11 11 B 26 encoderless 9 2 12 29 selecting 11 24 Error Filtr BW 11 49 13 11 B 18 B 37 F fan voltage 4 10 Fast Flux Level 11 28 fast flux up enable 11 12 explained 12 20 Fault Select 1 8 7 11
41. 11 77 Relay Setpoint 2 188 11 56 Step 3 Speed 255 11 77 Relay Setpoint 3 190 11 57 Step 3 Value 256 11 77 Relay Setpoint 4 192 11 58 Step 3 Type 257 11 77 Reserved 163 11 49 Step 4 Speed 258 11 77 Reserved 56 11 23 Step 4 Value 259 11 77 Reserved 57 11 23 Step 4 Type 260 11 70 Reserved 218 11 70 Step 5 Speed 261 11 78 Rev Speed Limit 40 11 20 Step 5 Value 262 11 78 Run Inhibit Sts 16 11 14 Step 5 Type 263 11 78 S Curve Percent 47 11 21 Step 6 Speed 264 11 79 Scaled Spd Fdbk 63 11 24 Step 6 Value 265 11 79 Service Factor 9 11 11 Step 6 Type 266 11 79 Name No Page Step 7 Speed 267 11 79 Step 7 Value 268 11 79 Step 7 Type 269 11 80 Step 8 Speed 270 11 80 Step 8 Value 271 11 80 Step 8 Type 272 11 80 Step 9 Speed 273 11 80 Step 9 Value 274 11 80 Step 9 Type 275 11 80 Step 10 Speed 276 11 81 Step 10 Value 277 11 81 Step 10 Type 278 11 81 Step 11 Speed 279 11 81 Step 11 Value 280 11 81 Step 11 Type 281 11 81 Step 12 Speed 282 11 82 Step 12 Value 283 11 82 Step 12 Type 284 11 82 Step 13 Speed 285 11 82 Step 13 Value 286 11 82 Step 13 Type 287 11 82 Step 14 Speed 288 11 83 Step 14 Value 289 11 83 Step 14 Type 290 11 83 Step 15 Speed 291 11 83 Step 15 Value 292 11 83 Step 15 Type 293 11 83 Step 16 Speed 294 11 84 Step 16 Value 295 11 84 Step 16 Type 296 11 84 Stop Dwell Time 18 11 14 Test Data 1 92 11 31 Test Data 2 94 11 31 Test Select 1 93 11 31
42. 11123 11223 Realtime accumulated since power up The time since power up that the fault in position 1 occurred The time since power up that the fault in position 2 occurred The time since power up that the fault in position 3 occurred The time since power up that the fault in position 4 occurred The time since power up that the fault in position 5 occurred The time since power up that the fault in position 6 occurred The time since power up that the fault in position 7 occurred The time since power up that the fault in position 8 occurred The time since power up that the fault in position 9 occurred The time since power up that the fault in position 10 occurred The time since power up that the fault in position 11 occurred The time since power up that the fault in position 12 occurred The time since power up that the fault in position 13 occurred The time since power up that the fault in position 14 occurred The time since power up that the fault in position 15 occurred The time since power up that the fault in position 16 occurred The time since power up that the fault in position 17 occurred The time since power up that the fault in position 18 occurred The time since power up that the fault in position 19 occurred The time since power up that the fault in position 20 occurred The time since power up that the fault in position 21 occurred The time since power up that the fault in position 22 occurred The time since power up that the fault in p
43. 1336E A125 2 107 2 4 0 8 54112T 1 167 4 2 0 2 54110 1 133 6 2 a 541428 8 54112B 1336E B060 a 42 4 1 8 541478 1 18 4 8 2 541318 1 113 3 6 G 541353 1336E B075 1 153 5 1 0 8 541533 1 13 3 6 2 541353 1 13 3 6 1 54135 1336E B100 1 85 0 3 0 8 541632 1 13 3 6 2 54135 1 13 3 6 1 541358 1336E B125 1 107 2 4 0 8 541683 G 26 7 3 2 541478 G 21 2 4 G 1541393 1336E BX150 1 107 2 4 0 8 1541683 G 26 7 3 2 541478 G 21 2 4 a 1541393 1336E B150 2 53 5 1 0 8 54109T 1 133 6 2 2 54110 G 21 2 4 1 541393 8 54109B 1336E B200 2 85 0 3 0 8 54111T a 42 4 1 2 54148 1 26 7 3 1 541423 8 54111B 1336E B250 2 107 2 4 0 8 54112T 1 67 4 2 0 2 54110 1 33 6 2 G 541423 8 54112B 1336E B300 3 167 4 2 0 24 54110 a 42 4 1 2 54148 NA NA 1336E BP300 3 167 4 2 0 24 54110 a 142 4 1 2 54148 NA NA 1336E B350 3 185 0 3 0 24 54111 a 142 4 1 2 54148 NA NA 1336E BP350 3 185 0 3 0 24 54111 a 142 4 1 2 54148 NA NA 1336E B400 3 107 2 4 0 24 54112 a 142 4 1 2 54148 NA NA 1336E BP400 3 107 2 4 0 24 54112 a 42 4 1 2 54148 NA NA 1336E B450 3 127 0 250 MCM 24 54174 a 142 4 1 2 54148 NA NA 1336E BP450 3 127 0 250 MCM 24 54174 a 142 4 1 2 54148 NA NA 1336E B500 3 152 0 300 MCM 24 54179
44. 2 Calculate the offset For example if you need a 0 to 10V input and you have a 4096 internal range you need to offset the 0 to 10V range to get a range In this case you would have an offset of 5 3 Take the opposite sign of what your offset calculations show In this case the true offset would be 5 Therefore when 5 is added to the range values after the range is converted to an analog value the range comes out to 0 to 10V 7 8 Setting Up the Input Output 4 Convert the digital output range to an analog range For example This digital value Is converted to this analog value 2048 10 1024 5 0 0 1024 5 2048 10 5 Compare the input to the digital to analog conversion C with the internal drive units B If the values are Then you Go to Identical Do not need to scale the value Step 8 Different Need to scale the value Step 6 In Figure 7 5 the values were different so we used Step 6 6 Calculate the scale For example if the input to the digital to analog conversion is 1024 and the internal drive units are 4096 the scale value should be 4 4 x 1024 4096 7 Take the inverse of the value you calculated in Step 6 For example if the scale value should be 4 you need to actually use 1 4 or 0 25 as your scale value 8 Enter the offset and scale values into the appropriate parameters Setting Up the 4 20 mA When setting up the 4 20 mA input output
45. 2 Press ENTER A profile name up to 14 characters is displayed on line 2 of the HIM 3 Press INC or DEC to scroll to a second profile if available 4 Press ENTER when the desired profile name is displayed An information display is shown that indicates the version numbers of the profile and the drive 5 Press ENTER to start the download The parameter number currently being downloaded is displayed on line 1 of the HIM Line 2 indicates the total progress Press ESC to stop the download 6 Press ENTER when COMPLETE is displayed on line 2 If line 2 reports ERROR refer to the following table Then Error 1 An EEPROM CRC error occurred Error 2 The profile is a different length than the master Error 3 You are downloading between different types of masters Error 4 The data is out or range or illegal Error 5 You attempted the download while the drive was running Error 6 You are downloading between different types of masters Using the Search Mode Search mode lets you search through the parameter list and display all parameters that are not at the factory default values You can also search for links that are not the factory defaults Search mode is only available with a Series A version 3 0 or Series B HIM To use Search mode 1 From the status display press any key Choose Mode is shown 2 Press INC or DEC to show Search 3 Press ENTER 4 To search through the parameter list press INC or D
46. 28 Speed Ref 1 Frac Parameter number 28 File group none Use Speed Ref 1 Frac to supply the fractional part of the external Parameter type inablerdectination speed reference 1 when speed reference is selected in Logic Display Input Sts parameter 14 Factory default 0 Minimum value 0 Maximum value 65535 Conversion 1 1 2428 base motor speed 29 Speed Ref 1 Parameter number 29 File group Control Speed Reference Enter the speed reference that the drive should use when speed Parameter type incanletdectinetion reference 1 is selected in Logic Input Sts parameter 14 Speed Display x x rpm Ref 1 supplies the whole number portion of the speed reference Factory default 0 0 rpm You can use Speed Ref 1 Frac parameter 28 to specify the inimurntesie 8 x base motor speed rpm fractional portion of the speed reference Marimumivalce 8 x base motor speed rpm Conversion 4096 base motor speed 30 Speed Scale 1 Parameter number 30 eof File group Control Speed Reference Enter the gain multiplier used to scale speed reference 1 Parameter type Hene Esitin Display X XXXX Factory default 1 0000 Minimum value 3 9999 Maximum value 3 9999 Conversion 8192 1 0000 31 Speed Ref 2 Parameter number 31 File group Control Speed Reference Enter the speed reference that the drive should use when speed Parameter type fncablotdectinaton reference 2 is selected in Logic Input Sts parameter 14 Display x x rpm Factory default 0 0 rom Minimum value 8 x bas
47. 93 Test Select 1 11 31 94 Test Data 2 11 31 The following table lists the parameters in numerical order Parameters 11 5 No Name Page 95 Test Select 2 11 32 96 AnIn1 Value 11 33 97 AniIn1 Offset 11 33 98 An In 1 Scale 11 33 99 An In 2 Value 11 33 100 An In 2 Offset 11 34 101 AnIn2 Scale 11 34 102 mA Input Value 11 34 103 mA Input Offset 11 34 104 mA Input Scale 11 34 105 An Out 1 Value 11 34 106 An Out 1 Offset 11 35 107 An Out 1 Scale 11 35 108 An Out 2 Value 11 35 109 An Out 2 Offset 11 35 110 An Out 2 Scale 11 35 111 mA Out Value 11 35 112 mA Out Offset 11 36 113 mA Out Scale 11 36 114 Relay Config 1 11 36 115 Relay Setpoint 1 11 37 116 L Option Mode 11 37 117 L Option In Sts 11 38 118 Mop Increment 11 38 119 Mop Value 11 38 120 Pulse In PPR 11 38 121 Pulse In Scale 11 38 122 Pulse In Offset 11 39 123 Pulse In Value 11 39 124 SP Enable Mask 11 39 125 Dir Ref Mask 11 40 126 Start Jog Mask 11 40 127 Clr Fit Res Mask 11 41 128 Dir Ref Owner 11 41 129 Start Stop Owner 11 42 130 Jog1 Jog2 Owner 11 42 131 Ramp CIFIt Owner 11 43 132 Flux Trim Owner 11 43 133 SP An In1 Select 11 44 134 SP An In1 Value 11 44 135 SP An In1 Scale 11 44 136 SP An In2 Select 11 44 137 SP An In2 Value 11 44 138 SP An In2 Scale 11 45 139 SP An Output 11 45 140 Data In A1 11 45 141 Data In A2 11 45
48. Allen Bradley 1336 IMPACT Adjustable Frequency AC Drive 0 37 597 kW 0 5 800 HP Version 1 xx 4 xx User Manual a ji L H i i gia f Automation Important User Information Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls Publication SGI 1 1 available from your local Allen Bradley Sales Office or online at http www ab com manuals gi describes some important differences between solid state equipment and hard wired electromechanical devices Because of this difference and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid state equipment all persons responsible for applying this equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable In no event will the Allen Bradley Company be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation the Allen Bradley Company cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams No patent liability is assumed by Allen Bradley Company with respect to use of information circuits equipment or sof
49. Anytime the value of parameter 116 is changed the system should be reset or the power to the control board should be cycled Figure 9 10 L Option Modes for Profiling L Option Mode TB3 31 32 Step gt Trigger Start cc 20 Not Stop Not Stop Fault Clear Fault Clear 21 O Common Common C J Ie 22 amp Step Step L Trigger Trigger 23 Step Step Trigger Trigger 24 S Not Ext Fit Not Ext Fit 25 O Common Common 26 ee Step Profile Trigger Enable 37 O Step Run Trigger Sequence Step Step 28 O Trigger Hold 29 O Common Common 30 S Enable Enable Step Transitions Entering a value of 2 into any given Step Type parameter defines the step as a TB3 input step When a step is defined as an input step its Step Value parameter will associate a particular input terminal with that step In mode 31 six inputs are available for step transitions When the Step Value parameter 0 TB3 Terminal 22 is selected 1 TB3 Terminal 23 is selected 2 TB3 Terminal 19 is selected 3 TB3 Terminal 26 is selected 4 TB3 Terminal 27 is selected 5 TB3 Terminal 28 is selected RPM 1600 1200 800 400 400 Applications In mode 32 only two inputs are available for step transitions When the Step Value parameter 0 TB3 terminal 22 is selec
50. C is subtracted 4 The result is an error value that is integrated and limited If NTC foldback predicts that the temperature within the device has exceeded 120 C then the motor current is limited causing a foldback condition If the motor current has been limited in the positive direction due to excessive temperature bit 1 is set in Torque Limit Sts parameter 87 Bit 9 indicates a current limit in the negative direction due to excessive inverter temperature Understanding the IT Inverter Protection The IT inverter protection test measures for excessive current over time To do this for most drives the test uses both 100 and 150 times the rated inverter current in motor per unit For the 460 800 HP H frame drives the test uses 100 and 135 If the current stays at or above 150 times the rated inverter current for 60 seconds the test limits the current to 100 times the rated inverter current When a drive limits the current either bit 2 positive values or bit 10 negative values in Torque Limit Sts parameter 87 is set You can also decide if you want to be notified when the drive limits the current To You need to Receive a fault Set bit 13 in Fault Select 2 parameter 22 Set bit 13 in Warning Select 2 parameter 23 and clear bit 13 in Fault Select 2 Ignore the limit condition Clear bit 13 in both Fault Select 2 and Warning Select 2 Receive a warning The following is the inverter overload
51. Check to see if Function In2 is not 2 All Bits On equal to Func 2 Mask Val Check to make sure that all bits 8 Signed I lt V that are set on in Func 2 Check to see if the signed value of Mask Val parameter 202 are set Function In2 is less than the value in Function In2 parameter 201 of Func 2 Mask Val 3 All Bits Off 9 Signed I lt V Check to make sure that all bits Check to see if the signed value of that are set in Func 2 Mask Val are Function In2 is less than or equal clear in Function In2 to the value of Func 2 Mask Val 4 Any Bit On 10 Signed I gt V Check to make sure that at least Check to see if the signed value of one of the bits that are set in Function In2 is greater than the Func 2 Mask Val is set in Function value of Func 2 Mask Val In2 11 Signed I gt V 5 Any Bit Off Check to see if the signed value of Check to make sure that at least one of the bits that are set in Func 2 Mask Val is clear in Function In2 Function In2 is greater than or equal to the value of Func 2 Mask Val Value Description 12 13 14 15 16 Unsign I lt V Check to see if the unsigned value of Function In2 is less than the value of Func 2 Mask Val Unsign Il lt V Check to see if the unsigned value of Function In2 is less than or equal to the value of Func 2 Mask Val Unsign I gt V Check to see if the unsigned value of Function In2 is greater than the value of Func 2 Mask Val Unsign I gt V Check to see if the unsign
52. Data In A2 Par 141 Data Out A2 Par 149 SCANport Device 2 Data In B1 Par 142 Data Out B1 Par 150 ae SCANDA Devige Data In B2 Par 143 Data Out B2 Par 151 SCANport Device 4 Data In C1 Par 144 Data Out C1 Par 152 SCANport Device 5 Data In C2 Par 145 Data Out C2 Par 153 SCANport Device 6 Data In D1 Par 146 Data Out D1 Par 154 Data In D2 Par 147 Data Out D2 Par 155 You need to link the Data In parameters parameters 140 147 to other drive parameters SCANport gateways or adapters to RIO serial DeviceNet SLC and Flex I O are some of the devices that can transfer data between the SCANport I O image and another device Refer to the appropriate manual for your specific adapter Logic Input Sts Drive Inv Status parameter 14 parameter 15 Bit O Normal Stop Bit 0 Run Ready Bit 1 Start Bit 1 Running Bit 2 Jog 11 Bit 2 Command Dir Bit 3 Clear Fault Bit 3 Rotating Dir Bit 4 Forward Bit 4 Accelerating Bit 5 Reverse Bit 5 Decelerating Bit 6 Jog 21 Bit 6 Warning Bit 7 Cur Lim Stop Bit 7 Faulted Bit 8 Coast Stop Bit 8 At Set Speed Bit 9 Sod Ramp Dis Bit 9 Enable LED Bit 10 Flux Enable Bit 10 Stopped Bit 11 Process Trim Bit 11 Stopping Bit 12 Speed Ref A Bit 12 At Zero Spd Bit 13 Speed Ref B Bit 13 Speed Ref A Bit 14 Speed Ref C Bit 14 Speed Ref B Bit 15 Reset Drive Bit 15 Speed Ref C 1 These functi
53. Factory default 0 Bit 6 Run Sequence on when set to 1 This bit clears when Minimum value 0000hex sequence is complete Maximum value 001Fhex Bit 7 Hold is active when set to 1 Conversion Bit 8 Encoder Velocity Blend mode selected when set to 1 237 Error Trim Gain Parameter number 237 File group Profile Command Sets the gain for the speed profiling control in a range from 0 5 Parameter type Setup 16 0 When sending values over a network connection the Display x x units scaling is 128 1 0 Factory default 2 Minimum value 0 5 Maximum value 16 0 Conversion 128 1 0 2 Parameter number 238 a End Action Sel File group Profile End Actions Parameter 238 can be used to select how the end of the run Parameter type Setup sequence is accomplished Display x 0 Stop Command Zero Speed Factory default 0 1 Go to Step uses P240 to determine which step to proceed to Minimum value 0 when the end is reached Maximum value 4 2 TB3 Input uses P241 to select which TB3 terminal to use coma on 3 Compare uses P242 as the comparison value 4 Encoder Home goes to the home position determined when function enabled Parameter number 239 aoe End Action Speed File group Profile End Actions Parameter 239 sets the speed for the end action Parameter type Setup 4096 Base Speed Display X X rpm Factory default 0 0 rpm Minimum value Maximum value Conversion 8 x base speed 8 x base speed 4096 base speed
54. Greater than 1 0 A lead filter is produced Less than 1 0 A lag filter is produced Equal to 1 0 The feedback filter is disabled Equal to 0 0 A simple low pass filter is produced Fdbk Filter BW lets you set the breakpoint frequency in radians for the speed feedback lead lag filter The breakpoint frequency is indicated by BW A notch filter is also available through Fdbk Filter Sel Information about the notch filter is provided in the Torque Reference Overview section of this appendix B 16 Control Block Diagrams Speed PI Regulator Overview You can use the following block diagram to view how the drive uses the speed PI regulator parameters 65 535 for auto tune E 50 for auto tune rror Command Spd Sts Filter C162 lt a gt Bw Speed Reference Ki Low N Pass From 65 535 Filter Trim Control Kf Speed Loop Feed Forward To Torque Reference Control aN From Feedback Control Torque Limit Sts Torque Is Limited 8 for autotune Ki Speed Loop i i integral Integrator Gain From Feedback Control Droop Droop Percent Gain X X Speed Reference gt Speed Feedback Speed Error Control Block Diagrams B 17 The 1336 IMPACT drive takes the speed reference that you specify to the drive and compares that value to the value of the speed feedback that is coming from the motor The drive tries to make the two values match as close as possible by send
55. Ground Joules B Line to Line MOV Rating Energy Rating 2 x Line Line Rating A Line to Ground MOV Rating Energy Rating Line Line A Line Ground B Frame Reference A B C D H Device Rating V 240 480 600 240 480 600 240 480 600 Line Line A 160 140 NA 160 160 160 140 140 150 Line Ground B 220 220 NA 220 220 220 220 220 220 Mounting and Wiring Your 1336 IMPACT Drive 2 27 Is a Line Reactor or Isolation Type Transformer Required Typically you can connect the 1336 IMPACT drive directly to a three phase AC power line However certain power line conditions may introduce the possibility of drive input power component malfunction To reduce the possibility of these malfunctions a line reactor or isolation type transformer may be required Use the following table to determine if a line reactor or isolation type transformer is required for your system If the AC line supplying the drive Then an AC line reactor or isolation type transformer Has power factor correction capacitors connected and switched Frequently experiences transient power interruptions or significant voltage spikes Is run off the same line as a line commutated DC drive Is recommended between the capacitor bank and the input to the drive May be required May be required Disconnecting the Drive Output Starting and Stopping the Motor Input Fusing ATTENTION The 1336 IMPACT drive does not provide in
56. Int Nand In2 Ind Or In2 And In3 Ind And In2 Or In3 lf Then False In5 In6 Out1 True In8 In9 Out2 Logical Multiply Divide Int Or In2 Ind Nor In2 Ind And In2 Ind Nand In2 Ind Or In2 And In3 Ind And In2 Or In3 If Then False In5 x In6 In7 Out1 Out2 True In8 x In9 In10 Out1 Out2 If Then False Per unit math is used False Value of 0 True Standard math is used True Value other than 0 Function Block 10 4 Using the Function Block Evaluating the Inputs Func I Eval Sel parameter 200 Func 2 Eval Sel parameter 203 and Func 3 Eval Sel parameter 206 let you select how you want to evaluate the corresponding input You have the following options To Pass the value directly through to the function block Mask the value logical AND the input value with a value Send a true value when all bits that are set in the mask are on in the input value Send a true value when all bits that are set in the mask are off in the input value Send a true value when any bit that is set in the mask is on in the input value Send a true value when any bit that is set in the mask is off in the input value Send a true value when the input value is equal to the value of Func x Mask Val parameter 199 202 or 205 Send a true value when the input value is not equal to the value of Func x Mask Val parameter 199 202 or 205 Send a true value wh
57. Jog P197 Let Logic Cmd Input parameter 197 control jogs Start L Opt Let the L Option board control starts Start SP 1 Let SCANport device 1 control starts Start SP 2 Let SCANport device 2 control starts Start SP 3 Let SCANport device 3 control starts Bit 12 13 14 15 Description Start SP 4 Let SCANport device 4 control starts Start SP 5 Let SCANport device 5 control starts Start SP 6 Let SCANport device 6 control starts Start P197 Let Logic Cmd Input parameter 197 control starts Parameters 11 41 127 Cir Fit Res Mask Parameter number 127 You can use the lower byte of Cir Fit Res Mask bits 0 through 7 en Menace Comm SEANDOTI Gonfig gt i arameter type linkable destination to select which SCANport devices can issue a Reset Drive Display bits command You can use the higher byte bits 8 through 15 to Factory default 11111111 11111111 select which SCANport devices can issue a Clear Faults Mne 00000000 00000000 command You can choose between Maximum value 11111111 11111111 0 Disable control Conversion 1 1 Enable control Refer to Chapter 8 Using the SCANport Capabilities for more The bits are defined as follows information Bit Description Bit Description Bit Description 0 Reset L Opt 6 Reset SP 6 12 ClirFit SP 4 Let the L Option board control Let SCANport device 6 control Let SCANport device 4 control resets resets clear fault commands 1 Reset SP 1 7 Reset P1
58. L Option Mode parameter 116 is 5 9 10 or 15 Minimum value 0 0 Maximum value base motor speed Conversion 4096 base motor speed Refer to Chapter 9 Applications for more information 119 Mop Value Parameter number 119 File grou Interface Comm Digital Confi Use Mop Value to view the Manually Operated Potentiometer Se type g EENE MOP value You need to link Mop Value to a reference such as Display x x rpm Speed Ref 1 parameter 29 for the drive to follow the Mop Factory default fot applicable command for speed Minimum value 0 0 Maximum value base motor speed Conversion 4096 base motor speed Refer to Chapter 9 Applications for more information 120 Pulse In PPR Parameter number 120 File grou Interface Comm Digital Confi Use Pulse In PPR to set the number of pulses per revolution Riel in type Aa Sate Display x PPR Factory default 1024 Minimum value 500 Maximum value 20000 Conversion 1 1 Refer to Chapter 7 Setting Up the Input Output for more information 121 Pulse In Scale Parameter number 121 File grou Interface Comm Digital Confi Enter the value to use to scale the pulse input The scale is a Sas type ES N ratio For example you would enter 0 5 if you want to scale the Display XXX pulse input to half Factory default 1 00 Minimum value 0 01 Maximum value 10 00 Conversion 100 1 00 Refer to Chapter 7 Setting Up the Input Output for more information Parameters 11 39 122 Pulse In Offset Parameter
59. Maximum value Conversion 0 0 radians per second 200 0 radians per second 10 1 Parameters 11 55 185 1 Parameter number 185 Notch Filtr Freq File group Control Speed Feedback Use Notch Filtr Freq to set the center frequency for an optional Parameter type linkable destination 2 pole notch filter To enable the notch filter you need to set Fdbk Display x x HZ Filter Sel parameter 65 to 4 Factory default 135 0 Hz 1 Notch Filtr Freq was added in Version 2 xx a hea ee E Conversion 8 1 Refer to the Torque Reference Overview in Appendix B Control Block Diagrams for more information about the notch filter 186 i 1 Parameter number 186 Notch Filtr Q File group Control Speed Feedback Use Notch Filtr Q to set the quality factor or Q for the 2 pole Parameter type linkable destination notch filter To enable the notch filter you need to set Fdbk Filter Display x Sel parameter 65 to 4 Factory default 50 Minimum value 2 1 Notch Filtr Q was added in Version 2 xx MEANE 500 Conversion i Refer to the Torque Reference Overview in Appendix B Control Block Diagrams for more information about the notch filter 11 56 Parameters 187 ingl Parameter number 187 Relay Config 2 File group Interface Comm Digital Config Use Relay Config 2 to select the function of terminal 3 on either Parameter type destination TB10 for frames A1 A4 or TB11 for frames B H output Display x 1 Relay Config 2 was
60. Minimum value Maximum value Conversion Control Speed Reference linkable destination x x rpm 0 0 rpm 8 x base motor speed rpm 8 x base motor speed rpm 4096 base motor speed 11 20 Parameters 40 Rev Speed Limit Parameter number 40 es a l File group Control Control Limits Use Rev Speed Limit to set a limit on speed in the negative Parameter type ges nanon direction Enter a negative value or zero Display X X rpm Factory default base motor speed rpm Minimum value 6 x base motor speed rpm Maximum value 0 0 rpm Conversion 4096 base motor speed 41 Fwd Speed Limit Parameter number 41 iol Ming a File group Control Control Limits Use Fwd Speed Limit to set a limit on speed in the positive Parameter type desinen direction Enter a positive value or zero Display x x rpm Factory default base motor speed rpm Minimum value 0 0 rom Maximum value 6 x base motor speed rpm Conversion 4096 base motor speed 42 Accel Time 1 Parameter number 42 File group Control Accel Decel Enter the length of time for the drive to ramp from 0 rpm to the Parameter type linkable destination base speed Display x x seconds Factory default 5 0 seconds Minimum value 0 0 seconds Maximum value 6553 5 seconds Conversion 10 1 0 43 Accel Time 2 Parameter number 43 File group Control Accel Decel Enter the length of time for the drive to ramp from 0 rpm to the Parameter type fncablotecinetion base speed Accel Time
61. Parameter number 255 a5 Step 3 Speed File group Profile Test Data Parameter 255 sets the rpm value for this step Scaling 4096 Parameter type Setup Base Speed Display x x rpm Factory default 0 0 rpm Minimum value Maximum value Conversion 8 x base speed 8 x base speed 4096 Base Motor Speed Parameter number 256 30 Step 3 Value File group Profile Test Data Parameter 256 sets the time in seconds for time steps the Parameter type Setup counts in units for encoder steps and the TB3 input to trigger on Display x xS X X X Units for TB Input steps Scaling Factory default 0 0 0 0 0 Time Step 10 x desired value 10 1 0 sec Minimum value 0 0 0 0 0 Encoder Step 10 1 0 units Maximum value 3276 7 5 3276 7 TB Input Step dependent on L Option Mode Sel See P241 Conversion 0 1 0 sec x TBin 10 1 unit Parameter number 257 ef Step 3 Type File group Profile Test Data Parameter 257 selects the type of step to be used Parameter type Setup 0 Not Used This forces an End Action Display x 1 Time Step operate at speed shown in P255 for time in P256 Factory default 0 2 TB Input Step operate at speed shown in P255 until this Minimum value 0 input goes true Maximum value 3 Conversion None 3 Encoder Step operate at speed shown in P255 for units in P256 11 78 Parameters 2 Parameter number 258 g Step 4 Speed File group Profile Test Data Parameter 258 sets th
62. Parameters Application Autotune Flux Braking Process Trim Profile Step Data Bus Brake Option par 13 DC Braking Hold Bus Brake Option par 13 DC Brake Current par 79 DC Brake Time par 80 400 Mtr Current Max Mtr Current par 195 Fast Flux Up Bus Brake Option par 13 Fast Flux Level par 78 PTrim Output par 48 PTrim Reference par 49 PTrim Feedback par 50 PTrim Select par 51 PTrim Filter BW par 52 PTrim Preload par 53 PTrim Ki par 54 PTrim Kp par 55 PTrim Lo Limit par 58 PTrim Hi Limit par 59 PTrim Out Gain par 60 Max Rev Spd Trim par 61 Max Fwd Spd Trim par 62 Start Dwell Flying Start Start Dwell Spd par 193 Start Dwell Time par 194 FStart Select par 216 FStart Speed par 217 Prog Function Profile Command Function In1 par 198 Func 1 Mask Val par 199 Func 1 Eval Sel par 200 Function In2 par 201 Func 2 Mask Val par 202 Func 2 Eval Sel par 203 Function In3 par 204 Func 3 Mask Val par 205 Func 3 Eval Sel par 206 Function In4 par 207 Function In5 par 208 Function In6 par 209 Function In7 par 210 Function In8 par 211 Function In9 par 232 Function In10 par 233 Function Sel par 212 Function Output 1 par 213 Function Output 2 par 214 Profile Enable par 235 Profile Status par 236 Profile Un
63. Reference Page B 24 Page B 34 Digital Encoder Encoderless B 3 B 4 Control Block Diagrams Speed Reference Selection You can use the following block diagram to view how the drive uses Overview the various speed reference selection parameters to determine the speed and direction that the drive should run Logic Input Sts Logic Input Sts Start Dwell Start Dwell Spd Time lt 14 gt Auto tune lt gt N Active g Speed Scale 1 Speed Ref PIEI 1 Frac Go 14 3 2 6 C28 Scale 0 000 hs C29 8192 001 Speed Ref 1 Scale Speed Ref 2 010 O Speed Ref 3 Cy Ot A towne Speed Scale7 speed Ref 433 100 Speed 1 Auto tune C37 Speed nets CTO 101 Start Dwell C38 Speed Ref 7 z spee rere C359 gt 110 elec cale 111 C39 8192 TE Speed Reference Jog Reference Select Select Logic Input Sts lt 14 gt l e Lye ran Logic Input Sts Unipolar 0 0 lt 14 Alel le 32767 Bipolar Stop Command C17 Speed Ref Type Logic Options Logic Options Fwd Speed Limit Min Logic Input Sts C 41D Speed Limit lt 14 DE 15 C215 Drive Inv Status L15 gt S Curve Percent Linear Accel Decel Ramp Dm M Rev LogicOptions Speed Limit Direction Select Control Block Diagrams B 5 Selecting the Speed and Jog References Multiple parameters can affect the speed and jog references These file Control parameters are as follows group Speed Reference
64. Setting Up the Analog I O Parameters for SCANport 000e eae 8 14 Chapter 9 Chapter Objectives 0 0 0 ccc eee eee nee eens 9 1 Choosing a Motor Feedback Source wk eee cece eee ees 9 1 Choosing an Optional Braking Decelerating Method 000 9 3 Using DG HOld 32 2 sewer Gadawie 82 Heed a meaa idee de Ai 9 6 Using Up to 400 Motor Current 0 cece cece eee eee 9 7 Understanding the Scale and Offset Parameters for Analog I O 9 8 Using 4 20 mA Inputs Outputs 2 0 eee eee eee 9 11 Using a Remote Potere camii a a A a A aA 9 12 USING MOP Stannis tia nate a o a a O ane ts 9 14 Using FIVING Start i pe osia aa a a a a Pa aa Aneesh ad 9 14 Speed Profiling Introduction 0 cee eee eee 9 16 Speed Profiling Operation 0 0 0 0 00 c cece eee 9 17 Using the Function Block Parameters Troubleshooting Understanding the Auto tuning Procedure Table of Contents toc 3 Speed Profile Start Up Configuration 2 0 2 0 cece cece eee eee 9 18 Initial Setup Requirements 000 c cece eee eee eee eee 9 19 Profile Command amp Control 0 0 0 0 cece cece eee e eens 9 21 Using the TBS INputs sais pine tas pias ada ad ae 9 23 Encode Steps ies cuctavese se en re ONEN EE Ee EAA oo hie 9 25 Chapter 10 Chapter Objectives ununun 10 1 What is a Function Block 0 6c eect A ea ai 10 1 Evaluating the Inputs 0 cece cette ene 10 4 Using the Timer Delay
65. Ss 448 600 485 650 522 700 597 800 1 AA Fourth Position Enclosure Type Code Type AA NEMA1 IP20 AE NEMA 1 IP20 EMC 0 37 45 kW 0 5 60 HP only DE AF NEMA4 IP65 AJ NEMA 12 IP54 AN Open IP00 EN mods Fifth Position Sixth Position Language Options Code Language EN English English FR English French ES English Spanish English German IT English Italian PT English Portuguese Code Description Human Interface Module IP 20 NEMA Type 1 HAB HAP HA1 HA2 Blank No functionality Programmer Only Programmer Controller w Analog Pot Programmer Controller w Digital Pot Human Interface Module IP 65 54 NEMA Type4 12 HJP HJ2 Programmer Only Programmer Controller w Digital Pot Communication Options GM1 GM2 GM5 Control L4 L7E BS L8E L6 LOE Single Point Remote 1 0 RS 232 422 485 DF1 amp DH485 DeviceNet Interface Options TTL Contact TTL Contact amp Encoder Feedback 24VAC DC 24VAC DC amp Encoder Feedback 115VAC 115VAC amp Encoder Feedback 1 G frame drives in enclosed construction and all H frame drives are supplied only through the Configured Drives Program 2 D G frame drives in IP 65 NEMA Type 4 and IP 54 NEMA Type 12 configurations are supplied through the Configured Drives Program Note BPR indicates F frame roll in units 1 4 Overview What is a Frame Designator Allen Bradley uses frame designators to identify the variou
66. Then Func 3 Mask Val False In5 x In6 In7 gt Out1 True In8 x In9 In10 gt Out 1 Function Output 2 Functi 214 If Then Function Ins C208 gt Falsd Use per unit math Function In6 C209 gt In6 True Use standard math Function In C210 In Functi Funct Function In10 233 Logical Multiply Divide Function Block The logical multiply divide function can be performed as either standard math or per unit math Per unit math lets you multiply divide internal drive units on a per unit basis where 4096 is equal to one unit With per unit math 4096 x 4096 4096 because you actually multiply 1 unit by 1 unit to get 1 unit The equation used for per unit math is as follows Inl In2 a i 3008 203336 Outl 2 Out1 Whole Value mwm 4096 Out2 Fractional Value a Chapter Objectives Understanding the Parameter Files and Groups Chapter 1 1 Parameters Chapter 11 provides the information about the parameters that you can use to program the 1336 IMPACT drive This topic Starts on page The parameter files and groups 11 1 A numerical listing of the parameters 11 5 An alphabetical listing of the parameters 11 7 The conventions used to describe the parameters 11 9 Descriptions ofthe parameters O O D ns Important When you change the value of a parameter the value is automatically stored Parameters are divided into seven files to help ease programming and oper
67. a 12V RET 23 24 25 6 19 20 21 22 27 283 2 0 J 2 3 a 5 8 EEERERRRREEE H 29 lige i il Se he eS et Circuits used with the L8E Option board must be able to operate with high true logic In the low state this type Must generate a voltage And leakage current of external circuit of no more than must be less than User Supplied 24V AC DC DC 8V DC 1 5 mA into a 2 5K ohm load AC 10V AC 2 5 mA into a 2 5K ohm load Both AC and DC external circuits in the high state must generate a voltage of 20 to 26 volts and source a current of approximately 10 mA for each input 5 16 Using the L Option Requirements for the 115V AC Figure 5 9 shows the wiring diagram for the L9E Option board Interface Board L9E Figure 5 9 L9E Option Board Wiring Diagram a Typical Z r o _ q _ f 140 E ene j 681 Typical mZ Current 5V O Limit e o e J1 J2 Feedback i Sien a 0 5A j 2200pf LL 255 TMe 133 200 0 001 ES rey TESTI t fe dada ta irme B A B A 12V RET 22 23 29 30 31 322 3 34 35 3 vs PEER RERRERERR ERE RE R EEE x Lt 4 E T an o es Circuits used with L9E Option board must be able to operate with high true logic In this state Circuits must generate a voltage of No more than 30V AC Leakage current must be less than 10 mA low into a 6
68. ae Step 16 Value File group Profile Test Data Parameter 295 sets the time in seconds for time steps the Parameter type Setup counts in units for encoder steps and the TB3 input to trigger on Display x xS x X X units for TB Input steps Scaling Factory default 0 0 0 0 0 Time Step 10 x desired value 10 1 0 sec Minimum value 0 0 0 0 0 Encoder Step 10 1 0 units Maximum value 3276 7 5 32767 7 TB Input Step dependent on L Option Mode Sel See P241 Conversion 10 1 0 sec xTBin 10 1 unit 2 Parameter number 296 Step 16 Type File group Profile Test Data Parameter 296 selects the type of step to be used Parameter type Setup 0 Not Used This forces an End Action Display x 1 Time Step operate at speed shown in P294 for time in P295 Factory default 0 2 TB Input Step operate at speed shown in P294 until this Minimum value 0 Maximum value 3 input goes true 3 Encoder Step operate at speed shown in P294 for units in P295 Conversion Chapter Objectives Required Equipment Chapter 12 Troubleshooting Chapter 12 provides information to help troubleshoot your 1336 IMPACT drive This topic Starts on page Required equipment 12 1 Fault warning handling 12 2 Viewing the queues and timestamps on the HIM 12 6 Fault descriptions 12 7 Bus precharge and ridethrough descriptions 12 16 Understanding the bus voltage tracker 12 21 Understanding the parameter limit faults 12 22 Understanding the
69. and then enter a 112xx value to determine the number of minutes and seconds since power up If you enter this value for Test Select 2 parameter 95 Minimum value Maximum value Conversion 95 Monitor Testpoints Fault Setup Testpoints linkable destination x 0 0 65535 lal Then the value in Test Data 2 parameter 94 represents the Scaled version of Torque Ref 1 parameter 69 Sum of scaled Torque Ref 1 parameter 69 and PTrim Output parameter 48 Upper current limit 4096 rated motor positive current Lower current limit 4096 rated motor negative current Upper torque limit 4096 rated motor positive torque Lower torque limit 4096 rated motor negative torque Motor Flux parameter 88 limited to Min Flux Level parameter 71 Value of Logic Input Status par 14 at the time of the last stop event 9728 9730 9987 9988 9990 9991 10000 10264 10503 Parameter limit conditions 10504 Parameter limit conditions 10505 Speed reference math limits 10506 Speed feedback math limits 10507 Speed regulator math limits 10508 Torque reference math limits 10509 Process trim math limits hours minutes seconds 11100 11200 11101 11201 11102 11202 11103 11203 11104 11204 11105 11205 11106 11206 11107 11207 11108 11208 11109 11209 11110 11210 11111 11211 11112 11212 11113 11213 11114 11214 11115 11215 11116 11216 11117 11217 11118 11218 11119 11219 11120 11220 11121 11221 11122 11222
70. beyond the installation practices provided in this manual You should suppress the coils of DC energized contactors associated with drives with a diode or similar device because they can generate severe electrical transients In areas subject to frequent lightning strikes additional surge suppression is advisable You should use suitable MOVs connected between each line and ground Refer to Figure 2 7 for additional information about MOVs Emission To avoid interference with nearby sensitive equipment you must be careful about how you arrange the power and ground connections to the drive Route the cable that goes to the motor well away from sensitive equipment as the motor cable does carry switched voltages Connect the ground conductor of the motor cable to the drive ground PE terminal directly Connecting this ground conductor to a cabinet ground point or ground bus bar may cause high frequency current to circulate in the ground system of the enclosure You must solidly connect the motor end of this ground conductor to the motor case ground You may use shielded or armored cable to guard against radiated emissions from the motor cable Connect the shield or armor to the drive chassis Common mode chokes are recommended at the drive output to reduce the common mode noise An RFI filter can be used and in most situations provides an effective reduction of RFI emissions that may be conducted into the main supply lines If the
71. feedback overview B 13 loss of feedback 11 16 11 17 12 5 PI regulator overview B 16 to B 18 reference selection overview B 4 to B 9 selecting reference B 5 tuning regulator 13 10 Speed Ref 1 11 18 Speed Ref 1 Frac 11 18 Speed Ref 2 11 18 Speed Ref 3 11 18 Speed Ref 4 11 18 Speed Ref 5 11 19 Speed Ref 6 11 19 Speed Ref 7 11 19 speed regulation 9 2 Speed Scale 1 11 18 Speed Scale 7 11 19 speed select table 5 9 speed torque selection 11 26 speed torque selection table 5 10 Start Dwell Spd 11 59 B 5 Start Dwell Time 11 59 B 5 Start Jog Mask 11 40 Start Stop Owner 11 42 starting up your system 6 7 state machine function 10 8 Stator Resistnce 11 50 stop choosing B 6 selecting coast 11 14 selecting current limit 11 14 selecting ramp 11 14 Stop Dwell Time 11 14 T terminal blocks location for frames A1 A4 1 5 location for frames B H 1 6 terms 1 3 Test Data 1 11 31 check for fluxing time 12 20 for calculated undervoltage 12 19 for precharge status 12 19 Test Data 2 11 31 for math limit fault 12 25 to 12 27 for parameter limit fault 12 22 Test Select 1 11 31 check for fluxing time 12 20 for calculated undervoltage 12 19 for precharge status 12 19 Test Select 2 11 32 for math limit fault 12 25 to 12 27 for parameter limit fault 12 22 through put time B 38 timer delay function 10 5 to 10 8 torque block overview B 24 limits explained B 21 re
72. gt 4096 becomes true and the timer on function runs for 10 seconds D as specified by In5 After 10 seconds 1024 the stop command becomes true and the motor speed decreases using the current limit At point E Motor Speed is less than 4096 so the drive is again using In7 Ramp Disable The stop is removed At point F Motor Speed is less than 1024 and with both In1 and In2 being false In3 which is 0 is used for Function Output1 The motor Time seconds continues decelerating using the specified deceleration ramp In addition you need to set three other parameters for this example to work Speed Ref 1 parameter 29 needs to be set to the base motor speed 4096 internal units Accel Time I parameter 42 and Decel Time J parameter 44 both need to be set to 2 seconds Using the Add Subtract The add subtract function adds the value of function input 1 to the Function value of function input 2 and places the result in Function Outputl parameter 213 Figure 10 12 shows the add subtract function block Figure 10 12 Add Subtract Function Block Func 1 Eval Sel Function Sel Int In2 Function Output 1 Function n K 201 Add Subtract Func 2 Mask Val C202 gt Function Block Coarse Adjustment Provided at In1 Actual Motor Speed Fine Adjustment Provided at In2 Speed Speed Speed Speed Using the Function Block 10 11 As an example you could set up the add subtract function block to
73. parameter 120 Pulse In Scale parameter 121 and Pulse In Offset parameter 122 Check the link on Pulse In Value parameter 123 12 30 Troubleshooting Encoderless Troubleshooting If you are having problems with encoderless mode refer to this table Problems for possible solutions before calling for help If Then you should Increase the bandwidth in Spd Desired BW parameter 161 If the bandwidth is too low the motor The motor will not may not accelerate although the current increases to current limit accelerate or does not start smoothly If the regen power limit is 0 increase it to at least 5 Increase the torque and current limits to the maximum Increase the value of Kp Freq Reg parameter 178 Decrease the bandwidth in Spd Desired BW parameter 161 if the process will allow If this does not help depending on your application you need to either increase or decrease the value of Error Filter BW parameter 162 The motor oscillates after it is up to speed Increase the acceleration time If the overspeed occurs during a fast acceleration The inverter trips on increase the value of Kp Freq Reg parameter 178 until absolute overspeed the trip stops occurring during starting Increase the bandwidth If the overspeed occurs during a reversal increase the deceleration time slower deceleration Chapter 13 Chapter Objectives What Is Auto tuning Understanding the Auto tuning P
74. press ENTER Press INC or DEC to toggle the N to a Y to configure the Torque Reference Press ENTER You can connect the Torque Reference to any ONE of the following the 5 Configure oraus HIM pot Analog In1 Analog In2 the 4 20 mA input or the gateway Depending on which Step 6 Reference N input you choose you may be prompted for an offset and scale value If no press ENTER 6 Configure Analog Press INC or DEC to toggle the N to a Y to connect the analog outputs Press ENTER Step 7 Outputs N If no press ENTER Step 11 Press INC or DEC to toggle the N to a Y to configure Analog Output 1 Press ENTER You Configure Analog can connect it to one of the following Speed Current Volts Torque or Power In addition ts Output 1 N you are asked for an offset and scale value Step 8 If no press ENTER Press INC or DEC to toggle the N to a Y to configure Analog Output 2 Press ENTER You Configure Analog can connect it to one of the following Power Speed Current Volts or Torque In addition 8 Output 2 N you are asked for an offset and scale value Step 9 If no press ENTER 9 Setup the 4 20 mA Press INC or DEC to toggle the N to a Y to configure the 4 20 mA output press ENTER Siendo e Output N If no press ENTER p Press INC or DEC to toggle the N to a Y to adjust to output to the HIM display Press Configure HIM ENTER You can link to Speed Current Volts Torque or Power You are then asked to 10 f Step
75. the programming device the drive will not fault if you have the SCANport communications fault set to be ignored for that port 8 8 Using the SCANport Capabilities Using the SCANport I O Image file nterface Comm group Gateway Data In amp Gateway Data Out SCANport Device 1 SCANport Device 2 SCANport Device 3 SCANport SCANport Device 4 Image In SCANport Device 5 SCANport Device 6 Setting the SCANport Errors Fault You can specify how you want to be notified if the SCANport network receives too many errors to continue working properly If you want this condition to be Then Set bit 15 in Fault Select 1 parameter 20 corresponding to Rep rtod as a fault the SCANport device number Reported as a Set bit 15 in Warning Select 1 parameter 21 and clear the bit warning in Fault Select 1 Ignored Clear bit 15 in both Fault Select 1 and Warning Select 1 The SCANport I O image provides the interface between SCANport devices and the drive The SCANport I O image is used to transfer realtime data in the same way as the PLC image is used The devices on SCANport allocate the SCANport I O image so multiple devices can use different sections of the image To view the values in the I O image table use parameters 140 through 147 for input and 148 through 155 for output 1336 IMPACT Logic Command Logic Status Reference Feedback Data In A1 Par 140 Data Out A1 Par 148 SCANport Device 1
76. 0 1 second increments Current limit 400 rated motor current up to inverter rating Inverse time overload capability Class 20 protection with speed sensitive response adjustable from 0 200 of rated output current in three speed ranges 2 1 4 1 and 10 1 UL certified Meets NEC article 430 Input Output 0 to 10V DC input Input impedance of 20K Ohms 4 20 mA input Input impedance of 130 Ohms Pulse input Differential input 5 or 12V maximum frequency of 100 kHz 10 mA minimum 0 to 10V DC output Output impedance of 100 Ohms 10 mA maximum 4 20 mA output Output impedance of 273 Ohms can drive up to 3 inputs DC power supply 10V DC 50 mA per voltage Fault contact Resistive rating 115 VAC 30VDC 5 0A Inductive rating 115 VAC 30VDC 2 0A Alarm contact Resistive rating 115VAC 30VDC 5 0A Inductive rating 115VAC 30VDC 2 0A A 4 Specifications Input Output Ratings The input and output current ratings grouped by drive voltage rating are provided in the following tables 200 240V 380 480V 500 600V Cat No Input kVA Nis ist ae ane Cat No Input kVA Haas ode cies AQFo5 1 48 28 092 23 BRFOS 1 54 14 096 12 AQFO7 1 93 35 120 30 BRFO7 2 18 21 135 17 CWF20 AQF10 2 89 54 179
77. 00000000 Maximum value 00111111 11111111 Conversion 1 1 The bits are defined as follows Refer to Chapter 13 Understanding the Auto tuning Procedure for more information Bit Description Bit Description 0 Soft Fault 8 Over Voltage A software fault occurred A hardware overvoltage fault occurred 1 No Mtr Bfuse 9 Desaturation No motor connected or an open bus fuse A hardware desaturation fault occurred 2 Short Ph U W 10 Ground Fault Phase U and W shorted A hardware ground fault occurred 3 Short Ph U V 11 Overcurrent Phase U and V shorted A hardware phase overcurrent fault occurred 4 Short Ph V W 12 Open Transis Phase V and W shorted Open power transistor s 5 Short Module 13 No Cur Fdbk Shorted modules Current feedback fault s 6 Gnd Fit Mod 14 15 Reserved Ground fault Leave 0 7 PriorTst Fit Fault before shorted module ran 175 Inverter Dgn2 Parameter number 175 i File group Autotune Autotune Status Inverter Dgn2 shows the results of the transistor diagnostic tests Parameter type Potted If any of the bits are set then a problem with the associated test Display bits is indicated Factory default not applicable Minimum value 00000000 00000000 The bits are defined as follows Bit Description U Up Short Transistor U upper shorted U Lo Short Transistor U lower shorted V Up Short Transistor V upper shorted V Lo Short Transistor V lower shorted W Up Short Transistor W upper shorted W Lo Short Transistor W
78. 1 Torque Trim 4 Preset Integ Process Trim bit 11 in Logic Input Set to trim the torque reference Preset integrator option Sts parameter 14 2 Speed Input 5 Trim Limiter 7 Encoder Trim Select the speed inputs Force ON trim limit option 52 PTrim Filter BW Parameter number 52 File grou Application Process Trim Use PTrim Filter BW to set the bandwidth of a single pole filter sere type Pp Meie datei used with the error input for process trim The input to the filter is Display E A cecond the difference between PTrim Reference parameter 49 and Factory default 0 0 GETE Secs PTrim Feedback parameter 50 The output of this filter is used Miete 0 0 PE E as the input to the process trim regulator MEn ENG 240 0 radians second Conversion 10 1 0 Refer to the Trim Control Overview section in Appendix B Control Block Diagrams for more information 53 PTrim Preload Parameter number 53 File grou Application Process Trim Use PTrim Preload to preset the output of the process trim Bee type PP Miene Eto regulator when you select either bit 3 Set the output option or Display BOG bit 4 Preset integrator option in PTrim Select parameter 51 Factory default 0 0 Minimum value 800 0 Maximum value 800 0 Conversion 4096 100 0 Refer to the Trim Control Overview section in Appendix B Control Block Diagrams for more information 54 PTrim Ki Parameter number 54 File grou Application Process Trim Use PTrim Kito control the integral gain of the process tr
79. 10 OUT Analog Out Discrete Outputs Fault outputs from the 1336 IMPACT drive are supplied at terminal blocks Fault outputs provide warning or fault signals based on drive programming Refer to the frame specific chapters for additional information about the terminal blocks available for your frame size The following values are the contact ratings for the programmable relays 2A at 115V AC 2A at 30V DC Figure 2 5 shows the typical digital output connections Figure 2 5 Typical Digital Output Connections Programmable Default is set to Not Fault Programmable Default set to Not Warning Alarm Normally Closed NC Normally Closed NC Common Common ao Normally Open NO E Normally Open NO Pulse Input The pulse input is a differential input that lets an external source provide the drive with a digital reference or trim signal The pulse input has the following specifications Specification Description Voltage rating 5 or 12V Maximum frequency 100 kHz Minimum mA 10 Auxiliary Output TB9 The 480V or 600V depending on the input voltage to the drive output terminal block TB9 is only available on F Frame Drives This terminal block provides a three phase high voltage connection from the load side of the AC input line fuses 2 24 Mounting and Wiring Your 1336 IMPACT Drive Connecting Your Gateway Normally this connection is used to power an external control transformer user suppl
80. 11 Status Display N reset the HIM If no press ENTER 11 Startup Complete press ENTER Press ENTER 6 12 Starting Up Your System Understanding Links A link is a software connection between two parameters that lets one parameter receive information from another parameter The parameter receiving the information is called a destination parameter Throughout this manual destination parameters are identified by the following symbol The parameter providing the information is called a source parameter Throughout this manual source parameters are identified by the following symbol Each destination parameter can only have one source parameter However source parameters may be linked to multiple destination parameters The information from the link always flows from the source parameter to the destination parameter a Coa gt af Sis lt Creating a Link You create links at the destination parameter To create a link 1 Go to the parameter that you want to receive the information 2 Enter the number of the source parameter The following example uses a Human Interface Module HIM to create a link For this example SP An Output parameter 139 is the destination parameter that is linked to Motor Torque parameter 86 which is the source parameter To create this link 1 From the Choose Mode prompt use INC or DEC to select Links 2 Press INC or DEC to select Set Links The HIM automatically scrol
81. 11 27 B 21 B 22 Notch Filtr Freq 11 55 B 23 Notch Filtr Q 11 55 B 23 NTC foldback protection B 33 O open circuit 11 15 11 16 12 4 options available 1 2 output devices See I O output reactor guidelines 2 2 to 2 4 output relay configuring 7 10 ownership of drive functions 8 3 P parameter limit 11 16 11 17 12 5 parameters Absolute Overspd 11 17 B 31 Accel Time 1 11 20 B 8 Accel Time 2 11 20 B 8 alphabetical listing 11 8 An In 1 Offset 11 33 An In 1 Scale 11 33 An In 1 Value 11 33 An In 2 Offset 11 34 An In 2 Scale 11 34 An In 2 Value 11 33 An In1 Filter BW 11 54 An In2 Filter BW 11 54 An Out 1 Offset 11 35 An Out 1 Scale 11 35 An Out 1 Value 11 34 An Out 2 Offset 11 35 An Out 2 Scale 11 35 An Out 2 Value 11 35 Autotune Errors 11 53 13 7 13 8 Autotune Speed 11 50 13 9 13 10 Autotune Status 11 48 13 13 B 37 Autotune Torque 11 49 13 9 13 10 B 21 Autotune Dgn Sel 11 51 13 2 Bus Options 12 18 Bus Brake Opts 11 12 12 16 to 12 18 for braking 9 3 to 9 6 for fast flux up 12 20 force precharge 12 20 select slew rate 12 21 Clr Fit Res Mask 11 41 Command Spd Sts 11 28 conventions 11 9 Current Rate Lim 11 28 B 37 Data In A1 8 8 11 45 Data In A2 8 8 11 45 Data In B1 8 8 11 45 Data In B2 8 8 11 45 Data In C1 8 8 11 46 Data In C2 8 8 11 46 Data In D1 8 8 11 46 Data In D2 8 8 11 46 Data Out A1 8 8 11 46 Data Out A2 8 8 11 46 Data Out B1 8 8
82. 11 57 189 in Ql Parameter number 189 Relay Config 3 File group Interface Comm Digital Config Use Relay Config 3 to select the function of terminals 4 5 and6 Parameter type destination on either TB10 for frames A1 A4 or TB11 for frames B H Display x output Factory default 30 Minimum value 0 1 Relay Config 3 was added in Version 2 xx Medina AE 36 Relay Config 3 may be any one of the following values Conversion 1 1 Value Description Value Description Value Description 0 Disabled 16 Not Zero Spd 29 Faulted The relay is disabled The motor is not at zero speed A fault has occurred 1 Run Ready 17 Flux Ready 30 Not Faulted The drive is ready to run The motor is ready to be fluxed up A fault has not occurred 2 Not Run Rdy 18 Not Flux Rdy 31 Warning The drive is not ready to run The motor is not ready to be fluxed up A warning has occurred 3 Running 19 Flux Up 32 Not Warning Commanded speed is not zero The drive feels the motor is fluxed up A warning has not occurred 4 Not Running 20 Not Flux Up 33 Enable Commanded speed is zero The drive feels the motor is not fluxed up Power is being applied to the 5 Stopping 21 Jogging motor The drive is stopping The motor is jogging 34 Not Enable 6 Not Stopping 22 Not Jogging Power is not being applied to the The drive is not stopping The motor is not jogging motor Stopped 23 At Limit 35 Function Val The drive is stopped The motor is at the limit shown in True when the value of
83. 11 77 11 78 11 79 11 80 11 81 11 82 11 83 11 84 Nameplate Amps 11 10 Nameplate HP 11 10 Nameplate Hz 11 10 Nameplate RPM 11 10 Nameplate Volts 11 10 Nefg Fit Status 11 70 Neg Mir Cur Lim 9 7 11 27 13 9 B 22 B 23 Neg Torque Lim 11 27 B 21 B 22 Notch Filtr Freq 11 55 B 23 Notch Filtr Q 11 55 B 23 numerical listing 11 5 Pos Mtr Cur Lim 9 7 11 27 13 9 B 22 B 23 Pos Torque Lim 11 27 B 21 B 22 PTrim Feedback 11 21 B 11 PTrim Filter BW 11 22 PTrim Hi Limit 11 23 B 12 PTrim Ki 11 22 B 11 PTrim Kp 11 23 B 11 PTrim Lo Limit 11 23 B 12 PTrim Out Gain 11 24 PTrim Output 11 21 B 11 PTrim Preload 11 22 B 11 PTrim Reference 11 21 B 11 PTrim Select 11 22 B 11 Pulse In Offset 7 11 to 7 12 11 39 Pulse In PPR 7 11 to 7 12 11 38 Pulse In Scale 7 11 to 7 12 11 38 Pulse In Value 7 11 to 7 12 11 39 PWM Frequency 11 11 PwrUp Fit Status 11 70 Ramp CIFit Owner 11 43 Regen Power Lim 11 27 13 9 B 21 for bus regulator braking 9 3 Relay Config 1 7 10 11 36 Relay Config 2 7 10 11 56 Relay Config 3 7 10 11 57 Relay Config 4 7 10 11 58 Relay Setpoint 1 7 10 11 37 Relay Setpoint 2 7 10 11 56 Relay Setpoint 3 7 10 11 57 Relay Setpoint 4 7 10 11 58 resetting to default C 7 Rev Speed Limit 11 20 13 9 B 7 Run Inhibit Sts 11 14 Scaled Spd Fdbk 11 24 S Curve Percent 11 21 B 8 Service Factor 11 11 Slave Torque 11 26 B 22 Slip Gain 11 50 B 26 s
84. 13 Speed Ref B 0 0 1 Speed Ref 1 3 Clear Fault selected 14 Speed Ref C 0 1 0 Speed Ref 2 A clear fault is in progress 8 Coast Stop 15 Reset Drive 0 1 1 Speed Ref 3 4 Forward A coast stop is selected The drive has been 1 0 O Speed Ref 4 A forward was commanded 9 Spd Ramp Dis commanded to reset 1 0 1 Speed Ref 5 Ramps are disabled 1 1 0 Speed Ref 6 1 1 1 Speed Ref 7 15 Drive Inv Status Parameter number 15 Use Drive Inv Status to view the status conditions within the eae type Monitor Drive Inv Bie drive When a bit is set 1 the corresponding condition in the Display bits drive is true The bits are defined as follows Bit Description 0 Run Ready The drive is ready to run No bits are set in Run Inhibit Sts parameter 16 1 Running The drive is following a speed torque reference 2 Command Dir Shows which direction has been requested 1 is forward and 0 is reverse 3 Rotating Dir Shows the direction that the motor is currently rotating 1 is forward and 0 is reverse Bit Factory default Minimum value Maximum value Conversion Description Bit Accelerating 10 If 1 the motor is accelerating Decelerating 11 If 1 the motor is decelerating Warning 12 If 1 a warning has occurred Faulted Description Stopped If 1 the drive is stopped Stopping If 1 the drive is stopping At Zero Spd Corresponds to Zero Speed Tol parameter 19 Speed Ref A Speed Ref B Speed Ref C If 1 a fault has oc
85. 15 to see which SCANport device s are presently issuing a valid jog 1 command You can choose between 0 Jog 1 jog 2 input not present 1 Jog 1 jog 2 input present The bits are defined as follows Bit 0 Description Jog2 L Opt The L Option board owns the Jog2 Jog2 SP 1 SCANport device 1 owns the Jog2 Jog2 SP 2 SCANport device 2 owns the Jog2 Jog2 SP 3 SCANport device 3 owns the Jog2 Jog2 SP 4 SCANport device 4 owns the Jog2 Jog2 SP 5 SCANport device 5 owns the Jog2 Bit 10 Parameter type Display Factory default Minimum value Maximum value Conversion Monitor Status SCANport Status Interface Comm SCANport Status source bits not applicable 00000000 00000000 11111111 11111111 Refer to Chapter 8 Using the SCANport Capabilities for more information Description Jog2 SP 6 SCANport device 6 owns the Jog2 Jog2 P197 Logic Cmd Input parameter 197 owns the Jog2 Jog1 L Opt The L Option owns the Jog1 Jog1 SP 1 SCANport device 1 owns the Jog1 Jog1 SP 2 SCANport device 2 owns the Jog1 Bit 11 12 13 Description Jog1 SP 3 SCANport device 3 owns the Jog1 Jog1 SP 4 SCANport device 4 owns the Jog1 Jog1 SP 5 SCANport device 5 owns the Jog1 Jog1 SP 6 SCANport device 6 owns the Jog1 Jog1 P197 Logic Cmd Input parameter 197 owns the Jog1 Parameters 11 43 131 Ramp CIFIt Owner Parameter number 131 File group Monitor S
86. 15 12 18 Fault Select 2 11 16 12 5 to 12 6 12 24 Fault Status 1 11 71 Fault Status 2 11 71 faults 12 2 Absolute Overspd 12 10 B 31 Analog Spply Tol 12 10 B 31 Autotune Diag 12 8 Autotune Errors 11 53 13 7 13 8 Bus Cycle gt 5 12 14 Bus Drop 12 14 Bus Undervlt 12 14 clear queue 12 7 C 10 configuring 11 15 11 16 12 4 to 12 6 Desaturation 12 14 Diff Drv Type 12 10 EE Checksum 12 10 External Fit In 12 11 Feedback Loss 12 27 B 29 Ground Fault 12 14 HW Malfunction 12 9 12 15 Inv Overload 12 9 Inv Overtemp Pnd 12 9 B 31 Inv Overtemp Trp 12 9 B 31 InvOvid Pend 12 9 mA Input 12 11 Math Limit 12 11 explained 12 24 Mtr Stall 12 8 B 29 MtrOvid Pnd B 29 MtrOvid Trp B 29 MtrOvrid Pnd 12 8 MtrOvrld Trp 12 8 Open Circuit 12 15 open transistor 13 5 Overcurrent 12 14 Overvoltage 12 14 Param Limit 12 11 explained 12 22 to 12 24 precharge 12 15 Prechrg Time 12 14 ridethrough 12 15 Ridethru Time 12 14 SP 1 Timeout 12 11 SP 2 Timeout 12 12 SP 3 Timeout 12 12 SP 4 Timeout 12 12 SP 5 Timeout 12 12 SP 6 Timeout 12 12 SP Error 12 12 Spd Fdbk Loss 12 11 SW Malfunction 12 10 viewing queue with HIM 12 6 Fdbk Device Type 9 1 to 9 3 11 24 13 11 B 13 Fdbk Filter BW 11 25 B 15 Fdbk Filter Gain 11 25 B 15 Fdbk Filter Sel 11 25 13 11 B 14 B 37 for notch filters B 23 features provided 1 1 feedback device choosing filter B 14 choosing source 9 1 to 9 3 B 13 set
87. 180 Freq Track Filtr Parameter number 180 R f TOA File group none Freq Track Filtr contains the rotor frequency regulator filter in Parameter type ESEON encoderless mode Do not change the value of this parameter Display 7 Factory default 5000 Minimum value 0 Maximum value 32767 Conversion 1 1 181 i 1 Parameter number 181 SP 2 Wire Enable File group Interface Comm SCANport Config SP 2 Wire Enable lets you specify whether the specified Parameter type destination SCANport device uses 2 wire or 3 wire control When you are Display bits operating in 2 wire control the start button acts like a jog Factory default 00000000 Minimum value 00000000 1 SP 2 Wire Enable was added in Version 2 xx Maximum value 11111110 Conversion t Bit Description Bit Description 0 Reserved 4 SP 4 Leave 0 Set to enable the device connected to SCANport 4 for 1 SP 1 2 wire control Set to enable the device connected to SCANport 1 for 5 SP 5 2 wire control Set to enable the device connected to SCANport 5 for 2 SP 2 2 wire control Set to enable the device connected to SCANport 2 for 6 SP 6 2 wire control Set to enable the device connected to SCANport 6 for 3 SP 3 2 wire control Set to enable the device connected to SCANport 3 for 7 P197 2 wire control Set to enable Logic Cmd Input parameter 197 for 2 wire control 182 1 Parameter number 182 An Int Filter BW File group Interface Comm Analog Inputs Use An In1 Filter BW to use a low pa
88. 3 xx Display Display Text Description 0 Disabled Flying start disabled 1 Last Speed 2 Speed Param File group Parameter type Display Factory default Minimum value Maximum value Conversion Application Flying Start linkable destination x NOOO ay Il Refer to Chapter 9 Applications for more information Flying start enabled Beginning search from last known speed Flying start enabled Beginning search from Fstart Speed parameter 217 11 70 Parameters 217 1 Parameter number 217 Fstart Speed File group Application Flying Start Use Fstart Speed to set the start point at which the speed search Parameter type linkable destination begins This parameter is only active when operating in Fstart Display x x RPM Select mode 2 Speed Param Factory default base motor speed rpm To maximize reconnect performance always set the Fstart Minimum value Rev Speed Limit Param 40 Speed slightly greater than the expected reconnect motor speed Maximum value Forward Speed Limit Param 41 Conversion 4096 base motor speed 1iFslan Speed Was Addedim Version Iso Refer to Chapter 9 Applications for more information 218 Reserved Parameter number 218 File group Leave this parameter set to 0 Parameter type Display Factory default Minimum value Maximum value Conversion 219 1 Parameter number 219 PwrUp Fit Status File group Monitor Fault Status PwrUp Fit Status indicates that a fault condition h
89. 40 The minimum maximum range 2 bit 1 Fwa Spesa Cimi The minimum maximum range parameter 41 Troubleshooting 12 23 If Test Then this Has been Data 2is parameter limited to 4 bit 2 BEE eve The minimum maximum range parameter 71 Pos Mtr Cur Lim bs 8 bit 3 parameter 72 The minimum maximum range 16 bit 4 Neg Mtr Cur Lim The minimum maximum range parameter 73 32 bit 5 Current Rate Lim Positive numbers parameter 77 128 bit 7 Meer Se IHn Zero or negative numbers parameter 61 256 bit 8 Max Fwa Spa Te Zero or positive numbers parameter 62 3 Enter a value of 10504 into Test Select 2 parameter 95 4 Look atthe value of Test Data 2 parameter 94 If Test Data 2 is zero no parameters in this group are being limited If Test Data 2 is non zero use the following table to determine which parameter is being limited If Test Then this Has been Data 2is parameter limited to Ki Speed Loop vad 4 bit 2 parameter 158 The minimum maximum range Kp Speed Loop en 8 bit 3 parameter 159 The minimum maximum range Kf Speed Loop ae 3 16 bit 4 parameter 160 The minimum maximum range 32 bit 5 EAE Devica Type The minimum maximum range parameter 64 64 bit 6 ahi ined The minimum maximum range parameter 67 128 bit 7 Invertor Amps The minimum maximum range parameter 11 Error Filtr BW pse 512 bit 9 parameter
90. 40 0 Minimum value 800 0 Maximum value 800 0 Conversion 4096 100 0 Refer to the Trim Control Overview section in Appendix B Control Block Diagrams for more information 50 PTrim Feedback Parameter number 50 PTrim Feedback is the feedback input value for process trim PTrim Feedback and PTrim Reference parameter 49 are compared and used to update PTrim Output parameter 48 File group Parameter type Display Factory default Minimum value Maximum value Conversion Application Process Trim linkable destination X x 0 0 800 0 800 0 4096 100 0 Refer to the Trim Control Overview section in Appendix B Control Block Diagrams for more information 11 22 Parameters 51 PTrim Select Parameter number 51 File grou Application Process Trim Use PTrim Select to select the options for the process trim Rae type Pp Hiene EET regulator If bits O and 1 are either both set or both clear both the Display bits speed and the torque references remain unaffected If bits 3 and Factory default 00000000 4 are both set bit 3 takes priority Minimu ae 00000000 Maximum value 11111111 The bits are defined as follows Conversion 1 1 Refer to the Trim Control Overview section in Appendix B Control Block Diagrams for more information Bit Description Bit Description Bit Description 0 Speed Trim 3 Set Output 6 Trim Enable Set to trim the speed reference Set the output option Enable process trim OR d with
91. 5K ohm load 90 115V AC 10 and source a current of approximately 20 high mA for each input Chapter Objectives Before Applying Power to Your Drive Chapter 6 Starting Up Your System Chapter 6 provides information so that you can start up your system This Topic Starts on Page Before applying power to your drive 6 1 Applying power to your drive 6 3 Recording your drive and motor information 6 3 Using the Human Interface Module HIM 6 4 Starting up your system 6 7 Running Quick Motor Tune 6 8 Running Digital Setup 6 10 Running Analog Setup 6 11 Understanding links 6 12 Where should go from here 6 14 Important We recommend that you run the start up sequence to start up your system most easily Before you apply voltage to your system you should Check the drive for any damage that may have occurred during shipment and installation Verify that all jumpers and configuration controls are properly set for your application Check all wiring external to the drive for accuracy and reliability Verify that all external I O wires are properly terminated in the terminal blocks Perform a full point to point continuity check on all I O wiring connected to the drive Verify that the incoming power connections are properly connected and tight Verify that the power source is properly sized and protected for your particular drive Verify that the motor power connections
92. 6 8 10 Nominal Input Voltage Figure D 42 Drive Ratings Line Derating 120 100 80 3 60 40 20 0 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 105 110 115 120 125 130 135 140 145 150 Speed EMC Directive Requirements for Conforming Installation Appendix E CE Conformity This apparatus is tested to meet Council Directive 89 336 Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC using a technical construction file and the following standards e EN 50081 1 2 Generic Emission Standard e EN 50082 1 2 Generic Immunity Standard Declarations of Conformity to the European Union Directives are available Please contact your Allen Bradley Sales Representative Marked for all applicable directives Emissions EN 50081 1 EN 50081 2 EN 55011 Class A EN 55011 Class B Immunity EN 50082 1 EN 50082 2 IEC 801 1 2 3 4 6 8 per EN50082 1 2 1 Note Installation guidelines stated below must be adhered to Important The conformity of the drive and filter to any standard does not guarantee that the entire installation will conform Many other factors can influence the total installation and only direct measurements can verify total conformity The following six items are required for CE conformance 1 Standard 1336 IMPACT Drive 0 37 485 kW 0 5 650 HP CE compatible 2 Factory installed EMC enclosure AE option or field installed EMC Enclosure
93. 6 Appendix B Chapter Objectivas 206 cies pero ches eee her pee bia dees pS B 1 Motor Control Board Overview 0c cece eee eee eee B 2 Speed Reference Selection Overview sirrien erae B 4 Trim Control Overview 0 c cece ccc e eee nnn B 10 Speed Feedback OvervieW 0 cece eect eee eee eee eee B 13 Speed PI Regulator Overview 0c cece aea B 16 Torque Reference OvervieW 0 cece cece e cent eee eee B 19 Torque Block Overview 0 0 cece eens B 24 Drive Fault Detection Overview 0 cece eee eee eee B 27 Inverter Overload Overview 2 0 0 cece cece e eee e eee eae B 32 Speed Loop Auto tune Overview 0 cece eee eee B 35 Through Put TIM s 24 0 ses sate eee ee Sees as eae dae dA B 38 Appendix C Chapter Objectives 0 0 0 cece cece eee eae C 1 What Is the Human Interface Module HIM 0 00 ccc eee eee eee C 1 HIM Operation sc 6 0ceecentan wees hae aera adn a eee C 3 HIM Compatibility Information 0 00 cece cece eee eee eee nes C 12 Removing the HIM s0 coriaa annie ye ee tara ond erences C 13 Appendix D Chapter Objectives 05 00 oe pedis eee ea eed ee Pee ee ale D 1 Derating Guidelines 0 0 c cece eens D 2 Appendix E EMG Directive nisi rnern dav sate dad wie Ca baad alee dae ale E 1 Requirements for Conforming Installation 00 00 cee eee eee ee E 1 FRING Uden x errata ecard BN atte th eae ek decedent er E 2 Elec
94. 8 inductance test 13 6 inertia test 13 9 multiple opens 13 5 open transistor faults 13 5 phase rotation tests 13 5 power structure tests 13 2 resistance test 13 7 running individual tests 13 2 software fault 13 5 speed loop overview B 35 B 38 status 11 48 13 13 transistor diagnostic tests 13 2 Autotune Errors 11 53 13 7 13 8 Autotune Speed 11 50 13 9 13 10 Autotune Status 11 48 13 13 B 37 Autotune Torque 11 49 13 9 13 10 B 21 Index Autotune Dgn Sel 11 51 13 2 band function 10 26 bandwidth adjusting 13 11 brake chopper 9 3 braking 9 3 to 9 6 bus regulator 9 4 DC braking 9 6 enable 11 12 dynamic braking 9 3 flux braking 9 5 enable 11 12 motor currents B 23 bus cycles gt 5 11 15 11 16 12 4 12 18 bus drop 11 15 11 16 12 4 12 18 bus regulator braking 9 4 explained B 21 bus undervoltage 11 15 11 16 12 4 12 18 bus voltage tracker explained 12 21 setting slew rate 11 12 Bus Brake Opts 11 12 12 16 12 18 for braking 9 3 to 9 6 for fast flux up 12 20 force precharge 12 20 select slew rate 12 21 C cable common mode core 2 9 guidelines for length 2 2 to 2 4 output reactor 2 9 shielding requirements 2 20 terminator 2 3 to 2 4 catalog number explained 1 3 CE conformity E 1 chopper brake 9 3 11 12 Clr Flt Res Mask 11 41 Command Spd Sts 11 28 common mode cores 2 9 communications fault 8 7 communications gateway connecting 2 24 contents of manual
95. Analog Z SP An Int Sel Par 133 aln SP An In1 Value 4 gt gt SP AniIn1 Scale Par 135 L134 gt 5 gt 6 gt SP An In2 Sel Par 136 31 eI SP An In2 Value 4l gt gt SP An In2 Scale Par 138 lt _137 5 gt 6 1 2 lt SP An Output 3 lt pe ee eae 5 ma 6 ms Using the SCANport Capabilities 8 15 To receive analog input from a SCANport device you need to 1 Set SP An Inl Sel parameter 133 to the SCANport device number 2 Set the scale factor by using SP An InI Scale parameter 135 3 Link a sink parameter to SP An InI Value parameter 134 For example if you plug a HIM into port 1 to control the external speed you need to enter a value of 1 for SP An InI Sel and link Speed Ref I parameter 29 to SP An InI Value You may scale the speed by using SP An InI Scale or Speed Scale 1 parameter 30 When setting the scale factor keep in mind the internal scaling range of the SCANport device For example the HIM pot uses a range of 0 to 32767 Refer to the documentation for your SCANport device for information about the range of the SCANport device The drive sends SP An Output parameter 139 to all devices connected to SCANport To send data out to the SCANport devices link SP An Output to a source parameter For example if the HIM is to receive speed feedback you would link SP An Output to Motor Speed parameter 81 8 16 Using the SCANpo
96. BRK terminal on your drive If your BRK terminal is labeled VBUS connect the terminal on the brake to the VBUS terminal on your drive ATTENTION Ifyou install control and signal wiring with an insulation rating of less than 600V route this wiring inside the drive enclosure to separate it from any other wiring and uninsulated live parts If you do not separate these wires you may damage your equipment or have unsatisfactory drive performance Mounting and Wiring Information Specific to Frames A1 A2 A3 and A4 3 3 Hard Wiring Your I O You can use terminal blocks TB4 TB7 and TB10 for hardwiring your I O These terminal blocks are shown in Figure 3 3 Figure 3 3 Reference Signal Connections J4 TB4 Hovig p Com le DC Poner a Supply 0v s3 i m The power supply is for drive Shield 44 input use only 05 Analog Output 1 a OQ 6 Shield 07 lt 8 Analog Output 2 i 9 Shield J 10 4 to 20 mA O lt D L 1 J7 TB7 1Q Qt Analog Input 1 a iS U2 Shield 3 16 Da J10 TB10 Analog Input 2 k is iil var U t f 1 mH Shield 6 PIT PLT Py ae ee 123 45 67 8 9 10 111 4to20 mA 19 ls Lt EJS ee ea eae es Ee ea eo Shield 9 GIGIGIZGICIGCIGICICICICNS 0 l en Teed 1e Pu
97. BW parameter 161 can then be determined Once these values are determined the speed loop auto tune test performs the speed loop gain calculations to determine the values of the following parameters This parameter Has this definition Ki Speed Loop parameter 158 Controls the integral error gain of the speed regulator Kp Speed Loop F parameter 159 Controls the proportional error gain of the speed regulator Kf Speed Loop parameter 160 Controls the feed forward gain of the speed regulator Fdbk Filter Sel parameter 65 Selects the type of feedback filter Error Filtr BW Sets the bandwidths of two cascaded low pass filters in the parameter 162 Kf error path of the speed PI regulator Current Rate Lim parameter 77 Specifies the largest allowable rate of change for the current reference signal During the speed loop auto tune you can check the status of the test by using Autotune Status parameter 156 The first four bits 0 3 identify the current status If this bit is set Then 0 The test is currently executing 1 The test has completed 2 An error was encountered 3 The test was aborted because a stop command was issued Bits 4 7 12 and 13 identify why bit 2 may have been set If this bit is set Then 4 The motor has active flux 5 The drive is not ready to start auto tune 6 The drive is not at zero
98. Constants Enter the sum of the motor stator and rotor leakage inductances tiottinertiantinelRoetlte and the motor cable inductance in per unit percent Parameter type desinaiion representation The auto tune procedure measures the leakage Display XXX inductance during the quick motor tune portion of start up Factory default 17 99 Minimum value 0 00 Maximum value 100 00 Conversion 4096 100 00 Refer to Chapter 13 Understanding the Auto tuning Procedure for more information 168 Flux Current Parameter number 168 j oo File group Motor Inverter Motor Constants Use Flux Current to specify the magnetizing current that Autotune Autotune Results produces rated flux in the motor in a per unit percent Parameter type destination representation The auto tune procedure measures the flux Display NT current during the quick motor tune portion of start up Factory default 30 00 Minimum value 0 00 Maximum value 75 00 Conversion 4096 100 00 Refer to Chapter 13 Understanding the Auto tuning Procedure for more information 169 Slip Gain Parameter number 169 Use Slip Gain to fine tune the slip constant of the motor to improve speed regulation in encoderless mode File group Motor Inverter Motor Constants Autotune Autotune Results Parameter type destination Display X X Factory default 100 0 Minimum value 0 0 Maximum value 400 0 Conversion 1024 100 0 Refer to Chapter 9 Applications for more information
99. Drive Reducing Voltage Reflections Voltage doubling at motor terminals known as reflected wave phenomenon or transmission line effect can occur when using drives with long motor cables The 1336 IMPACT drive is equipped with an internal voltage reflection reduction mechanism This mechanism provides a minimum dwell time that is controlled so that voltage transients are allowed to decay thus reducing motor overvoltage This limits the voltage seen at the motor terminals to 2 2 per unit and greatly increases the run length of the motor cable before a terminator is required You should use inverter duty motors with phase to phase insulation ratings of 1600 volts or higher to minimize effects of reflected wave on motor insulation life Without the dwell time correction the voltage reflection transients surpass the insulation rating of the motor with less than 500 feet of cable With the introduction of a controlled dwell time the voltage transients are safely maintained below the insulation rating of the motor In Figure 2 1 the terminal voltage is plotted as a function of cable distance for a 1336 IMPACT drive at a 4 kHz carrier frequency Figure 2 1 Terminal Voltage at a 4 kHz Carrier Frequency 4 kHz Terminal Overvoltage 800 700 600 500 Voltage Vpk 400 300 No Correction 200 Corrected Code 1600V 100 25 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 Cable Length Feet Op
100. ENTER if you do not want to use a coast stop You will then be prompted for a ramp stop followed by a current limit stop If you do want to use a coast stop use INC or DEC to toggle the N to a Y Press ENTER Press SEL Decide what value you want the drive to use for the acceleration ramp For more information about the acceleration ramp refer to the Speed Reference Selection Overview 7 Accel Time 1 in Appendix B Control Block Diagrams Step 8 20 SE Use INC or DEC to enter the value When the value is correct press ENTER to return to the top line Press ENTER again Press SEL Decide what value you want the drive to use for the deceleration ramp For more information about the deceleration ramp refer to the Speed Reference Selection Overview 8 es a 1 in Appendix B Control Block Diagrams Step 9 Use INC or DEC to enter the value When the value is correct press ENTER to return to the top line Press ENTER again Starting Up Your System 6 11 Step At this prompt You need to Go to If a speed reference is not already linked you can enter a value to use as a preset speed For example if there is a link to Speed Ref 1 parameter 29 the start up procedure would skip to Speed Ref 2 parameter 31 or the next non linked speed reference 9 Rie fel For each speed reference press SEL Step 10 309 Use INC or DEC to enter the value When the value
101. Factory default not applicable Minimum value 32768 Maximum value 32767 Conversion 1 1 Test Select 1 Parameter number 93 f File group Monitor Testpoints Test Select 1 is a diagnostic tool that you can use to access Fault Setup Testpoints S EA E Hi P ang specifies which data Parameter type Hee CES icion value should be displayed in Test Data 1 parameter 92 Display v Factory default 0 Minimum value 0 Maximum value 65535 Conversion 1 1 If you enter this value for Test Select 1 parameter 93 Then the value in Test Data 1 parameter 92 represents the 12 Precharge status 86 Approximate fluxing time Test Data 2 Parameter number 94 File grou Monitor Testpoints Use Test Data 2 to view a data value that corresponds to the group awit Bene ee Gee value selected in Test Select 2 parameter 95 Test Data 2is a Parameter type aoe diagnostic tool used to view internal parameters Display ix Factory default not applicable Minimum value 32768 Maximum value 32767 Conversion 1 1 11 32 Parameters 95 Test Select 2 Test Select 2 is a diagnostic tool that you can use to access specific testpoints The value you enter specifies which data values should be displayed in Test Data 2 parameter 94 For Test Select 2 values of 11100 through 11232 you need to first enter a 111xx value to determine the number of hours since Parameter number File group Parameter type Display Factory default power up
102. Function 8 Not Stopped Torque Limit Sts parameter 87 Output 1 par 213 and or the The drive is not stopped 24 Not At Lim value of Function Output 2 9 Accelerating The motor is not at the limit shown in par 214 are zero The motor is accelerating Torque Limit Sts parameter 87 36 Not Function Val 10 Not Accel 25 gt Speed True when the values of both The motor is not accelerating The motor speed is greater than or equal Function Output 1 par 213 and 11 Decelerating to Relay Setpoint 3 parameter 190 Function Output 2 par 214 The motor is decelerating 26 lt Speed are zero 12 Not Decel The motor speed is less than Relay 37 Function T F The motor is not decelerating Setpoint 3 parameter 190 True when timer or logical state of 13 At Set Speed 27 gt Current add sub or mult div is true based The motor is at the requested The motor current is greater than or equal on the selected function block speed to Relay Setpoint 3 parameter 190 38 Function T F 14 Not Set Sp 28 lt Current False when timer or logical state of The motor is not at the requested The motor current is less than add sub or mult div is false based speed Relay Setpoint 3 parameter 190 on the selected function block 15 At Zero Spd The motor is at zero speed 190 1 Parameter number 190 Relay Setpoint 3 File group Interface Comm Digital Config Relay Setpoint 3 lets you specify the setpoint threshold for either Parameter type linkable destination speed or c
103. Function Block for more information 11 66 Parameters i 1 Parameter number 208 xe Function Ins File group Application Prog Function Use Function Ind to provide input to the function block that is Parameter type linkable destination provided with the 1336 IMPACT drive Conversion lei For the timer delay and state machine function blocks Function If Function Sel parameter 212 is 0 8 then In5 is used to specify how long after the timer on input is received Display XXX XX minutes before turning on the timer output When used for these modes Factory default 0 00 minutes the timer on signal must be present for as long as you specify in Minimum value 0 00 minutes Function Ins Maximum value 655 35 minutes For the up down counter function block Function In5 specifies If Function Sel parameter 212 is 9 13 then how much to subtract from the value when Function In2 Display x parameter 201 indicates that a rising edge has occurred Factory default 0 For the scale function block Function Ind is the lower word of the Minimum value 0 value that you want to use as either the minimum or maximum Maximum value 65535 value for the output The upper word of this value is specified in Refer to Chapter 10 Using the Function Block for more Function In4 parameter 207 information 1 Function In5 was added in Version 2 xx 209 Function In6 Parameter number 209 Use Function In6 to provide input to the function block that is provided w
104. Function Val 10 Not Accel 25 gt Speed True when the values of both The motor is not accelerating The motor speed is greater than or equal Function Output 1 par 213 and 11 Decelerating to Relay Setpoint 2 parameter 188 Function Output 2 par 214 The motor is decelerating 26 lt Speed are zero 12 Not Decel The motor speed is less than Relay 37 Function T F The motor is not decelerating Setpoint 2 parameter 188 True when timer or logical state of 13 At Set Speed 27 gt Current add sub or mult div is true based The motor is at the requested The motor current is greater than or equal on the selected function block speed to Relay Setpoint 2 parameter 188 38 Function T F 14 Not Set Sp 28 lt Current False when timer or logical state of The motor is not at the requested The motor current is less than add sub or mult div is false based speed Relay Setpoint 2 parameter 188 on the selected function block 15 At Zero Spd The motor is at zero speed 188 1 Parameter number 188 Relay Setpoint 2 File group Interface Comm Digital Config Relay Setpoint 2 lets you specify the setpoint threshold for either Parameter type linkable destination speed or current Relay Setpoint 2 is only active if Relay Config 2 Display x x parameter 187 is set to a value of 25 26 27 or 28 Factory default 0 0 3 Minimum value 800 0 1 Relay Setpoint 2 was added in Version 2 xx MENANG 800 0 Conversion 4096 100 0 Parameters
105. Fwd Spd Trim 62 11 24 Func 2 Mask Val 202 11 63 Max Mtr Current 195 11 59 Func 3 Eval Sel 206 11 65 Max Rev Spd Trim 61 11 24 Func 3 Mask Val 205 11 64 Min Flux Level 71 11 26 Function In1 198 11 61 Min Speed Limit 215 11 69 Function In10 233 11 73 Mop Increment 118 11 38 Function In2 201 11 62 Mop Value 119 11 38 Function In3 204 11 64 Motor Current 83 11 29 Function In4 207 11 65 Motor Flux 88 11 30 Function In5 208 11 66 Motor Frequency 89 11 30 Function In6 209 11 66 Motor Overload 26 11 17 Function In7 210 11 67 Motor Poles 7 11 11 Function In8 211 11 67 Motor Power 90 11 30 Function In9 232 11 73 Motor Speed 81 11 28 Function Output1 213 11 69 Motor Stall Time 25 11 17 Function Output2 214 11 69 Motor Torque 86 11 29 Function Sel 212 11 68 Motor Voltage 85 11 29 Fwd Speed Limit 41 11 20 Motor Voltage 234 11 73 Id Offset 231 11 73 Nameplate Amps 4 11 10 Int Torque Ref 229 11 73 Nameplate HP 2 11 10 11 8 Parameters Name No Page Name No Page Nameplate Hz 6 11 10 Slave Torque 70 11 26 Nameplate RPM 3 11 10 Slip Gain 169 11 50 Nameplate Volts 5 11 10 SP 2 Wire Enable 181 11 26 Nefg Fit Status 220 11 70 SP An In1 Scale 135 11 50 Neg Mtr Cur Lim 73 11 27 SP An In1 Select 133 11 54 Neg Torque Lim 75 11 27 SP An In1 Value 134 11 44 Notch Fi
106. HIM The Human Interface Module HIM is the standard user interface for the 1336 IMPACT drive Important For more information about the HIM refer to Appendix C Using the Human Interface Module HIM Important The start up procedure described in this manual assumes that you are using a HIM If you are using another programming device such as a Graphic Programming Terminal GPT refer to the instructions for that programming device and modify the start up instructions in this manual accordingly Important Your HIM should be connected to SCANport 1 for all HIM functions to work correctly The defaults have been set up for the HIM to be connected to port 1 If you plug the HIM into a different port you need to change the default links The HIM contains a display panel and a control panel The display panel lets you program the drive and view the various operating parameters The control panel lets you control different drive functions Figure 6 1 shows an example of a HIM Figure 6 1 Example of a HIM Display Panel m r ALLEN BRADLEY Control Panel Human Interface Module HIM Wal The display panel provides the following keys Press this To This key is key referred to as ESC Go back one level in the menu tree that the HIM uses to organize information The Escapeikey SEL Alternate which display line top or bottom is
107. HMCP250L5 65 000 1336E B200 187 250 KTA3 400S 320 65 000 HMCP400N5 H 65 000 1336E B250 224 300 KTA3 400S 400 65 000 HMCP400N5 65 000 1336E BP250 224 300 KTA3 400S 400 65 000 HMCP400N5 65 000 1336E B300 261 350 NA NA 1336E BP300 298 400 KTA 400S 400 65 000 HMCP400R5 65 000 Mounting and Wiring Your 1336 IMPACT Drive 2 7 IEC Installations per IEC947 2 UL CSA Installations Bulletin 140 Circuit Breaker HMCP Circuit Breaker2 Maximum Rated Service Short _ Max Short Drive Rated Vt Circuit Capability MCP Trip Circuit Amps Catalog Number kW HP Catalog Number 400 415V Catalog Number Setting ee 1336E B350 298 400 NA NA NA 1336E BP350 261 350 NA NA HMCP600L6W E 65 000 1336E B400 336 450 NA NA NA 1336E BP400 298 400 NA NA HMCP600L6W E 65 000 1336E B450 373 500 NA NA NA 1336E BP450 336 450 NA NA HMCP600L6W E 65 000 1336E B500 448 600 NA NA NA 1336E C001 0 75 1 140 MN 0400 100 000 HMCPS003A0 E 65 000 1336E C003 2 2 3 140 MN 0630 100 000 HMCPS007C0 E 65 000 1336E C007 5 5 7 5 140 MN 1000 16 000 HMCPSO15E0C E 65 000 1336E C010 7 5 10 140 MN 1600 6 000 HMCPSO15E0C E 65 000 1336E C015 11 15 140 MN 2000 6 000 HMCPSO30H1C F 65 000 1336E C020 15 20 140 MN 2500 6 000 HMCPSO30H1C H 65 000 1336E C025 18 5 25 140 CMN 4000 65 000 HMCPS050K2C E 65 000 1336E C030 22 30 140 CM
108. INC or DEC to scroll through the parameter list until you come to the destination parameter that you want to link In this example you would use INC or DEC until you reach parameter 139 The display should be similar to the following SP An Output GEBEREEE 4 Press SEL The display should now be similar to the following flat Linked EE RESAH fs Eps C 12 Using the Human Interface Module HIM HIM Compatibility Information 5 6 7 Press INC or DEC to go to the parameter that you want to provide the information In this case parameter 86 Motor Torque Press ENTER Press ESC when you have finished to exit the Set Links mode Removing a Link To remove a link you need to Bad Ape ATTENTION Be careful when removing links If the source parameter has already written a value to the destination parameter the destination parameter retains the value until you explicitly remove it For some parameters this may produce undesirable results From the Choose Mode prompt use INC or DEC to select Links Press INC or DEC to select Set Links Use INC or DEC to scroll through the parameter list until you come to the destination parameter that you want to link Press SEL Enter 0 Press ENTER Press ESC when you have finished to exit the Set Links mode If your HIM was shipped with your 1336 IMPACT drive it should be fully compatible with your drive However if you are using a HIM that you purchased bef
109. Kit 1336x AEx see page E 2 3 Filter as called out on the following page 4 Grounding as shown on page E 3 5 Input power source to filter and output power filter to drive and drive to motor wiring must be braided shielded cable with a coverage of 75 or better metal conduit or other with equivalent or better attenuation mounted with appropriate connectors For shielded cable it is recommended to use a compact strain relief connector with double saddle clamp for filter and drive input and compact strain relief connector with EMI protection for motor output 6 Control I O and signal wiring must be in conduit or have shielding with equivalent attenuation E 2 Filter CE Conformity Filter Selection Filter Catalog Three Phase Used with Frame Number Volts ig Reference 200 240V 1336E AQF05 AQF10 Al 1336 RFB 7 A 380 480V 1336E BRF05 BRF20 A1 A2 200 240V 1336E AQF15 AQF20 A2 1336 RFB 16 A 380 480V 1336E BRF30 BRF50 A2 A3 200 240V 1336E AQF30 AQF50 A3 1336 RFB 30 A 380 480V 1336E BRF75 BRF100 A4 200 240V 1336E A007 B 1336 RFB 27 B 380 480V 1336E B007 B015 B 200 240V 1336E A010 A015 B 1336 RFB 48 B 380 480V 1336E B020 B030 B 200 240V 1336E A020 A030 C 1336 RFB 80 C 380 480V 1336E BX040 BX060 C 200 240V 1336E A040 A050 D 1336 RFB 150 D 380 480V 1
110. L Option Mode at any time either by re running the start up procedure or by changing L Option Mode directly The start up procedure is the preferred method If you change L Option Mode directly the change does not take affect until you reset the drive or complete the following steps 1 Remove power to the drive 2 Let the bus voltage decay completely 3 Restore power to the drive When you restore the power the drive uses the new input mode value to determine the function of the L Option inputs You may also need to manually adjust several other parameters that the start up procedure prompts you for Important If you do not have an L Option board installed you must set L Option Mode to 1 default and install jumpers If the drive was shipped from the factory without the option these jumpers will have been installed Jumper 1 Jumper 2 7 bh T L Option board s Connector 7 Jumper 1 gt ul Jumper 2 gt ea P i Wiring the L Option Board TB3 accepts wire with the following specifications Wire information Description Minimum wire size 0 30 mm 22 AWG Maximum wire size 2 1 mm 14 AWG Maximum torque 1 36 N m 12 Ib in
111. L3 T1 2 T3 y Dynamic Brake A A 4 1 Required j To Motor Input Fusing To Motor 1 Required Branch Circuit Disconnect AC Input Line Mounting and Wiring Information Specific to Frames B C D E F G and H Figure 4 3 Drive Connections for Frames C and D 200 240V 15 22 kW 20 30 HP Terminal Designations 380 480V 30 45 kW 40 60 HP Terminal Designations 500 600V 18 5 45 kW 25 60 HP Terminal Designations QQ ANONSAI PE PE DC DC R S T U V w GRD GRD L1 L2 L3 T1 3 T3 1 Dynamic Brake N A h 1 Required L 4 Input Fusing 1 Required Branch Circuit Disconnect T To Motor AC Input Line 200 240V 30 45 kW 40 60 HP Terminal Designations 380 480V 45 112 kW 60 150 HP Terminal Designations 500 600V 56 112 kW 75 150 HP Terminal Designations JE TS DC DC PES PES TE Brake Brake To Motor S U v w
112. Logic Select To manually run the auto tune test you need to use Autotune Dgn Sel parameter 173 It has the following bit definitions To run this test You need to set Must the load be this bit coupled to the motor Inverter transistor diagnostics 0 No Motor phase rotation test 1 No Inductance measure test 2 No Rs measure test resistance 3 No Flux current measure test 4 No Inertia test 5 Yes 1 Although the motor does not have to be coupled to the load during these tests you can have it coupled to the load during any of the tests The motor must be coupled to the drive for all of these tests Bits 6 through 15 are reserved leave 0 Important You must run the motor phase rotation test inductance test resistance test flux test and inertia test in order To run a particular test 1 Set the bit in Autotune Dgn Sel that corresponds to the test you want to run 2 Enable the drive When the test is complete the bit is cleared 0 If a fault occurred refer to the Troubleshooting section You can run the auto tune tests individually The power structure and transistor diagnostics routines let you determine if any problems exist in the power structure of the drive and determine the probable cause of these problems The diagnostic software determines hardware problems through a series of system tests These tests are parameter dependent The test results depend on drive size motor si
113. Math Limit A math limit has occurred 13 InvOvid Pend An inverter overload is pending IT 15 InvOvid Trp An inverter overload trip IT has occurred Bits 2 7 8 11 12 and 14 are reserved For each condition that you want the drive to fault on you need to set the corresponding bit in Fault Select 2 When the drive trips on a condition that you set to fault the drive how the drive reacts depends on which condition occurred 12 6 Troubleshooting Warning Select bit 1 Trips Drive bit 1 o Reports as Warning Faut o lt o _ om bit 0 Reports as Warning bit 0 No Report Ignored Viewing the Fault and Warning Queues on the HIM For bits 0 1 4 5 and 15 e The red VP light turns on e The motor coasts to a stop For bits 3 and 6 through 13 e The red VP light turns on e The motor stops according to how bits 1 3 in Logic Options parameter 17 are set If this bit is set Then this stop type is used 1 Coast 2 Current limit 3 Ramp For each condition that you want the drive to display a warning fault on you need to 1 Set the corresponding bit in Warning Select 2 2 Make sure the corresponding bit in Fault Select 2 is set to 0 When the drive trips on a condition that you set to display a warning e The green VP light flashes e The drive continues to run If a particular bit is not set in either Fault Select 2 or Warning Select 2 the drive ignore
114. Maximum value 17 Conversion E Refer to Chapter 10 Using the Function Block for more information Value Description Description Value Description 0 None l V 12 Unsign I lt V Pass the value directly on to the Check to see if Function In1 is Check to see if the unsigned value function block equal to Func 1 Mask Val of Function In1 is less than the 1 Mask I Not V value of Func 1 Mask Val Mask specific bits Check to see if Function Intisnot 13 Unsign I lt V 2 All Bits On equal to Func 1 Mask Val Check to see if the unsigned value Check to make sure that all bits Signed I lt V of Function In1 is less than or that are set on in Func 1 Check to see if the signed value of equal to the value of Func 1 Mask Val parameter 199 are set Function In1 is less than the value Mask Val in Function In1 parameter 198 of Func 1 Mask Val 14 Unsign I gt V 3 All Bits Off Signed I lt V Check to see if the unsigned value Check to make sure that all bits Check to see if the signed value of of Function In1 is greater than the that are set in Func 1 Mask Valare Function In1 is less than or equal value of Func 1 Mask Val clear in Function In1 to the value of Func 1 Mask Val 15 Unsign I gt V 4 Any Bit On Signed I gt V Check to see if the unsigned value Check to make sure that at least Check to see if the signed value of of Function In1 is greater than or one of the bits that are set in Function In1 is greater than the equal to the value of Func 1 Func 1 Mask Val
115. Motor Data Y e Nameplate Hz the frequency rating e Nameplate RPM the rated speed Step 2 Motor Poles the number of motor poles For each item you need to do the following 1 Press SEL to make the bottom display line active 2 Use INC or DEC to enter the correct value 3 When the value is correct press ENTER to return to the top line 4 Press ENTER again A Do youhavean If you are not using an encoder press ENTER Step 4 Encoder N If you are using an encoder use INC or DEC to toggle the N to a Y Press ENTER Step 3 Press SEL to make the bottom display line active Encoder PPR 3 ee Use INC or DEC to enter the pulses per revolution that your encoder uses Step 4 When the value is correct press ENTER to return to the top line Press ENTER again If you are not using a dynamic brake or regenerative system press ENTER 4 Is there Regen f INC or DEC Step 5 Dynamic Brake N If you are using a dynamic brake or regenerative system use or to toggle the N p to a Y Press ENTER Rotation Test 5 Press GREEN STRT Press START Step 6 6 Is the Motor If the motor is rotating press ENTER ee Rotating Y If the motor is not rotating go to Chapter 12 Troubleshooting j A If the motor is rotating in what you consider to be the forward direction press ENTER s the Rotation s 7 Direction Fwd Y Otherwise you will be asked to stop the drive by pressing STOP Step 8 You then need to exit start up and change the motor leads S
116. Refer SP 3 SCANport device 3 owns the reference command Refer SP 4 SCANport device 4 owns the reference command Refer SP 5 SCANport device 5 owns the reference command Bit 10 Parameter type Display Factory default Minimum value Maximum value Conversion Monitor Status SCANport Status Interface Comm SCANport Status source bits not applicable 00000000 00000000 11111111 11111111 a Refer to Chapter 8 Using the SCANport Capabilities for more information Description Refer SP 6 SCANport device 6 owns the reference command Refer P197 Logic Cmd Input parameter 197 owns the reference command Direct L Opt The L Option board owns the direct command Direct SP 1 SCANport device 1 owns the direct command Direct SP 2 SCANport device 2 owns the direct command Bit 11 12 13 14 15 Description Direct SP 3 SCANport device 3 owns the direct command Direct SP 4 SCANport device 4 owns the direct command Direct SP 5 SCANport device 5 owns the direct command Direct SP 6 SCANport device 6 owns the direct command Direct P197 Logic Cmd Input parameter 197 owns the direct command 11 42 Parameters 129 Start Stop Owner Parameter number 129 You can use the lower byte of Start Stop Owner bits 0 through 7 Fe group E nnes A to see which SCANport device s are presently issuing a valid Parameter type SOUS stop command You can use the higher byte bi
117. SCANport 4 Start Jog Mask Par 126 SCANport 5 Clr Fit Res Mask Par 127 SCANport 6 Dir Ref Mask Par 125 Gateway parameter 197 Dir Ref Mask Par 125 i Clr Fit Res Mask Par 127 Dir Ref Owner Par 128 Start Stop Owner Par 129 Jog1 Jog2 Owner Par 130 Ramp CIFIt Owner Par 131 Flux Trim Owner Par 132 Drive Inv Status Par 15 Bit 0 Run Ready Bit 1 Running Bit 2 Command Dir Bit 3 Rotating Dir Bit 4 Accelerating Bit 5 Decelerating Bit 6 Warning Bit 7 Faulted Logic Input Sts Par 14 it 0 Normal Stop it 1 Start it2 Jog 1 it 3 Clear Fault it 4 Forward it 5 Reverse it6 Jog 2 it 7 Current Limit Stop it 8 Coast to Stop it 9 Speed Ramp Disable it 11 Process Trim Enable it 12 Speed Ref A it 13 Speed Ref B it 14 Speed Ref C it 15 Reset Drive DWOWWWWDWWWDABWWAWWWDA Bit 8 At Set Speed Bit 9 Enable LED Bit 10 Stopped Bit 11 Stopping Bit 12 At Zero Spd Bit 13 Speed Ref A Bit 14 Speed Ref B Bit 15 Speed Ref C it 10 Flux Enable Magnetizing Flux CBA 000 No Change 001 Speed Ref 1 010 Speed Ref 2 011 Speed Ref 3 100 Speed Ref 4 101 Speed Ref 5 110 Speed Ref 6 111 Speed Ref 7 No Change Speed Ref 1 Speed Ref 2 Speed Ref 3 Speed Ref 4 Speed Ref 5 Speed Ref 6 Speed
118. SpdFdbk Loss 6 Ext Fault In 12 Reserved 1 InvOvtmp Pnd 7 Reserved 13 InOvid Pend 2 Reserved 8 Reserved 14 Reserved 3 MtrOvid Pend 9 Param Limit 15 InvOvid Trip 4 MtrOvid Trip 10 Math Limit 5 Mtr Stall 11 Reserved 223 1 Parameter number 223 Warning Status 1 File group Monitor Fault Status Warning Status 1 shows warning conditions that have been Parameter type source configured to report as drive warning conditions Each Display Bits configuration bit matches the bit definitions of Warning Select 1 Factory default 0000 0000 0000 0000 parameter 21 and Warning Select 2 parameter 23 When a bit Minimum value 0000 0000 0000 0000 is 1 the condition is true otherwise the condition is false 1 Warning Status 1 was added in Version 3 xx Maximum value Conversion 1111 1111 1111 1111 1 1 Refer to Chapter 12 Troubleshooting for more information Bit Condition Bit 0 Ridethru Time 6 1 Prechrg Time 7 2 Bus Drop 8 3 Bus Undervlt 9 4 Bus Cycles gt 5 10 5 Open Circuit 11 Condition Reserved Reserved mA Input SP 1 Timeout SP 2 Timeout SP 3 Timeout Bit 12 13 14 15 Condition SP 4 Timeout SP 5 Timeout SP 6 Timeout SP Error 11 72 Parameters 224 i 1 Parameter number 224 Warning Status 2 File group Monitor Fault Status Warning Status 2 shows warning conditions that have been Parameter type source configured to report as drive warning conditions Each Display Bits configuration bit matches the b
119. Speed Profile would then proceed to Step 2 and command 1700 rpm for another 10 seconds The control will then proceed to the next step Since Step 3 is not configured the profile will end and command zero speed End Actions When the profile control is at the end of a sequence a variety of actions can be taken These are called End Actions The end actions are selected by parameter 238 End Action Select and are configured via the End Action EA parameters 239 through 243 The kinds of End Actions available are If Parameter 238 End Action Select 0 Command zero speed 1 Goto EA Goto step indicated by parameter 240 2 Input EA End action speed P 239 until TB3 input transitions and then commands zero speed 3 Compare EA Command EA speed P 239 until compare parameter P 242 equals compare value P 243 4 Home EA Command EA speed P 239 until motor returns to home position To cause the first profile to continually loop from step 2 back to step 1 you would use the Goto end action Enter a value of 1 in the End Action EA select parameter Then select the target step by entering a value of in the EA Goto parameter 240 When enabled the profile will continually sequence between the Step 1 speed of 400 rpm and the Step 2 speed of 1700 rpm in 10 second intervals This will continue until the profile is turned off via the Profile Enable Parameter 235 clearing bit 0 The other End Action
120. Stop Clr Fit Run Rev MOP Incr Ext Fit MOP Decr _ Spd Sel 2 Spd Sel 1 Enable 16 RunFwd Stop Clr Fit Run Rev Loc Rem Ext Fit Stop Type Spd Sel 2 Spd Sel 1 Enable 17 Start Stop Clr Fit Rev Fwd PTrim En Ext Fit Ramp Dis Spd Sel 2 Spd Sel 1 Enable 18 Stat Stop Clr Fit Rev Fwd Flux Enable Ext Fit Reset Spd Sel 2 Spd Sel 1 Enable 19 Start Stop Clr Fit Spd Trq3 Spd Trq 2 Ext Fit Spd Trq 1 PTrim En Spd Sel 1 Enable 20 Start Stop Clr Fit Spd Trqg 3 Spd Trq 2 Ext Fit Spd Trq 1 Flux Enable Spd Sel 1 Enable 21 Start Stop Clr Fit Reverse Forward Ext Fit Ramp Dis Reset Spd Sel 1 Enable 22 Start Stop Clr Fit Spd Trq3 Spd Trq 2 Ext Fit Spd Trq 1 Spd Sel 2 Spd Sel 1 Enable 23 RunFwd Stop Clr Fit Run Rev PTrim En Ext Fit Reset Spd Sel 2 Spd Sel 1 Enable 24 RunFwd Stop Clr Fit Run Rev Flux Enable Ext Fit Reset Spd Sel 2 Spd Sel 1 Enable 25 RunFwd _ Stop Clr Fit Run Rev PTrim En Ext Fit Ramp Dis Spd Sel 2 Spd Sel 1 Enable 26 RunFwd Stop Clr Fit Run Rev Jog Ext Fit Spd Sel 3 Spd Sel 2 Spd Sel 1 Enable 27 Start Stop Clr Fit Rev Fwd MOP Incr Ext Fit MOP Decr Spd Sel 2 Spd Sel 1 Enable 28 Start Stop Clr Fit MOP Incr MOP Decr Ext Fit Spd Sel 3 Spd Sel 2 Spd Sel 1 Enable 29 Start Stop Clr Fit Reverse Forward Ext Fit MOP Incr MOP Decr Spd Sel 1 Enable 30 RunFwd Stop Cir Fi Run Rev MOP Incr Ext Fit MOP Decr Spd Sel 2 Spd Sel 1 Enable 31 Step Trig Stop Clr F Step Trig Step Trig Ext Fit Step Trig Step Trig Step Trig Enable 32 Start Stop Clr FI S
121. Stop Run Rev Proc Trim Ext Fault Ramp Spd 2 Spd 1 26 RunFwd Stop Run Rev Jog Ext Fault Spd 3 Spd 2 Spd 1 27 Start Stop Rev Fwd Pot Up Ext Fault Pot Dn Spd 2 Spd 1 28 Start Stop Pot Up Pot Dn Ext Fault Spd 3 Spd 2 Spd 1 29 Start Stop Rev Fwd Ext Fault Pot Up Pot Dn Spd 1 30 Run Fwd Stop Run Rev Pot Up Ext Fault Pot Dn Spd 2 Spd 1 313 Step Trigger Not Stop Step Trigger Step Trigger Not Ext Flt Step Trigger Step Trigger Step Trigger 323 Start Not Stop Step Trigger Step Trigger Not Ext Flt Profile Enable Run SequenceStep Hold 1 Added for Version 2 01 2 Added for Version 2 02 3 Added for Version 4 01 11 38 Parameters 117 L Option In Sts Parameter number 117 File grou Interface Comm Digital Confi Use L Option In Sts to view the status of the L Option inputs ae type g Es Display bits Factory default not applicable Minimum value 00000000 00000000 Maximum value 00000001 11111111 Conversion 1 1 Bit Description Bit Description Bit Description Bit Description 0 TB3 19 3 TB3 23 6 TB3 27 9 15 Reserved 1 TB3 20 4 TB3 24 7 TB3 28 Leave 0 2 TB3 22 5 TB3 26 8 TB3 30 enable 118 Mop Increment Parameter number 118 File group Interface Comm Digital Config Use Mop Increment to set the rate of increase or decrease to the Parameter type linkable destination Manually Operated Potentiometer MOP value based on Display x x rpm rpm second rpm second Mop Increment is only used when the value of Factory default 10 of base motor speed
122. The actual rotor position may be slightly forward or behind the exact target and still be within range Increasing the tolerance parameter value will enlarge this range When the next step calculates a target it uses the actual position the new step begins at Repeating Profile Sequences If a Goto End Action is selected the position error will continue to accumulate over multiple sequences Over time the accrued error could be significant If a Home End Action is selected the error of a single sequence will Not accumulate over multiple sequences The rotor will return to the same position it was in when the Profile enable bit was first set As long as the enable bit is set the control will retain this as its home position Additional sequences can be started by toggling the Run Sequence bit Velocity Blend Mode Encoder mode applications which don t require great precision can utilize the Velocity Blend mode to switch from one step velocity to another In this blend mode control will not demand that the motor rest at zero speed for eleven update intervals before continuing to the next step as illustrated in Figure 9 14 Step Example Without Velocity Blend Profile Enable xxxx0011 Step Example Using Velocity Blend Mode Profile Enable xxxx1011 Applications 9 29 This is useful when using the encoder to replace limit switches for controlling the commanded speed Keeping the commanded velocity from going to zero speed fo
123. Timeout A communication loss with SCANport device 2 11 SP 3 Timeout A communication loss with SCANport device 3 12 SP 4 Timeout A communication loss with SCANport device 4 13 SP 5 Timeout A communication loss with SCANport device 5 14 SP 6 Timeout A communication loss with SCANport device 6 15 SP Error Too many errors have occurred in the communications Bits 6 and 7 are reserved For each condition that you want the drive to fault on set the corresponding bit in Fault Select 1 When the drive trips on a condition that you set to fault the drive how the drive reacts depends on which condition occurred For bits 0 through 5 e The red CP light turns on e The motor coasts to a stop For bits 8 through 14 e The red VP light turns on e The motor stops according to how bits 1 3 in Logic Options parameter 17 are set If this bit is set Then this stop type is used 1 Coast 2 Current limit Ramp Fault Select bit 1 Trips Drive o Fault Om bit 0 Reports as Warning Warning Select bit 1 Reports as Warning Oo Oo bit 0 No Report Ignored Troubleshooting 12 5 For each condition that you want the drive to display a warning fault on you need to 1 Set the corresponding bit in Warning Select 1 2 Make sure the corresponding bit in Fault Select 1 is set to 0 When the drive trips on a condition that you set to display a warning e The C
124. Understanding the Logic Input Sts parameter 8 1 Configuring the SCANport controls 8 3 Setting the SCANport faults 8 7 Using the SCANport I O image 8 8 Setting the analog I O parameters 8 14 Logic Input Sts parameter 14 shows which functions are currently executing To use SCANport effectively you need to understand how Logic Input Sts works Logic Input Sts has the following bits 0 Normal Stop 8 Coast Stop 1 Start 9 Ramp Disable 2 Jog1 10 Flux Enable 3 Clear Fault 11 Process Trim Enable 4 Forward 12 Speed Ref A 5 Reverse 13 Speed Ref B 6 Jog2 14 Speed Ref C 7 Current Limit Stop 15 Reset Drive Serial Communications devices such as the Human Interface Module that are directly mounted on the IMPACT drive are identified as SCANport Device 1 Remote communication devices such as a HIM GPT etc are identified as Device 2 and up depending on the amount of control devices connected to the Drive Using the SCANport Capabilities The logic evaluation block receives SCANport control from up to eight sources The logic evaluation block takes this information and combines it to form a single logic command word that you can view using Logic Input Sts In this manner the logic evaluation block allows for multi point control Figure 8 1 shows the flow of information Figure 8 1 SCANport Interactions with Logic Input Sts Logic Input Sts SCANport 1 SCANport 2 SCANport 3
125. Vorstlaan Boulevard du Souverain 36 1170 Brussels Belgium Tel 32 2 663 0600 Fax 32 2 663 0640 Asia Pacific Rockwell Automation Level 14 Core F Cyberport 3 100 Cyberport Road Hong Kong Tel 852 2887 4788 Fax 852 2508 1846 Publication 1336 IMPACT 5 0 April 2002 P N 74103 700 01 05 Supersedes April 2000 Copyright 2002 Rockwell Automation All rights reserved Printed in USA
126. Wire type Use only copper wire Figure 5 3 provides the terminal designations for TB3 Remote 26 IA Speed Select 3 Open 27 28 Ie Speed Select 2 Open eal Speed Select 1 A7 se Local Figure 5 3 Using the L Option TB3 Terminal Designations 5 9 Included on L7E L8E amp L9E Only 19 20 21 22 23 24 2 2 27 2 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 lcaGalGaGaGalGa Saeeeceeeceeocsocs o a lt OO er IS a So t FS ono SF LD Re O a e a O e FS B GOO fF Sf EBB BER 8 aE Bee lt lt MN E Z EE lt i E wi Gr G iS 9 me See te me ES IG SS 7 amp amp oO gt M i 8 eG g D i a 8 ar ME Speed Select Speed Reference Several sources can provide the speed reference to the drive A SCANport device or the L Option determine the source The default source for a command reference all speed select inputs open is Speed Ref 1 If any of the speed select inputs are closed the drive uses other parameters as the speed reference source The following table defines the input state of the Speed Select inputs for a desired speed reference source Sped Speed Speed Frequency source select 3 select 2 select 1 Open Open Open Speed Ref 1 Open Open Closed Speed Ref 2 Open Closed Open Speed Ref 3 Open Closed Closed Speed Ref 4 Closed Open Open Speed Ref 5 Closed Open Closed
127. a E MERSI The maximum torque in frame size N m lb in is mm AWG is A1 A4 5 3 0 8 10 18 1 81 16 B 8 4 0 8 8 18 1 81 16 13 3 0 5 6 20 1 70 15 C 26 7 0 8 3 18 5 65 50 p2 127 0 2 1 250 MCM 14 6 00 52 67 4 2 1 00 14 8 6 00 52 E2 253 0 2 1 500 MCM 14 10 00 87 F 303 6 2 1 600 MCM 14 23 00 200 G 303 6 2 1 600 MCM 14 23 00 200 H 303 6 2 1 600 MCM 14 23 00 200 1 Wire sizes given are the maximum minimum sizes that TB1 will accept These are not recommendations 2 These configurations of TB1 are stud type terminations and require the use of lug type connectors to terminate field installed conductors Lug kits are available for use with these configurations Wire size used is determined by selecting the proper lug kit based on the drive catalog number Refer to Chapter 4 for information on lug kits 3 Applies to 30 kW 40 hp 200 240V 45 and 56 kW 60 and 75 hp 380 480V 56 kW 75 hp 500 600V drives only The drive connections are frame specific Refer to the appropriate chapter for the drive connections Selecting Your Motor Cables You can select which type of cable you want to use with the 1336 IMPACT drive Unshielded Cable For many installations you can use unshielded cable as long as you can separate it from sensitive circuits As an approximate guide allow a spacing of 1 meter 3 3 feet for every 10 meters 33 feet of length In all cases you need to avoid lon
128. aie ee 100 103 106 109 and 20 20 eN yor ae g 112 external units to 10V you can use an offset value of 5 to change the range to 5V Lets you use the full range of internal drive Scale parameters 98 digital value units The maximum range is 32767 101 104 107 110 and 16 1 21g ee oe 113 internal units internal units The maximum analog to digital value is 2048 Filter parameters 182 0 200 NA digital value Lets you use a low pass filter to reduce the 183 and 184 internal units noise received from the input file nterface Comm group Analog Inputs Not all applications require both an offset parameter and a scale parameter For example if you have an input range of 0 to 10V and you want a range of 0 to 8192 internal drive units you do not need to supply an offset value If you do not require an offset value make sure that the offset parameter is set to 0 Likewise you may not need a scale value If this is the case make sure that the scale parameter is set to 1 Determining the Offset and Scale Values for an Analog Input To determine the offset and scale values for an analog input you need to know the following e the range of units coming from the analog input for example 5V to 5V or OV to 10V e the range that you want to see in internal drive units for example 2048 to 2048 or 0 to 4096 You determine the value of the offset parameter by comparing the range of units coming from the
129. analog input to the range that you want to see in internal drive units For example if you need to get a drive unit range from a 0 to 10V input range you can use an offset of 5 subtracting 5 from both 0 and 10 gives you a 5 to 5 range Once you have the proper range the offset is converted to an internal or digital value 10V is always equal to 2048 internal drive units 5V equals 1024 internal drive units For this example the internal drive units are 1024 Setting Up the Input Output 7 5 To get to the desired range of 4096 4096 base motor speed you need to scale the internal drive units by 4 4 x 1024 4096 Figure 7 3 shows an example of the offset and scale values for an analog input parameter Figure 7 3 Example of Offset and Scale for Analog Inputs Range of the analog Range of the analog input after the offset input in internal is applied drive units Drive Output 0 to 10V pot 5 Analog to Digital 5 gt 0 y Converter Offset 5 5 1024 By subtracting 5 from By multiplying 1024 by 4 both 0 and 10 you get you get the 4096 range a 5 range you were looking for Cc To summarize to determine the offset and scale values for your analog inputs you need to 1 Compare the output range to the internal drive unit range In the example shown in Figure 7 3 you would compare the ranges represented by A and B If the ranges are Then you Go to The same that is both bo
130. and Inches Mounting and Wiring Information Specific to Frames B C D E F G and H 4 15 Removable Lifting Angle Open Chassis Dimensions Depth 508 3 20 01 Weight 453 6 kg 1000 Ibs 1524 0 60 00 f 648 0 19 3 25 51 0 76 Important Two 2 725 CFM fans are required if an open type drive is mounted in a user supplied enclosure Dimensions for Frame G ALLEN BRADLEY 2324 1 91 50 762 0 30 00 Conduit Access Area See Bottom View Dimensions for Details 63 5 2 50 635 0 25 00 All Dimensions in Millimeters and Inches 4 16 Important Mounting and Wiring Information Specific to Frames B C D E F G and H Typical G Frame Mounting in User Supplied Enclosure lt 14 2 0 56 ra 11 1x19 1 0 44 x 0 75 ez 3 4 1 6 A i m N Dig a N aa 82 6 3 25 lt 55 1 ba 2 17 Ix Pa Pa Bracket ao This information represents the method used to factory mount an open type Frame G in an enclosure specifically designed by Allen Bradley Illustrations are only intended to identify structural mounting points and hardware shapes You must design and fabricate steel components base
131. applied to the Function Val True when the value of Function Output 1 par 213 and or the value of Function Output 2 par 214 are zero Not Function Val True when the values of both Function Output 1 par 213 and Function Output 2 par 214 are zero Function T F True when timer or logical state of add sub or mult div is true based on the selected function block Not Function T F False when timer or logical state of add sub or mult div is false based on the selected function block Parameters 11 37 115 Relay Setpoint 1 Parameter number 115 File grou Interface Comm Digital Confi Relay Setpoint 1 lets you specify the setpoint threshold for either eee g f tes p Parameter type linkable destination speed or current Relay Setpoint 1 is only active if Relay Config 1 Display se parameter 114 is set to a value of 25 26 27 or 28 Factory default 40 0 Minimum value 800 0 Maximum value 800 0 Conversion 4096 100 0 116 L Option Mode Parameter number 116 CAL File group Interface Comm Digital Config Use L Option Mode to select the functions of L Option inputs at Parameter type deino TBS If you change the value of L Option Mode you must cycle Display 4 power before the change will take effect Factory default 1 Minimum value 1 The following is the mode information Maximum value 32 Conversion 1 1 Refer to Chapter 5 Using the L Option for additional information Mode TB3 19 TB3 20 TB3 22 T
132. command to the value stored in HIM memory These arrows are only available with digital speed control EGE The control panel section also provides the following indicators z anis Provides information about This isreferreg indicator to as The direction of motor rotation he Direction Se LED An approximate visual indication of the command The Speed speed This indicator is only available with digital Indicator speed control When you first apply power to the 1336 IMPACT drive the HIM cycles through a series of displays These displays show the drive name HIM ID number and communication status When complete the status display shown in Figure 6 2 is displayed Figure 6 2 Initial Status Display The display shows the current drive status or any faults that may be present During the start up procedure you will need to answer the questions that are displayed in the status display area 6 6 1 Starting Up Your System i a Press any key on the HIM to continue Before you begin the start up procedure you should have a basic understanding of how the HIM uses a menu tree to organize the information that the HIM displays Figure 6 3 shows the generic HIM menu tree used by all devices that support the HIM Figure 6 3 HIM Menu Tree Power Up and Status Display RA EA EA EAO Choose Mode Operator Level Mode Level EEProm Search Control
133. curve for frames A G This inverter overload curve also applies to the frame H with the exception of the 460V 800 HP B 34 Control Block Diagrams Inverter Overload Curves 200 9 190 30 second Pending 150 180 170 60 second Overload 150 160 150 140 130 120 Percent Rated Inverter Current 110 100 10 100 Seconds to Trip 1000 10000 Inverter Overload Inverter Overload Pending The following is the inverter overload curve for the 460V 800 HP frame H Inverter Overload Curves H Frame 200 190 180 170 160 1 150 30 second Pending 135 Percent Rated Inverter Current 140 Pa 60 second Ov erload 135 135 130 120 110 105 100 10 100 1000 10000 Seconds to Trip Overload Foldback Overload Warning Control Block Diagrams B 35 Speed Loop Auto tune You can use the following block diagram to view how the drive uses Overview the parameters for speed loop auto tune Autotune Autotune Drive Inv Torque Speed Status Autotune Status Drive Run Stopped Autotune Dgn Sel Inertia a Executing 4 173 L ___
134. cycle Factory default 0 the SCANport terminals to display the correct information Minimum value 32767 Maximum value 32767 Conversion 1 1 140 Data In A1 Parameter number 140 et File group Interface Comm Gateway Data In Use Data In A1 to view the SCANport to drive image that is Parameter type Ee received from some device on SCANport This image may be Display i referred to as the SCANport I O image or a datalink in the Factory default not applicable manual for your communications module MMlninntimieaie 32767 Maximum value 32767 Conversion 1 1 141 Data In A2 Parameter number 141 Apa File group Interface Comm Gateway Data In Use Data In A2 to view the SCANport to drive image that is Parameter type eoe received from some device on SCANport This image may be Display W referred to as the SCANport I O image or a datalink in the Factory default not applicable manual for your communications module MEA 32767 Maximum value 32767 Conversion 1 1 142 Data In B1 Parameter number 142 4 File group Interface Comm Gateway Data In Use Data In B1 to view the SCANport to drive image that is Parameter type Soules received from some device on SCANport This image may be Display a referred to as the SCANport I O image or a datalink in the Factory default not applicable manual for your communications module Miia eG 32767 Maximum value 32767 Conversion 1 1 143 Data In B2 Parameter number 143 NETS File group Interface Com
135. device 2 owns the 15 Flux P197 SCANport device 4 owns the Flux Logic Cmd Input parameter 197 Trim owns the Flux 5 Trim SP 5 SCANport device 5 owns the Trim 11 44 Parameters 133 SP An In1 Select Parameter number 133 File group Interface Comm SCANport Analog Use SP An In1 Selectto select which SCANport analog device is Parameter type ehea used in SP An In1 Value parameter 134 Display re Factory default 1 Minimum value 1 Maximum value 6 Conversion 1 1 Value Description Value Description Value Description 1 SP 1 3 SP 3 5 SP5 Use SCANport device 1 Use SCANport device 3 Use SCANport device 5 2 SP 2 4 SP 4 6 SP 6 Use SCANport device 2 Use SCANport device 4 Use SCANport device 6 134 SP An In1 Value Parameter number 134 File grou Interface Comm SCANport Analo Use SP An In1 Value to view the analog value of the SCANport Se type b ee device selected in SP An In1 Select parameter 133 You need Display a to link SP An In1 Value to a parameter such as Speed Ref 1 Factory default not applicable parameter 29 Minimum value 32767 Maximum value 32767 Conversion 1 1 135 SP An In1 Scale Parameter number 135 File group Interface Comm SCANport Analog Use SP An In1 Scale to scale SP An In1 Value parameter 134 Parameter type MEOE lest Display X XXX Factory default 0 125 Minimum value 1 000 Maximum value 1 000 Conversion 32767 1 000 136 SP An In2 Select Parameter number 136 __ _ File group Inter
136. disabled except Stop These inputs must be present before drive will start For Common Bus this becomes Precharge Enable Bit 11 of Logic Options parameter 17 must be 0 for reverse direction control For soft faults only You need to recycle power to the drive to clear For hard faults refer to the Troubleshooting chapter To configure the stop type refer to Logic Options parameter 17 This input must be present before the fault can be cleared and the drive will start This can be disabled through Fault Select 2 parameter 22 and Warning Select 2 parameter 23 9 follow Stop 1 in Logic Options 10 See Speed Torque Select table This takes precedence over Spd Trq Mode Sel parameter 68 11 Unlatched maintained start 12 In modes 5 9 10 and 15 the MOP value is not reset to 0 when you stop In modes 27 28 29 and 30 the MOP value is reset to 0 when you stop NOTE For detailed information on Modes 31 and 32 which were added for Speed Profiling applications refer to page 9 23 in this manual Latched starts require a stop to stop the drive Note This only affects the L Option stop For modes that do not have Stop Type stop commands 5 8 Using the L Option Entering the Input Mode into the Input Mode Parameter During the start up procedure you will be prompted for the L Option mode number The drive enters the number you select at this prompt into L Option Mode parameter 116 Changing the Input Mode You can change
137. equal to Func 3 Mask Val Check to see if the unsigned value Check to make sure that all bits Signed I lt V of Function In3 is less than or that are set on in Func 3 Check to see if the signed value of equal to the value of Func 3 Mask Val parameter 205 are set Function In3 is less than the value Mask Val in Function In3 parameter 204 of Func 3 Mask Val 14 Unsign I gt V 3 All Bits Off Signed I lt V Check to see if the unsigned value Check to make sure that all bits Check to see if the signed value of of Function In3 is greater than the that are set in Func 3 Mask Val are Function In3 is less than or equal value of Func 3 Mask Val clear in Function In3 to the value of Func 3 Mask Val 15 Unsign I gt V 4 Any Bit On Signed I gt V Check to see if the unsigned value Check to make sure that at least Check to see if the signed value of of Function In3 is greater than or one of the bits that are set in Function In3 is greater than the equal to the value of Func 3 Func 3 Mask Val is set in Function value of Func 3 Mask Val Mask Val In3 Signed I gt V 16 Invert 5 Any Bit Off Check to see if the signed value of Pass the opposite value on to the Check to make sure that at least Function In3 is greater than or function block one of the bits that are set in equal to the value of Func 3 17 Absolute Func 3 Mask Val is clear in Mask Val Pass a positive value on to the Function In3 function block 207 Function In4 Parameter number 207 File group Applicat
138. first function such as 1st Decel or Rev when input is applied and the second function such as 2nd Decel or Fwd when input is not applied a AUN NOTE All Functions are enabled when input is applied and disabled when not applied In modes 5 9 10 and 15 the MOP value is not reset to 0 when you stop In modes 27 28 29 and 30 the MOP value is reset to 0 when you stop The L Option has ownership of direction No other device on SCANport can control the direction The L Option has ownership of reference if all three selects are not available The L Option controls Spa Trq Mode Sel parameter 68 5 6 Using the L Option Figure 5 1 L Option Mode Selection and Typical TB3 Connections Status 7 3 6 Not Stop Clear Fault Common Status Status Status Common Status Status Status Common 3 Enable Start 9 Not Stop 7 Clear Fault 3 6 Three Wire Common Mode Rev Fwd 5 2 3 4 5 10 6 17 18 27 10 Proc Trim FluxEn 1 Digital Stop 2nd 1st Digital Type 1 Accel 1 PotUp Jog Jog Not Ext Fault 4 8 Common Local Ramp Reset Speed i Speed Qnd tst Digital Control 2 Select 3 1 Select 3 1 Decel Pot Dn 2 a z Speed Select 2 1 Speed Select 1 1 Common Enable 3 See Speed Select table Drive must be stopped to take Local Control Control by all other adapters is disabled except Stop These
139. following table provides more specific information If Test Data 2is 1 bit 0 The encoder speed calculation Then a divide overflow occurred during 2 bit 1 The low speed calculation part 1 4 bit 2 The low speed calculation part 2 12 26 Troubleshooting 9 To fix a problem in this area check for possible encoder faults Also check for possible encoder problems or excessive noise on the encoder signals Enter a value of 10507 into Test Select 2 Look at the value of Test Data 2 If Test Data 2 is zero go to step 7 If Test Data 2 is non zero there is a problem in the speed regulator area These conditions are unlikely to occur and indicate an unusual combination of gains references and feedback values The drive attempts to regulate speed however operation in a current limited condition is likely The following table provides more specific information If Test Then Occurred Data 2is during 1 bit 0 A subtract overflow The integral error calculation 2 bit 1 A multiply overflow The integral gain calculation 4 bit 2 An overflow The bumpless calculation 8 bit 3 A subtract overflow The droop offset 256 bit 8 A subtract overflow The speed error calculation 512 bit 9 A subtract overflow The Kf error calculation To fix a problem in this area reduce the maximum level of speed reference Check if Total Inertia parameter 157 and Spd Desi
140. for both sensorless and encoder modes 4 The available starting torque is at least 150 motor torque and could be as higher than 300 if the inverter can supply the current Refer to Max Mtr Current parameter 195 Improving Speed Regulation in Encoderless Mode file Motor Inverter group Motor Constants After completing the auto tune tests you can adjust Slip Gain parameter 169 to improve the speed regulation as a function of load in encoderless mode Slip Gain defaults to 100 and typically results in 0 5 speed regulation Ideally you should adjust Slip Gain while the motor is fully loaded and at its normal operating temperature Adjust Slip Gain until the actual speed as measured by an independent source such as a hand tachometer is equal to the desired speed This should result in a minimum steady state speed deviation as load changes The proper slip for good speed regulation also depends on the motor temperature thus if the motor operating temperature normally varies between cold and hot select a compromise slip gain Using the Motor Simulation Mode You can use the motor simulation mode to simulate a system that does not have a motor present This can be useful for testing purposes Choosing an Optional Braking Decelerating Method Applications 9 3 To select the motor simulation mode enter a value of 3 in Fdbk Device Type parameter 64 When you run simulation mode the torque and flux curre
141. have an encoder and operation below 1Hz is not required Whenever possible you should use the start up procedure to change the feedback device type because the start up procedure automatically re adjusts the speed loop gains when you change between encoder and encoderless operation 1Hz Deadband 11 25 65 Fdbk Filter Sel Parameter number 65 y File group Control Speed Feedback Use Fdbk Filter Sel to select the type of feedback filter You can Parameter type inanlotdectnetion choose among me following filters Display x Value Description Factory default 0 0 No Filter Minimum value 0 Use this option if you do not want to filter the feedback Maximum value 4 1 35 49 ma A A EAE Conversion 1 1 2 E a t9943 racian eevee Refer to Appendix B Control Block Diagrams for information Use a heavy 20 40 radian feedback filter about Fabk Filter Sel 3 Lead Lag Use a single pole lead lag feedback filter You need to set up Fdbk Filter Gain par 66 and Fdbk Filter BW par 67 4 Notch Use a notch filter You need to set up Notch Filtr Freq par 185 and Notch Filtr Q par 186 66 Fdbk Filter Gain Parameter number 66 i i File group Control Speed Feedback ie a to specify the Kn term of the single pole Parameter type eble desireiion ead lag feedback filter Display IO Factory default 1 00 If KN is Then Minimum value 5 00 Greater than 1 0 A lead filter is produced ILD value coe Conversion 256 1 00
142. i The Select key currently active Increment increase the selected value If no value is selected use this key to scroll through the groups or parameters currently selected The Increment key Decrement decrease the selected value If no value is selected use this key to scroll through the groups or parameters currently selected The Decrement key Select the group or parameter that is currently active or enter the selected parameter value into memory The top line of the display automatically becomes active to let you choose another parameter or group The Enter key th lt i Starting Up Your System 6 5 The HIM provides the following keys for the control panel section Press this This key is To key referred to as Start operation if the hardware is enabled and no other control devices are sending a Stop command The Slat key Initiate a stop sequence The Stop key JOG Jog the motor at the specified speed Releasing the key stops the jog The Jog key Change the motor direction The appropriate The Change Direction Indicator light will light to indicate direction Direction key Increase or decrease the HIM speed command An indication of this command is shown on the visual Speed Indicator Pressing both keys simultaneously stores the current The Up Arrow HIM speed command in HIM memory Cycling power and Down Arrow or removing the HIM from the drive sets the speed keys
143. inputs must be present before drive will start For Common Bus this becomes Precharge Enable Bit 11 of Logic Options parameter 17 must be 0 for reverse direction control For soft faults only You need to recycle power to the drive or reset to clear hard faults For hard faults refer to the Troubleshooting chapter To configure the stop type refer to Logic Options parameter 17 Note This only affects the L Option stop For modes that do not have Stop Type stop commands follow Stop 1 in Logic Options 8 This input must be present before the fault can be cleared and the drive will start This can be disabled through Fault Select 2 parameter 22 and Warning Select 2 parameter 23 9 Latched momentary starts require a stop to stop the drive 10 In mode 5 the MOP value is not reset to 0 when you stop In mode 27 the MOP value is reset when you stop NO 8R WD 19 a 20 21 22 l CONE 23 24 25 26 QS 27 o 28 o ae 29 ae 30 H AN Oo FR WD Using the L Option 5 7 Figure 5 2 L Option Mode Selection and Typical TB3 Connections Start THREE WIRE 7 3 6 Not Stop Clear Fault 12 12 Mode 12 12 7 8 9 10 11 19 20 21 22 28 29 Common 5 5 ca 5 5 i Reverse Reverse Digital Reverse st Speed i Speed Reverse Speed 10 Digital Reverse aO 5 PotUp 5 Accel
144. is less Faults section for more information ia Warning o i ag Open Circuit green than 50 of commanded If you do not want this condition to be reported as a warning change bit 5 in Warning Select 1 parameter 21 to 0 13000 i CP Solid red Hard A hardware malfunction Recycle the power If the fault does not clear replace the HW Malfunction occurred board 13001 CP Solid red Hard A hardware malfunction Recycle the power If the fault does not clear replace the HW Malfunction occurred board 13002 CP Solid red Hard A hardware malfunction Recycle the power If the fault does not clear replace the HW Malfunction occurred board 13003 CP Solid red Hard A hardware malfunction Recycle the power If the fault does not clear replace the HW Malfunction occurred board 13004 CP Solid red Hard A hardware malfunction Recycle the power If the fault does not clear replace the HW Malfunction occurred board 12 16 Troubleshooting Understanding Precharge and Ridethrough Faults file Application group Bus Control file Fault Setup group Fault Limits To understand the precharge and ridethrough faults you need a basic understanding of how these functions work as well as the options that you can use to alter the way precharge and ridethrough operate in the 1336 IMPACT drive Understanding Precharge The precharge of the drive has different circuits depending on drive size For the precharge
145. is set in Function value of Func 1 Mask Val Mask Val In1 Signed I gt V 16 Invert 5 Any Bit Off Check to see if the signed value of Pass the opposite value on to the Check to make sure that at least Function In1 is greater than or function block one of the bits that are set in equal to the value of Func 1 17 Absolute Func 1 Mask Val is clear in Mask Val Pass a positive value on to the Function In1 function block 201 Function In2 Parameter number 201 File group Application Prog Function Use Function In2 to provide input into the function block that is Parameter type linkable destination provided with the 1336 IMPACT drive You can choose to either Conversion 1 1 evaluate Function In2 or pass the value directly to the function If Func 2 Eval Sel parameter 203 is 0 or 6 11 then block Display x To evaluate Function In2 you need to also use Func 2 Mask Val Factory default 0 parameter 202 and Func 2 Eval Sel parameter 203 Minimum value 32767 To pass the value directly to the function block enter a value of 0 Maximum value 32767 into Func 2 Eval Sel If Func 2 Eval Sel parameter 203 is 1 5 then E Display bits 1 Function In2 was added in Version 2 xx Factory default 00000000 00000000 Minimum value 00000000 00000000 Maximum value 11111111 11111111 If Func 2 Eval Sel parameter 203 is 12 15 then Display x Factory default 0 Minimum value 0 Maximum value 65535 Refer to Chapter 10 Using the Function Block for mor
146. may be desirable when external power supplies are used file Fault Setup group Fault Limits Troubleshooting 12 19 This bit Has this definition Disables the precharge function after initial power up Any bus drop or undervoltage will not result in precharge This may destroy the drive if 14 power returns to the system This should be used where you control the input impedance or with a front end converter with automatic current limiting Disables the ridethrough and precharge functions If the power lines drop out the drive attempts to continue operation as long as any power is 15 available This may destroy the drive if power returns to the system This should be used only where you control the system s incoming power and provide external logic power Using Line Undervolts You can use Line Undervolts parameter 27 to set the level of bus voltage that must be present to complete precharge and a level where ridethrough can be initiated If configured as a fault warning Line Undervolts sets the bus voltage level that faults warns the drive The bus voltage level that is used is determined as follows Line Undervolts Inverter Volts parameter 12 sqrt 2 bus voltage level for ridethroughs faults or warnings Using Test Select 1 and Test Data 1 to View Software Testpoints Additional information concerning precharges and ridethroughs is available through Test Select 1 parameter 93 a
147. milli amp Parameter type Meie Gessiinention output The offset is applied after the scale factor Display enn Factory default 0 000 mA Minimum value 32 000 mA Maximum value 32 000 mA Conversion 128 1 000 113 mA Out Scale Parameter number 113 oe File group Interface Comm Analog Outputs Use mA Out Scale to set the scale factor or gain for milli amp Parameter type inaulotdeatination output A 32767 digital value is converted by the scale factor Display AGO oy allows eae eae range of 2048 which is then Factory default 0 500 offset to provide a 20 mA range hina verre 1 000 Maximum value 1 000 Conversion 32767 1 000 114 Relay Config 1 Parameter number 114 File grou Interface Comm Digital Confi Use Relay Config 1 to select the function of terminal 1 on either Aa eae type spa as TB10 for frames A1 A4 or TB11 for frames B H output Display Factory default 13 Relay Config 1 may be any one of the following values Minimum value 0 Maximum value 36 Conversion Value Description Value Description 0 Disabled 16 Not Zero Spd 29 The relay is disabled The motor is not at zero speed 1 Run Ready 17 Flux Ready 30 The drive is ready to run The motor is ready to be fluxed up 2 Not Run Rdy 18 Not Flux Rdy 31 The drive is not ready to run The motor is not ready to be fluxed up 3 Running 19 Flux Up 32 Commanded speed is not zero The drive feels the motor is fluxed up 4 Not Running 20 Not Flux Up 33 Commanded speed is zero
148. need to make sure that bit 3 in Fault Select 1 is set To do this you need to do the following 1 Navigate through the HIM menu tree structure to the desired parameter In this example you want to go to Fault Select 1 parameter 20 which is located in the Fault Setup file and the Fault Config group 2 Press SEL to view the bit definition for the first bit bit 0 Bit O is located in the lower right The bits are numbered from 15 to 8 on the top row and 7 to 0 are on the bottom row An x in any position indicates that the bit is not defined 3 Press SEL again to view the bit definition of bit 1 pus Ungerolt onini oon 4 Continue pressing SEL until you reach bit 3 C 6 Using the Human Interface Module HIM 5 To change the value of bit 3 from a 0 to a 1 press either INC or DEC Bus Undervit ooi oriri oon 6 Press ENTER to save your changes and exit the bit definitions If the cursor is a blinking underline instead of a flashing character you are either in Display mode or are trying to change a read only parameter Using the Process Mode Process mode lets you monitor the values of two processes at one time To use Process mode you need to 1 Press any key from the status display Choose Mode is shown 2 Press INC or DEC to show Process 3 Press ENTER The following is displayed Process Wari 1 Process Ware 2 4 Decide which two of the following processes you want to monitor 1 S
149. number 122 me File group Interface Comm Digital Config Enter the minimum speed the pulse input will go to Parameter type des naton Display X X rpm Factory default 0 0 Minimum value base motor speed Maximum value base motor speed Conversion 4096 base motor speed Refer to Chapter 7 Setting Up the Input Output for more information 123 Pulse In Value Parameter number 123 File group Interface Comm Digital Config Use Pulse In Value to view the pulse input value You need to link Parameter type mores Pulse In Value to a reference parameter Display x x rpm Factory default not applicable Minimum value 0 0 Maximum value 8 x base motor speed Conversion 4096 base motor speed Refer to Chapter 7 Setting Up the Input Output for more information 124 SP Enable Mask Parameter number 124 File group Interface Comm SCANport Config Use SP Enable Mask to select which SCANport devices can control the drive You can choose between 0 Disable control 1 Enable control Stop is always active even if you disable a device The bits are defined as follows Parameter type linkable destination Display bits Factory default 11111111 Minimum value 00000000 Maximum value 11111111 Conversion IS Refer to Chapter 8 Using the SCANport Capabilities for more information Bit Description Bit Description Bit Description 0 Enable L Opt 3 Enable SP 3 Enable SP 6 Enable the L Option board Enable SCANport device 3 Enable SCANport
150. pre defined links Each terminal has parameters associated with it as shown in Figures 7 1 and 7 2 7 2 Setting Up the Input Output Figure 7 1 Parameters with Associated Terminals for Frames A1 A4 TBA J4 10V Com 10V Shield Analog Output 1 Shield Analog aAarNonrhwnrM Output 2 2 Lo Shield Offset Scale Offset Scale Output 1 Relay 1 Supply Relay 2 Relay 3 Relay 4 Voltage Clearance Voltage Clearance WE SP An In1 Sel Par 133 Offset Scale Motor Speed Motor Power C108 gt _ lt gt Offset Scale Filter BW Speed Ref 2 i Ta gt gt Gi Offset Scale Filter BW 100 F101 gt lt a gt Offset Scale Filter BW 108 nm gt Pulse In PPR Pulse In Scale lt 1223 gt Pulse In Offset 114 Relay Config 1 115 Relay Setpoint 1 187 Relay Config 2 188 Relay Setpoint 2 189 Relay Config 3 190 Relay Setpoint 3 191 Relay Config 4 192 Relay Setpoint 4 Speed Ref 1 SP An In1 Value i SP An In1 Scale Par 135 SP An In2 Sel Par 136 SP An In2 Value i SP An In2 Scale Par 138 SP An Output Motor Speed Figure 7 2 Setting Up the Input Output Parameters with Associated Terminals for Frames B H TB10 J10 10V Com 10V Analog Input 1 Shield Analog 4b Input 2 Shield 4 20mA Input 1 Shield Pulse A Source ied OaAnNoarhwohr Analog j Output 1 z Shield Analog Output
151. provide fine and coarse adjustment to the speed reference as shown in Figure 10 13 Figure 10 13 Examples of Fine and Coarse Adjustments in Speed Example 1 Example 2 Speed f Time Time Speed Speed Time Time Time Time Speed For this example to work link the analog input 1 parameters to Function In parameter 198 and the analog input 2 parameters to Function In2 parameter 201 as shown in Figure 10 14 10 12 Using the Function Block Figure 10 14 Example of an Add Subtract Function Block Coarse Adjustment Func 1 Eval Sel 10V Pot Function Sel An In 1 Offset An In 1 Scale An In 1 Value Function In1 Function Output 1 Enter 0 This value is not used C199 gt gt Func 1 Mask Val Int In2 10V 2048 4096 ors 409 Func 2 Eval Sel 10V Pot An In 2 Offset An In 2 Scale An In 2 Value Function In2 Q ea at a 0 0 200 Fine Enter 0 This value is not used Add Subtract Adjustment Func 2 Mask Val Function Block Enter 0 for parameters 204 through 211 as these parameters are not used for this function block An In I Value parameter 96 receives input from a 10V pot An In 1 Offset parameter 98 is set to 0 because no offset is needed The 10V input is converted to 2048 internal drive units An In 1 Scale parameter 97 is set to 2 to scale the value to 4096 which is tbase motor speed This input is passed to Function I
152. regenerative energy Normally automatic limiting by the bus voltage regulator is preferred because manual limiting may have to be repeated if the regenerative energy changes due to load speed or system losses To stop overvoltages automatically you must enable the bus voltage regulator with the dynamic brake Follow these directions 1 Set bit 5 Bus High Lim in Bus Brake Opts parameter 13 2 Set bit 10 Brake Regn in Bus Brake Opts parameter 13 This sets the bus voltage regulator operation to a higher voltage 3 If overvoltages still occur then manually reduce the Regen Power Lim parameter 76 See below To stop overvoltages manually you must limit the regenerated energy by either extending the deceleration time or reducing the regenerated power limit e To extend the deceleration time set Decel Time I parameter 44 and Decel Time 2 parameter 45 to the desired values e To reduce the regenerated power limit set Regen Power Lim parameter 76 to the desired value Using the Bus Regulator for Braking If you are not using a dynamic brake the bus regulator is the default braking method as selected during the Quick Start routine To enable bus regulator braking 1 Clear bit 10 Brake Regen in Bus Brake Opts parameter 13 2 Clear bit 6 Flux Braking in Bus Brake Opts 3 Clear bit 5 Bus High Lim in Bus Brake Opts As the motor is decelerated or as regeneration occurs for example an overhauling loa
153. required to produce rated horsepower This effect will occur in all drives but is usually only significant in F G and especially H frame drives since the voltage drop is proportional to source inductance and load current Output power 2 116 KVA 230V 2 190 KVA 380V 2 208 KVA 415V 2 537 KVA 460V 2 671 KVA 575V Note For information on factors that could effect the power output of the drive please refer to the enclosure and derating guidelines Output current 2 5 983A Output horsepower continuous 7 5 800 hp Overload capability Continuous 100 fundamental current 1 minute 150 Output frequency range 0 250 Hz Output waveform Sinusoidal PWM Maximum short circuit current rating 200 000A rms symmetrical 600 volts when used with specified AC input line fuses as detailed in Chapters 3 and 4 Per Max Short Circuit Amps specific to each drive rating when using specified HMCP Breakers 200 000A when using specified HMCP Breakers with Current Limit Option Ride through 2 seconds Efficiency 97 typical Specifications This category Performance Speed regulation with an encoder Has these specifications To 0 001 of rated motor speed over a 100 1 speed range To 0 02 of rated motor speed over a 1000 1 speed range Speed regulation without an encoder 0 5 of rated motor speed over a 120 1 speed ran
154. saved e A phase to phase fault is set Running the Phase Rotation Test file Autotune group Autotune Setup Understanding the Auto tuning Procedure 13 5 e All subsequent testing is stopped e Some untested devices may be set as open Typically you should fix the hardware faults and run open tests again to determine if any opens exist What Do Open Transistor Faults Indicate Open transistor faults could indicate an open anywhere in the control or power section that turns on a given transistor You should check the power transistor gate drive signal from the control board through the cabling to the opto isolators continuing through the gate drives and finally through the cabling to the power transistor This includes the power wiring to the motor terminals and the motor If the bus voltage is too low opens could occur bus voltage should be greater than 85 of nominal line What Happens If Multiple Opens Occur If multiple opens occur several additional faults may be indicated For example if transistor U upper and U lower are open the test also indicates that current feedback U phase is open Because current cannot run through phase U the current feedback device cannot be checked and therefore is listed as a malfunction The type of installation often determines which parts of the transistor diagnostics may or may not work As a result treat the software only as an aid for testing the power structure Wh
155. sec Minimum value 0 0 0 0 0 Encoder Step 10 1 0 units TB Input Step dependent on L Option Mode Sel See P241 Maximum value Conversion 3276 7 5 3276 7 10 1 0 sec x TBin 10 1 unit 272 Parameter number 272 Step 8 Type File group Profile Test Data Parameter 272 selects the type of step to be used Parameter type Setup 0 Not Used This forces an End Action Display x 1 Time Step operate at speed shown in P270 for time in P271 Factory default 0 2 TBS Input Step operate at speed shown in P270 until this Minimum value 0 input goes true Maximum value 3 3 Encoder Step operate at speed shown in P270 for units in Conversion P271 Parameter number 273 sr Step 9 Speed File group Profile Test Data Parameter 273 sets the rpm value for this step Scaling 4096 Parameter type Setup Base Speed Display X X rpm Factory default 0 0 rpm Minimum value Maximum value 8 x base speed 8 x base speed Conversion 4096 Base Motor Speed 274 Parameter number 274 Step 9 Value File group Profile Test Data Parameter 274 sets the time in seconds for time steps the Parameter type Setup counts in units for encoder steps and the TB3 input to triggeron Display x xS X X X units for TB Input steps Scaling Factory default 0 0 0 0 0 Time Step 10 x desired value 10 1 0 sec Minimum value 0 0 0 0 0 Encoder Step 10 1 0 units Maximum value 3276 7 5 3276 7 TB Input Step dependent on L Option Mode
156. should be physically close to the drive with short connections Important To assure that the RFI filter is effective you must shield or armor the motor cable and follow the guidelines given in this manual RFI Filter Leakage Current The optional RFI filter may cause ground leakage currents Therefore you must provide an appropriate ground connection refer to the grounding instruction on page 2 14 ATTENTION To guard against possible equipment damage you can only use RFI filters with AC supplies that are nominally balanced with respect to ground In some countries three phase supplies are occasionally connected in a 3 wire configuration with one phase grounded Grounded Delta The filter must not be used in Ground Delta supplies 2 30 Mounting and Wiring Your 1336 IMPACT Drive Notes Chapter Objectives Wiring the Power Chapter 3 Mounting and Wiring Information Specific to Frames A1 A2 A3 and A4 Chapter 3 provides the mounting and wiring information specific to frames Al A2 A3 and A4 This Topic Starts on Page Wiring the power 3 1 Hard wiring your I O 3 3 Input fusing requirements 3 4 Dimensions 3 5 Important If your 1336 IMPACT drive is not an Al A4 frame size skip this chapter and read the mounting and wiring instructions specific to your frame size If you do not know what your frame size is refer to Chapter 1 Overview The input and output connections for frames Al A4 a
157. signal at each step Parameter type Setup programmed with an encoder step Display x Encoder Pulses Factory default 20 Minimum value 0 Maximum value 32767 Conversion 24 A Parameter number 245 3 Counts per Unit File group Profile Commands Parameter 245 is set to 4 times the encoder PPR for one unitto Parameter type Setup equal one 1 0 revolution Display x Encoder Pulses Counts per unit parameter determines the size of a single Factory default 4096 encoder step value unit in encoder counts Minimum value 1 Maximum value 32767 Refer to Chap 9 pages 25 amp 26 for additional explanation Conversion Encoder pulse 4 11 76 Parameters 24 Parameter number 246 j Units Traveled File group Profile Command Parameter 246 is a read only parameter that shows the value Parameter type Setup traveled from the home position in encoder units Display x x units This parameter may roll over if the profile travels more than 3276 Factory default 4096 units in one direction Minimum value 3276 7 Maximum value 3276 7 Conversion 10 1 0 unit 247 Parameter number 247 Profile CMD LSW File group Profile Command Parameter 247 is the lower word of the 32 bit speed reference Parameter type Setup This must be linked to P28 Speed Ref 1 Frac Display X X rpm Factory default 0 0 rpm Minimum value 8 x base speed Maximum value 8 x base speed Conversion 4096 base motor speed 24 Parameter number 248 j Profile CMD MSW Fil
158. so that you can tell when a fault occurred in relation to when the drive was powered up To view the time stamp you need to use Test Data 2 parameter 94 and Test Select 2 parameter 95 You need to enter one value into Test Select 2 to view the time in hours since power up and another value to view the minutes and seconds These values are listed in the Test Select 2 description in Chapter 11 Parameters As an example if you want to know when the fault in position 12 occurred in relation to when the drive was powered up you would need to do the following 1 Enter a value of 11112 in Test Select 2 parameter 95 2 Look at the value of Test Data 2 parameter 94 This value represents the number of hours after power up that the fault in position 12 occurred 3 Enter a value of 11212 in Test Select 2 4 Look at the value of Test Data 2 to see the number of minutes and seconds after power up that the fault in position 12 occurred To clear the fault queue select Clear Queue from the Fault Queue options To view the warning queue select Warning Queue from the Control Status options The remaining steps are the same as for the fault queue When a fault occurs the fault is displayed until you initiate a Drive Reset or a Clear Faults command A Drive Reset clears all faults while a Clear Faults command only clears soft and warning faults You can perform a Drive Reset and Clear Faults either through bits in Logic Input Sts p
159. speed 7 The motor is running The auto tune test timed out because the inertia test failed to 12 accelerate the load The load must accelerate at a rate of 5 speed change per minute or faster 13 The inertia test failed to reach the torque limit B 38 Control Block Diagrams Through Put Time You can use the following block diagram and table to determine the maximum amount of time that it will take a command to execute Pulse Train Inputs 4 ms Torque Reference Velocity Reference Process Trim 12 5 ms Torque Control Control 2 ms SCANport Reference 4 ms SCANport Logic Evaluation 50 ms SCANport Command 4 ms Relay Output L Option Commands 12 5 ms Card Relay Fault Inputs Faults Handler 8 ms 100 ms Parameter Link gt Scanner 4 ms Blocks 12 5 ms Programmable Function 12 5 ms through put time is in addition to the other scan times of the I Os Adaptive FO C Control Output Current Commutation 1 ms Execution Order Table Interval 1ms 2ms 4ms 8ms 12 5ms 50 ms 100 ms Functions Field Oriented Control Encoder Inputs Velocity Regulator Torque Reference SCANport Reference Commands Pulse Train Inputs Analog Inputs Analog Outputs Parameter Link Scanner Velocity Reference L Option Card Relay Inputs Programmable Function Blocks Relay Outputs Process Trim SCANport Logic Evaluation Dri
160. speed bandwidth Spd Desired BW parameter 161 These adjustments are made based on the measured value of Total Inertia High inertias imply low bandwidths and low inertias imply high bandwidths The drive sets six parameters when it completes the inertia test How these parameters are set depends on how Fdbk Device Type parameter 64 is set Understanding the Auto tuning Procedure 13 11 If Fdbk Device Type is set for encoderless the parameters are set as follows This parameter Is set to this value 25 0 1 35 49 radians second 0 7 500 0 radians second Min Flux Level parameter 71 Fdbk Filter Sel parameter 65 Kf Speed Loop parameter 160 Error Filtr BW parameter 162 Total Inertia and Spd Desired BW are set as follows When Total Inertia Then Spd Desired BW parameter 157 is parameter 161 is set to inertia lt 0 3 seconds 15 radians second 0 3 seconds lt inertia lt 2 seconds 10 radians second 2 seconds lt inertia lt 5 seconds 5 radians second 5 seconds lt inertia lt 20 seconds 1 radians second inertia gt 20 seconds 0 5 radians second If Fdbk Device Type is set for an encoder the parameters are set as follows This parameter Is set to this value Min Flux Level parameter 71 25 0 Fdbk Filter Sel parameter 65 0 none Kf Speed Loop parameter 160 1 0 Total Inertia Spd Desired BW and Error Filtr BW are set as follows W
161. speed feedback signals Set output option When you set bit 3 the output follows PTrim Preload parameter 53 with the process trim enable bit off Rise of process trim enable will preset the integral term of the process trim regulator to start the 2 PTrim Output parameter 48 at the data input value Preset integrator option When you set bit 4 PTrim Output is zero with the process trim enable bit off Rise of enable will preset the integrator as in 4 option bit 3 Force ON trim limit option When you set bit 5 the speed trim limit function is always active When clear bit 5 0 the speed trim limiter is 5 automatically disabled Enable process trim Enable Encoder Switchover Mode If bits 3 and 4 are both clear 0 PTrim Output parameter 48 becomes zero with the enable bit off and the integral term is initialized at zero If bits 3 and 4 are both set 1 option 3 set output option takes priority Control Block Diagrams The limit function lets you select the minimum and maximum values To enter the Enter a value in this parameter Minimum level PTrim Lo Limit parameter 58 Maximum level PTrim Hi Limit parameter 59 Once the value leaves the limit function PTrim Select parameter 51 determines whether the value is used as a speed trim or a torque trim If this bit is set Then 0 The speed reference is used 1 The torque reference is used B
162. the Run Fwd Rev inputs are closed the drive continues to run To stop the drive when any Run Fwd Rev input is opened requires the stop input to be wire ORed with the Run Fwd or Run Rev e Stop input stops the drive e The drive will not start if the stop input is open the enable input is open or the drive is faulted Use Drive Inv Status parameter 15 bit 0 Run Ready to know when the drive is ready to start When using a combination of 2 and 3 wire e Each wiring type operates as above e 2 wire has priority over 3 wire so opening or closing and opening 2 wire Run Fwd Rev input will stop the drive even if started by a 3 wire start e Stop input stops the drive Determining Function Ownership To determine which device is issuing a specific command use parameters 128 through 132 file Interface Comm To determine which device is Check the high bits 8 15 Of this group SCANport Status issuing this command low bits 0 7 byte parameter Stop Low 129 Direction control High 128 Start High 129 Jog1 High 130 Jog2 Low 130 Speed reference Low 128 Flux enable High 132 Trim enable Low 132 Ramp High 131 Clear fault Low 131 Using the SCANport Capabilities For each of these parameters each bit represents a device If this bit is set Or if this bit is set Than theownerig for low for high i 0 8 L Option 1 9 SCANport device 1 2
163. the most conservative value The drive then passes the values to the torque limit function Understanding the Torque Limit The torque limit function uses the values it receives from the power limit function If Min Flux Level The values parameter 71 is are Not 100 Passed directly to the torque limit selector Multiplied by 1 flux and Motor Flux parameter 88 is Set to100 applied before the values are passed to the torque limit selector If a value is limiting the torque or current in either the positive or negative direction a bit is set in Torque Limit Sts parameter 87 B 22 Control Block Diagrams This bit is set for limits in this If this Is being limited by direction Positive Negative The Iq limit parameters Pos Mtr Cur Lim parameter 72 or Neg Mtr Cur Lim 0 8 parameter 73 Current The NTC limit 1 9 The Inverter IT limit 2 10 Flux braking 3 11 The torque limit parameters Pos Torque Lim parameter 74 or Neg Torque Lim parameter 75 12 Torque The power limit parameters from the bus 5 13 regulator The autotune limit parameters 6 14 Understanding the Torque Selection Spd Trq Mode Sel parameter 68 lets you select between speed mode file Control and torque mode group Speed Trq Mode file Control if you choose Then your reference comes from this mode group Torque Reference Speed The speed PI
164. to The same that is both positive Do not need an offset Step 3 Different Need an offset Step 2 In the example shown in Figure 7 6 the ranges were the same so we used Step 3 2 Calculate the offset 3 Convert the mA range to a digital range if you have not already done so Keep in mind that 20 mA equals 2048 and 4 mA equals 0 4 Compare the output of the conversion to internal units to the output range you want If the values are Then you Go to Identical Do not need to scale the value Step 6 Different Need to scale the value Step 5 In the example shown in Figure 7 6 the ranges were different so we used Step 5 5 Calculate the scale In this example the internal units were 2048 and you needed 4096 therefore you would use a scale value of 2 6 Enter the offset and scale values into the appropriate parameters 7 10 Setting Up the Input Output Using the SCANport Capabilities Configuring the Output Relay file nterface Comm group Digital Config To communicate with external devices such as terminals the 1336 IMPACT drive uses the SCANport communications protocol You can access the SCANport capabilities without doing any special configuration However if you plan to use SCANport you can change the default configuration to customize the way SCANport works for you Chapter 8 Using the SCANport Capabilities contains information about SCANport and how you can ch
165. you should keep the Input Output following in mind e 4 20 mA I O is not bi directional e 4 20 mA faults occur when the 4 20 mA input is connected to a current source and then removed This trip point is 250 drive units or 0 45 mA e The maximum number of drives on the mA output is 3 e The 4 20 mA output can drive a maximum load of 750Q When setting up your 4 20 mA input output you need to know that 4 mA is equal to 0 internal units and 20 mA is equal to 2048 internal units The scaling and offset parameters for 4 20 mA input output work similarly to the analog scaling and offset parameters Figure 7 6 shows an example of the scaling and offset used for the 4 20 mA input Setting Up the Input Output 7 9 Figure 7 6 Example of Scaling and Offset for 4 20 mA Inputs Range of the Range of the input after the offset input in internal 4 20mA is applied drive units Drive Output 4 20 mA Pot Input 20 20 Analog to 2048 4096 Digital gt 0 Converter Offset 20 2048 4 4 0 0 By subtracting OmA from By multiplying 2048 by2 both 20 and 4 you main you get the 4096 range tain the current range you were looking for with 4 as the zero point In this example the 4 20 mA input is offset and scaled to provide 2048 range from the 4 20 mA input To do this you would need to 1 Compare the range of the output that you want to 4 20 If the ranges are Then you Go
166. 0 B 17 scaling B 18 speed overshoot 13 13 gateway See communications gateway grounding your drive 2 14 to 2 17 H heat dissipation requirements 2 9 HIM See Human Interface Module HIM Human Interface Module HIM basics 6 4 compatibility information C 12 control status mode C 9 creating links 6 12 C 11 description C 1 display mode C 5 changing bit definitions C 5 to C 6 downloading parameter profile C 8 EEProm mode C 7 menu tree C 4 password mode C 10 to C 12 process mode C 6 program mode C 5 removing C 13 resetting default parameter values C 7 search mode C 8 uploading parameter profile C 7 viewing fault warning queues 12 6 C 9 hysteresis function 10 23 to 10 25 1 0 analog 9 8 to 9 11 associated parameters 7 1 offset for input 7 4 to 7 6 offset for output 7 6 to 7 8 scale for input 7 4 to 7 6 scale for output 7 6 to 7 8 setting SCANport parameters 8 14 setting up 7 1 to 7 8 configuring 4 20 mA 7 8 analog 7 4 to 7 8 L Option 7 12 output relay 7 10 pulse input 7 11 to 7 12 hard wiring 2 21 analog inputs 2 21 analog outputs 2 23 discrete outputs 2 23 reference signal connections frames A1 A4 3 3 frames B H 4 8 IPT See motor overload Id Offset 11 73 inertia measuring B 36 input fusing 2 27 input output ratings A 4 Int Torque Ref 11 73 internal drive units 7 1 inverter current rating 11 11 over temperature 11 16 11 17 12 5 o
167. 0 0 1 DC Brake Current was added in Version 2 xx Mesimumm value AREA Conversion 4096 100 0 current Refer to Chapter 9 Applications for more information 80 Parameter number 80 DC Brake Time File group Application DC Braking Hold Enter the period of time that the DC braking current should be Parameter type destination applied after a stop has been commanded To enable DC Display x x seconds braking you need to set bit 9 in Bus Brake Opts parameter 13 Factory default 10 0 seconds Minimum value 0 0 seconds 1 DC Brake Time was added in Version 2 xx Maximum value 6553 5 seconds Conversion 10 1 0 seconds Refer to Chapter 9 Applications for more information 81 Motor Speed Parameter number 81 File group Monitor Motor Status Motor Speed contains a filtered version of speed feedback The Parameter type Sace value displayed in Motor Speed is passed through a low pass Display x x rpm filter having a 125 millisecond time constant Factory default not applicable Minimum value 8 x base motor speed Maximum value 8 x base motor speed Conversion 4096 base motor speed 82 Command Spd Sts Parameter number 82 File group Monitor Drive Inv Status Command Spd Sts is the high word portion of a 32 bit speed Parameter type motes reference quantity It is the input term for the Speed PI Regulator Display x x rpm Factory default Minimum value Maximum value Conversion not applicable 8 x base motor speed 8 x base motor speed 4
168. 00 ft or less If installed at a higher altitude derate the drive Refer to Figure D 40 Not available at time of publication IMPORTANT Two 725 CFM fans are required if an open type drive is mounted in a user supplied enclosure This is the inverter loss only common bus configuration 1 kHz PWM 2 14 Mounting and Wiring Your 1336 IMPACT Drive Grounding Your Drive You need to properly ground your 1336 IMPACT drive Figure 2 3 shows the grounding recommendations for the 1336 IMPACT drive Figure 2 3 Recommended 1336 IMPACT Drive Grounding O Conduit 4 Wire Cable Ground Rod Grid or Building Structure Steel Common ALLEN BRADLEY Mode 1 Shield 1 je U T1 Core Oa a soove _V T2 r HES PE Gnd TEX M Dae ss Shield i Motor Frame PE ee ae ee J C Ground per RIO DH Motor Local Codes or Analog Terminator Common Mode Core To Computer Position Controller 1 Options that can be installed as needed To ground your 1336 IMPACT drive you need to 1 aA ae 8 Connect the drive to the system ground at the power ground PE terminal provided on the power terminal block TB1 Define the paths through which the high frequency ground currents flow Connect the ground conductor of the motor cable drive end directly to the drive ground termi
169. 000 1336E AQF15 1 2 1 5 140 MN 1000 16 000 HMCPS015E0C E 65 000 1336E AQF20 2 2 3 140 MN 1000 16 000 HMCPS030H1C F 65 000 1336E AQF30 3 7 5 140 MN 1000 16 000 HMCPS030H1C F 65 000 2 6 Mounting and Wiring Your 1336 IMPACT Drive IEC Installations per IEC947 2 UL CSA Installations Bulletin 140 Circuit Breaker HMCP Circuit Breaker Maximum Rated Service Short _ Max Short Drive Rated Vt Circuit Capability MEF Trip Circuit Amps Catalog Number kW HP Catalog Number 400 415V Catalog Number Setting 180V 1336E AQF50 3 7 5 140 MN 2500 6 000 HMCPS03H1C H 65 000 1336E A007 5 5 7 5 140 CMN 4000 65 000 HMCPS030H1C H 65 000 1336E A010 7 5 10 140 CMN 4000 65 000 HMCPS050K2C F 65 000 1336E A015 11 15 140 CMN 6300 50 000 HMCPS050K2C H 65 000 1336E A020 15 20 140 CMN 6300 50 000 HMCPS100R38C G 65 000 1336E A025 18 5 25 140 CMN 9000 25 000 HMCPS100R3C_ H 65 000 1336E A030 22 30 140 CMN 9000 25 000 HMCPS100R3C H 65 000 1336E A040 30 40 KTA3 160S 125 65 000 HMCP150T4C F 65 000 1336E A050 37 50 KTA3 160S 160 65 000 HMCP150T4C G 65 000 1336E A060 45 60 KTA3 250S 200 65 000 HMCP250A5 E 65 000 1336E A075 56 75 KTA3 250S 250 65 000 HMCP250A5 E 65 000 1336E A100 75 100 KTA3 400S 320 65 000 HMCP400J5 65 000 1336E A125 93 125 KTA3 400S 320 65 000 HMCP400J5 65 000 1336E BRF05 0 3
170. 040 64 5 Figure D 4 175 933 1108 B050 78 2 Figure D 5 193 1110 1303 BX060 78 2 Figure D 5 193 1110 1303 B060 96 9 4 361 1708 2069 1 Base derate amps are based on nominal voltage 240 480 or 600V If the input voltage exceeds the drive rating the drive output must be derated Refer to Figure D 41 2 Drive ambient temperature rating is 40 C If ambient exceeds 40 C derate the drive Refer to Figures D 1 D 39 3 Drive rating is based on altitudes of 1000m 3000ft or less If installed at a higher altitude derate the drive Refer to Figure D 40 4 Not available at time of publication Mounting and Wiring Your 1336 IMPACT Drive 2 13 Catalog Number Base Derate Amps Derate Curve 3 Heat Dissipation Drive Watts Heatsink Watts Total Watts B075 120 3 Figure D 14 361 1708 2069 B100 149 2 Figure D 15 426 1944 2370 B125 180 4 Figure D 16 522 2664 3186 BX150 180 4 Figure D 16 606 2769 3375 B150 240 0 Figure D 9 606 2769 3375 B200 291 4 Figure D 10 755 3700 4455 B250 327 4 Figure D 17 902 4100 5002 B300 406 4 none 1005 4805 5810 BP300 406 4 Figure D 18 4 4 4 B350 459 2 none 1055 5455 6510 BP350 459 2 Figure D 19 4 3 B400 505 1 none 1295 6175 7470 BP400 481 0 Figure D 20 4 4 4 B450 570 2 none 1335 6875 8210 BP450 531 7 Figure D 21 ii 4 4 B500 599 2 Figure D 22 1395 7800 9200 B600 673 4 Figure D 23 1485 8767 10252 B700C 850 0 Figure D 24 1700 9700 11400 B
171. 096 base motor speed Parameters 11 29 83 Motor Current Parameter number 83 Use Motor Current to view the actual RMS value of the motor ae type MontoEMotor Sine current as determined from the LEM current sensors This data is Display x x amp averaged and updated every 50 milliseconds Factory default not applicable Minimum value 0 0 amps Maximum value 6553 5 amps Conversion 4096 rated inverter amps 84 DC Bus Voltage Parameter number 84 File group Monitor Drive Inv Status DC Bus Voltage represents the actual bus voltage in volts as Parameter type SOUE read by the software from an analog input port Display xyole Factory default not applicable Minimum value 0 volts Maximum value 1000 volts Conversion IS 85 Motor Voltage Parameter number 85 File group Monitor Motor Status Use Motor Voltage to view the actual line to line fundamental Parameter type Sore RMS value of motor voltage This data is averaged and updated Display Zvol every 50 milliseconds Factory default not applicable Minimum value 0 volts Maximum value 3000 volts Conversion ilsi Motor Torque Parameter number 86 f File group Monitor Motor Status Use Motor Torque to view the calculated value of motor torque Parameter type source as determined by the drive The actual value of the motor torque Display x x trq is within 5 of this value This data is updated every Factory default not applicable 2 milliseconds Minimum value 800 0 Maxim
172. 1 Then 0 A software fault occurred 1 No motor is connected or a bus fuse is open Phase U and W shorted Phase U and V shorted Phase V and W shorted There are shorted modules A ground fault occurred A fault occurred before the short module ran COIN OD oa AJOJN A hardware overvoltage fault occurred A hardware desat fault occurred 10 A hardware ground fault occurred 11 A hardware phase overcurrent fault occurred 12 There are open power transistor s 13 There are current feedback faults Bits 14 and 15 are reserved Inverter Dgn2 parameter 175 is defined as follows When this bit is set 1 Then 0 Transistor U upper shorted Transistor U lower shorted Transistor V upper shorted Transistor V lower shorted Transistor W upper shorted Transistor W lower shorted The current feedback phase U offset is too large INIA AJOJ N The current feedback phase W offset is too large Transistor U upper open o Transistor U lower open 10 11 Transistor V upper open Transistor V lower open 12 Transistor W upper open 13 14 Transistor W lower open Current feedback phase U open 15 Current feedback phase W open If any hardware fault occurs during the open transistor testing then the following occur e The hardware fault is
173. 1 parameter 21 to 0 Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or line power interruption 12066 CP Solid The bus voltage dropped 150V Refer to the Understanding Precharge and Ridethrough Warning Faults section for more information Bus Drop green below the bus tracker voltage ae If you do not want this condition to be reported as a warning change bit 2 in Warning Select 1 parameter 21 to 0 Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or line power interruption The DC bus voltage fell below the Refer to the Understanding Precharge and Ridethrough 12067 CP Solid Si i Warning minimum value 388V DC at Faults section for more information Bus Undervit green Aa 460V AC input If you do not want this condition to be reported as a warning change bit 3 in Warning Select 1 parameter 21 to 0 Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or line At least 5 ridethrough cycles power interruption have occurred within a 20 second Refer to the Understanding Precharge and Ridethrough 12068 CP Solid i rae f Warning period This indicates a converter Faults section for more information Bus Cycle gt 5 green 2 problem or a problem with the If you do not want this condition to be reported as a Incoming power warning change bit 4 in Warning Select 1 parameter 21 to 0 Make sure the motor is properly connected Refer to the Understanding Precharge and Ridethrough 12069 CP Solid The fast flux up current
174. 1 1 2 3 4 Carrier Frequency in kHz Carrier Frequency in kHz Figure D 39 ae C700C and Pe Cs00c 80 of Drive 70 Rated Amps 60 50 40 30 20 10 A 0 i 0 I I 1000 2000 I 3000 I 4000 Carrier Frequency in Hz I 5000 I 6000 of Drive Rating 700 HP of Drive Rating 800 HP D 8 Derating Guidelines Due to drive losses the output voltage to the motor is affected by the AC input voltage to the drive This reduced motor voltage may require more motor torque and therefore current to achieve rated motor horsepower Though most applications do not require full rated motor horsepower at full speed the following information is provided to assist with proper motor drive selection 1 For 460V motors operate with a minimum 480V Input AC line voltage 2 Size the motor with the capability to operate with 8 more current 3 Purchase a motor designed to operate at 440V Figure D 40 All Drive Ratings 100 of Drive Rated Amps 90 80 I I I I I 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 m 3300 6600 9900 13200 ft Altitude Figure D 41 Required Only for the following drives 1336E A B C 025 18 5 kW 25 HP at 8 kHz 1336E A B C 22 kW 30 HP at 6 8 kHz 1336E A B C 45 kW 60 HP at 6 kHz 100 of Drive Rated Amps 90 80 I I I I I I 240 480 or 600V 2 4
175. 1 153 5 1 0 2 54109 NA NA 1336E B600 3 152 0 300 MCM 24 54179 1 153 5 1 0 2 54109 NA NA 1336E B700C 4 253 0 500 MCM 8 107 2 4 0 54110 1336E B800C 4 253 0 500 MCM 8 107 2 4 0 54110 1336E C075 1 33 6 2 8 1541423 1 2 8 4 8 541319 1336E C100 1 53 5 1 0 8 1541533 1 2 54135 1336E C125 1 67 4 2 0 8 541589 1 2 541353 1336E C150 1 107 2 4 0 8 54111 2 541353 1336E C200 2 67 4 2 0 8 54110T 2 541423 8 54110B 1336E C250 2 185 0 3 0 8 54111T 1 67 4 2 0 2 54110 1 26 7 3 G 541423 8 54111B 1336E CX300 3 185 0 3 0 16 54111 NA NA 1336E C300 3 185 0 3 0 16 54111 NA NA 1336E C350 3 153 5 1 0 24 54109 NA NA 1336E CP350 1336E C400 3 167 4 2 0 24 54110 Consult Factory NA NA 1336E CP400 1336E C450 3 185 0 3 0 24 54111 NA NA 1336E C500 3 107 2 4 0 24 54112 NA NA 1336E C600 3 127 0 250 MCM 24 54174 NA NA 1336E C700C 3 253 0 500 MCM 6 54118 1 67 4 2 0 a 54110 1336E C800C 3 253 0 500 MCM 6 54118 1 67 4 2 0 a 54110 1 Lugs shown for DC are based on dynamic brake sizing of 50 of motor rating x 1 25 Select proper lugs based on required braking torque Refer to 1336 5 64 or 1336 5 65 for additional information 2 T amp BCOLOR KEYED Connectors require T amp B WT117 or TBM 6 Crimper tool or equivalent
176. 10 SCANport device 2 3 11 SCANport device 3 4 12 SCANport device 4 5 13 SCANport device 5 6 14 SCANport device 6 7 15 Logic Cmd Input parameter 197 gt The SCANport device number is determined by the SCANport connection it is plugged into Masking Control Functions mask 1 You can also mask control functions This lets you enable or disable a Control o Control Function control function for all or some of the devices Input o Important You cannot mask the stop command Any device mask 0 attached to the 1336 IMPACT drive can stop the drive at any time 7 To set a mask for a control function you can use the following file nterface Comm parameters group SCANport Config To set a mask to control Set the appropriate bit in Use this this function the high low byte parameter Control which ports can accept the 124 control functions Issue forward reverse commands High 125 Issue a start command High 126 Issue a jog command Low 126 Select an alternate reference or preset Low 125 speed Generate a clear fault command High 127 Reset drive Low 127 For each of these parameters each bit represents a device This bit for Or this bit for Represents low high 0 8 L Option 1 9 SCANport device 1 2 10 SCANport device 2 3 11 SCANport device 3 4 12 SCANport device 4 5 13 SCANport device 5 6 14 SCANport device 6 7 15 Logic Cmd Input
177. 100 A040 98 of Drive Rated Amps 94 92 90 i i i 2 4 6 Carrier Frequency in kHz Figure D 7 100 A050 ae 90 ofDrive 85 SS Rated Amps g0 75 70 65 F i i 2 4 6 Carrier Frequency in kHz Figure D 8 100 A060 95 90 of Drive 85 Rated Amps go _ 75 70 65 N 60 1 1 2 4 6 Carrier Frequency in kHz Figure D 9 100 A075 and B150 95 90 of Drive 85 Rated Amps g0 75 70 65 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 Carrier Frequency in kHz Figure D 10 100 A100 and B200 95 90 of Drive 35 Rated Amps g0 75 70 65 I l I I I 1 2 3 4 5 6 Carrier Frequency in kHz D 4 Derating Guidelines Gm Standard rating for enclosed drive in 40 C ambient and open drive in 50 C ambient Derating factor for enclosed drive in ambient between 41 C and 50 C Figure Catalog Number Derate Figure D 11 B015 of Drive Rated Amps 100 95 90 85 80 75 70 65 Si 1 2 3 4 5 6 si 8 9 10 1 12 Carrier Frequency in kHz Figure D 12 B025 of Drive Rated Amps 100 95 90 85 80 75 70 65 60 55 I 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Carrier Frequency in kHz Figure D 13 BX040 of Drive Rated Amps 100 95 90 85 80 75 70 65 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 il Mw
178. 1024 25 x 4096 1PU Base Speed 1024 IN1 1024 IN2 16777 IN3 4096 10 20 Using the Function Block 32 bit out 1024 IN1 x 16777 IN2 x 65536 274 874 368 dec 4096 IN3 oo 1062 4000 Hex WHL Fract P213 P214 The previous example assumes that both D1 amp D2 have motor speeds of equal rating Applications where motor speeds differ provide an even greater example of the flexibility of this function block To set up this application you need to enter the values shown in Figure 10 24 Figure 10 24 Multiply Divide Function Block Func 1 Eval Sel Speed Ref 1 Function Sel An In 1 Value Function In1 An Out 1 Value Func 1 Mask Val Function Output 1 Lead Drive Func 2 EvalSel 42 An In 1 Value x D1 D2 4096 In1 x In2 In3 Enter D1 D2 where D1 is the diameter of the lead drive s spindle and D2 is the diameter of the smaller spindle Enter 0 This value is not used In4 Use per unit math Speed Ref 1 Function Output 2 Speed Ref 1 Frac Enter 0 This value is not used gt 205D Func 3 Mask Val i rae Multiply Divide Enter 0 Function Block Enter 0 for parameters 208 through 211 Function In4 as these parameters are not used In this example per unit math is used because the value coming in through An In 1 Value parameter 96 is in internal units The output value is also in internal units Using the Scale Function You can use the function block t
179. 11 19 37 Speed Scale 7 11 19 38 Jog Speed 1 11 19 39 Jog Speed 2 11 19 40 Rev Speed Limit 11 20 41 Fwd Speed Limit 11 20 42 Accel Time 1 11 20 43 Accel Time 2 11 20 44 Decel Time 1 11 20 45 Decel Time 2 11 20 46 Droop Percent 11 21 47 S Curve Percent 11 21 No Name Page 48 PTrim Output 11 21 49 PTrim Reference 11 21 50 PTrim Feedback 11 21 51 PTrim Select 11 22 52 PTrim Filter BW 11 22 53 PTrim Preload 11 22 54 PTrim Ki 11 23 55 PTrim Kp 11 22 56 Reserved 11 22 57 Reserved 11 23 58 PTrim Lo Limit 11 23 59 PTrim Hi Limit 11 23 60 PTrim Out Gain 11 24 61 Max Rev Spd Trim 11 24 62 Max Fwd Spd Trim 11 24 63 Scaled Spd Fdbk 11 24 64 Fdbk Device Type 11 24 65 Fdbk Filter Sel 11 25 66 Fdbk Filter Gain 11 25 67 Fdbk Filter BW 11 25 68 Spd Trq Mode Sel 11 26 69 Torque Ref 1 11 26 70 Slave Torque 11 26 71 Min Flux Level 11 26 72 Pos Mtr Cur Lim 11 27 73 Neg Mtr Cur Lim 11 27 74 Pos Torque Lim 11 27 75 Neg Torque Lim 11 27 76 Regen Power Lim 11 27 77 Current Rate Lim 11 28 78 Fast Flux Level 11 28 79 DC Brake Current 11 28 80 DC Brake Time 11 28 81 Motor Speed 11 28 82 Command Spd Sts 11 28 83 Motor Current 11 29 84 DC Bus Voltage 11 29 85 Motor Voltage 11 29 86 Motor Torque 11 29 87 Torque Limit Sts 11 30 88 Motor Flux 11 30 89 Motor Frequency 11 30 90 Motor Power 11 30 91 lq 11 31 92 Test Data 1 11 31
180. 11 47 Data Out B2 8 8 11 47 Data Out C1 8 8 11 47 Data Out C2 8 8 11 47 Data Out D1 8 8 11 47 Data Out D2 8 8 11 47 DC Brake Current 9 6 9 7 11 28 DC Brake Time 9 6 11 28 DC Bus Voltage 11 29 Decel Time 1 11 20 B 8 Decel Time 2 11 20 B 8 destination explained 6 12 Dir Ref Mask 11 40 Dir Ref Owner 11 41 downloading profile C 8 Drive Inv Status 11 13 Drive Inv Sts 2 11 60 Droop Percent 11 21 B 18 Enc Pos Fdbk Hi 11 72 Enc Pos Fdbk Low 11 72 Encoder PPR 11 11 B 26 Error Filtr BW 11 49 13 11 B 18 B 37 Fast Flux Level 11 28 Fault Select 1 8 7 8 8 11 15 12 4 to 12 5 12 18 Fault Select 2 11 16 12 5 to 12 6 12 24 Fault Status 1 11 71 Fault Status 2 11 71 Fdbk Device Type 9 1 to 9 3 11 24 13 11 B 13 Fdbk Filter BW 11 25 B 15 Fdbk Filter Gain 11 25 B 15 Fdbk Filter Sel 11 25 13 11 B 14 B 37 for notch filters B 23 file and group organization 11 1 Flux Current 11 50 B 26 Flux Trim Owner 11 43 Freq Track Filtr 11 54 Fstart Select 11 69 Fstart Speed 11 70 Func 1 Eval Sel 10 4 Func 1 Eval Sel 11 62 Func 1 Mask Val 11 61 Func 2 Eval Sel 10 4 11 63 Func 2 Mask Val 11 63 Func 3 Eval Sel 10 4 Func 3 Eval Sel 11 65 Func 3 Mask Val 11 64 Function In1 11 61 Function In10 11 73 Function In2 11 62 Function In3 11 64 Function In4 11 65 Function In5 11 66 Function In6 11 66 Function In7 11 67 Function In8 11 67 Funct
181. 115V AC power instruments 6 24V AC DC logic PLC I O per NEC amp local codes Analog signals DC Reference feedback 7 supplies signal 5 to 24V DC Shielded cable Belden Signal 8735 8737 8404 Digital low speed TTL 3 18 3 12 3 9 0 1 3 2 3 4 5 Process ae I O encoder Shielded cable Belden S Digital high speed counter pulse tack 9728 9730 Serial RS 232 422 to Shielded cable Belden 9 communigations terminals and RS 232 8735 8737 Si printers RS 422 9729 9730 igna conn Serial Note 6 1 3 0 11 communications PLC Remote I O Twinaxial Cable greater than 20k PLC Data Highway A B1770CD baud Example Spacing relationship between 480V AC incoming power leads and 24V DC logic leads e 480V AC leads are class 2 24V DC leads are class 6 e For separate steel conduits the conduits must be 76 mm 3 inches apart e Ina cable tray the two groups of leads are to be 152 mm 6 inches apart Spacing Notes 1 Both outgoing and return current carrying conductors are to be pulled in the same conduit or laid adjacent in tray 2 Cables of the following classes can be grouped together Class 1 equal to or above 601 volts Classes 2 3 and 4 may have their respective circuits pulled in the same conduit or layered in the same tray Classes 5 and 6 may have their respective circuits pulled in the same conduit or layered in the same tray Note Bundle may not exceed conditions o
182. 150 of drive rated current for 1 minute is less than 400 motor current the drive current limit is used to determine the maximum available motor current The available current range is shown as the maximum current limit value in Pos Mtr Cur Lim parameter 72 and Neg Mtr Cur Lim parameter 73 9 8 Applications Understanding the Scale and Offset Parameters for Analog O file Application When The maximum current is group 400 Mtr Current Max Mtr Current parameter 195 is 1 400 motor current Max Mtr Current is 0 200 motor current The drive current limit is less than the ee Determined by the drive current limit motor current limit file nterface Comm group Analog Inputs To enable the 400 motor current function set Max Mtr Current parameter 195 to a value of 1 Important When you enable the 400 motor current function you should be aware that torque regulation specifications only apply to the 0 100 torque range When the drive is configured for 400 motor current the current loops are rescaled to allow a larger range of motor current at the expense of decreased current resolution Only use the increased current range for large drive to motor ratios In cases where there is not a large difference between the drive rated current and the motor rated current little added benefit is provided for most applications The increased current range results in decreased current res
183. 162 The minimum maximum range 1029 Nameplate ARM The minimum maximum range bit 10 parameter 3 g cue ahi has The minimum maximum range bit 11 parameter 8 g 4096 Nameplate Amps The minimum maximum range Nameplate bit12 parameter 4 Amps must be less than or equal to twice Inverter Amps parameter 11 32768 Droop Percent bit 15 parameter 46 The minimum maximum range The parameter limit testpoints are cleared when you clear the faults Once you know which parameter s is being limited you can determine why the parameter was limited In many cases a link from the limited parameter to another parameter will explain how the limit value was reached For example a link to an analog input value 12 24 Troubleshooting Understanding the Math Limit Faults The fact that a parameter limit condition occurred does not by itself create a problem for the drive because the drive limits the parameter to a valid number The ability to configure a fault or warning is provided to let you determine when a potential application problem exists the requested action cannot be achieved because an attempt was made to set a parameter outside its limits If this situation is understood and acceptable then you can simply set up the drive for a Param Limit warning clear bit 9 in Fault Select 2 parameter 22 and set bit 9 in Warning Select 2 parameter 23 or to ignore the condition entirely clear both bits By default th
184. 2 Shield 4 20mA Output 1 TB11 J11 Relay 1 Supply Relay 2 Relay 3 Relay 4 OAN OA KRWDY Voltage Clearance iE oO SP An In1 Sel Par 133 Offset Scale Filter BW er He He Offset Scale Filter BW 101 hs Offset Scale Filter BW Pulse In PPR Pulse In Scale Pulse In Offset A A Relay Config 1 115 187 Relay Config 2 188 Relay Setpoint 2 189 Relay Config 3 190 Relay Setpoint 3 Relay Setpoint 1 191 Relay Config 4 192 Relay Setpoint 4 SP An In1 Value i SP An Int Scale Par 135 lt M gt SP An In2 Sel Par 136 SP An In2 Value i SP An In2 Scale Par 138 Speed Ref 2 moD lt 99 gt lt 102 gt lt 13 gt Motor Speed ti gt Motor Power lt gt Speed Ref 1 Motor Speed 7 3 7 4 Setting Up the Input Output As Figures 7 1 and 7 2 show each analog input and output parameter has associated offset and scale parameters The 1336 IMPACT drive provides the offset and scale parameters so that you can adjust the range of the analog input and output sources and use the entire internal range of drive units If you are having problems determining your scale and offset values or are using a PLC refer to the explanation in the application section The following table provides information about the analog scale and offset parameters Input Range Output Range Affects Description Offset parameters 97 analog value iio ae i i
185. 2 is available only when the value of Display Aa socond3 L Option Mode parameter 116 is 4 11 or 14 Factory default 10 0 seconds Minimum value 0 0 seconds Maximum value 6553 5 seconds Conversion 10 1 0 44 Decel Time 1 Parameter number 44 File group Control Accel Decel Enter the length of time for the drive to ramp from base speed to Parameter type linkable destination 0 rpm This is used for a ramp stop Display x x seconds Factory default 5 0 seconds Minimum value 0 0 seconds Maximum value 6553 5 seconds Conversion 10 1 0 45 Decel Time 2 Parameter number 45 Enter the length of time for the drive to ramp from base speed to 0 rpm This is used for a ramp stop Decel Time 2 is available only when the value of L Option Mode parameter 116 is 4 11 or 14 File group Parameter type Display Factory default Minimum value Maximum value Conversion Control Accel Decel linkable destination x x seconds 10 0 seconds 0 0 seconds 6553 5 seconds 10 1 0 Parameters 11 21 46 Droop Percent Parameter number 46 File group Control Speed Regulator Use Droop Percent to specify the percent of base speed that the Parameter type ITEE destination speed reference is reduced when at full load torque You can use Display Wien ke to cause motor speed to droop with an increase in Factory default 0 0 gag Minimum value 0 0 Maximum value 25 5 Conversion 10 1 0 47 1 Parameter number 47 S Curve Percent Fi
186. 22 9 182 9 2203 25 40 375 600 600 600 600 75 600 0 75 1 7 6 12 2 114 3 182 9 182 9 182 9 182 9 22 9 182 9 25 40 375 600 600 600 600 75 600 0370s 78 12 2 114 3 182 9 182 9 182 9 182 9 22 9 182 9 25 40 375 600 600 600 600 75 600 3 7 6 7 6 12 2 1143 182 9 182 9 182 9 22 9 182 9 25 40 375 For 600 600 600 75 600 22 3 7 6 12 2 114 3 applications 182 9 182 9 182 9 22 9 182 9 25 40 375 installations 600 600 600 75 600 7 6 12 2 114 3 using new 182 9 182 9 182 9 22 9 182 9 A3 376 1 5 2 25 40 375 motors no 600 600 600 75 600 075 1 7 6 122 1143 einai Jis 182 9 182 9 182 9 22 9 182 9 25 40 _ 375 io voltage 600 600 600 ae 75 600 roo iS ier iva Site em em tw res eats y You Terminator a 5 5 7 5 5 5 7 5 7 6 12 2 114 3 should observe 182 9 182 9 182 9 24 4 182 9 7 5 10 75 10 25 40 375 standard 600 600 600 80 600 B 5 5 22 5 5 22 7 6 12 2 114 3 Practices for 182 9 182 9 182 9 24 4 182 9 7 5 30 75 30 25 40 375 voltagedrop 600 600 600 80 600 30 45 30 45 7 6 12 2 1143 aaie 182 9 182 9 182 9 76 2 182 9 X40 X60 40 60 25 40 875 zndother 600 600 _ 600 250 600 5 4
187. 3 and L1 amp L3 Use a Digital Multimeter DMM on AC volts highest range 1000V AC The input voltage should equal the drive rated input voltage present on the drive s nameplate within 10 If the voltage is out of tolerance verify that the drive rating is correct for the application If it is correct adjust the incoming line voltage to within 10 Refer to Appendix D Derating Guidelines for the drive current derating requirements for voltages above nominal to 10 Record the following information You will need this information for the start up routine and for any future servicing if needed Table 6 A Drive and Motor Information Drive Nameplate Data Catalog Number Serial Number Series AC Input Volts Amps AC Output Volts Amps Horsepower Rating kW Motor Nameplate Data Catalog Number Serial Number Series AC Input Volts Amps Horsepower Rating kW Poles May be located on the nameplate RPM Hz Encoder Nameplate Data Catalog Number Serial Number Series Input Power Supply Volts Input Signal Level Volts Optional Output Signal Level Volts Output Type Pulse Per Revolution PPR Maximum Speed Maximum Frequency Revision Levels Main Control Board Gate Driver Board Jumper Settings Board Dependent 6 4 Starting Up Your System Understanding the Basics of the Human Interface Module
188. 3 Refer SP 3 direction 15 Direct P197 Let SCANport device 3 control 9 Direct SP 1 Let Logic Cmd Input the reference Let SCANport device 1 control parameter 197 control the 4 Refer SP 4 the direction direction Let SCANport device 4 control 10 Direct SP 2 the reference Let SCANport device 2 control 5 Refer SP 5 the direction Let SCANport device 5 control 11 Direct SP 3 the reference Let SCANport device 3 control the direction 126 Start Jog Mask Parameter number 126 File group Interface Comm SCANport Config You can use the lower byte of Start Jog Mask bits 0 through 7 to Parameter type iere Barei select which SCANport devices can issue a jog reference Display bits eae e a a byte bits nies ue Factory default 11111111 11111111 select whic port devices can issue a start command You Minimum value 00000000 00000000 can choose between 0 Disable control 1 Enable control The bits are defined as follows Bit 0 Description Jog L Opt Let the L Option board control jogs Jog SP 1 Let SCANport device 1 control jogs Jog SP 2 Let SCANport device 2 control jogs Jog SP 3 Let SCANport device 3 control jogs Jog SP 4 Let SCANport device 4 control jogs Jog SP 5 Let SCANport device 5 control jogs Bit 10 11 Maximum value Conversion 11111111 11111111 1 1 Refer to Chapter 8 Using the SCANport Capabilities for more information Description Jog SP 6 Let SCANport device 6 control jogs
189. 336E B060 B100 D 200 240V 1336E A060 D 1336 RFB 180 D 380 480V 1336E B125 BX150 D 200 240V 1336E A075 A125 E 1336 RFB 340 E 380 480V 1336E B150 B250 E 1336 RFB 475 G 380 480V 1336E BX250 B350 G 1336 RFB 590 G 380 480V 1336E B400 B450 G 1336 RFB 670 G 380 480V 1336E B500 B600 G Not available 380 480V 1336E B700 B800 H EMC Enclosure Kit Selection Frame Enclosure Kit Catalog Number Reference 200 240V Rating 380 480V Rating 500 600V Rating A1 A2 A3 1336E AE3 1336E AE3 A4 1336E AE2 1336E AE2 1336E AE2 B 1336E AE4 1336E AE4 1336E AE4 Cc 1336E AE5 1336E AE5 1336E AE5 D 1336E AE6 1336E AE6 1336E AE6 E 1336E AE7 1336E AE7 1336E AE7 F H Not Available RFI Filter Installation Important Refer to the instructions supplied with the filter for details The RFI filter must be connected between the incoming AC supply line and the drive input terminals Electrical Configuration Grounding CE Conformity E 3 RFI Filter Leakage Current The RFI filter may cause ground leakage currents Therefore a solid ground connection must be provided as shown below ATTENTION To guard against possible equipment damage RFI filters can only be used with AC supplies that are nominally balanced and grounded with respect to ground Insome installations three phase supplies are occasionally connected in a 3 wire configur
190. 459 2 C450 394 473 BPR350 300 379 455 366 459 2 C500 434 520 B400 330 416 501 402 505 1 ceoo 514 617 BP400 313 396 476 383 481 0 ces0 578 694 BPR400 313 396 476 383 481 0 C700C 616 739 770 B450 372 470 565 454 570 2 C800C 639 767 800 BP450 346 437 526 424 531 7 12c700c 616 739 770 BPR450 346 437 526 424 531 7 12Cc800c 639 767 800 B500 391 494 504 477 599 2 Beoo 439 555 668 537 673 4 BP300 265 334 402 324 406 4 BP350 300 378 455 366 459 2 BP400 313 396 476 383 481 0 BP450 346 437 526 424 531 7 B7ooc 517 625 835 677 850 Bsooc 647 817 965 783 983 12B700C 517 625 835 677 850 12B800C 647 817 965 783 983 Specifications A 5 Cable and Wiring Recommendations Minimum Spacing in Inches Between Classes Steel Conduit Tray Wiring F P A Spacing Category Class Signal Definition Signal Examples Cable Type 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Notes 1 en 600V or 5 Skv 3 Ph AC lines per NEC amp local codes o 39 3 9 3 18 Notes 1 2 5 Power 2 AG powerless than 460V 3 Ph AC lines per NEC amp local codes 600V 3 9 0 3 6 3 12 Note6 1 2 5 3 AC power AC motor per NEC amp local codes 115V AC DC logic Relay logic PLC I O motor thermostat 5 7 per NEC amp local codes Control Power supplies 3 9 3 6 O 3 9 Note 6 1 2 5
191. 5 No Name Page 246 Units Traveled 11 76 247 Profile CMD Frac 11 76 248 Profile CMD 11 76 249 Step 1 Speed 11 76 250 Step 1 Value 11 76 251 Step 1 Type 11 76 252 Step 2 Speed 11 77 253 Step 2 Value 11 77 254 Step 2 Type 11 77 255 Step 3 Speed 11 77 256 Step 3 Value 11 77 257 Step 3 Type 11 77 258 Step 4 Speed 11 78 259 Step 4 Value 11 78 260 Step 4 Type 11 78 261 Step 5 Speed 11 78 262 Step 5 Value 11 78 263 Step 5 Type 11 78 264 Step 6 Speed 11 79 265 Step 6 Value 11 79 266 Step 6 Type 11 79 267 Step 7 Speed 11 79 268 Step 7 Value 11 79 269 Step 7 Type 11 79 270 Step 8 Speed 11 80 271 Step 8 Value 11 80 272 Step 8 Type 11 80 273 Step 9 Speed 11 80 274 Step 9 Type 11 80 275 Step 9 Value 11 80 276 Step 10 Speed 11 81 277 Step 10 Type 11 81 278 Step 10 Value 11 81 279 Step 11 Speed 11 81 280 Step 11 Type 11 81 281 Step 11 Value 11 81 282 Step 12 Speed 11 82 283 Step 12 Value 11 82 284 Step 12 Type 11 82 285 Step 13 Speed 11 82 286 Step 13 Value 11 82 287 Step 13 Type 11 82 288 Step 14 Speed 11 83 289 Step 14 Value 11 83 290 Step 14 Type 11 83 291 Step 15 Speed 11 83 292 Step 15 Value 11 83 293 Step 15 Type 11 83 294 Step 16 Speed 11 84 295 Step 16 Value 11 84 296 Step 16 Type 11 84 Alphabetical Parameter Listing
192. 5 112 45 112 12 2 305 114 3 issues 182 9 182 9 182 9 61 0 182 9 60 X150 60 150 40 100 375 600 600 600 200 600 z 112 187 112 224 12 2 53 3 1143 Eor retrofit 182 9 182 9 182 9 182 9 182 9 150 250 150 300 40 _ 175 875 situations 600 600 600 600 600 224 336 224 336 1183 533 114 3 check withthe 182 9 182 9 182 9 182 9 182 9 300 450 300 450 60 175 375 motor 600 600 600 600 600 G 224 448 224 448 183 53 3 114 3 manufacturer 182 9 1829 182 9 182 9 182 9 300 600 300 600 60 175 375 forinsulation 600 600 600 600 600 H 522 597 522 597 18 3 53 3 114 3 rating 182 9 182 9 182 9 182 9 182 9 700 800 700 800 60 175 375 600 600 600 600 600 A 3 reactor reduces motor and cable stress but may cause a degradation of motor waveform quality Reactors must have a turn turn insulation rating of 2100 volts or higher Type A Motor Characteristics No phase paper or misplaced phase paper lower quality insulation systems corona inceptio voltages between 850 and 1000 volts Type B Motor Characteristics Properly placed phase paper medium quality insulation systems corona inception voltages between 1000 and 1200 volts 1329R Motors These AC variable speed motors are power matched for use with Allen Bra
193. 58 193 Start Dwell Spd 11 59 No Name Page 194 Start Dwell Time 11 59 195 Max Mtr Current 11 59 196 Drive Inv Sts 2 11 60 197 Logic Cmd Input 11 60 198 Function In1 11 61 199 Func 1 Mask Val 11 61 200 Func 1 Eval Sel 11 62 201 Function In2 11 62 202 Func 2 Mask Val 11 63 203 Func 2 Eval Sel 2 63 204 Function In3 2 64 205 Func 3 Mask Val 2 64 206 Func 3 Eval Sel 2 65 207 Function In4 2 65 208 Function In5 2 66 209 Function In6 2 66 210 Function In7 2 66 211 Function In8 2 67 212 Function Sel 2 68 213 Function Output1 2 69 214 Function Output2 2 69 215 Min Speed Limit 2 69 216 FStart Select 11 69 217 FStart Speed 11 70 218 Reserved 11 70 219 PwrUp Fit Status 11 70 220 Ncfg Fit Status 11 70 221 Fault Status 1 11 71 222 Fault Status 2 11 71 223 Warning Status 1 11 71 224 Warning Status 2 11 72 225 Spd Reg Output 11 72 226 Spd Error 11 72 227 Enc Pos Fdbk Low 11 72 228 Enc Pos fdbk Hi 11 72 229 Int Torque Ref 11 73 230 Iq Offset 11 73 231 Id Offset 11 73 232 Function Ing 11 73 233 Function In10 11 73 234 Motor Voltage 11 73 235 Profile Enable 11 74 236 Profile Status 11 74 237 Error Trim Gain 11 74 238 End Action Sel 11 74 239 End Action Speed 11 74 240 End Action Go To 11 75 241 End Action Input 11 75 242 End Action Comp 11 75 243 End Action Val 11 75 244 Value Tolerance 11 75 245 Counts per unit 11 7
194. 6 Rated Torque 230 Iq Offset Parameter number 230 File group None IQ Offset contains the LEM U offset required to null the current Parameter type linkable destination error no motor current flowing This offset is set automatically Display x by running the transistor diagnostics Factory default 0 Minimum value 100 1 Iq Offset was added in Version 3 xx Maximum value 100 Conversion 1 1 231 Id Offset Parameter number 231 File group None Id Offset contains the LEM W offset required to null the current Parameter type linkable destination error no motor current flowing This offset is set automatically Display x by running the transistor diagnostics Factory default 0 F Minimum value 100 1 Id Offset was added in Version 3 xx E ANE 100 Conversion 1 1 232 Function Ing Parameter number 232 File group Application Prog Function Use Function In9 to provide input to the function block that is Parameter type sink provided with the 1336 IMPACT drive Display x S F F Factory default 0 1 Function In9 was added in Version 3 xx Minimum value 32767 Maximum value 32767 Conversion 1 1 Refer to Chapter 10 Using the Function Block for more information 233 1 Parameter number 233 Function In10 File group Application Prog Function Use Function In10 to provide input to the function block that is Parameter type sink provided with the 1336 IMPACT drive Display x Factory default 0 1 Function In10 was added in Version 3 xx Minimu
195. 67 Maximum value 32767 If Function Sel parameter 212 is 11 then Display xX Minimum value 0 Maximum value 65535 Refer to Chapter 10 Using the Function Block for more information 214 1 Parameter number 214 Function Output2 File group Application Prog Function Use Function Output 2 to view the results of the function block Parameter type source Function Output 2 is the lower byte of a double word Function Sel Display x parameter 212 is 11 12 or 13 Factory default not applicable Minimum value 0 1 Function Output 2 was added in Version 2 xx Maximum value 65535 Conversion 1 1 Refer to Chapter 10 Using the Function Block for more information 215 imit Parameter number 215 Min Speed Limit File group Control Control Limits Use Min Speed Limitto specify the minimum speed that you want Parameter type linkable destination the motor to run at Min Speed Limit overrides any speed Display X X rpm references to lower speeds Factory default 0 0 rpm 1 Min Speed Limit was added in Version 2 xx Minima valle oorp Maximum value base motor speed Conversion 4096 base motor speed 216 Fstart Select Parameter number 216 Use Fstart Select to activate the flying start feature when operating in Encoderless mode This allows encoderless mode the ability to reconnect into a rotating motor and resume operation Note Encoder mode will automatically reconnect and does not use the Fstart Select parameter 1 Fstart Select was added in Version
196. 69 the potentiometer connected to analog input 1 becomes the torque reference signal This signal must be scaled and offset to get the entire 100 in the 0 to 10 volt range A digital range of 8192 4096 must now be scaled for an analog range of 10 volts and must be offset so 5 volts on the potentiometer indicates 0 torque As shown in Figure 9 3 the offset voltage adds the corresponding digital value to the range In this case an offset of 5 volts adds a digital value of 1024 to the range This causes 0 volts on the potentiometer to register as 1024 digital internal to the drive and 10 volts on the potentiometer is 1024 to the drive This can then be scaled by a factor of 4 8192 drive units so that 0 volts sends a digital value of 4096 for 100 torque and 10 volts sends a digital value of 4096 for 100 torque 9 10 Applications Multiplexer 0 10V Pot Figure 9 3 Potentiometer 0 10V Range to Control 100 Torque Reference An In 1 Offset Lo Par 97 5V 1024 An In 1 Scale Anini Fitergw nin 1 Value e Par 98 anus Par 182 10V 10v 2048 Range of 20V De le 10V 0 10V Potentiometer 10V 0 5V 10V digital value 2048 0 1024 2048 ees mg a Scale by 4 4096 0 4096 file Interface Comm group Analog Outputs Understanding the Scale and Offset Parameters for Output Analog outputs are similar to analog inputs Each output has a scale and offset parameter along with a specific variable
197. 7 0 5 140 MN 0250 100 000 HMCPS003A0 E 65 000 1336E BRFO7 0 56 0 75 140 MN 0250 100 000 HMCPS003A0 G 65 000 1336E BRF10 0 75 1 140 MN 0400 100 000 HMCPS003A0 G 65 000 1336E BRF15 1 2 1 5 140 MN 0400 100 000 HMCPS007C0O B 65 000 1336E BRF20 1 5 2 140 MN 0630 100 000 HMCPS007C0O Cc 65 000 1336E BRF30 2 2 3 140 MN 1000 16 000 HMCPSO15E0C B 65 000 1336E BRF50 3 7 5 140 MN 1000 16 000 HMCPSO15E0C D 65 000 1336E BRF75 5 5 7 5 140 MN 1600 6 000 HMCPSO15E0C H 65 000 1336E BRF100 7 5 10 140 MN 2000 6 000 HMCPS030H1C H 65 000 1336 B010 11 15 140 MN 2000 6 000 HMCPSO30H1C E 65 000 1336 B015 15 20 140 MN 2500 6 000 HMCPS030H1C H 65 000 1336 B020 18 5 25 140 CMN 4000 65 000 HMCPS050K2C H 65 000 1336 B025 22 30 140 CMN 4000 65 000 HMCPS050K2C H 65 000 1336 B030 22 30 140 CMN 6300 50 000 HMCPS050K2C H 65 000 1336 BX040 30 40 140 CMN 6300 50 000 HMCPS050K2C H 65 000 1336 B040 37 50 140 CMN 6300 50 000 HMCPS100R3C G 65 000 1336 B050 45 60 140 CMN 9000 25 000 HMCPS100R38C G 65 000 1336E BX060 45 60 140 CMN 9000 25 000 HMCPS100R3C G 65 000 1336E BO60 56 75 KTA3 160S 125 65 000 HMCPS150T4C_ F 65 000 1336E B075 75 100 KTA3 160S 125 65 000 HMCPS150T4C H 65 000 1336E B100 93 125 KTA3 160S 160 65 000 HMCPS150U4C E 65 000 1336E B125 112 150 KTA3 250S 200 65 000 HMCP250K5 H 65 000 1336E BX150 112 150 KTA3 250S 200 65 000 HMCP250K5 H 65 000 1336E B150 149 200 KTA3 400S 320 65 000
198. 7 0 185 2 275 0 15 35 7 5 130 0 76 2 85 3 6 71 kg 8 50 11 42 8 15 7 29 10 83 0 60 0 30 5 12 3 00 3 36 14 8 Ibs AA 260 0 350 0 212 0 230 0 320 0 15 35 15 35 130 0 133 0 86 0 15 90 kg 10 24 13 78 8 35 9 06 12 60 0 60 0 60 5 12 5 23 3 39 35 0 Ibs 3 6 Mounting and Wiring Information Specific to Frames A1 A2 A3 and A4 Frames A1 through A4 22 2 0 88 Conduit Knockout 1 Plc ue ia 22 2 28 6 0 88 1 13 Conduit Knockout 3 Pics D LA ML l i Fans will be present on A4 Frame Frame L M N P Q R s Reference At 111 8 105 4 86 3 25 4 63 2 102 1 135 4 4 40 4 15 3 40 1 00 2 49 4 02 5 33 A2 132 3 126 0 106 9 25 4 63 2 102 1 135 4 5 21 4 96 4 21 1 00 2 49 4 02 5 33 A3 158 8 152 4 133 4 25 4 63 2 102 1 135 4 6 25 6 00 5 25 1 00 2 49 4 02 5 33 A4 164 0 164 0 139 0 27 0 65 0 97 0 128 7 6 45 6 45 5 47 1 06 2 65 3 82 5 07 All Dimensions in Millimeters and Inches Mounting and Wiring Information Specific to Frames A1 A2 A3 and A4 The following are the dimensions for the IP65 54 NEMA 4 12 3 7 enclosures See Detail A l 12 4 0 49 lt F gt G lt T t H See Detail B Alle
199. 800C 983 0 Figure D 24 1900 12000 13900 500 600V drives CWF10 25 4 25 29 54 CWF20 4 2 4 29 57 86 CWF30 6 0 4 32 87 119 CWF50 7 9 4 35 117 152 CWF75 9 9 none 91 217 308 CWF100 12 0 none 103 251 354 C015 18 9 none 117 360 477 C020 23 6 none 140 467 607 C025 30 0 none 141 492 633 C030 34 6 none 141 526 667 C040 45 1 none 175 678 853 C050 57 2 none 193 899 1092 C060 61 6 ij 193 981 1174 C075 85 8 Figure D 25 361 1553 1894 C100 109 1 Figure D 26 426 1978 2504 C125 138 6 Figure D 27 522 2162 2683 C150 159 7 Figure D 28 4 3 7 C200 252 6 Figure D 29 755 3065 3820 C250 283 6 Figure D 30 890 3625 4515 C300 298 0 none 926 5015 5941 CX300 300 0 none 926 3990 4930 C350 353 6 none 1000 5935 6935 CP350 350 0 Figure D 33 580 6125 6705 CPR 350 350 0 none 580 6125 6705 c400 406 4 Figure D 31 1430 7120 8550 CP400 400 0 Figure D 34 711 7000 7711 450 459 2 Figure D 32 1465 8020 9485 500 505 1 Figure D 37 1500 8925 10425 C600 599 2 Figure D 38 1610 10767 12377 C650 673 4 Figure D 39 1700 12000 14000 C700C 770 0 Figure D 39 1800 94008 11200 C800C 800 0 FigureD 39 2000 113008 13300 1 Base derate amps are based on nominal voltage 240 480 or 600V If the input voltage exceeds the drive rating the drive output must be derated Refer to Figure D 41 oo W DY Drive ambient temperature rating is 40 degrees C If ambient exceeds 40 degrees C derate the drive Refer to Figures D 1 D 39 Drive rating is based on altitudes of 1000 m 30
200. 97 13 ClirFit SP 5 Let SCANport device 1 control Let Logic Cmd Input Let SCANport device 5 control resets parameter 197 control resets clear fault commands 2 Reset SP 2 8 CirFit L Opt 14 ClirFit SP 6 Let SCANport device 2 control Let the L Option board control Let SCANport device 6 control resets clear fault commands clear fault commands 3 Reset SP 3 9 CirFit SP 1 15 CirFit P197 Let SCANport device 3 control Let SCANport device 1 control Let Logic Cmd Input resets clear fault commands parameter 197 control clear 4 Reset SP 4 10 CirFit SP 2 fault commands Let SCANport device 4 control Let SCANport device 2 control resets clear fault commands 5 Reset SP 5 11 CirFit SP 3 Let SCANport device 5 control Let SCANport device 3 control resets clear fault commands 128 Dir Ref Owner Parameter number 128 File group You can use the lower byte of Dir Ref Owner bits 0 through 7 to see which SCANport device currently has exclusive control of the reference changes You can use the higher byte bits 8 through 15 to see which SCANport device currently has exclusive control of direction changes You can choose between 0 Reference direction input not present 1 Reference direction input present The bits are defined as follows Bit 0 Description Refer L Opt The L Option board owns the reference command Refer SP 1 SCANport device 1 owns the reference command Refer SP 2 SCANport device 2 owns the reference command
201. A European Installations 1336E _ _ 010 7 5 10 50A 30A 20A UL requirements specify 1336E _ _ 015 11 15 70A 35A 25A 1 The recommended fuse is ee 336E 020 15 20 100A 45A 35A Class gG general industrial ee mue be vsat tor all ae AS drives in this section 1336E _ _ 025 18 5 25 100A 60A 40A applications and motor circuit A protection i a designations 1336E _ _ 030 22 30 125A 70A 50A include 1336E _ _ X040 150A 80A 60A BS88 British Standard Parts 1 Pe CC KTK FNQ R 1336E _ _ 040 150A 80A 60A amp 2 EN60269 1 Parts 1 amp 2 Type J JKS LPJ type gG or equivalent should be Type T JJS JJN 1336E _ _ 050 200A 100A 80A used for these drives Fuses 1336E _ _ X060 100A that meet BS88 Parts 1 amp 2 are UL requirements specify 1336E __ 060 250A 125A 90A acceptable for Frames A F that UL Class CC T or J Typical designations include fuses must be used for all 1336E __ 075 56 75 300A 150A 110A but may not be limited to the drives in this section 1336E __ 100 75 100 400A 200A 150A following r Typical designations 1336E __ 125 93 125 450A 250A 175A Parts 1 amp 2 AC AD BC BD include CD DD ED EFS EF FF FG e 1336E _ _ X150 250A GF GG GH Type J JKS LPJ 1336E __ 150 150 300A 225A Type T JJS JJN 1336E _ _ 200 200 400A 350A 1336E _ _ 250 250 450A 400
202. A 1336E _ _ X300 300 400A 1336E _ _ 300 300 _ 500A 400A The recommended fuse is Class gG general industrial 1336E _ _ P300 300 500A applications and motor circuit 1336E 350 300 Fz 600A 450A protection z 7 A BS88 British Standard Part 4 1336E _ _ P350 350 600A EN60269 1 Part 4 type gG 1336E __ 400 600A 500A semiconductor fuses or Bussmann FWP Gould 2 2 2 equivalent should be used for Shawmut A 70Q or QS 1336E _ _ P400 400 600A these drives G Frame drives semiconductor type fuses 1336E _ _ 450 450 800A 600A require semiconductor fuses must be used for all drives 2 2 2 and should be fused with Part 4 in this section 1336E _ _ P450 450 700A fuses 1336E _ _ 500 500 800A 800A Typical designations include 1336E 600 900A 800A but may not be limited to the following 1336E _ _ 650 800A Part 4 CT ET FE EET FEE 1336E ___700C 522 700 600A 700A RFEE FM FMM 1336E __ 800C 597 800 700A 700A 1 Both fast acting and slow blow are acceptable 2 Fuses are supplied with F and H Frame drives 3 Two fuses in parallel are required 4 12 Mounting and Wiring Information Specific to Frames B C D E F G and H Dimensions The following are the dimensions for the B C D E F G and H frames Dimensions for Frames B C and D i C Max ann AQF Mounting Hole Detail Frames B amp C
203. A Out Scale 11 36 mA Out Value 11 35 manuals related 1 3 masking functions 8 6 math limit 11 16 11 17 12 5 Max Fwd Spd Trim 11 24 Max Mtr Current 9 8 11 59 Max Rev Spd Trim 11 24 maximum minimum function 10 12 to 10 14 Min Flux Level 11 26 13 11 B 21 Min Speed Limit 11 69 Mop Increment 9 14 11 38 Mop Value 9 14 11 38 MOP using 9 14 motor cables selecting 2 18 to 2 20 motor control board overview B 2 Motor Current 11 29 motor feedback source 9 1 to 9 3 Motor Flux 11 30 B 21 Motor Frequency 11 30 B 26 motor information cables length of 2 2 selecting 2 18 to 2 20 changing audible noise level 11 11 choosing feedback source 9 1 fo 9 3 current rating 11 10 frequency rating 11 10 horsepower rating 11 10 motor poles 11 11 speed rpm 11 10 voltage rating 11 10 motor overload 11 16 11 17 12 5 Motor Overload 11 17 Motor Poles 11 11 B 26 Motor Power 11 30 motor simulation mode 11 24 Motor Speed 11 28 Motor Stall Time 11 17 B 29 motor stalled 11 16 11 17 12 5 Motor Torque 11 29 Motor Voltage 11 29 Motor Voltage 11 73 11 74 11 75 11 76 11 77 11 78 11 79 11 80 11 81 11 82 11 83 11 84 mounting your drive 2 10 MOV ratings 2 26 multiply divide function 10 18 N Nameplate Amps 11 10 Nameplate HP 11 10 Nameplate Hz 11 10 Nameplate RPM 11 10 Nameplate Volts 11 10 Ncfg Flt Status 11 70 Neg Mir Cur Lim 9 7 11 27 13 9 B 22 B 23 Neg Torque Lim
204. An In 1 Value To Cal SpeedRef2 Motor Speed Tro An Out 1 Value Motor Power An Out 2 Value Motor Speed e O a SP An Output The links are made from the destination side and the data transfer occurs in the opposite direction For additional information about links refer to Chapter 6 Starting Up Your System maintained start With a maintained start the drive runs as long as you are commanding a start The drive stops when you remove the start input for example if you remove your finger from the start button This type of start is also referred to as an unlatched start mask parameters Through the SCANport interface up to six different SCANport adapters and the L Option board can control the 1336 IMPACT drive With this flexibility conflicts are inherent The 1336 IMPACT drive lets you make functional masks At each port you can selectively lock out functions such as start jog and drive direction as well as many fault interlocks by using mask parameters to select the allowable functions for each port momentary start With a momentary start the drive continues running until a stop is commanded even after you remove the start input This type of start is also referred to as a latched start non volatile memory Non volatile memory is data memory in the drive that retains the values of all data even when power is disconnected from the drive An EE Electrically Erasable chip is used for the non vo
205. B3 23 TB3 24 TB3 26 TB3 27 TB3 28 1 Status Stop Status Status Status Status Status Status 2 Start Stop Rev Fwd Jog Ext Fault Spd 3 Spd 2 Spd 1 3 Start Stop Rev Fwd 2 1Stop Type Ext Fault Spd 3 Spd 2 Spd 1 4 Start Stop Rev Fwd 2 1 Accel Ext Fault 2 1 Decel Spd 2 Spd 1 5 Start Stop Rev Fwd Pot Up Ext Fault Pot Dn Spd 2 Spd 1 6 Start Stop Rev Fwd Jog Ext Fault Loc Rem Spd 2 Spd 1 7 Start Stop Rev Fwd Ext Fault Jog Spd 2 Spd 1 8 Start Stop Rev Fwd Ext Fault Spd 3 Spd 2 Spd 1 9 Start Stop Pot Up Pot Dn Ext Fault Spd 3 Spd 2 Spd 1 10 Start Stop Rev Fwd Ext Fault Pot Up Pot Dn Spd 1 11 Start Stop 1st Accel 2nd Accel Ext Fault ist Decel 2nd Decel Spd 1 12 Run Fwd Stop Run Rev Loc Rem Ext Fault Spd 3 Spd 2 Spd 1 13 Run Fwd Stop Run Rev 2 1 Stop Type Ext Fault Spd 3 Spd 2 Spd 1 14 Run Fwd Stop Run Rev 2 1 Accel Ext Fault 2 1 Decel Spd 2 Spd 1 15 Run Fwd Stop Run Rev Pot Up Ext Fault Pot Dn Spd 2 Spd 1 16 Run Fwd Stop Run Rev Loc Rem Ext Fault 2 1 Stop Type Spd 2 Spd 1 17 Start Stop Rev Fwd Proc Trim Ext Fault Ramp Spd 2 Spd 1 18 Start Stop Rev Fwd Flux En Ext Fault Reset Spd 2 Spd 1 19 Start Stop Spd Trq 3 Spd Trq 2 Ext Fault Spd Trq 1 Proc Trim Spd 1 20 Start Stop Spd Trq 3 Spd Trq 2 Ext Fault Spd Trq 1 Flux En Spd 1 21 Start Stop Rev Fwd Ext Fault Ramp Reset Spd 1 22 Start Stop Spd Trq 3 Spd Trq 2 Ext Fault Spd Trq 1 Spd 2 Spd 1 23 Run Fwd Stop Run Rev Proc Trim Ext Fault Reset Spd 2 Spd 1 24 Run Fwd Stop Run Rev Flux En Ext Fault Reset Spd 2 Spd 1 25 Run Fwd
206. Block Function In7 Converting Between Drive Units and RPM This section is provided to help you convert between drive units and rpm The formula for the conversion is Speed Ref 1 X 65536 Speed Ref 1 Frac x Base motor speed 4096 x 65536 yrpm Using the Hysteresis Function Using the Function Block 10 23 As an example the following table shows several drive unit values converted to rpm A base speed of 1755 is used for this table Speed Reference Whole pie 32767 14039 99999346 4096 1755 00000000 1 0 42846680 0 0 42846026 0 0 21422686 0 0 00000654 4 1 50000645 4096 0 1755 00000000 The formula for converting from rpm to internal units is as follows y rpm base motor speed 4096 x 65536 65536 Whole Fractional remainder The following table shows several values in rpm converted to drive units Again a base speed of 1755 is used baer Speed Reference Whole 1755 4096 0 4284668 1 0 42846026 0 0 9 2 1755 4096 1 5 4 2000 4667 0 5 1 The hysteresis function lets you select a value based on whether Input 1 is greater than Input 4 or less than Input 5 If Input 1 is between Input 4 and Input 5 then the value does not change Figure 10 27 shows the parameters that are used for the hysteresis function and how these parameters are evaluated 10 24 Using the Function Block Figure 10 27 Hysteresis Function Block Func 1 Eval Sel
207. Bradley home page on the World Wide Web at http www ab com then select Drives followed by Product Information and Service Information Select document s 1060 pdf 230V drives and or 1070 pdf 460 and 575V drives e Standard Drives AutoFax service an automated system that you can call to request a faxed copy of the spare parts information or other technical document Simply call 440 646 6701 and follow the phone prompts to request document s 1060 230V drives and or 1070 460 and 575V drives F 2 Spare Parts Information Notes Numerics 2 3 wire control 8 4 4 20 mA application 9 11 400 motor current 9 7 to 9 8 A Absolute Overspd 11 17 B 31 Accel Time 1 11 20 B 8 Accel Time 2 11 20 B 8 add subtract function 10 10 fo 10 12 alarms See warnings An In 1 Offset 11 33 An In 1 Scale 11 33 An In 1 Value 11 33 wiring 2 21 An In 2 Filter BW 11 54 An In 2 Offset 11 34 An In 2 Scale 11 34 An In 2 Value 11 33 wiring 2 21 An In1 Filter BW 11 54 An Out 1 Offset 11 35 An Out 1 Scale 11 35 An Out 1 Value 11 34 wiring 2 23 An Out 2 Offset 11 35 An Out 2 Scale 11 35 An Out 2 Value 11 35 analog I O See I O analog autotune Autotune Errors 11 53 13 7 13 8 Autotune Speed 11 50 Autotune Status 11 48 13 13 Autotune Torque 11 49 Autotune Dgn Sel 11 51 13 2 checking status of 11 48 defined 13 1 faults 13 7 13 8 flux current test 13
208. Bus High Lim Set this bit only when bit 10 is set and the brake used on the drive is undersized Refer to Chapter 9 Applications Flux Braking Set to use an increase in the motor flux current to increase the motor losses and allow a faster deceleration time when there is no chopper brake or regenerative capability DC Hold Set to enable DC hold This applies DC current to the motor to attempt to hold zero speed in encoderless operation when the drive is stopped Parameter number 13 File group Application Flux Braking Application DC Braking Hold Application Fast Flux Up Application Bus Reg Control Parameter type linkable destination Display bits Factory default 00000000 00000000 Minimum value 00000000 00000000 Maximum value 11111111 11111111 Conversion 1 1 For additional information about Bus Brake Opts refer to Chapter 9 Applications and Chapter 12 Troubleshooting Important If you add a dynamic brake after completing the drive start up you must run start up again or manually adjust Regen Power Lim parameter 76 to the proper value If you do not the drive will be limited to 25 regen Bit Description 8 Fast Fluxup Set to enable fast flux up Fast Flux Level parameter 78 set the level of current used to build flux in the motor 9 DC Braking Set to apply DC current to the motor when a stop is commanded DC Brake Current parameter 79 sets the level and DC Brake Time parameter 80 sets the time 10 Brake Rege
209. C Current MULT e Limit Selection 120 rai lt I i Integrator 1 Inverter Heatsink 1 Temperature C i 1 i 100 Rated Inverter Iq in Motor Per Unit I I i i IT Inverter Protection Torque Limit Sts i Zo I 60 Sec 150 Inverter Current I 1 125 MS Filter i IT Inverter 1 To Motor i Protection Current i Limit i Selection I I I I I 150 Rated Inverter Iq in Motor Per Unit CD Fault Select 2 C23 gt f3 Warning Select 2 The inverter overload is designed to provide limits to ensure that the device ratings for the power semi conductors are not exceeded The inverter overload tests for excessive temperatures within the device and excessive current over time IT file Monitor group Drive Inv Status Control Block Diagrams B 33 For both the temperature tests and the current over time tests the internal reference Is is scaled in terms of percent rated motor current It is also scaled to the inverter For these conversions Nameplate Amps parameter 4 and Inverter Amps parameter 11 are also used Understanding the NTC Foldback Protection The NTC foldback protection test measures for excessive temperatures within the device To do this 1 The value of I which has been converted to inverter units is multiplied by 30 C 2 This value represents a temperature rise that is added to the actual inverter heatsink temperature 3 From the result of this sum 120
210. C and 50 C Figure Catalog Number Derate Figure D 1 100 AQ05 50 and 98 BRFO05 100 pias 94 of Drive 92 Rated Amps 90 88 86 84 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 12 Carrier Frequency in kHz Figure D 2 100 A010 and B020 95 90 of Drive 85 Rated Amps g0 75 70 85 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Carrier Frequency in kHz Figure D 3 100 A015 and B030 95 90 of Drive 85 Rated Amps g0 75 70 65 60 55 50 i i 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 i 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Carrier Frequency in kHz Figure D 4 100 A020 and B040 95 90 of Drive 85 Rated Amps g0 75 70 65 60 F i 1 1 1 1 1 T 1 1 1 I 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Carrier Frequency in kHz Figure D 5 100 A025 B050 and 95 BX060 90 of Drive 85 Rated Amps g0 75 70 65 60 55 50 45 a I 1 1 1 I 1 I l 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Carrier Frequency in kHz QE Standard rating for enclosed drive in 40 C ambient and open drive in 50 C ambient Derating Guidelines Derating factor for enclosed drive in ambient between 41 C and 50 C Figure Catalog Number Derate Figure D 6
211. Clear Fault 10 Ramp SP 2 owns the Ramp SCANport device 2 owns the Ramp 132 Flux Trim Owner Parameter number 132 File group Monitor Status SCANport Status You can use the lower byte of Flux Trim Owner bits 0 through 7 to see which SCANport device s are currently issuing a valid process trim command You can use the higher byte bits 8 through 15 to see which SCANport device s are presently issuing a valid flux command You can choose between Interface Comm SCANport Status Parameter type source Display bits Factory default not applicable 0 Flux trim input not present 1 Flux trim input present The bits are defined as follows Minimum value Maximum value Conversion 00000000 00000000 11111111 11111111 1 1 Refer to Chapter 8 Using the SCANport Capabilities for more information Bit Description Bit Description Bit Description 0 Trim L Opt 6 Trim SP 6 11 Flux SP 3 The L Option board owns the SCANport device 6 owns the SCANport device 3 owns the Trim Trim Flux 1 Trim SP 1 7 Trim P197 12 Flux SP 4 SCANport device 1 owns the Logic Cmd Input parameter 197 SCANport device 4 owns the Trim owns the Trim Flux 2 Trim SP 2 8 Flux L Opt 13 Flux SP 5 SCANport device 2 owns the The L Option owns the Flux SCANport device 5 owns the Trim 9 Flux SP 1 Flux 3 Trim SP 3 SCANport device 1 owns the 14 Flux SP 6 SCANport device 3 owns the Flux SCANport device 6 owns the Trim 10 Flux SP 2 Flux 4 Trim SP 4 SCANport
212. Diag Stop software Any hardware stop input Drive diagnostic inhibit 3 Extern Fault 9 Sftware Stop 15 Drive Fault External input open Any software stop input Any fault condition 4 Coast Fault 10 Start Jog A coast fault condition occurred Start and or jog is set 17 Logic Options Parameter number 17 s File group Control Drive Logic Select Use Logic Options to select the options for logic operation of the Parameter type mee dsrc drive Display bits If you set bits 1 2 and 3 the drive performs a coast to stop For Factory default 00010000 00001000 additional information about the stop types and priorities referto Minimum value 00000000 00000000 Appendix B Control Block Diagrams Maximum value 01111111 11111111 The bits are defined as follows Conversion 1 1 Bit Description Bit Description Bit Description 0 Reserved 7 Jog Coast 12 Coast Stop 2 Leave 0 1 selects jog coast Set to use a coast to stop Only 1 Coast Stop 1 0 selects regen stop used when L Option Mode Set to use a coast to stop 8 Start Diag par 116 is 3 13 or 16 2 CurLim Stop 1 Do diagnostics each time the 13 CurLim Stop 2 Set to use a current limit to stop drive is started Set to use a current limit to stop 3 Ramp Stop 1 9 Pwr Up Start Only used when L Option Mode Set to use a ramp to stop Set to enable the auto start par 116 is 3 13 or 16 4 5 Reserved feature on power up if a start is 14 Ramp Stop 2 Leave 0 valid Set to use a ramp to stop Only 6 Jog
213. EC or until Parameters is displayed To search through the links press INC or DEC until Links is displayed 5 Press ENTER The HIM searches through all parameters and displays any parameters links that are not at their factory defaults 6 Press INC or DEC to scroll through the list Using the Human Interface Module HIM C 9 Using the Control Status Mode Control Status mode lets you enable disable the drive logic and check the fault and warning queues Control Status mode is only available with a Series A version 3 0 or Series B HIM Using Control Logic The Control Logic option lets you disable the drive logic mask to prevent a serial fault when the HIM is removed with the drive power applied To use Control Logic From the status display press any key Choose Mode is shown Press INC or DEC to show Control Status Press ENTER Press INC or DEC until Control Logic is displayed Press ENTER Press SEL Press INC or DEC to select either Disabled or Enabled Press ENTER The logic mask is now disabled or enabled SAA oS Sy ja Viewing the Fault Queue Warning Queue To view either the fault or the warning queue 1 Press any key from the status display Choose Mode is shown 2 Press INC or DEC to show Control Status 3 Press ENTER 4 Press INC or DEC until Fault Queue or Warning Queue is displayed 5 Press ENTER 6 Press INC or DEC until View Queue is displayed 7 Press ENTER The fault queue can co
214. Encoder Feedback Mode Speed regulation requirements Applicable when requirements are larger than 0 5 of base speed May be applicable for requirements between 0 1 and 0 5 with manual adjustments Recommended for requirements smaller than 0 1 of base speed Minimum speed Applicable when the minimum speed is greater than 1 60 of base speed that is 30 rpm on a 60 Hz 4 pole motor May be applicable down to speeds of 1 120 of base speed 15 rpm if high bandwidth responses are not required Recommended for speeds less than 1 120 of base speed 15 rpm Maximum operating speed Depends on the number of motor poles A 4 pole motor has a maximum operating speed of 7200 rpm Depends on the number of motor poles A 4 pole motor has a maximum operating speed of 7200 rpm Maximum speed bandwidths Starting torque 30 radians second 150 of rated motor torque 100 radians second 150 of rated motor torque Torque regulation 5 2 Start into spinning motor Some cogging may occur Smooth start Speed range 120 1 1000 1 Output frequency range 0 250 Hz 0 250 Hz Erratic operation including cogging may result at speeds less than 1 60 of base speed 2 You can use Min Speed Limit parameter 215 to adjust the minimum speed 3 The maximum speed bandwidths are with no inertia connected to the motor The maximum achievable bandwidths decrease with increasing connected inertia
215. File group Profile Test Data Parameter 288 sets the rpm value for this step Scaling 4096 Parameter type Setup Base Speed Display X x rpm Factory default 0 0 rpm Minimum value 8 x base sp Maximum value 8 x base sp Conversion 4096 base sp 2 Parameter number 289 39 Step 14 Value File group Profile Test Data Parameter 289 sets the time in seconds for time steps the Parameter type Setup counts in units for encoder steps and the TB3 input to triggeron Display x xS x X X units for TB Input steps Scaling Factory default 0 0 0 0 0 Time Step 10 x desired value 10 1 0 sec Minimum value 0 0 0 0 0 3276 7 5 3276 7 10 1 0 sec x TBin 10 1 unit Encoder Step 10 1 0 units Maximum value TB Input Step dependent on L Option Mode Sel See P241 Conversion 290 Parameter number 290 Step 14 Type File group Profile Test Data Parameter 290 selects the type of step to be used Parameter type Setup 0 Not Used This forces an End Action Display x 1 Time Step operate at speed shown in P288 for time in P289 Factory default 0 2 TBS Input Step operate at speed shown in P288 until this Minimum value 0 input goes true Maximum value 3 3 Encoder Step operate at speed shown in P288 for units in Conversion None P289 291 Parameter number 291 a Step 15 Speed File group Profile Test Data Parameter 291 sets the rpm value for this step Scaling 4096 Parameter type Setup Base Speed Display x x rpm Factory d
216. Function 0 00 0 cece eee 10 5 Using the State Machine Function 000 c cece cece e eee eee 10 8 Using the Add Subtract Function 0 ccc cece eee eee 10 10 Using the Maximum Minimum Function 00 0 0c cece eee ees 10 12 Using the Up Down Counter Function 00 00 e cece eee eee eee 10 14 Using the Multiply Divide Function 00 00 c cece cere eee eee 10 18 Using the Scale Function 0 0 cece cece eee eens 10 20 Using the Hysteresis Function 0 0 cece eee eee 10 23 Using the Band Function aaa 10 26 Using the Logical Add Subtract Function ccc e eee eee ees 10 26 Using the Logical Multiply Divide Function 0 0000 eee ee eae 10 27 Chapter 11 Chapter Objectives 0 0 cece eect eee eens 11 1 Understanding the Parameter Files and Groups 0 e0e sues 11 1 Numerical Parameter Listing 0 0 cece eee 11 5 Alphabetical Parameter Listing 0 c cece eee eee eee 11 7 Parameter Conventions 0 ccc cece eee e teen eee e eee eae 11 9 Chapter 12 Chapter Objectives inns occ ee ers teed aes faveed eg a ade See ees tad 12 1 Required Equipment 0c cece eee eee eee eet RA 12 1 FaultWarning Handling 0 cece eect eee eee eens 12 2 Viewing the Fault and Warning Queues on the HIM 0008 12 6 What Are the Fault Descriptions 2 0 eee eee eae 12 7 Understanding Precharge and Ridethro
217. Function Sel If Then Function Int gt In4 In2 gt Out 1 Output 1 Int lt In5 In3 gt Out 1 Function unction Ins C204 In5 lt Int lt In4 No change Function In4 207D Function In5 C208 Hysteresis Function Block The hysteresis function provides a band in which the output value does not change For example if an input value is greater than Input 4 the output value is Input 2 As the input value decrease the output value remains Input 2 until the input value is less than Input 5 Refer to Figure 10 28 Figure 10 28 Hysteresis Output Values Hysteresis Band No Change Using the Function Block 10 25 As an example you could use the hysteresis function to fine tune the speed regulator across a broad speed range and ensure that the drive does not oscillate between the two configurations at any particular speed To ensure that the speed regulator is finely tuned at both the low and the high speed in the range the drive is tuned for each speed and the two values of Spd Desired BW parameter 161 are noted The drive uses the low value when it is at low speed It uses the high value when it is at high speed When it is between the high speed and low speed it uses the last specified value This example is shown in Figure 10 29 Figure 10 29 Example of Hysteresis Speed High value is used Start Stop Time To set up the function block for this application you would need to en
218. Less than 1 0 A lag filter is produced Equal to 1 0 The feedback filter is disabled Equal to 0 0 A simple low pass filter is produced You need to set this parameter if Fdbk Filter Sel parameter 65 is set to 3 67 Fdbk Filter BW Parameter number 67 Use Fdbk Filter BW to establish the breakpoint frequency in radians for the speed feedback lead lag filter You need to set this parameter if Fdbk Filter Sel parameter 65 is set to 3 File group Parameter type Display Factory default Minimum value Maximum value Conversion Control Speed Feedback linkable destination x x radians second 100 0 radians second 0 2 radian second 900 0 radians second 10 1 0 11 26 Parameters 68 Spd Trq Mode Sel Parameter number 68 Use Spd Trq Mode Sel to select the source for the drive torque TESNE control Sposa ld Moge arameter type linkable destination reference Spd Trq Mode Sel operates as a selector switch The Display bits position of the selector determines the torque reference selection Factory default 1 as follows Minimum value 0 Maximum value 5 Conversion 11 For a more detailed description of these bits refer to the Torque Reference Overview section in Appendix B Control Block Diagrams Value Description Value Description Value Description 0 Zero Torque 3 Min Trq Spd 5 Sum Trq Spd Zero Torque Selects the smallest value when Selects the sum of the torque 1 Speed Reg the torque reference and the reference and Spe
219. Lugs should be crimped according to manufacturer s tool instructions If required Rockwell Automation can supply lug kits for lugs shown above Kits do not include crimping tools Consult factory for kit information 3 5 16 Stud All other studs are 3 8 4 8 Mounting and Wiring Information Specific to Frames B C D E F G and H Hard Wiring Your I O You can use terminal blocks TB10 and TB11 for hard wiring your T O These terminals are shown in Figure 4 6 Figure 4 6 Reference Signal Connections Re TB11 l p a PT l 123456789 10 T l SATAAN AOAC Supply f Relay 1 Relay 3 Default At Speed Default Not Fault Voltage l Clearance SH Shield Relay 2 Relay 4 Default Enable Default Not Warning DC Power Run Alarm Supply 10V Com 10V TB10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 212 20000000000e 0000000000 SH SH SH SH SH ee ee ee Analog Analog 4 20mA__ Pulse Analog Analog 4 20 mA Input 1 Input 2 Input Source Output 1 Output 2 Output
220. MS 210 File group Application Prog Function Use Function In7 to provide input to the function block that is Parameter type linkable destination provided with the 1336 IMPACT drive Conversion 1 1 For the timer delay function block Function In7 specifies the If Function Sel parameter 212 is O 10 12 then value to pass to Function Output 1 parameter 213 when the Display bits timer delay evaluation is false Factory default 00000000 00000000 For the state machine function block Function In7 is used for the Minimum value 00000000 00000000 output if the evaluation of Function In2 parameter 201 is true Maximum value 11111111 11111111 and the evaluation of Function In1 parameter 198 and the timer If Function Sel parameter 212 is 11 function are false Display x For the scale function Function In7 is the lower word of the value Factory default 0 that you want to use as either the minimum or maximum value for Minimum value 32767 the output The upper word of this value is specified in Function Maximum value 32767 In6 parameter 209 If Function Sel parameter 212 is 13 then For the counter function Function In7 is used for the Cnt Clr Display tx value By default the value is 0 This value can be changed by Factory default 0 the user Minimum value 0 f Maximum value 65535 1 Funeton inz Was addediinVersion 2Xx Refer to Chapter 10 Using the Function Block for more information 211 Function In8 Parameter number ee 211 File group A
221. Manual 0 0 0 eeta o cece nena 1 1 Terms and Abbreviations 0 eect ee eee 1 3 Common Techniques Used in this Manual 0 c0c cence neces 1 5 Allen Bradley Support a nunnana 1 5 Chapter 1 Chapter Objectives u un ennnen 1 1 What Features Does the 1336 IMPACT Drive Provide a an 1 1 How Do Read the Catalog Number 00 ccc e eee eee 1 3 What is a Frame Designator 0 0 0 cece cen ene 1 4 Hardware OvervieW 0 c cece aaa 1 5 Where Do Go From Here 0 0 cece cee eee eee eee 1 6 Chapter 2 Chapter Obj ctiveSwiis as ecetavvs Pes dauese esha es cette ees Lense ey 2 1 Before Mounting Your Drive 0 eee ects 2 2 Input Fuses and Circuit Breakers 2 0 00 cece eee eee 2 5 Mounting Your Drive ser ecca0s it Picasa teas era eee aes 2 10 Grounding Your Drive 00 cece cette eee eee 2 14 Wiring the PONEC iwi eee ste wits Satew se oan AE Sates ee od ka ena od 2 17 Hard Wiring Your lO sicnessvs trin vE PTEE A ayes EVENAAR 2 21 Connecting Your Gateway susue 2 24 Installing an Interface Board 2 cece eee enna 2 25 Connecting the Power to the Drive 0 0 0 0 cece cece eee 2 25 Disconnecting the Drive Output 0 eee 2 27 Starting and Stopping the Motor 0 0 cece eee eee eee ee 2 27 Electrical Interference EMI RFI 6 eee eee 2 28 Do Need an RFI Filter 2 00 0 eee eee 2 28 Chapter 3 Chapter Objectives 0 0 00 cc cece e
222. N 4000 65 000 HMCPS050K2C G 65 000 1336E C040 30 40 140 CMN 6300 50 000 HMCPS050K2C G 65 000 1336E C050 37 50 140 CMN 6300 50 000 HMCPS100R3C E 65 000 1336E C060 45 60 140 CMN 6300 50 000 HMCPS100R3C E 65 000 1336E C075 56 75 140 CMN 9000 25 000 HMCPS100R3C G 65 000 1336E C100 75 100 KTA3 160S 125 65 000 HMCP150T4C E 65 000 1336E C125 93 125 KTA3 160S 160 65 000 HMCP150T4C E 65 000 1336E C150 112 150 KTA3 400S 160 65 000 HMCP150T4C G 65 000 1336E C200 149 200 KTA 400S 320 65 000 HMCP250J5 65 000 1336E C250 187 250 KTA3 400S 320 65 000 HMCP400W5 G 65 000 1336E CX300 224 300 KTA3 400S 320 65 000 HMCP400W5 H 65 000 1336E C300 224 300 KTA3 400S 320 65 000 HMCP400W5 H 65 000 1336E C350 261 350 KTA3 400S 320 65 000 NA NA NA 1336E C400 298 400 KTA3 400S 320 65 000 NA NA NA 1336E C450 336 450 NA NA NA NA NA 1336E C500 373 500 NA NA NA NA NA 1336E C600 448 600 NA NA NA NA NA NA Not Available use fuses Bulletin 140 At 480 volts circuit breaker must have a fuse backup Refer to the AB Industrial Control Catalog At 600 volts additional restrictions apply No limitations in source short circuit ratings HMCP Circuit Breaker HMCP Breaker is a magnetic trip device only Always set the trip setting as low as possible in a particular application 3Current limiting option can extend this value to 200 000A RMS 2 8 Mounting and Wiring Your 1336 IMPACT
223. N41 11 Reference N41 21 Datalink A1 N41 31 Datalink A2 N41 41 Datalink B1 N41 51 Datalink B2 N41 61 Datalink C1 N41 71 Datalink C2 N41 8 Datalink D1 Message Handler Logic Evaluation Block SP An In2 Value p 137 Data In A1 p 140 Data In A2 p 141 Data In B1 p 142 Data In B2 p 143 DF1 DH485 p 142 p 143 Data In C1 p 144 p 145 p 146 p 147 Serial Messages Write Data In C2 p 145 Data In D1 p 146 Data In D2 p 147 N41 91 Datalink D2 N40 0 63 BTR Emulation N41 0 Logic Status N41 11 Feedback N41 21 Datalink A1 DF1 DH485 N41 3 Datalink A2 Serial Messages N41 4 Datalink B1 Read N41 5 Datalink B2 N41 61 Datalink C1 N41 71 Datalink C2 N41 31 Datalink D1 N41 9 Datalink D2 Message Handler Drive Inv Status p 15 SP An Output p 139 Data Out A1 p 148 Data Out A2 p 149 Data Out B1 p 150 Data Out B2 p 151 Data Out C1 p 152 Data Out C2 p 153 Data Out D1 p 154 Data Out D2 p 155 1 Optionally enabled using DIP switches on the adapter 8 12 Using the SCANport Capabilities Remote I O Communications Module The following figure shows how the I O image table for the programmable controller relates to the 1336 IMPACT drive when a Remote I O Communications Module is used RIO SCANport PLC I O 1203 Gx1 1336 IMPACT Drive Image Remote I O Communications Output Image Module Block Transfer Logic Command Reference Datalink A1 1 Datali
224. Output is a word Input In7 Reserved Must be 0 In1 is true if TB3 28 is closed C7 gt L Option In Sts Function Int Enter 00000000 10000000 Func 1 Mask Val Function Output 1 Enter 0 This value is not used Function In2 Enter 0 This value is not used Func 2 Mask Val Func 3 Eval Sel 2 In3 Logic Input Sts Function In3 Enter 01110000 00000000 Func 3 Mask Val Set Enter 4096 which is 1000H Function In8 par 211 0 rpm Function In4 Speed Ref 1 par 29 25 rpm Enter 0 Speed Ref 2 par 31 50 rpm Speed Ref 3 par 32 100 rpm Speed Ref 4 par 33 500 rpm Enter 0 Speed Ref 5 par 34 250 rom Function In6 Speed Ref 6 par 35 125 rpm Enter 0 Up Down Counter Speed Ref 7 par 36 40 rpm L Option Mode par 116 8 Function In7 Function Block Dir Ref Mask par 125 01111111 01111110 This works as shown in Figure 10 21 10 18 Using the Function Block Figure 10 21 Example of a Shuitle oP Gi B C D E F G poH TB3 28 inc if 1 1 i TB3 23 fwd L TB3 22 rev TB3 19 start TB3 20 stop 24 volts TB3 21 common Shuttle moves from A to H Shuttle moves from H to A Shuttle is closing switch A forward direction and stop commanded Shuttle closes switch H reverse direction and stop commanded User presses and holds start button until switch A opens increment Speed User presses and holds start button until switch H opens inc
225. P light flashes green e The drive continues to run If a particular bit is not set in either Fault Select 1 or Warning Select 1 the drive ignores the condition when it occurs Most of the group 1 fault warning configuration options deal with DC bus conditions These bus conditions deal with the bus precharge and any type of ridethrough conditions The bus precharge and ridethrough conditions are covered later in this chapter If you are using bits 9 14 to ignore communication errors please read the following ATTENTION Hazard of personal injury or equipment damage exist If you command a start or jog and then disconnect the programming device the drive will not fault if you have the SCANport communications fault set to be ignored for that port Configuring Faults and Warnings Group 2 You can configure which of the following faults you want to trip the drive by using Fault Select 2 parameter 22 and Warning Select 2 parameter 23 Fault Select 2 and Warning Select 2 both have the following bit definitions This bit With this text Is defined as 0 SpdFdbk Loss an ee SaaS information from the digital 1 InvOvtmp Pnd An inverter overtemperature is pending 3 MtrOvid Pend A motor overload I2T is pending 4 MtrOvid Trip A motor overload I2T trip has occurred 5 Mir Stall The motor has stalled 6 ExtFaultin An external fault has occurred 9 Param Limit A parameter is out of limits 10
226. PTrim Ki 11 22 B 11 PTrim Kp 11 23 B 11 PTrim Lo Limit 11 23 B 12 PTrim Out Gain 11 24 PTrim Output 11 21 B 11 PTrim Preload 11 22 B 11 PTrim Reference 11 21 B 11 PTrim Select 11 22 B 11 publications related 1 3 Pulse In Offset 7 11 to 7 12 11 39 Pulse In PPR 7 11 fo 7 12 11 38 Pulse In Scale 7 11 to 7 12 11 38 Pulse In Value 7 11 to 7 12 11 39 pulse input 7 11 to 7 12 PWM Frequency 11 11 PwrUp FIt Status 11 70 R Ramp CIFIt Owner 11 43 Regen Power Lim 11 27 13 9 B 21 for bus regulator braking 9 3 Relay Config 1 7 10 11 36 Relay Config 2 7 10 11 56 Relay Config 3 7 10 11 57 Relay Config 4 7 10 11 58 Relay Setpoint 1 7 10 11 37 Relay Setpoint 2 7 10 11 56 Relay Setpoint 3 7 10 11 57 Relay Setpoint 4 7 10 11 58 relay wiring 2 23 remote pot 9 12 to 9 14 Rev Speed Limit 11 20 13 9 B 7 RFI filter 2 28 to 2 29 grounding 2 17 installing 2 29 ridethrough disable all 11 12 explained 12 15 timeout 11 15 11 16 12 4 12 18 rpm converting to drive units 10 22 Run Inhibit Sts 11 14 S scale function 10 20 to 10 23 Scaled Spd Fdbk 11 24 scaling 9 8 SCANport Clr Fit Res Mask 11 41 configuring controls 8 3 to 8 7 connections for frames A1 A4 1 5 connections for frames B H 1 6 control ownership 8 3 determining function ownership 8 5 Dir Ref Mask 11 40 Dir Ref Owner 11 41 disabling control functions 8 6 enabling contro
227. Ramp En 10 Reserved used when L Option Mode Set to enable the jog ramp Leave 0 par 116 is 3 13 or 16 11 Bipolar Sref 15 Reserved 1 selects bipolar reference Leave 0 0 selects unipolar reference 18 Stop Dwell Time Parameter number 18 Use Stop Dwell Time to set an adjustable delay time before the drive disables speed and torque regulators when a stop has been initiated File group Parameter type Display Factory default Minimum value Maximum value Conversion Control Drive Logic Select linkable destination x x seconds 0 0 seconds 0 0 seconds 10 0 seconds 10 1 0 Parameters 19 Zero Speed Tol Parameter number 19 File grou Control Drive Logic Select Use Zero Speed Tol to establish a band around zero speed that EA A type linkable rE ar is used to determine when the drive considers the motor to be at Display x x rpm zero speed Bit 12 At Zero Spd in Drive Inv Status Factory default base motor speed 100 rpm parameter 15 indicates this Imire 0 0 rpm Maximum value 8 x base motor speed rpm Conversion 4096 base motor speed 20 Fault Select 1 Parameter number 20 Use Fault Select 1 to specify how the drive should handle certain conditions Each bit within this parameter matches the bit definitions of Warning Select 1 parameter 21 If you set bit s to 1 in this parameter the drive reports a fault when that condition occurs If you clear bit s to 0 the drive reports the condition based on Warnin
228. Rate 5 If all bits are clear 0 the slew rate is 0 05 V second If more than one bit is set the first bit that is set is used for the slew rate For most applications the default slew rate of 0 05V second which is 1 volt in 20 seconds should be appropriate 12 22 Troubleshooting Understanding the Parameter Limit Faults file Fault Setup group Testpoints If you receive a Param Limit fault 03057 or warning 03089 the drive has limited the value of one or more parameters When you enter a parameter value from a programming device such as a Human Interface Module HIM the drive checks the value against the minimum and maximum parameter range However parameter values can also change as a result of a link to that parameter When a parameter value is changed indirectly by a link the drive performs additional limit checking on several critical parameters For example if you create a link between Pos Mtr Cur Lim parameter 72 and An In 1 Value parameter 96 An In I Value could change the value of Pos Mtr Cur Lim If the analog input level exceeds the range of Pos Mtr Cur Lim the drive limits the data value that is stored as a current limit When this happens a parameter limit condition has occurred You can configure the drive to report a parameter limit condition as either a fault or a warning or to ignore the condition To You need to Report the condition as a fault Set bit 9 in Faul
229. Ref 7 Spd Select 3 2 1 ao aa COCO O a O 0 0 00 Specifications Common Common Common Encoder B Encoder NOT A Encoder NOT B Encoder A 12V 200mA max Encoder Common L Option 1 Status Stop Clr Fit Status Status Status Status Status Status Enable 2 Start Stop Clr Fit Rev Fwd Jog Ext Fit Spd Sel 3 Spd Sel 2 Spd Sel 1 Enable 3 Start Stop Clr Fit Rev Fwd Stop Type Ext Fit Spd Sel 3 Spd Sel 2 Spd Sel 1 Enable 4 Start Stop Clr Fit Rev Fwd Accel 2 1 Ext Fit Decel 2 1 Spd Sel 2 Spd Sel 1 Enable 5 Start Stop Clr Fit Rev Fwd MOP Incr Ext Fit MOP Decr _ Spd Sel 2 Spd Sel 1 Enable 6 Start Stop Clr Fit Rev Fwd Jog Ext Fit Loc Rem Spd Sel 2 Spd Sel 1 Enable L Start Stop Clr Fit Reverse Forward Ext Fit Jog Spd Sel 2 Spd Sel 1 Enable 8 Start Stop Clr Fit Reverse Forward Ext Fit Spd Sel 3 Spd Sel 2 Spd Sel 1 Enable 9 Start Stop Clr Fit MOP Incr MOP Decr Ext Fit Spd Sel 3 Spd Sel 2 Spd Sel 1 Enable 10 Start Stop Clr Fit Reverse __ Forward Ext Fit MOP Incr MOP Decr Spd Sel 1 Enable 11 Start Stop Clr Fit Accel 1 Accel 2 Ext Fit Decel 1 Decel 2 Spd Sel 1 Enable 12 RunFwd Stop Cir Fit Run Rev Loc Rem Ext Fit Spd Sel3 Spd Sel 2 Spd Sel 1 Enable 13 RunFwd Stop Clr Fit Run Rev Stop Type Ext Fit Spd Sel 3 Spd Sel 2 Spd Sel 1 Enable 14 RunFwd Stop Clr Fit Run Rev Accel 2 1 Ext Fit Decel 2 1 Spd Sel 2 Spd Sel 1 Enable 15 Run Fwd
230. Sel ind Off Time State Machine Int In5 On Time 8 Andini Then this lf In2 is Timer is output is used False False In3 Function False True In6 Output 1 Func 2 Eval Sel True False n7 P True True In8 lt 213 gt gt Function In2 C201 gt Outi Func 2 Mask Val C202 gt Add Subtract Function 9 Int In2 Outi Output 2 Func 3 Eval SID 214 gt gt Out2 Function In3 204 gt 10 Int In2 gt max Outt Int In2 lt min Outt Func 3 Mask Val In3 If Then False min gt Out1 Function In4 C207 gt True max gt Outi Function In5 208 gt Up Down Counter Function In C209 gt 1 Count up rising edge Futon CBD cece Function In8 C211 D a Function In9 C232 gt ra Won Outi E n10 True Double word gt Out1 Out2 Multiply Divide 12 In1 x In2 In3 Out1 Out2 Ind If Then False Per unit math is used True Standard math is used False Value of 0 True Value other than 0 13 In Out Int In2 In4 In5 Outi Out2 In3 In6 In7 Function Block Continued on Next Page Using the Function Block 10 3 Continued from Previous Page 14 In4 Hi In5 Lo In2 In1 gt In4 gt Out1 In3 In1 lt In5 gt Out1 In5 lt In1 lt In4 gt Out1 no change In4 Hi In5 Lo In2 In5 lt In1 lt In4 gt Outi In3 not In5 lt In1 lt In4 gt Out Logical Add Subtract Int Or In2 Ind Nor In2 Int And In2
231. Sel See P241 Conversion 10 1 0 sec x TBib 10 1 unit Parameter number 275 ae Step 9 Type File group Profile Test Data Parameter 275 selects the type of step to be used Parameter type Setup 0 Not Used This forces an End Action Display x 1 Time Step operate at speed shown in P273 for time in P274 Factory default 0 2 TBS Input Step operate at speed shown in P273 until this Minimum value 0 input goes true Maximum value 3 Conversion 3 Encoder Step operate at speed shown in P273 for units in P274 Parameters 11 81 27 Parameter number 276 p Step 10 Speed File group Profile Test Data Parameter 276 sets the rpm value for this step Scaling 4096 Parameter type Setup Base Speed Display X X rpm Factory default 0 00 rpm Minimum value 8 x base speed Maximum value 8 x base speed Conversion 277 Parameter number 277 Step 10 Value File group Profile Test Data Parameter 277 sets the time in seconds for time steps the Parameter type Setup counts in units for encoder steps and the TB3 input to trigger on Display x xS x X X units for TB Input steps Scaling Factory default 0 0 0 0 0 Time Step 10 x desired value 10 1 0 sec Minimum value 0 0 0 0 0 Encoder Step 10 1 0 units Maximum value 3276 7 5 3276 7 TB Input Step dependent on L Option Mode Sel See P241 Conversion 10 1 0 sec x TBin 10 1 unit 278 Parameter number 278 Step 10 Type File group Profile Test Data Paramet
232. Speed Ref 6 Closed Closed Open Speed Ref 7 Closed Closed Closed Last State Closed Applied 1 Open Removed 0 file nterface Comm group SCANport Analog file Interface Comm group Analog Inputs Example 1 For the first example input mode 2 has been selected The application calls for a local Human Interface Module HIM speed command or remote 4 20mA from a PLC To program the drive for this example 1 Set the value of SP An InI Select parameter 133 to 1 2 Set the value of SP An InI Scale parameter 135 to 0 125 3 Link SP An Inl Value parameter 134 to Speed Ref 1 parameter 29 4 Set mA In Offset parameter 103 to 0 5 Set mA In Scale parameter 104 to 2 6 Link mA In Value parameter 102 to Speed Ref 2 parameter 31 5 10 Using the L Option With Speed Select inputs 2 and 3 open and the selector switch set to Remote Speed Select 1 closed the drive follows Speed Ref 2 parameter 31 or 4 20mA With the switch set to Local Speed Select 1 open all speed select inputs are open and the drive follows the local HIM Speed Ref J parameter 29 Example 2 For the second example input mode 7 has been selected The application follows a local HIM unless a preset speed is selected To program the drive for this example 1 Set the value of SP An InI Select parameter 133 to 1 2 Set the value of SP An InI Scale parameter 135 to 0 125 3 Link SP An Inl Value p
233. Stop Type 1 The stop types are set up in Logic Options parameter 17 Accel Time I parameter 42 and Accel Time 2 parameter 43 and Decel Time I parameter 44 and Decel Time 2 parameter 45 are selected by modes 4 11 and 14 Otherwise the acceleration deceleration times follow Accel Time 1 and Decel Time 1 If the L Option mode is not 1 the L Option speed reference takes ownership of the speed reference To let other devices control speed reference disable the L Option speed reference with Dir Ref Mask parameter 124 for modes 4 7 10 11 14 25 or set Speed Ref 1 2 and 3 7 for modes 2 3 8 9 12 and 13 If you select modes 19 20 or 22 the L Option board takes precedence over Spd Trq Mode Sel parameter 68 Configuring the Manually Operated Potentiometer MOP Function The L Option I O modes 5 9 and 15 control the Manually Operated Potentiometer MOP function The MOP up and MOP down increment and decrement MOP Value parameter118 based on MOP Increment parameter 117 which is in rpm per second To control speed you need to link MOP Value to a speed reference Chapter Objectives Understanding the Logic Input Sts Parameter file Monitor group Drive Inv Status SCANport Definition Chapter 8 Using the SCANport Capabilities Chapter 8 provides information for changing the default configuration to customize the way SCANport works for you This topic Starts on page
234. T drive 8 Using SCANport Provides information to help you use SCANport 9 Applications Provides information about various applications for which you can use the 1336 P IMPACT drive 10 Using the Function Block Provides information and examples to help you use the provided function block 11 Parameters Provides information about the available parameters 12 Troubleshooting Explains how to interpret and correct problems with your drive 13 Understanding the Auto tuning Procedure Provides information to help you solve problems that were reported during the motor tune routine A Specifications Provides specifications and reference tables for the 1336 IMPACT drive B Control Block Diagrams E information to help you better understand the capabilities of your C Using the Human Interface Module HIM Provides information to help you use your Human Interface Module HIM D Derating Guidelines Provides the derating graphs for the 1336 IMPACT drive E CE Conformity Provides information regarding CE conformity F Spare Parts Information Provides information for locating spare parts ATTENTION This board contains ESD electrostatic discharge sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if you do not follow ESD control precautions If you are not familiar with static control procedures refer to Guarding Against Electrostatic Dam
235. TN TN o AC Input Line To Motor 1 User supplied Selecting the Proper Lug Kit for D E F G and H frame drives have stud type terminals and or bus Your System bars bolts that require standard crimp type connectors for cable termination Connectors such as T amp B COLOR KEYED Connectors or equivalent are recommended Table 4 A shows the lug selection for one possible cable choice Choose connectors for each installation based on the desired cable sizes the application requirements and all applicable national state and local codes Mounting and Wiring Information Specific to Frames B C D E Table 4 A Lug Selection F G and H 4 7 Drive Catalog AC Input R S T Output U V W and PE DC DC Number Cable per Phase T amp B Part No Cable per Phase T amp B Part No Cable per Phase T amp B Part No Qty mm AWG Qty Number Qty mm AWG Qty Number Qty mm AWG Qty Number mea lo 13 8 170 8 54153 54135 renos o o o fs o po fo as o feso o ns 1336E A060 1 107 2 4 0 8 1541688 1 13 3 6 2 541353 1 21 2 4 1 1541393 1336E A075 2 153 5 1 0 8 54109T 1 33 6 2 2 54109 1 21 2 4 1 1541393 8 54109B 1336E A100 2 85 0 3 0 8 54111T a 42 4 1 2 54148 1 33 6 2 a 1541428 8 54111B
236. TOP Drive Press RED button Press STOP Step 9 If you want to run the auto tune tests with 50 motor current press ENTER If 50 motor current is not enough to run the tests on your system the start up procedure will time out and let you increase the percentage To use a different percentage of current Tune Drive with u l F g gt Step 1 9 50 Current y 1 Use INC or DEC to toggle the Y to an N tep 10 2 Press ENTER 3 Press SEL 4 Use INC or DEC to enter the percentage you want to use 5 Press ENTER Press START The inductance resistance flux current and inertia tests are run at this time The display section shows you which auto tune test is currently running 10 Motor May Rotate ATTENTION Hazard of personal injury exists Even thoughthe motormay Step 11 Press GREEN STRT not rotate during the first three tests the motor will rotate during the inertia test 11 Tune Complete Press ENTER Press ENTER 6 10 Configuring the Digital Section Starting Up Your System Follow these steps to configure the digital section Step At this prompt You need to Go to Press ENTER if you want to set up the relay output Step 2 Configure the 1 Relay Output Y If you do not want to set up the relay output use INC or DEC to toggle the Y to an N Step 4 Press ENTER Press SEL Decide what you want the function of TB10 pins 1 and 2 for frames A1 A4 or TB11 pins 1 and 2 f
237. Test Select 2 95 11 32 Torque Limit Sts 87 11 30 Torque Ref 1 69 11 26 Total Inertia 157 11 48 Trans Dgn Config 172 11 51 Units Traveled 246 11 76 Value Tolerance 244 11 75 Vd Max 170 11 51 Vq Max 171 11 51 Warning Select 1 21 11 16 Warning Select 2 23 11 17 Warning Status 1 223 11 71 Warning Status 2 224 11 72 Zero Speed Tol 19 11 15 Parameters 11 9 Parameter Conventions The remainder of this chapter describes the parameters available for the 1336 IMPACT drive Parameter descriptions follow these conventions Par Parameter Name Parameter Number 1 Parameter Description File group f file and group Parameter type 3 destination or source Display g user units Factory default 5 drive factory setting Minimum Value 6 minimum value acceptable Maximum value 7 maximum value acceptabe Conversion 8 drive units display units Enums 2 values 1 Parameter number Each parameter is assigned a unique number The number is used to read or write information to and from that parameter 2 File group This lists the file and group where the parameter is located A parameter may be listed in more than one file and group Other parameters may not be listed in any file or group and must be accessed through the linear list 3 Parameter type Three types of parameters are available source The value is changed only by the drive and is used to monitor values destination The value is changed through programming Destinations are c
238. The drive feels the motor is not fluxed up 5 Stopping 21 Jogging The drive is stopping The motor is jogging 34 6 Not Stopping 22 Not Jogging The drive is not stopping The motor is not jogging 7 Stopped 23 At Limit 35 The drive is stopped The motor is at the limit shown in Torque 8 Not Stopped Limit Sts parameter 87 The drive is not stopped 24 Not At Lim 9 Accelerating The motor is not at the limit shown in The motor is accelerating Torque Limit Sts parameter 87 36 10 Not Accel 25 gt Speed The motor is not accelerating 11 Decelerating The motor is decelerating 26 12 Not Decel The motor is not decelerating 13 At Set Speed 27 The motor is at the requested speed 14 Not Set Sp 28 The motor is not at the requested speed 15 At Zero Spd The motor is at zero speed 1 Added for Version 2 xx The motor speed is greater than or equal to Relay Setpoint 1 parameter 115 lt Speed The motor speed is less than Relay 37 Setpoint 1 parameter 115 gt Current The motor current is greater than or equal to Relay Setpoint 1 parameter 115 38 lt Current The motor current is less than Relay Setpoint 1 parameter 115 Value Description Faulted 1 1 A fault has occurred Not Faulted A fault has not occurred Warning A warning has occurred Not Warning A warning has not occurred Enable Power is being applied to the motor Not Enable Power is not motor being
239. The drive is stopping The motor is jogging 34 Not Enable 6 Not Stopping 22 Not Jogging Power is not being applied to the The drive is not stopping The motor is not jogging motor 7 Stopped 23 At Limit 35 Function Val The drive is stopped The motor is at the limit shown in True when the value of Function 8 Not Stopped Torque Limit Sts parameter 87 Output 1 par 213 and or the The drive is not stopped 24 Not At Lim value of Function Output 2 9 Accelerating The motor is not at the limit shown in par 214 are zero The motor is accelerating Torque Limit Sts parameter 87 36 Not Function Val 10 Not Accel 25 gt Speed True when the values of both The motor is not accelerating The motor speed is greater than or equal Function Output 1 par 213 and 11 Decelerating to Relay Setpoint 4 parameter 192 Function Output 2 par 214 The motor is decelerating 26 lt Speed are zero 12 Not Decel The motor speed is less than Relay 37 Function T F The motor is not decelerating Setpoint 4 parameter 192 True when timer or logical state of 13 At Set Speed 27 gt Current add sub or mult div is true based The motor is at the requested The motor current is greater than or equal on the selected function block speed to Relay Setpoint 4 parameter 192 38 Function T F 14 Not Set Sp 28 lt Current False when timer or logical state of The motor is not at the requested The motor current is less than add sub or mult div is false based speed Relay Setpoin
240. This can be verified by resetting the drive or cycling power to clear the encoder position feedback parameters 227 amp 228 Rotate the shaft one revolution and observe the value of parameter 227 This should be four times greater than the value of the encoder PPR parameter 8 Step Rotation Distance In Motor Shaft Revolutions To define all encoder Step Value parameter units as graduated in whole revolutions set the Count Per Unit parameter CPU equal to 4 x the PPR parameter 8 For Example For a single revolution in a drive with a 1024 PPR encoder CPU P245 4 x 1024 P8 4096 With the CPU parameter set entering a value of 100 in the Step 1 Value parameter 250 will cause the profile control to command the Step 1 Speed until the motor has turned 100 revolutions P249 Step 1 Speed 1726 P250 Step 1 Value 100 0 units revs P251 Step 1 Type 3 Encoder To have one encoder unit equal two motor revolutions CPU P245 2 revs x 4 PPR 8 x PPR P8 To have one value parameter unit equal 1 2 revolution CPU P245 1 2 x 4 PPR P8 2 x PPR P8 Step Value parameters can be entered in 1 10th unit increments Applications 9 27 Figure 9 12 Example Single Encoder Step1 Step 1 Speed Approximate Decel Accel Rate Rate P44 Speed P42 l Value Tolerance P244 Time Target Position 100 Revs Determining the End of an Encoder Step The Value Tolerance parameter 244 is used as a hysteresis b
241. Torque3 Torque 51 Torque 3 i PotUp 5 i i I i 1 l i i i i i gt Foward Forward Digital Forward 2nd Speed Speed Forward Speed 10 Digital Forward 48 i PotDn Accel iTorque2 Torque iTorque2 1 PotDn Not Ext Fault i i i i l I I l l I i I l 1 l i i 1 i I 1 i i i i i Common i i i i i i i i i i i i Jog Speed 1 Speed 1 Digital Ist Speed Speed Ramp Speed Speed 1 Digital _ gt Select3 Select3 PotUp Decel Torque 1 Torque 1 Disable Torque1 Select3 PotUp Speed 1 Speed 1 Speed 1 Digital 2nd Process Flux Reset Speed 1 Speed 1 Digital 1 Select2 Select2 Select2 PotDn Decel Trim Enable Select2 Select2 PotDn Speed Select 1 Common 3 Enable 5 11 Run Forward TWO WIRE 7 3 6 Not Stop Clear Fault Mode 12 Common ea 2 13 1 15 16 2 224 2 2 3 31832 Run Reverse See Note Below i I i i i 1 l i I Local 2 Stop 2nd tst Digital Local 2 Process Flux Process Jog Digital 48 Control Type Accel PotUp Control Trim Enable Trim PotUp Not Ext Fault I I I I I I l Common TE E e E D E a S J Speed Speed 2nd tst Digital Stop Reset Reset Ramp Speed Digital Select 3 iSelect3 Decel PotDn Type Disable Select3 Pot Dn Speed Select 2 i l i l l l 1 Speed Select 1 Common 3 Enable See Speed Select table Drive must be stopped to take Local Control Control by all other adapters is
242. Your 1336 IMPACT Drive Chapter 2 provides information so that you can install your 1336 IMPACT drive This topic Starts on page Before mounting your drive 2 2 Input Fuses and Circuit Breakers 2 5 Mounting your drive 2 10 Grounding your drive 2 14 Wiring the power 2 17 Hard wiring your I O 2 21 Connecting your gateway 2 24 Installing an interface board 2 25 Connecting the power to the drive 2 25 Disconnecting the drive output 2 27 Starting and stopping the motor 2 27 Electrical interference EMI RFI 2 28 Important Some of the mounting and wiring information is specific to the individual frame sizes This information is identified in this chapter but is located in the following chapters Information for this frame size Is provided in A1 A2 A3 or A4 Chapter 3 B C D E F G or H Chapter 4 If you do not know what your frame size is please refer to Chapter 1 Overview ATTENTION The following information is merely a guide for proper installation The National Electric Code NEC and any other governing national regional or local code will overrule this information Allen Bradley cannot assume responsibility for the compliance or noncompliance to any code national local or otherwise for the proper installation of this drive or associated equipment A hazard of personal injury and or equipment damage exists if codes are ignored during installation 2 2 Mounting
243. a coast stop To issue a coast stop set bit 8 in Logic Input parameter 14 or set any type of stop after configuring the coast stop select in Logic Options parameter 17 coast stop option 1 or 12 per drive set up When the motor is stopped the hold function provides an indefinite duration of DC current The level of DC current is set by the DC Brake Current parameter 79 level but is limited by 70 of drive rated current IT protection or current limit whichever is less This function is not available when you enable a coast to stop To enable DC hold set bit 7 in Bus Brake Opts parameter 13 ATTENTION A hazard of electric shock does exist You can only change Bus Brake Opts when the drive is disabled If the drive is enabled you cannot turn off the DC hold function by clearing bit 7 Because the actual motor losses are not known when DC hold is active you must determine thermally safe operating times and levels Check with the motor vendor for DC braking or DC hold application guidelines You may also want to consider using external motor thermal protection A limited hold time can be provided by using the DC braking function with an extended DC brake time By default the 1336 IMPACT drive uses a maximum of 200 motor current However for some applications that use a drive that is significantly larger than the motor you may use a maximum of 400 motor current In all cases where the drive current limit typically
244. ack phase W offset Power trans U upper for all tests Power trans W upper for all tests 2 Short Trans 7 Trans U Lo 11 Trans W Lo Shorted transistor tests Power trans U lower for all tests Power trans W lower for all tests 3 Ground Fault 8 Trans V Up 12 15 Reserved Ground fault tests Power trans V upper for all tests Leave 0 4 Open Tests Open device tests 173 Autotune Dgn Sel Parameter number 173 Use Autotune Dgn Sel to select the drive diagnostic and commissioning test The bits are defined as follows File group Parameter type Display Factory default Minimum value Maximum value Conversion Autotune Autotune Setup linkable destination bits 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00111111 Je Bit Selects Bit Selects 0 Trans Diag 2 Lo Measure Inverter transistor Leakage inductance diagnostics test 1 Mtr Phas Rot 3 Rs Measure Motor phase rotation Stator resistance tests test Refer to Chapter 13 Understanding the Auto tuning Procedure for more information Bit Selects Bit Selects 4 Id Measure 6 15 Reserved Flux current measure Leave 0 5 Inertia Inertia tests 11 52 Parameters 174 Inverter Dgn1 Parameter number 174 i File group Autotune Autotune Status Inverter Dgn1 shows the results of the transistor diagnostic tests Parameter type SOE if any of the bits are set then a problem with the associated test Display bits is indicated Factory default not applicable Minimum value 00000000
245. added in Version 2 xx TACITOTY default a Minimum value 0 Relay Config 2 may be any one of the following values Maximum value 36 Conversion 1 1 Value Description Value Description Value Description 0 Disabled 16 Not Zero Spd 29 Faulted The relay is disabled The motor is not at zero speed A fault has occurred 1 Run Ready 17 Flux Ready 30 Not Faulted The drive is ready to run The motor is ready to be fluxed up A fault has not occurred 2 Not Run Rdy 18 Not Flux Rdy 31 Warning The drive is not ready to run The motor is not ready to be fluxed up A warning has occurred 3 Running 19 Flux Up 32 Not Warning Commanded speed is not zero The drive feels the motor is fluxed up A warning has not occurred 4 Not Running 20 Not Flux Up 33 Enable Commanded speed is zero The drive feels the motor is not fluxed up Power is being applied to the 5 Stopping 21 Jogging motor The drive is stopping The motor is jogging 34 Not Enable 6 Not Stopping 22 Not Jogging Power is not being applied to the The drive is not stopping The motor is not jogging motor 7 Stopped 23 At Limit 35 Function Val The drive is stopped The motor is at the limit shown in True when the value of Function 8 Not Stopped Torque Limit Sts parameter 87 Output 1 par 213 and or the The drive is not stopped 24 Not At Lim value of Function Output 2 9 Accelerating The motor is not at the limit shown in par 214 are zero The motor is accelerating Torque Limit Sts parameter 87 36 Not
246. age Allen Bradley Publication 8000 4 5 2 or any other applicable ESD protection handbook ATTENTION Only personnel familiar with SCANport devices and associated machinery should plan or implement the installation start up or subsequent troubleshooting of this board Failure to comply may result in personnel injury and or equipment damage Related Documentation The following documents contain additional information concerning related Allen Bradley products To obtain a copy contact your local Allen Bradley office or distributor For the National Electrical Code you may need to contact the publisher In depth information on grounding and wiring Allen Bradley Allen Bradley Programmable Controller programmable controllers For Read this document Document number Grounding and Wiring Guidelines TO PLC 5 Family Programmable Controllers 3 A description on how to install a PLC 5 system Hardware ineiliation Manual 1785 6 6 1 A description of important differences between solid state Application Considerations for Solid State programmable controller products and hard wired Controls SGI 1 1 electromechanical devices An article on wire sizes and types for grounding electrical Published by the National Fire d ipin nit YP g 9 National Electrical Code Protection Association of quip Boston MA A complete listing of current Allen Bradley documentation including ordering instructions Also indicates whether t
247. ain par 66 Fdbk Filter BW par 67 Notch Filtr Freq par 185 Notch Filtr Q par 186 Feedback Device Fdbk Device Type par 64 Encoder PPR par 8 Speed Regulator Total Inertia par 157 Spd Desired BW par 161 Ki Speed Loop par 158 Kp Speed Loop par 159 Kf Speed Loop par 160 Error Filtr BW par 162 Droop Percent par 46 Parameters s Interface Comm Motor Inverter Digital Config SCANport Analog Motor Nameplate SP An Ini Select par 133 Nameplate HP par 2 L Option Mode par 116 SP An Int Value par 134 Nameplate RPM par 3 L Option In Sts par 117 SP An In1 Scale par 135 Neen Aae vara Relay Config 1 par 114 SP An In2 Select par 136 Nameplate Volts par 5 Relay Setpoint 1 par 115 SP An In2 Value par 137 X p E Relay Config 2 par 187 SP An In2 Scale par 138 lameplate Hz par 6 Relay Setpoint 2 par 188 SP An Output par 139 Motor Poles par 7 Relay Config 3 par 189 Service Factor par 9 Relay Setpoint 3 par 190 Relay Config 4 par 191 Relay Setpoint 4 par 192 Gateway Data In Encoder Data Mop Increment par 118 Data In A1 par 140 Mop Value par 119 Data In A2 par 141 Encoder PPR par 8 Pulse In PPR par 120 Data In B1 par 142 TER Pulse In Scale par 121 Data In B2 par 143 inverter Pulse In Offset par 122 Data In C1 par 144 Pulse In Value
248. ake sure that you have entered the correct motor nameplate information To run the inductance test 1 Set bit 2 in Autotune Dgn Sel parameter 173 2 Enable the drive The drive enable light turns off when the test is complete The inductance test runs for approximately 1 minute When a reading is obtained in Leak Inductance perform the resistance test Typical values for per unit inductance are in the range of 15 to 25 motor impedance The value shown in Leak Inductance is a percent value If you are using long wiring runs the typical value for per unit inductance should increase by the ratio of wiring inductance to motor inductance Understanding the Auto tuning Procedure 13 7 The motor inductance measuring routine contains several special faults If the drive trips during the inductance test check bits 1 through 5 of Autotune Errors parameter 176 file Autotune group Autotune Status If this bit is set 1 Then Ind gt 0 Spd The motor is not at zero speed Generally this bit is set in two cases e Ifthe motor rotates during this test an improper result is likely Make sure the motor decoupled from load or process is not rotating just before or during the test 1 e If the motor is not rotating during this test then investigate electrical noise creating encoder transitions Improper encoder grounding or a noisy encoder power supply could cause noise This fault cannot be determined for encoderl
249. al codes and standards such as NEC VDE and BSA and local codes outline provisions for safely installing electrical equipment Installation must comply with specifications regarding wire type conductor sizes branch circuit protection and disconnect devices Failure to do so may result in personal injury and or equipment damage Mounting and Wiring Information Specific to Frames B C D E F G and H 4 3 1 User supplied The drive connections for TB1 are shown in Figure 4 2 4 3 and 4 4 Figure 4 2 Drive Connections for Frames B1 and B2 200 240V 5 5 kW 7 5 HP Terminal Designations 380 480 500 600V 11 kW 15 HP Terminal Designations i PE PE pC DC R U V W Lt 3 3 m 2 T3 Dynamic Brake A y To Motor H H To Motor 1 Required Branch Required Circuit Disconnect Input Fusing AC Input Line 200 240V 7 5 11 kW 10 15 HP Terminal Designations 380 480V 15 22 kW 20 30 HP Terminal Designations 500 600V 15 kW 20 HP Terminal Designations QO O O O O O O 9O 9O Q OHO WPOTMOTH OHO ffO TTC Hf O O PILOlO lO lOlO O Ol O oe PE PE DC DC R S T U vV w a F L1 L2
250. al operator to Function determine whether to add Input 5 and Input 6 or Input 8 and Input 9 Figure 10 32 shows the parameters that are used for the logical add subtract function and how these parameters are evaluated Using the Function Block 10 27 Figure 10 32 Logical Add Subtract Function Block Func 1 Eval Sel Function Sel Int Or In2 Function In2 C201 gt H Nae Int Nand In2 Func 2 Mask Val 202 gt Int Or In2 And In3 Int And In2 Or In3 Function lf Then Output 1 Func 3 Mask Val True In5 In6 gt Out1 False In8 In9 gt Out 1 Function In5 208D Function In6 C209 gt Function In8 C211 Function Ino 232 Logical Add Subtract Function Block Using the Logical The logical multiply divide function lets you use a logical operator to Multiply Divide Function determine whether to multiply the value of Input 5 with the value of Input 6 and then divide the result by the value of Input 7 or multiply the value of Input 8 with the value of Input 9 and then divide the result by the value of Input 10 Figure 10 33 shows the parameters that are used for the logical multiply divide function and how these parameters are evaluated 10 28 Using the Function Block Figure 10 33 Logical Multiply Divide Function Block Func 1 Eval Sel Function Sel Int Or In2 Function In2 C201 gt ae Int Nand In2 Func 2 Mask Val C202 gt Int Or In2 And In Int And In2 Or In3 Function Output 1 If
251. am EEProm modes and the Control Logic Clear Queue menus are password protected and are not displayed in the menu To access these modes you need to 1 Press any key from the status display Choose Mode is shown Press INC or DEC to show Password Press ENTER Press ENTER Enter Password is displayed Press INC or DEC until your correct password is displayed With a Series A Version 3 0 or Series B HIM SEL moves the cursor 6 Press ENTER You can now access the Program and EEProm modes To prevent future access to program changes you need to logout WF WN 1 Press any key from the status display Choose Mode is shown Press INC or DEC to show Password Press ENTER Press INC or DEC until Logout is displayed Press ENTER to log out of Password mode Woe we NS Creating a Link You create links at the destination parameter To create a link 1 Go to the parameter that you want to receive the information 2 Enter the number of the source parameter The following example uses a Human Interface Module HIM to create a link For this example SP An Output parameter 139 is the destination parameter that is linked to Motor Torque parameter 86 which is the source parameter To create this link 1 From the Choose Mode prompt use INC or DEC to select Links 2 Press INC or DEC to select Set Links The HIM automatically scrolls through the linear parameter list until it finds a parameter that you can link 3 Use
252. amage exist If you initiate a command to start motor rotation command a start or jog and then disconnect the programming device the drive will not fault if you have the SCANport communications fault set to be ignored for that port C 14 Using the Human Interface Module HIM To remove the HIM you need to 1 Either remove the power or clear the port bit which corresponds to the port the HIM is attached to in SP Enable Mask parameter 124 or Fault Select I parameter 20 to prevent the drive from faulting 2 Remove the front cover of the drive 3 Slide the module down out of its cradle To use the module from anywhere up to 10 meters 33 feet from your drive you need to 1 Connect the appropriate cable between the HIM and the communications port adapter 2 3 4 or 5 or adapter 1 the HIM cradle 2 Set SP Enable Mask to enable the port that you plugged the HIM into and or Fault Select 1 parameter 20 To replace the module follow these steps 1 Slide the module up into its cradle 2 Replace the front cover of the drive 3 Apply power set SP Enable Mask or set Fault Select 1 Appendix D Derating Guidelines Chapter Objectives A number of factors can affect drive ratings Appendix D contains the derating guidelines for the 1336 IMPACT drive If your drive is affected by more than one factor contact Rockwell Automation
253. ameter 208 Function In6 parameter 209 Function In7 parameter 210 and Function In amp parameter 211 provide additional input values You can use the function block to set up a timer delay You can choose how to evaluate the inputs and when you want to apply the timer by using Function Sel 10 6 Using the Function Block gt Regardless of the option you choose the timer off event cannot happen until after your timer on event occurs Figure 10 4 shows the parameters that are used for the timer delay function and how these parameters are evaluated Figure 10 4 Timer Delay Function Block Func 1 Eval Sel C200 gt Function Int C198 gt Function Sel Ini Or In2 In1 Nor In2 Off Time Function In2 C201 In And In2 On Time Int Nand In2 Func 2 Mask Val 202 gt Int Or In2 And In Int And In2 Or In3 Function Output 1 Function In3 C204 gt RER 213 Func 3 Mask Val C205 gt True In gt Out 1 False In7 gt Out 1 Function In4 207 gt Function In4 Off Time 6 Int Timer Or In2 And In3 unction Ing 208 In5 OnTime 7 Int Timer And In2 Or In3 Function In6 209 gt Function In7 lt 210 Timer Delay Function Block As an example you could use the timer delay function to set up a delayed start with a ramp up to speed function When the L Option receives start input there is a delay before the start command is sent to the motor This delay is specified in Function In5 para
254. ample Applications 9 15 Figure 9 9 Example of a Flying Start 17 1780 rpm aan ra rpm lt 1 34 sec gt Drive Frequency Output 1780 rpm Motor Speed Search Starts Reconnect Return to Speed Once enabled the flying start feature remains on until you set Fstart Select to 0 If flying start is on when you perform a start from zero it adds time to the start NOTE The Flying Start Feature is only necessary for a drive in the sensorless mode If an encoder is present Flying Start is inherent Flying Start from Last Known Speed Important It is not recommended that you start the flying start search from the last known speed if your drive is operating in torque mode To start the flying start from the last known speed you need to 1 Set Fstart Select parameter 216 to 1 2 Start the drive Important The following conditions reset the last known speed to zero cycling drive power resetting the drive clearing a hardware fault JOC BOV DESAT or Ground fault Flying Start from Selected Speed To start the flying start from a speed that you set you need to 1 Set Fstart Select parameter 216 to 2 2 Set Fstart Speed parameter 217 to the speed at which you want to begin the search 3 Start the drive Important To maximize performance set Fstart Speed slightly greater than the speed at which you expect to reconnect to the motor NOTE The Forward and Reverse Speed Limit MUST
255. an L Option board to access the MOP feature To use the MOP feature you need to 1 Set L Option Mode parameter 116 to a value of 5 9 10 or 15 You must use one of these modes because these are the only modes that provide access to Digital Pot Up Dn 2 Set Mop Increment parameter 118 to a value in rpms second This value sets the rate of increase or decrease to the MOP 3 Link Mop Value parameter 119 to either a speed or a torque reference For example you could link Mop Value to Speed Ref 1 parameter 29 if you want the drive to follow the MOP command for speed When the Digital Pot Up is true the value of Mop Increment is added to Mop Value and when the Digital Pot Dn is true the value of Mop Increment is subtracted from Mop Value This lets you control the speed through the MOP as shown in Figure 9 8 Figure 9 8 Example of the MOP Feature Mop Value oo Signal Digital Pot Up True Digital Pot Dn False Digital Pot Up False Digital Pot Dn True The flying start feature lets you start a drive when the connected motor is rotating When you activate the flying start feature the drive starts at either the last known speed or a speed that you enter As an example you want to reconnect to a motor that is rotating at 860 rpm You set F start Select to 2 and set Fstart Speed to 1780 rpm The drive searches for 1 34 seconds and then reconnects to the motor at 737 rpm Figure 9 9 illustrates this ex
256. ance Tests Not at zero speed Auto tune setpoint is too low 1 Ind gt 0 Spd 7 Res Sign Err 12 Flix Flux lt 0 Not at zero speed Sign error Flux less than zero 2 Ind Sign Err 8 Res 0 Cur 13 Flx Cur gt MCur Sign error or negative Lsigma Zero current Flux current gt rated motor current 3 Ind 0 Cur 9 Res SW Err 14 Flx En Drop Zero current Software error Enable dropout 4 Ind A D Ovfl 10 Res En Drop 15 Flx Hi Load A D overflow at minimum gain Enable dropout The load is too high 5 Ind En Drop Enable dropout 177 Ki Freq Reg Parameter number 177 i r File group none Ki Freq Reg contains the integral gain of the frequency regulator Parameter type dastiinaion in encoderless mode Do not change the value of this parameter Display Factory default 300 Minimum value 0 Maximum value 32767 Conversion 1 1 178 Kp Freq Reg Parameter number 178 K ly File group none Kp Freq Reg contains the proportional gain of the frequency Parameter type aeetinerion regulator in encoderless mode Do not change the value of this Display x parameter Factory default 800 Minimum value 0 Maximum value 32767 Conversion 1 1 179 Kf Freq Reg Parameter number 179 s 7 File group none Kf Freq Reg contains the feed forward gain of the frequency Parameter type Meetinetion regulator in encoderless mode Do not change the value of this Display wee parameter Factory default 1 0 Minimum value 0 0 Maximum value 128 0 Conversion 256 1 0 11 54 Parameters
257. and Parameter 44 Decel Rate 1 were both be set to 8 seconds The acceleration and deceleration control is part of the speed PI regulator It is important that the rate limits set in the PI regulator do not interfere with the speed profile regulator 9 20 Applications For Example If the deceleration rate in the speed PI regulator is set too long the control of the speed profile loop will not be followed The result will be an overshoot of the programmed travel distance If the decel rate is lowered then the overall cycle of the speed profile is increased Profile Speed Command Profile Speed Command outputs were linked into Speed Ref 1 The 32 bit command is used for fine positioning in encoder mode A Parameter 247 Profile CMD Frac linked to Parameter 28 Speed Ref 1 Frac B Parameter 248 Profile CMD linked to Parameter 29 Speed Ref 1 Bipolar Signal Reference Parameter 17 Logic Options bit 11 Bipolar Sref must be set to 1 to enable bipolar reference for speed and direction control If this is not set for bipolar operation a reverse speed command which is a negative value cannot occur As a result the profile will lock up when the first negative speed step is encountered Bus Regulation Turned Off Bus Regulation is turned OFF when parameter 13 bit 10 is cleared bit 10 set to 0 This is so the speed profile control will NOT be overidden by the bus regulator when bit 10 is set to zero NOTE Us
258. and Wiring Your 1336 IMPACT Drive Before Mounting Your Drive Before mounting your drive consider the following e what tools and equipment you need to mount your drive e the distance between the motor and the drive e the distance between the drive and other surfaces Important Before you mount your drive you need to thoroughly read and understand the information presented in this chapter You should take every precaution to complete the wiring as instructed Required Tools and Equipment At a minimum you will need the following tools and equipment to mount your drive e asmall regular screw driver e amedium phillips screw driver e a box end wrench or socket set e wire strippers Distance Between the Motor and the Drive If the distance between the motor and the drive requires long motor cables you may need to add an output reactor or cable terminators to limit voltage reflections at the motor The following tables show the maximum length cable allowed for various installation techniques Values shown in Table 2 A are for 480V nominal input voltage and drive carrier frequency of 2 kHz Consult factory regarding operation at carrier frequencies above 2 kHz Multiply values by 0 85 for high line conditions For input voltages of 380 400 or 415V AC multiply the table values by 1 25 1 20 or 1 15 respectively Values shown in Table 2 B are for nominal input voltage and drive carrier frequency of 2 kHz Consult factory regardin
259. and for determining the End of Step position The motor shaft must be at the target position within the value tolerance P244 counts for eleven consecutive update cycles Approx 138 ms before control will continue to the next step Should the motor overshoot the target the profile command will adjust in the opposite direction causing the shaft to back up If this overshoot is unacceptable the Error Trim Gain P237 can be set to a lower value less than 2 0 to eliminate this The Error Trim Gain parameter is discussed in detail later in this chapter At Encoder Position Output Relay 4 signal The 4 Output relay is reserved for identification of the encoder step position When the shaft has remained within the target position tolerance for approximately 50 ms the control will set the Output Relay 4 to identify the motor shaft as being at the programmed Step Target position If the next step is an Encoder step the output will be cleared when beginning this next step If the next step is not an encoder step the relay will be left set Step Hold in Encoder Mode The Hold bit can be set either by writing the third bit of the Profile Enable parameter or by setting the L10 TB3 input terminal 28 in Mode 32 When the hold bit is set the Profile Control will continue to the step target With the Step Hold bit set the control will not proceed to the next step The control will remain active and maintain the target pos
260. ange the default configuration There are four programmable relays PTL PTT PT 123 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 ES aL Ea 4a eae LE Sa Ee Eee Af IH il Frames A1 A4 J10 TB10 AQOOOCCOOCOOOC Frames BH TB11 ne 3 Relay 1 Dsi FM Speed y Default Not Fault Relay 2 Default Enable Run Relay 4 Default Not Warning Alarm This z And defaults to the Is configured using these parameters h relay following Relay Config 1 parameter 114 and Relay Setpoint 1 parameter 115 At Speed Relay Config 2 parameter 187 and Relay Setpoint 2 parameter 188 Enable Relay Config 3 parameter 189 and Relay Setpoint 3 parameter 190 Not Fault Relay Config 4 parameter 191 and Relay Setpoint 4 parameter 192 Not Warning alarm The programmable relays are a combination of normally open and closed contacts You can configure these relays using the Relay Config x parameters to specify that a relay should follow a specific function You can configure the relay to follow the bit function or the NOT of the function For example If the motor is at set speed and you You would enter this value in the Relay want the contact to Config parameter 13 to indicate At Set Speed Open 14 to indicate Not At Set Speed Refer to the descriptions of Relay Config 1 Relay Config 2 Relay Config 3 or Relay Config 4 in Chapter 11 Parameters for a complete listing of functions C
261. arameter 134 to Speed Ref 1 parameter 29 4 Set Speed Ref 2 parameter 31 to 10 rpm 5 Set Speed Ref 3 parameter 32 to 50 rpm 6 Set Speed Ref 4 parameter 33 to 100 rpm The following table shows how the contacts operate for the speed select switch Because Input Mode 7 does not offer a Speed Select 3 input Speed Ref 4 7 are not available Switch Speed select input Parameter used ite for speed position 4 28 2 27 reference Programmed setting Local Open Open Speed Ref 1 HIM 0 base speed 1 Open Speed Ref 2 10 rpm 2 Open Closed Speed Ref 3 50 rpm 3 Closed Closed Speed Ref 4 100 rpm Speed Torque Selection The following table defines the input state of the speed torque mode select inputs for a desired speed torque mode mode select 3 mode select 2 mode select 1 __SPeeditorque mode Open Open Open Zero torque Open Open Closed Speed regulate Open Closed Open Torque regulate Open Closed Closed Minimum torque speed Closed Open Open Maximum torque speed Closed Open Closed Sum of the torque and speed Closed Closed Open Zero torque Closed Closed Closed Zero torque Closed Applied 1 Open Removed 0 Refer to the Torque Reference Overview section of Appendix B Control Block Diagrams for additional information about speed and torque selection Using the L Option 5 11 Using an Encoder with the If you have an L7E L8E and L9E board y
262. arameter 14 or with a terminal The fault codes are defined as shown in Table 12 A 12 8 Troubleshooting Table 12 A Fault Descriptions Fault Code LED Fault er g and Text information Type Description Suggested Action The drive encountered a problem 01027 VP Flashin while running the auto tune tests Check Autotune Errors parameter 176 For additional Autotune Dia i r d 9 Soft When this condition occurs the information about Autotune Errors refer to Chapter 13 H drive coasts to a stop regardless Understanding the Auto tuning Procedure of the selected stop type Check for possible motor overheating If the motor temperature is excessive reduce the A motor overload is pending The accel decel times parameters 42 45 or reduce the 01051 VP Flashing Soft drive has reached 95 of the load MtrOvrid Pnd red level required for a motor If the motor temperature is acceptable increase the overload trip see fault 01052 value of Motor Overload parameter 26 If you do not want this condition to be reported as a fault change bit 3 in Fault Select 2 parameter 22 to 0 Check for possible motor overheating M i The dri e If the motor temperature is excessive reduce the otor overload tripped The drive accel decel times parameters 42 45 or reduce the has reached the level of 01052 VP Flashing load MtrOvrld Trp r d Soft accumulated motor current over lfth ii fired tabie i i time as set by Mo
263. arameter 193 before ramping Display x x seconds to whichever speed reference you have selected speed Factory default 0 0 seconds references 1 through 7 Minimum value 0 0 seconds 1 Start Dwell Time was added in Version 2 xx maximum valuo 10 0 Seconds Conversion seconds x 10 Refer to the Speed Reference Selection Overview section in Appendix B Control Block Diagrams for more information 195 1 Parameter number 195 Max Mtr Current File group Control Control Limits Use Max Mtr Current to increase the maximum motor current from 200 to 400 if you are using a drive that is significantly larger than your motor Choose To Select 0 200 maximum motor current 1 400 maximum motor current Regardless of your selection the drive limits current to 150 of the rated inverter current 1 Max Mtr Current was added in Version 2 xx Application 200 400 Mtr Cur Parameter type destination Display x Factory default Minimum value Maximum value Conversion 1 Refer to the Using Up to 400 Motor Current section of Chapter 9 Applications Rot SS 11 60 Parameters 196 1 Parameter number 196 Drive Inv Sts 2 File group Monitor Drive Inv Status Use Drive Inv Sts 2 to view the status conditions within the drive Parameter type source When a bit is set 1 the corresponding condition in the drive is Display bits true Factory default not applicable F Minimum value 00000000 00000000 1 Drive inv Sts 2 was added in Version 2
264. are properly connected and tight Check the motor phasing Motor phase A should be connected to drive output phase A Likewise phase B and C should be properly terminated to their respective terminals This phasing is double checked during the start up procedure For H frame drives verify phasing of incoming power for correct rotation of the 3 phase top mounted fan Verify that the Pulse Input Voltage Selection jumper is set correctly for your application 6 2 Starting Up Your System If your input voltage is 5V DC Then jumper J8 frames A1 14 J4 frames B H should be across Pins 1 and 2 12V DC Pins 2 and 3 If you are using an encoder attached to your L Option board you should also e Verify that the encoder feedback device is properly connected The encoder should be a quadrature device with a 12V input power requirement and either 12V or 5V differential outputs Jumpers J1 and J2 on the L Option board must be set for the desired output The jumper settings for J1 and J2 must match e Verify that the L Option board if present is wired properly e Check the phasing of the encoder A and A NOT as well as B and B NOT must be properly terminated This phasing is double checked during the start up procedure Starting and Stopping the Motor ATTENTION The drive start stop control circuitry includes solid state components If hazards due to accidental contact with moving machinery or
265. as added in Version 2 xx Factory default 00000000 00000000 Minimum value 00000000 00000000 Maximum value 11111111 11111111 If Func 1 Eval Sel parameter 200 is 12 15 then Display x Factory default 0 Minimum value 0 Maximum value 65535 Refer to Chapter 10 Using the Function Block for more information 199 1 Parameter number 199 Func 1 Mask Val File group Application Prog Function Use Func 1 Mask Valto enter a mask or value to compare Function In1 parameter 198 to according to the value you select in Func 1 Eval Sel parameter 200 1 Func 1 Mask Val was added in Version 2 xx Parameter type linkable destination Conversion 1 1 If Func 1 Eval Sel parameter 200 is 0 or 6 11 then Display x Factory default zi Minimum value 32767 Maximum value 32767 If Func 1 Eval Sel parameter 200 is 1 5 then Display bits Factory default 11111111 11111111 Minimum value 00000000 00000000 Maximum value 11111111 11111111 If Func 1 Eval Sel parameter 200 is 12 15 then Display x Factory default 65535 Minimum value 0 Maximum value 65535 Refer to Chapter 10 Using the Function Block for more information 11 62 Parameters 200 1 Parameter number 200 Func 1 Eval Sel File group Application Prog Function Func 1 Eval Sel lets you choose how you want to evaluate Parameter type destination Function In1 parameter 198 Display x 1 Func 1 Eval Sel was added in Version 2 xx fathead default 9 Minimum value 0
266. as been Parameter type source detected during power up or reset of the drive When a bit is 1 Display Bits the condition is true otherwise the condition is false Factory default 0000 0000 0000 0000 1 PwrUp Fit Status was added in Version 3 xx STIR i nae se ae ee Conversion 1 1 Bit Condition Bit Condition Bit Condition 0 CP EPROM 6 Reserved 12 VP MBI 1 CP Int RAM 7 Reserved 13 Reserved 2 CP Ext RAM 8 VP EPROM 14 EE Checksum 3 CP Stack Ram 9 VP Int Ram 15 EE R W 4 CP MBI 10 VP Ext Ram 5 Reserved 11 VP Stack RAM 220 1 Parameter number 220 Nefg Fit Status File group Monitor Fault Status Nefg Fit Status indicates that a fault condition in the drive Parameter type source CANNOT be configured as a warning When a bit is 1 the Display Bits condition is true otherwise the condition is false Bits 0 3 are Factory default 0000 0000 0000 0000 detected by hardware Bits 4 15 are detected are detected by Minimum value 0000 0000 0000 0000 software Maximum value 11111111 1111 1111 1 Ncfg Fit Status was added in Version 3 xx conversion Iai Bit Condition Bit Condition Bit Condition 0 Bus Overvolt 6 Dr Type Dif 12 Inv Temp Trp 1 Trans Desat 7 lll Drv Type 13 Task Overrun 2 Ground Flt 8 CP Handshake 14 Ill Interrupt 3 IOC 9 Abs overspd 15 Mode Timeout 4 VP Handshake 10 15v Tol 5 Diff SW Ver 11 Auto Diag Parameters 11 71 221 1 Parameter number 221 Fault Status 1 File group Monitor Fault Status Fault Status 1 shows fault c
267. ast flux up current is lt 50 22 Fault Select 2 Parameter number 22 Use Fault Select 2 to specify how the drive should handle certain eee type iy E conditions Each bit matches the bit definitions of Warning Display bits Select 2 parameter 23 If you set a bit to 1 the drive reports a Factory default 10000000 00010001 fault when that condition occurs If you clear a bit to 0 the drive Minimum value 00000000 00000000 reports the condition based on Warning Select 2 Memm vale 11111111 11111111 Conversion 1 1 The bits are defined as follows Refer to Chapter 12 Troubleshooting for additional information Bit Description Bit Description Bit Description 0 SpdFdbk Loss 5 Mtr Stall 11 12 Reserved A loss of feedback occurred The motor stalled Leave 0 1 InvOvtmp Pnd 6 Ext Fault In 13 InvOvid Pend An inverter overtemp is pending The ext input is open An inverter overload is pending 2 Reserved 7 8 Reserved IT Leave 0 Leave 0 14 Reserved 3 MtrOvid Pend 9 Param Limit Leave 0 A motor overload is pending T A parameter is out of limits 15 InvOvid Trip 4 MtrOvid Trip 10 Math Limit Inverter overload trip IT Motor overload trip T A math limit occurred Parameters 11 17 23 Warning Select 2 Parameter number 23 File grou Fault Setup Fault Confi Use Warning Select 2 to specify how the drive should handle Eaten type eee AR certain conditions Each bit matches the bit definitions of Fault Display bits Sele
268. asts to a stop regardless parameter 13 for additional information about bus of the selected stop type overvoltages If you are using flux braking refer to Chapter 9 Applications for information about flux braking There was too much current in 12017 the system Run the power structure diagnostics Desaturation CP Solid red Hard When this condition occurs the Check for a shorted motor or motor wiring drive coasts to a stop regardless Replace the drive of the selected stop type A current path to earth ground in excess of drive rated current has Run the power structure diagnostics been detected at one or more of Check th d lwit he dri 12018 CP Solid red Hard the drive output terminals ecl the motor and external wiring to the drive output Ground Fault i a terminals for a grounded condition When this condition occurs the Reol he dri drive coasts to a stop regardless epa e the drive of the selected stop type There was too much current in 1201 the system Run the power structure diagnostics ene CP Solid red Hard When this condition occurs the Check for shorted motor or motor wiring drive coasts to a stop regardless Replace drive of the selected stop type yp Pha Cycle Power to Drive 12020 CP Solid Red Hard and GP have losl Reset Defaults communication Replace Main Control Board Check the incoming power and fuses 12032 CP Flashing There was a bus voltage drop of l gP wi u Soft 150V and power did not retur
269. at Do I Do If Get a Software Fault If bit 0 of Inverter Dgn J is set 1 an improper sequence of events has occurred Either the software cannot distinguish what is occurring or there is noise in the system If a fault occurs repeatedly the problem may be a fault that the software cannot directly identify for example a voltage breakdown in a snubber If this is the case you need to determine through external measurements if the problem is real or if there is a noise problem In cases where a specific test continually results in nuisance faults use Trans Dgn Config parameter 172 to disable that test For proper drive operation you need to have e A specific phase sequence of the motor leads T1 T2 T3 T1 T3 T2 etc e A specific sequence of encoder leads pulse A leads B etc These sequences determine which direction the motor shaft rotates when torque is applied If the sequence is not set up correctly the motor may rotate in the wrong direction or no torque may be produced To run the phase rotation test 1 Set bit 1 in Autotune Dgn Sel parameter 173 2 Enable the drive 13 6 Understanding the Auto tuning Procedure gt Running the Sequential Torque Tuning Tests file Autotune group Autotune Results file Autotune group Autotune Setup 3 Check if the motor is running in what you define as the positive direction If it is not stop the drive swap the T1 and T2 motor lead
270. ate Driver Board Over 30 hp At separate terminal strips located at the bottom of the drive Mounting and Wiring Information Specific to Frames B C D E F G and H TB1 TB3 TB4 TB6 TB9 TE TB10 Power Terminal Block TB10 11 Control amp Signal Wiring Control Interface Option For factory use only For factory use only 480V Output F Frame Only or 600V depending On Drive Output Volts Shield Terminals Figure 4 1 Terminal Block Locations ra ral TBO A o TB3 my 1B4 FSE TB3 maad _ TB10 11 g4 TB6 TE Control Interface TB4 z ae TB1 Location a Es TBI c Sf TB11 TBI Baal bed A TE paa TB6 Brake Control Interface TB3 TBI M Terminals TB11 Location TB1 TB1 g g Frames B C Frames D E Frame F R S T H TB3 TB3 hinnata 1810 11 Las lt TB10 11 AVS q TE KD TE eS BS TBI U V W TB1 U V W Location amp Brake Location amp Brake Terminals Terminals PE PE Ground Ground Frame G Frame H ATTENTION The nation
271. ation with one phase grounded Grounded Delta The filter must not be used in Grounded Delta supplies Conduit 4 Wire Cable Co RFI S L2 o Filter mee 5 eet T L3 PE Baan Ground Rod Grid Shield Terminated in Cable or Building Structure Steel Clamp on A Frame Drives RFI Filter Grounding Important Using the optional RFI filter may result in relatively high ground leakage currents Surge suppression devices are also incorporated into the filter Therefore the filter must be permanently installed and solidly grounded bonded to the building power distribution ground Ensure that the incoming supply neutral is solidly connected bonded to the same building power distribution ground Grounding must not rely on flexible cables and should not include any form of plug or socket that would permit inadvertent disconnection Some local codes may require redundant ground connections The integrity of all connections should be periodically checked E 4 CE Conformity Mechanical Configuration Filter Mounting Important A positive electrical bond must be maintained between drive and filter at all 4 corners Star washers can be eliminated if a positive electrical bond is assured Three Phase Input 1 Important Drive and filter must be mounted to a common back p
272. ator access These files are divided into groups and each parameter is an element in a specific group Parameters may be used as elements in more than one group You can also view the parameters in a linear mode This lets you view the entire parameter table in numerical order You can access the linear mode from the bottom of any group The following tables list the parameters that are available in each file and group Parameters Program B Monitor Control Fault Setup LY Motor Status Drive Logic Select Fault Config Logic Options par 17 Fault Select 1 par 20 Mo apren paren 89 Stop Dwell Time par 18 Warning Select 1 par 21 ae ees lest Zero Speed Tol par 19 Fault Select 2 par 22 Motor Veles rae a Start Dwell Spd par 193 Warning Select 2 par 23 otor Voltage par 85 Start Dwell Time par 194 Motor Voltage par 234 Motor Torque par 86 Fault Limits Motor Flux par 88 Motor Power par 90 Int Torque Ref par 229 Enc Pos Fdbk High par 228 Enc Pos Fdbk Low par 227 Control Limits Drive Inv Status DC Bus Voltage par 84 Logic Input Sts par 14 Drive Inv Status par 15 Drive Inv Sts 2 par 196 Run Inhibit Sts par 16 Command Spd Sts par 82 Torque Limit Sts par 87 Spd Reg Output par 225 Spd Error par 226 Rev Speed Limit par 40 Fwd Speed Limit par 41 Pos Mtr C
273. aveform quality Reactors must have a turn turn insulation rating of 2100 volts or higher 1329R only Values shown are for nominal input voltage and drive carrier frequency of 2 kHz Consult factory regarding operation at carrier frequencies above 2 kHz Multiply values by 0 85 for high line conditions NR Not Recommended Input Fuses and Circuit Breakers Mounting and Wiring Your 1336 IMPACT Drive 2 5 The 1336 IMPACT can be installed with either input fuses or an input circuit breaker Local national electrical codes may determine additional requirements for these installations Installations per U S NEC UL CSA Fuses In general the specified fuses are suitable for branch short circuit protection and provide excellent short circuit protection for the drive The fuses offer a high interrupting capacity and are fast acting Refer to the North American selections in Chapter 3 for A1 A4 frames and Chapter 4 for B H frames Circuit Breakers The Westinghouse HMCP breakers specified in the following table provide branch short circuit protection Because circuit breakers are typically slower than fuses and those listed are magnetic trip only they may not be as effective in offering short circuit protection to the drive in the event of an internal drive short circuit They may not be as effective in limiting damage to the drive IEC Installations Fuses For those installations that are not required to meet the U S NEC UL CSA th
274. base speed Conversion 4096 Base Motor Speed 262 Parameter number 262 Step 5 Value File group Profile Test Data Parameter 262 sets the time in seconds for time steps the Parameter type Setup counts in units for encoder steps and the TB3 input to triggeron Display x xS x X X units for TB Input steps Scaling Factory default 0 0 0 0 0 Time Step 10 x desired value 10 1 0 sec Minimum value 0 0 0 0 0 Encoder Step 1 1 revolution Maximum value 3276 7 5 3276 7 TB Input Step dependent on L Option Mode Sel See P241 Conversion 0 1 0 sec x TBin 10 1 unit 2 Parameter number 263 63 Step 5 Type File group Profile Test Data Parameter 263 selects the type of step to be used Parameter type Setup 0 Not Used This forces an End Action Display x 1 Time Step operate at speed shown in P261 for time in P262 Factory default 0 2 TB Input Step operate at speed shown in P261 until P262 Minimum value 0 input goes true Maximum value 3 Conversion 3 Encoder Step operate at speed shown in P261 for units in P262 Parameters 11 79 Parameter number 264 eet Step 6 Speed File group Profile Test Data Parameter 264 sets the rpm value for this step Scaling 4096 Parameter type Setup Base Speed Display X X rpm Factory default 0 0 rpm Minimum value Maximum value 8 x base speed 8 x base speed Conversion 4096 Base Motor Speed 265 Parameter number 265 Step 6 Value File group Profile Test Data Param
275. be set to the same magnitude to prevent Absolute Overspeed Fault 9 16 Applications Speed Profiling Introduction This feature provides a series of 16 programmable steps that allow Normal with Hold Hold Input RPM 1000 500 1000 500 7 Poo Hg 1000 you to program a sequence of speed command transitions Each step can be activated based on time digital inputs or encoder counts The profile can be used as a single sequence with a return to a home or as a continuous loop returning to an initial step value each time This feature can be used for simple positioning requirements on applications such as turntables hemmers gantries run out tables transfer shuttles and station gates NOTE The Speed Profile feature is not intended to be used in conjunction with certain other features in the drive These include Function Blocks Process Trim or Bus Regulation Using these features in combination with Speed Profiling may result in inconsistent operation that cannot be guaranteed The Speed Profile is configured using a command word and end action parameters Each available step is configured with three parameters which define the speed in RPM to operate during the step and when to end the step The amount of travel for each step is controlled by the type of trigger which ends or terminates the step and is based on time encoder count or digital input In addition parameters for monitoring and status info
276. ble shows the common mode cores available for the 1336 IMPACT drive Catalog Jo noe Number Used with Description 1321 M001 Communications cables analog signal Open style signal cables etc level 1321 M009 All 1336 IMPACT drives rated Open style with 480V 0 37 3 7 kW 0 5 5 hp terminal block 9A All 1336 IMPACT drives rated 1321 M048 480V 5 5 22 kW 7 5 30 hp Open style 48A 600V 5 5 30 kW 7 5 40 hp All 1336 IMPACT drives rated 1321 M180 480V 30 112 kW 40 X150 hp Open style 180A 600V 37 93 kW 50 125 hp All 1336 IMPACT drives rated 1321 M670 480V 112 597 kW 150 800 hp Open Style 670A 600V 149 597 kW 200 800 hp 2 10 Mounting and Wiring Your 1336 IMPACT Drive Mounting Your Drive 1 Allowing for Heat Dissipation You need to mount the drive so that there is sufficient space at the top sides and front of the cabinet to let the heat dissipate as shown in Figure 2 2 Figure 2 2 Heat Dissipation Requirements Alternate Mounting Methods oo B sees suena aey pranLEY CETE ETY Doo 6008 6008 oloo Sloao Ol Ole 00 8 8 00 If you have a D frame drive you should have at least 152 4 203 2 mm 6 8 in betw
277. ct 2 parameter 22 If you set a bit to 1 and the Factory default 10100000 00001010 corresponding bit in Fault Select 2 is clear 0 the drive reports a Mia ee 00000000 00000000 warning when that condition occurs If both corresponding bits in Maximum valie 111111111 1111111 Fault Select 2 and Warning Select 2 are 0 the drive ignores the onterion i 1 1 condition when it occurs g Refer to Chapter 12 Troubleshooting for additional information The bits are defined as follows Bit Description Bit Description Bit Description 0 SpdFdbk Loss 5 Mtr Stall 11 12 Reserved A loss of feedback occurred The motor stalled Leave 0 1 InvOvtmp Pnd 6 Ext Fault In 13 InvOvid Pend An inverter overtemp is pending The ext input is open An inverter overload is pending 2 Reserved 7 8 Reserved IT Leave 0 Leave 0 14 Reserved 3 MtrOvid Pend 9 Param Limit Leave 0 A motor overload is pending T A parameter is out of limits 15 InvOvid Trip 4 MtrOvid Trip 10 Math Limit Inverter overload trip IT Motor overload trip PT A math limit occurred 24 Absolute Overspd Parameter number 24 File grou Fault Setup Fault Limits Enter the incremental speed above Fwd Speed Limit EEE type ee Moctinotion parameter 41 or below Rev Speed Limit parameter 40 that is Display x x rpm allowable before the drive indicates its speed is out of range an Factory default base motor speed x 01 rpm Absolute Overspd fault fault number 03025 Minimum value 0 0 rpm Maximum value base
278. ct eens 3 1 Wiring the PONET sta eas ace dee ade haa ane ata ane 3 1 Hard Wiring Your VO 0 eee eee e nents 3 3 Input Fusing Requirements 0 0 cece cece eee 3 4 DIMCNSIONS etanoa teed heads Ae ease ead 3 5 Chapter 4 Chapter Objectives 0 0 0 0 cece eee eee eee 4 1 Wining the POWO acceden nemasne e A eat eid eae OA 4 1 Selecting the Proper Lug Kit for Your System aaua 4 6 Hard Wiring Your I O aaaea 4 8 Selecting Verifying Fan Voltage uuaa 4 10 Input Fusing Requirements 0 0 c cece eee eee eae 4 11 DIMGNSIONS etenoa creeds AAR he Aye pase tesa 4 12 Chapter 5 Chapter Obj ctiveS insisi opii awd E A daa ate ee eis 5 1 What is the L Option n 0 cece nee e eens 5 2 Starting Up Your System Setting Up the Input Output Using the SCANport Capabilities Applications Table of Contents toc 2 Setting Up the L Option Board 0 eee eee eee 5 4 Using an Encoder with the L Option Board 6 eee eee eee 5 11 Requirements for the Contact Closure Interface Board L4 5 14 Requirements for the 24V AC DC Interface Board Requirements L5 5 12 Requirements for the 115V AC Interface Board L6 0 000 5 13 Requirements for the Contact Closure Interface Board L7E 5 14 Requirements for the 24V AC DC Interface Board Requirements L8E 5 15 Requirements for the 115V AC Interface Board L9E 0005 5 16 Chapter 6 Chapter Objectives
279. ction in Appendix B Control Block Diagrams Using Dynamic Braking Brake Chopper Dynamic braking uses an external braking device to dissipate the excess energy when the drive is decelerated This setup disables the bus voltage regulator and relies on the dynamic brake to dissipate the excess regenerated energy Important The dynamic brake must be connected to the capacitor side of the DC link choke output side If the brake is connected to the converter bridge of the DC link choke input side it will fail To use a dynamic brake 1 Set bit 10 Brake Regen in Bus Brake Opts parameter 13 2 Clear bit 5 Bus High Lim in Bus Brake Opts parameter 13 3 Refer to the manual that came with your brake for further information 4 Set Regen Power Lim parameter 76 according to the available braking power If the brake is sized for maximum regenerative energy then the Regen Power Lim parameter 76 may be set to its highest value 5 If overvoltage occurs see below If bus overvoltages occur then the brake is not large enough to dissipate the excess energy Either increase the brake size or limit regenerative energy until the overvoltages no longer occur 9 4 Applications file group Application Bus Control file group Control Control Limits The regenerative energy may be limited either automatically by letting the bus regulator work along with the dynamic brake or manually by reducing the
280. ctory default 8 0 when you enter a non zero value for Spd Desired BW Minimum value 0 0 parameter 161 Normally you should adjust Spd Desired BW Maximum value 4095 9 and let the drive calculate the gains If manual adjustment is Conversion 8 1 0 needed for example if the inertia cannot be determined the drive sets Spd Desired BW to zero for you when this gain is changed 159 Kp Speed Loop Parameter number 159 A File group Control Speed Regulator Use Kp Speed Loop to control the proportional error gain of the Parameter type Meb Gesiinettion speed regulator Display sen The 1336 IMPACT drive automatically adjusts Kp Speed Loop Factory default 8 0 when you enter a non zero value for Spd Desired BW Minimum value 0 0 parameter 161 Normally you should adjust Spd Desired BW Maximum value 200 0 and let the drive calculate the gains If manual gain adjustment is Conversion 8 1 0 needed for example if the inertia cannot be determined the drive sets Spd Desired BW to zero for you when this gain is changed Parameters 11 49 160 Kf Speed Loop Parameter number File group 160 Control Speed Regulator Use Kf Speed Loop to control the feed forward gain of the speed regulator Setting the Kf gain to less than one reduces speed Parameter type linkable destination Display X XXX feedback overshoot in response to a step change in speed Factory default 1 000 reference Minimum value 0 500 Maximum value 1 000 Conve
281. curred 2 13 At Set Speed 14 The motor is at the requested 15 speed Enable LED The drive is enabled 1 If a warning has occurred check the warning queue for more information 2 Ifa fault has occurred check the fault queue for more information 00000 00 00g OS OAO O 55 not applicable 00000000 00000000 11111111 11111111 1 1 No Change Speed Ref 1 Speed Ref 2 Speed Ref 3 Speed Ref 4 Speed Ref 5 Speed Ref 6 Speed Ref 7 11 14 Parameters 16 Run Inhibit Sts Parameter number 16 ne RA ess File group Monitor Drive Inv Status View Run Inhibit Sts to determine what condition is actively Parameter type Sowa preventing the drive from starting or running If all bits are clear Display bits 0 the drive should start If the drive is running and this word Factory default not applicable becomes non zero the drive will stop TMlnintimicaite 00000000 00000000 Maximum value 11111111 11111111 The bits are defined as follows Conversion w Bit Description Bit Description Bit Description 0 Atune Mode 5 No Enable 11 Reserved The drive is currently in No hardware drive enable input Leave 0 auto tune 6 Flux Loss 12 EE Function 1 Precharge The drive dropped the drive The drive stopped and an EE The drive stopped amp is in bus enable acknowledgement function is active precharge 7 Reserved 13 Atune Stop 2 Coast Stop Leave 0 Auto tune stop Coast stop input discrete or 8 Hrdware Stop 14
282. d energy is transferred from the motor to the drive This causes an increase in the bus voltage When the bus voltage becomes high enough the bus voltage regulator becomes active and reduces the regeneration power limit to control the bus voltage The maximum regeneration power limit is controlled in Regen Power Lim parameter 76 and the bus voltage regulator automatically further reduces this level as needed to limit the bus voltage The regeneration power limit implements a torque limit as a function of motor speed times torque Then the system power losses determine the motor deceleration The default bus regulator braking set up uses a 25 regenerative power limit Regen Power Lim If the losses in the system are large enough you may use a larger value file group Application Flux Braking file group Control Control Limits Applications 9 5 Figure 9 1 shows how the bus regulator relates to both speed and torque Figure 9 1 Bus Regulator in Relation to Speed and Torque abr T Speed Torque System Losses Using Flux Braking You can use flux braking to stop the drive or to shorten the deceleration time to a lower speed The higher losses result in a shorter motor deceleration time Other methods of deceleration or stopping may perform better depending on the motor and the load To enable flux braking 1 Set bit 6 Flux Braking in Bus Brake Opts parameter 13
283. d Ridethrough Soft period This indicates a converter Bus Cycle gt 5 red Faults section for more information problem or a problem with the i a incoming power If you do not want this condition to be reported as a fault change bit 4 in Fault Select 1 parameter 20 to 0 Troubleshooting 12 15 Fault Code and Text 12037 LED Information CP Flashing Fault Type Description The fast flux up current is less Suggested Action Make sure the motor is properly connected Refer to the Understanding Precharge and Ridethrough Open Circuit red Soft than 50 of commanded Faults section for more information If you do not want this condition to be reported as a fault change bit 5 in Fault Select 1 parameter 20 to 0 Check the incoming power and fuses There was a drop of 150V and Refer to the Understanding Precharge and Ridethrough 12064 CP Solid aa Faults section for more information gt Warning power did not return within 2 i RidethruTime green seconds If you do not want this condition to be reported as a warning change bit 0 in Warning Select 1 parameter 21 to 0 Refer to the Understanding Precharge and Ridethrough Faults section for more information 12065 CP Solid Warnin The precharge function could not if d hi A Prechrg Time green g complete within 30 seconds you onal wane is condition to be reported as a warning change bit 1 in Warning Select
284. d by the torque limit Notch Filtr Freq parameter 185 sets the center frequency for the 2 pole notch filter and Notch Filtr Q parameter 186 sets the quality factor The following is an example of a notch filter gain Notch Filtr Q parameter 185 A Notch Filtr Freq parameter 186 Hz Other filters are available through Fdbk Filter Sel These filters are covered in the Speed Feedback Overview section of this appendix Understanding the Current Limits The current limit function uses a minimum and maximum selection routine to select the upper and lower Iq limits The upper Iq limit is the lowest value when Pos Mtr Cur Lim parameter 72 the NTC limit and the IT limit are compared The lower Iq limit is the largest value when Neg Mtr Cur Lim parameter 73 the negative of the NTC limit and the negative of the IT limit are compared The motor current limits affect the level of the total stator current Is To convert from stator current Is to torque current Iq the flux current Id must be compensated for This is done by subtracting Flux Current parameter 168 from the motor current limit using vector math During flux braking the Iq limit is reduced significantly to allow high levels of Id current A large Id current is required for flux braking to occur Understanding the Monitor Motor Status The monitor motor status parameters are available for you to view the values of various power related functions Pos
285. d on the actual mounting configuration calculated loads and enclosure specifications Minimum thickness of all parts 4 6 0 18 ra A N 154 2 6 07 188 0 2Plcs 7 40 EachEnd Length y 549 4 21 63 J N VY r ha gt 572 ra Bale ay T Brace wee z lt 25 4 1 00 j N x v gt gt 50 8 2 00 A A 14 5 0 57 gt x 682 2 26 86 gt gt lt peny Ni lt 711 2 28 00 7 h p TE we Mounting and Wiring Information Specific to Frames B C D E F G and H Top Mounted Fan Shipped Loose for ee Customer Installatio n an Dimensions for Frame H Proper Fan Rotation Counter clockwise when viewed from the top q 635 0 25 00 Removable Lifting Angle 762 0 508 0 30 20 A Conduit Access Area Front 1270 0 50 a Bottom View Manufacturer dependent may be shorter 635 0 25 2324 1 91 50 635 0 25 Proper Fan Rotation Fan not visible when viewed from the top Conduit Access Area 1270 0 s 50 Top View All Dimensions in Millimeters and Inches 4 18 Mounting and Wiring Information Specific to Frames B C D E F G and H Bottom Dimensions for Frames B G Frames B and C
286. d or reverse motion The direction depends on whether or not bit 11 of Logic Options parameter 17 is set for unipolar or bipolar If bit11 Then the drive receives To change the direction is set for references that are you need to Set the forward reverse bit in the L Option card or command word This bit is displayed Unipolar Allpositive in bits 4 forward and 5 reverse of Logic Input Sts Change the reference sign For this type Use the following to Bipolar Positive and negative of reference change the reference sign Analog voltages Digital numbers Regardless of how you change the direction you can specify how fast the drive can go in either direction forward or reverse To do this you need to set the maximum values in Fwd Speed Limit parameter 41 and Rev Speed Limit parameter 40 You can also specify the minimum speed at which you want the drive to run To do this enter the minimum speed in Min Speed Limit parameter 215 When you set the minimum speed you can still go from a positive reference to a negative reference When you press the stop button the speed will go down to zero Using the Speed Ramps The 1336 IMPACT drive lets you set the acceleration and deceleration ramps by specifying how long you want the drive to go from 0 rpm to the base speed and from the base speed back to 0 rpm Forward Direction acceleration deceleration Constant Speed I i I Speed
287. d the OV or ground terminal at the equipment source end not the drive end You must ground all control and signal wiring at a single point in the system remote from the drive 2 Ground the shield if you are using shielded control and signal wires Connecting the TE Terminal Block The TE terminal block is used for all control signal shields within the drive Refer to the frame specific chapters for the TE terminal block location The TE terminal block accepts wire with the following specifications Wire information Description Minimum wire size 0 30 mm 22 AWG Maximum wire size 2 1 mm 14 AWG Maximum torque 1 36 N m 12 Ib in Wire type Use only copper wire Grounding the Safety Ground PE Most codes require a safety ground You can connect the ground bus to adjacent building steel such as a girder or joist or a floor ground loop provided that the grounding points comply with your national such as NEC regional or local regulations Wiring the Power Mounting and Wiring Your 1336 IMPACT Drive 2 17 Grounding the Optional RFI Filter If you are using an RFI filter you must solidly ground the RFI filter Important Using an optional RFI filter may result in relatively high ground leakage currents The filter incorporates surge suppression devices to clamp line surges to a limited voltage above ground potential Therefore you must permanently install and solidly ground the filter Grounding must not
288. dard math Function Output 2 Func 3 Mask Val Multiply Divide Function In4 C207 gt Function Block Using the Function Block 10 19 The multiply divide function can be performed as either standard math or per unit math Per unit math lets you multiply divide internal drive units on a per unit basis where 4096 is equal to one unit With per unit math 4096 x 4096 4096 because you actually multiply 1 unit by 1 unit to get 1 unit The equation used for per unit math is as follows Int x In2 x 65536 32 bit Out IN3 Example iN1 IN 199 x 8192 x 65536 _ 4 068 373 115 decimal 100 N3 Output Whole Fract 1 068 373 115 dec 3FAE 147B Hex MSW LSW Output 213 STD Math PU Math 3FAE hex 16 302 dec P213 LSW 0 Whl 16302 dec Output 214 147B hex 5 243 dec P214 MSW 16302 Fract 5243 dec In this example the drive controlling the smaller spindle follows the speed of the drive controlling the larger spindle This example is shown in Figure 10 23 Figure 10 23 Example of a Drive Ratio e Func In 1 lt 198 gt An In 1 Value lt 29 gt Speed Ref 1 Hardwired Connection Between Drives C105 AnOut1 Value The smaller D2 will spin approximately 4 096 times faster than the D1 Drive This Ratio is set by the IN2 and IN3 parameters IN2 _ 16777 _ 4 096 PU D2 IN3 4096 1 PU D1 If the current command speed of D1 Speed Ref P29 was 25 of its base speed its value would be
289. datalink in the Factory default not applicable manual for your communications module Minin Ate 32767 Maximum value 32767 Conversion la 147 Data In D2 Parameter number 147 File grou Interface Comm Gateway Data In Use Data In D2 to view the SCANport to drive image that is a des type Petree received from some device on SCANport This image may be Display I4 referred to as the SCANport I O image or a datalink in the Factory default not applicable manual for your communications module Minimum value 32767 Maximum value 32767 Conversion 1 1 148 Data Out A1 Parameter number 148 File grou Interface Comm Gateway Data Out Use Data Out A1 to view the drive to SCANport image that is po he type linkable MEER sent to some device on SCANport This image may be referred to Display m as the SCANport I O image or a datalink in the manual for your Factory default 0 communications module Minimum value 32767 Maximum value 32767 Conversion 1 1 149 Data Out A2 Parameter number 149 Use Data Out A2 to view the drive to SCANport image that is sent to some device on SCANport This image may be referred to as the SCANport I O image or a datalink in the manual for your communications module File group Parameter type Display Factory default Minimum value Maximum value Conversion Interface Comm Gateway Data Out linkable destination x 0 32767 32767 1 1 Parameters 11 47 150 Data Out B1 Parameter number 150
290. de of the 13V to 03026 VP Flashing 18V range Possible faulty analog 15V power supply The power Soft fe supply or the main control board may require Analog Spply Tol red When this condition occurs the replacement drive coasts to a stop regardless i of the selected stop type 03029 VP Solid red Hard A software malfunction has Recycle the power If the fault does not clear replace the SW Malfunction occurred main control board A software malfunction has 03030 ogoned Recycle the power If the fault does not clear replace the SW Malfunction Virsoldired Marg Wher this condition occurs the main control board drive coasts to a stop regardless of the selected stop type 03031 VP Solid red Hard A software malfunction has Recycle the power If the fault does not clear replace the SW Malfunction occurred main control board Troubleshooting 12 11 Fault Code and Text LED Information Fault Type Description Suggested Action 03040 mA Input VP Flashing red Soft A loss of 4 20mA input has occurred Check your wiring and connections If the fault does not clear replace the main control board If you do not want this condition to be reported as a fault change bit 8 in Fault Select 1 parameter 20 to 0 03057 Param Limit VP Flashing red Soft A parameter limit has occurred Examine the parameter limit testpoints to determine the exact cause Refer to the Unde
291. decoupled from load or process is not rotating just before or during the test 6 e If the motor is not rotating during this test then investigate electrical noise creating encoder transitions Improper encoder grounding or a noisy encoder power supply could cause noise This fault cannot be determined for encoderless applications You must visually check for this condition on encoderless systems If your motor does rotate during this test consult the factory Res Sign Err 7 A sign error fault occurs when the average voltage is negative If you receive a sign error run the test again because the value returned is not reliable Res 0 Cur If this bit is set you need to 8 1 Set the rated motor current in Nameplate Amps parameter 4 to the correct value 2 Run the test again 3 Consider replacing the control board 9 Res SW Err A software fault is generated when an improper sequence of events has occurred Consider running the test again Res En Drop 10 The drive enable was lost during the resistance test Consider running the test again and monitor the drive enable bit 9 of Drive Inv Status parameter 15 and or the Inv En LED on the main control board Running the Flux Current Test Rated motor flux is required to produce rated torque at rated current The motor flux test measures the amount of current required to produce rated motor flux and displays the amount in Flux Current parameter 168 The motor accelerates to ap
292. ded in Version 3 xx Minimum value pa A vaca pood Maximum value 8 x base speed Conversion 4096 base motor speed 227 1 Parameter number 227 Enc Pos Fdbk Low File group Monitor Motor Status Enc Pos Fdbk Low shows the LOW word portion of a 32 bit Parameter type source encoder pulse accumulator Each encoder quadrature edge will Display x be counted resulting in a 4X multiplication As a result this Factory default 0 parameter will be scaled such that the position change per motor Minimum value 0 revolution is equal to 4 times the encoder PPR Maximum value 65535 1 Enc Pos Fdbk Low was added in Version 3 xx Conversion ae 228 Parameter number 228 Enc Pos Fdbk Hi File group Monitor Motor Status Enc Pos Fdbk Hi shows the HI word portion of a 32 bitencoder Parameter type source pulse accumulator that was described in the previous parameter Display x This word will change by 1 count for every change in low count of Factory default 0 65 536 4x encoder pulses Minimum value 0 Maximum value 65535 1 Enc Pos Fdbk Hi was added in Version 3 xx Conversion 1 1 Parameters 11 73 229 1 Parameter number 229 Int Torque Ref File group Monitor Motor Status Int Torque Ref shows the value of torque reference that is present Parameter type source at the output of the torque limiter Display X X Factory default 0 0 1 Int Torque Ref was added in Version 3 xx Minimum valie 800 Maximum value 800 Conversion 409
293. ded structure If due to the type of connector you must ground the armor at the cabinet entrance use shielded cable within the cabinet to continue as far as possible with the coaxial arrangement of power cable and ground In some hazardous environments you cannot ground both ends of the cable armor This is because of the possibility of high current circulating at the input frequency if the ground loop is cut by a strong magnetic field This only applies in the proximity of powerful electrical machines In this case make the ground connection at one end through a capacitance that blocks the low line frequency current but presents a low impedance to RF Due to the highly pulsed nature of the circulating current the capacitor type used must be rated for AC to ground voltage Consult the factory for specific guidelines Conduit If you use metal conduit for cable distribution use these guidelines e Drives are normally mounted in cabinets and ground connections are made at a common ground point in the cabinet If the conduit is connected to the motor junction box and the drive end you do not need any additional conduit connections e Route no more than three sets of motor leads through a single conduit This minimizes cross talk that could reduce the effectiveness of the noise reduction methods described If more than three drive motor connections per conduit are required use shielded cable If practical each conduit should contain only
294. device 6 1 Enable SP 1 4 Enable SP 4 Enable P197 Enable SCANport device 1 Enable SCANport device 4 Enable Logic Cmd Input 2 Enable SP 2 5 Enable SP 5 parameter 197 Enable SCANport device 2 Enable SCANport device 5 11 40 Parameters 125 Dir Ref Mask Parameter number 125 f File group Interface Comm SCANport Config You can use the lower byte of Dir Ref Mask bits 0 through 7 to Parameter type Meie destination select which SCANport device can issue a reference command Display bits Nees pe the higher byte Sts 8 aes 15 s a which Factory default 141111111 11111111 ca ie a cee onal reverse direction Minimamiualce 00000000 00000000 commang NOH Cal chopen renee Maximum value 11111111 11111111 0 Disable control Conversion 1 1 1 Enable control The bits are defined as follows Refer to Chapter 8 Using the SCANport Capabilities for more information Bit Description Bit Description Bit Description 0 Refer L Opt 6 Refer SP 6 12 Direct SP 4 Let the L Option board control the Let SCANport device 6 control Let SCANport device 4 control reference the reference the direction 1 Refer SP 1 7 Refer P197 13 Direct SP 5 Let SCANport device 1 control Let Logic Cmd Input Let SCANport device 5 control the reference parameter 197 control the the direction 2 Refer SP 2 reference 14 Direct SP 6 Let SCANport device 2 control 8 Direct L Opt Let SCANport device 6 control the reference Let the L Option board control the the direction
295. dley drives Each motor is energy efficient and designed to meet or exceed the requirements of the Federal Energy Act of 1992 All 1329R motors are optimized for variable speed operation and include premium inverter grade insulation systems which meet or exceed NEMA MG1 Part31 40 4 2 These distance restrictions are due to charging of cable capacitance and ay vary from application to application Includes wire in conduit Values shown are for 480V nominal input voltage and drive carrier frequency of 2 kHz Consult factory regarding opera tion at carrier frequencies above 2 kHz Multiply vales by 0 85 for high line conditions For input voltages of 380 400 or 415V AC multiply the table values by 1 25 1 20 or 1 15 respectively 2 4 Mounting and Wiring Your 1336 IMPACT Drive Table 2 B Maximum Motor Cable Length Restrictions 500V 600V Drives All Cable Lengths Given in meters feet No External Devices w 1204 TFB2 Terminator w 1204 TFA1 Terminator Reactor at Drive g Motor w Insulation V p p Motor w Insulation V p p Motor w Insulation V p p Motor w Insulation V p p Drive Drive kW hp Motor kW Frame p hp 1600V2 Any Cable 15 2 182 9 335 3 61 0 182 9 nab 0 75 1 NR NR o INR oa aio NR J 200 600 i 15 2 182 9 335 3 61 0 182 9 0 37 0 5 NR NR 0 INR 100 INR 200 600 182 9 1 5 2 600 1 2 1 5 1929 600 1 5 2 1825
296. drive parameter table The drive units are converted to display units that are shown on the Human Interface Module HIM Drive units may also be A single letter designator used to identify the various drive sizes Frame sizes are frequently referred to instead display units drive units called internal units EE or E See non volatile memory frame size of the kW or horsepower rating they represent Refer to Chapter 1 Overview to determine the frame size for your drive This term Has the following definition links A link is a software connection between two parameters that lets you transfer data from one parameter to the other The parameter that provides the information is called the source parameter The parameter that receives the data is called the destination parameter The 1336 IMPACT Drive lets you make up to 20 links You can only program links when the drive is not running Links are stored in EE and established at power up and or system reset There are two types of links e User link A user link is a software connection that you establish You can change these links as needed e Default link A default link is a software connection between two parameters that is made when the drive is initialized You can change the default links as needed after initialization Default links are sometimes called pre defined links The default links are as follows To SP An In1 Value gt rb Speed Ref 1
297. e Speed Timer On 15 seconds 0 Time In addition Start Jog Mask parameter 126 should be set to 11111110 11111111 Using the State Machine The state machine function lets you use a decision table to select Function which value to use for the output based on the values of In2 and a timer on In1 Figure 10 8 shows the state machine function block Figure 10 8 State Machine Function Block Func 1 Eval Sel Function Sel In4 In5 Off Time On Time Andini Then this Function Func 3 Eval a ine is Timer is output is used Output 1 False True In6 Function In3 C204 gt True False In7 True True In8 Func 3 Mask Val Functi Function In5 Function In6 Function In C210 gt inz In8 Function In8 State Machine Function Block As an example you could use the state machine function block to set up a speed profiler such as the one shown in Figure 10 9 Using the Function Block 10 9 Figure 10 9 Speed Profiler Using the State Machine Function Block Speed rpm 4000 1024 0 1 2 3 4 Time seconds To set up the function block for this application you would need to enter the values shown in Figure 10 10 Figure 10 10 State Machine Function Block Func 1 Eval Sel Function Sel In1 is true if Motor Speed gt 4000 Cat gt Motor Speed Function In Enter 4000 Func 1 Mask Val Func 2 Eval Sel C81
298. e information Parameters 11 63 202 1 Parameter number 202 Func 2 Mask Val File group Application Prog Function Use Func 2 Mask Val to enter a mask or value to compare Parameter type linkable destination Function In2 parameter 201 to according to the value you Conversion 1 1 select in Func 2 Eval Sel parameter 203 If Func 2 Eval Sel parameter 203 is 0 or 6 11 then 1 Func 2 Mask Val was added in Version 2 xx Display os Factory default 1 Minimum value 32767 Maximum value 32767 If Func 2 Eval Sel parameter 203 is 1 5 then Display bits Factory default 11111111 11111111 Minimum value 00000000 00000000 Maximum value 11111111 11111111 If Func 2 Eval Sel parameter 203 is 12 15 then Display x Factory default 65535 Minimum value 0 Maximum value 65535 Refer to Chapter 10 Using the Function Block for more information 203 1 Parameter number 203 Func 2 Eval Sel File group Application Prog Function Func 2 Eval Sel lets you choose how you want to evaluate Parameter type destination Function In2 parameter 201 Display x 1 Func 2 Eval Sel was added in Version 2 xx Factory default 2 Minimum value 0 Maximum value 17 1 1 Refer to Chapter 10 Using the Function Block for more Conversion information Value Description Value Description 0 None 6 l V Pass the value directly on to the Check to see if Function In2 is function block equal to Func 2 Mask Val 1 Mask 7 I Not V Mask specific bits
299. e gt Math Limit You can configure the drive to report a math limit condition as either a fault or a warning or to ignore the condition To You need to Report the condition as a fault Set bit 10 in Fault Select 2 parameter 22 Clear bit 10 in Fault Select 2 and set bit 10 in Report the condition as a warning Warning Select 2 parameter 23 Make sure that bit 10 is clear in both Fault Ignore the condition Select 2 and Warning Select 2 Troubleshooting 12 25 Understanding Math Limit Testpoints To determine which math limit has occurred you need to examine several testpoints by entering the appropriate number in Test Select 2 parameter 95 and looking at the value of Test Data 2 parameter 94 If Test Data 2 is non zero a math limit has been reached The math limit testpoints are cleared when faults are cleared If Test Data 2 is non zero the value indicates which math limit condition has occurred A bit position is assigned to each limit condition Therefore a value of 1 corresponds to bit 0 2 for bit 1 4 for bit 2 and so forth Typically only a single math limit condition will occur at a time If multiple conditions do occur you need to interpret the testpoint value as combinations of more than one bit For example bits 0 and 1 decimal value 1 2 3 To determine which math limit has occurred you need to 1 Enter a value of 10505 into Test Select 2 parameter 95 2 Look at the value of Test Data 2
300. e DeviceNet to SCANport Word 0 Logic Command Word 1 Reference Word 2 Datalink A1 Word 3 Datalink A2 Output Mapping Word4_ Datalink B1 Write Word5 Datalink B2 Word6 Datalink C1 Word7 1 Datalink C2 Word81 Datalink D1 Word9 1 Datalink D2 Logic Evaluation Block SP An In2 Value p 137 Data In A1 p 140 Data In A2 p 141 Data In B1 p 142 Data In B2 p 143 Data In C1 p 144 p 145 p 146 p 147 Data In C2 p 145 Data In D1 p 146 Data In D2 p 147 Word 0 Logic Status Word 1 Feedback Word2 1 Datalink A1 Word3 1 Datalink A2 Input Mapping Word4 1 Datalink B1 Read Word5 1 Datalink B2 Word6 1 Datalink C1 Word7 1 Datalink C2 Word8 1 Datalink D1 Word91 Datalink D2 Drive Inv Status p 15 SP An Output p 139 Data Out A1 p 148 Data Out A2 p 149 Data Out B1 p 150 Data Out B2 p 151 Data Out C1 p 152 Data Out C2 p 153 Data Out D1 p 154 Data Out D2 p 155 Message Message Handler Buffers Message Handler 1 Optionally enabled using DIP switches on the module Supported SCANport Messages The 1336 IMPACT drive supports the following SCANport messages The formats and methods to use these messages vary depending on the type of gateway used Not all gateways support messaging or all message types Consult your gateway manual s or application notes when determining the level of support for any gateway ATTENTION Hazard of equipment damage exists If messages block tra
301. e Maximum value 3 3 Encoder Step operate at speed shown in P282 for units in Conversion P283 2 Parameter number 285 Step 13 Speed File group Profile Test Data Parameter 285 sets the rpm value for this step Scaling 4096 Parameter type Setup Base Speed Display X X rpm Factory default 0 00 rpm Minimum value 8 x base speed Maximum value 8 x base speed Conversion 4096 base sp 2 Parameter number 286 Be Step 13 Value File group Profile Test Data Parameter 286 sets the time in seconds for time steps the Parameter type Setup counts in units for encoder steps and the TB3 input to trigger on Display x xS xX X X Units for TB Input steps Scaling Factory default 0 0 0 0 0 Time Step 10 x desired value 10 1 0 sec Minimum value 0 0 0 0 0 Encoder Step 10 1 0 units Maximum value 3276 7 5 3276 7 TB Input Step dependent on L Option Mode Sel See P241 Conversion 10 1 0 sec x TBin 10 1 unit 2 Parameter number 287 af Step 13 Type File group Profile Test Data Parameter 287 selects the type of step to be used Parameter type Setup 0 Not Used This forces an End Action Display x 1 Time Step operate at speed shown in P285 for time in P286 Factory default 0 2 TB Input Step operate at speed shown in P285 until this Minimum value 0 Maximum value 3 input goes true 3 Encoder Step operate at speed shown in P285 for units in P286 Conversion Parameters 11 83 2 Parameter number 288 9g Step 14 Speed
302. e 1336 IMPACT drive It describes the procedures needed to install program start and maintain the 1336 IMPACT AC drive Before you operate service or initialize the 1336 IMPACT drive you should at a minimum read the first 6 chapters of this manual Contents of this Manual This manual contains the following information Chapter Title Contents Describes the purpose background and scope of this manual as well as an Preface F overview of this product 1 Overview Provides an overview of the features of the 1336 IMPACT drive Also provides an overview of the 1336 IMPACT hardware 2 Mounting and Wiring Your 1336 IMPACT Drive Provides procedures for mounting and wiring 1336 IMPACT drives This chapter covers the installation information that is common to all drives 3 Mounting and Wiring Information Specific to Provides the mounting and wiring information that is specific to frames A1 A2 Frames A1 A2 A3 and A4 A3 and A4 4 Mounting and Wiring Information Specific to Provides the mounting and wiring information that is specific to frames B C D Frames B C D E F G and H E F G and H 5 Using the L Option Provides information for wiring and using the L Option Starting Up Your System Provides procedures for starting up your system u o E Provides information to help you set up and use the inputs and outputs 7 Configuring the I O Communications available on the 1336 IMPAC
303. e 164 100 allows 1 per unit p u torque during acceleration F 1680 This i file Autotune Autotune Speed 165 68 is the maximum for the flux test This is limited internally by the software group Autotune Setup Sa GR CTE TIRE Tada AREE RY CNET SECT FERRIC RETEST IRATE T A 1 The option to regenerate to stop following identification of flux producing current should function properly with or without a brake or regeneration unit Running the Inertia Test The inertia test measures the inertia of the motor and connected load machine The drive requires an accurate inertia value to set the bandwidth or responsiveness of the speed regulator You can select operation at any bandwidth at or below the calculated maximum bandwidth 13 10 Understanding the Auto tuning Procedure file Autotune group Autotune Results To run the inertia test 1 Set bit 5 in Autotune Dgn Sel parameter 173 2 Enable the drive The motor should accelerate up to the speed specified in Autotune Speed parameter 165 at a rate limited by the torque specified in Autotune Torque parameter 164 The motor stops and the drive updates Total Inertia parameter 157 The Ki and Kp gains are adjusted based on the results of the inertia test the setting of Kf gain and the setting of Spd Desired BW parameter 161 which is the desired bandwidth setting for the drive s speed regulator Bandwidth is limited based on the results of the inertia tests Tun
304. e adapter was not intentionally disconnected e Check the wiring to the SCANport adapters e Replace wiring SCANport expander SCANport adapters and main control board e Complete drive if required If you do not want this condition to be reported as a fault change bit 12 in Fault Select 1 parameter 20 to 0 06045 SP 5 Timeout VP Flashing red Soft The SCANport adapter at port 5 has been disconnected and the logic mask bit for port 5 is set 1 If the adapter was not intentionally disconnected e Check the wiring to the SCANport adapters e Replace wiring SCANport expander SCANport adapters and main control board e Complete drive if required If you do not want this condition to be reported as a fault change bit 13 in Fault Select 1 parameter 20 to 0 06046 SP 6 Timeout VP Flashing red Soft The SCANport adapter at port 6 has been disconnected and the logic mask bit for port 6 is set 1 If the adapter was not intentionally disconnected e Check the wiring to the SCANport adapters e Replace wiring SCANport expander SCANport adapters and main control board e Complete drive if required If you do not want this condition to be reported as a fault change bit 14 in Fault Select 1 parameter 20 to 0 06047 SP Error VP Flashing red Soft SCANport communications have been interrupted If the adapter was not intentionally disconnected e Check the amount of noi
305. e are met Each step transition can be turned off or be one of three active types If a STEP TYPE parameter 0 the step is turned Off 1 the step is time based 2 Tb3 input based 3 Encoder Count based The Step Type is determined by the third parameter in each parameter group The value of the Step Type parameter will change the meaning of the Step Value parameter P 250 In our first example we will make the first step time based by entering a value of 1 in the Step Type parameter Changing the value of the Step Type parameter 251 from a 0 to a 1 turns the step on and tells the control to interpret the step value in units of seconds Enter 400 rpm in the Step 1 Speed parameter 249 Enter 10 seconds in the Step Value parameter 250 EXAMPLE 1 First Step P249 Step 1Speed 400 rpm P250 Step 1 Value 10 seconds P251 Step 1 Type 1 Time Step To program a second step we would setup the parameters 252 through 254 Enter 1700 in Step Speed parameter 252 Turn the step on by entering a value of 1 in the Step Type parameter 254 Enter 10 seconds in the Step Value parameter 253 EXAMPLE 1 Second Step P252 Step 2 Speed 1700 rpm P253 Step 2 Value 10 seconds P254 Step 2 Type 1 Time Step 9 18 Applications Speed Profile Start Up Configuration Description of Operation Second Step In example 1 the Speed profile would command 400 rpm for 10 seconds based on the information in Step 1 The
306. e group Profile Command Parameter 248 is the upper word of the 32 bit speed reference Parameter type Setup This must be linked to P29 Speed Ref 1 Display X X rpm Factory default 0 0 rpm Minimum value 8 x base speed Maximum value 8 x base speed Conversion 4096 base motor speed 249 Parameter number 249 Step 1 Speed File group Profile Test Data Parameter 249 sets the rpm value for this step Scaling 4096 Parameter type Setup Base Speed Display X X rpm Factory default 0 0 rpm Minimum value 8 x base speed Maximum value 8 x base speed Conversion 4096 Base Motor Speed 250 Parameter number 250 Step 1 Value File group Profile Test Data Parameter 250 sets the time in seconds for time steps the Parameter type Setup counts in units for encoder steps or the TB3 input to triggeron Display x xS X X X units for TB Input steps Scaling Factory default 0 0 0 0 0 Time Step 10 x desired value 10 1 0 sec Minimum value 0 0 0 0 0 Encoder Step 10 1 0 units Maximum value 3276 7 5 3276 7 TB Input Step dependent on L Option Mode Sel See P241 gonversion o Losec TEn CaO unit 2 Parameter number 251 i Step 1 Type File group Profile Test Data Parameter 251 selects the type of step to be used Parameter type Setup 0 Not Used this forces an End Action Display x 1 Time Step operate at speed shown in P249 for time in P250 Factory default 0 2 TB3 Input Step operate at speed shown in P249 until P250 Minimum yalye 2 input goes
307. e in P280 Factory default 0 2 TB Input Step operate at speed shown in P279 until this Minimum value 0 Maximum value 3 input goes true 3 Encoder Step operate at speed shown in P279 for units in P280 Conversion 11 82 Parameters 282 Parameter number 282 Step 12 Speed File group Profile Test Data Parameter 282 sets the rpm value for this step Scaling 4096 Parameter type Setup Base Speed Display x x rpm Factory default 0 00 rpm Minimum value 8 x base speed Maximum value 8 x base speed Conversion 4096 base sp 2 Parameter number 283 g3 Step 12 Value File group Profile Test Data Parameter 283 sets the time in seconds for time steps the Parameter type Setup counts in units for encoder steps and the TB3 input to trigger on Display x xS x X X units for TB Input steps Scaling Factory default 0 0 0 0 0 Time Step 10 x desired value 10 1 0 sec Minimum value 0 0 0 0 0 Encoder Step 10 1 0 units Maximum value 3276 7 5 3276 7 TB Input Step dependent on L Option Mode Se Sel See P241 Conversion 10 1 0 sec x TBin 10 1 unit 284 Parameter number 284 Step 12 Type File group Profile Test Data Parameter 284 selects the type of step to be used Parameter type Setup 0 Not Used This forces an End Action Display x 1 Time Step operate at speed shown in P282 for time in P283 Factory default 0 2 TB3 Input Step operate at speed shown in P282 until this Minimum value 0 input goes tru
308. e inertia test has measured a Motor Speed parameter 81 in excess of half the Autotune Speed parameter 165 but a Torque Limit Sts parameter 87 has not been indicated The drive enters a torque limit condition at the start of the i3 inertia test e Make sure the motor is stopped or at least rotating at less than half the auto tune speed before beginning the inertia test e If the motor is not rotating at the start of the inertia test investigate encoder and related wiring as a source for incorrect speed feedback Chapter Objectives Specifications Appendix A Specifications Appendix A provides the specifications for the 1336 IMPACT drive This topic Starts on page Specifications A 1 Input output ratings A 4 Cable and wiring requirements A 5 Software block diagrams A 6 The following table shows the specifications for the 1336 IMPACT drive This category Has these specifications Environmental Ambient operating temperature IP00 Open 0 to 50 C 32 to 122 F IP20 NEMA Type 1 Enclosed 0 to 40 C 32 to 104 F IP65 NEMA Type 4 Enclosed 0 to 40 C 32 to 104 F Storage temperature all constructions 40 to 70 C 40 to 158 F Atmosphere Important Drive must not be installed in an area where the ambient atmosphere contains volatile or corrosive gas vapors or dust If the drive is not going to be installed for a period of time it must be stored in an area w
309. e malfunction was detected on power up or reset 03009 VP Red 2 Hard When thi P diti p h Recycle the power If the fault does not clear replace the HW Malfunction blink gninis TONGINONOCEUrS Ihe main control board drive coasts to a stop regardless of the selected stop type 12 10 Troubleshooting Fault Code LED Fault ol A and Text information Type Description Suggested Action A hardware malfunction was detected on power up or reset 03010 VP Red 3 Hard A aa Recycle the power If the fault does not clear replace the HW Malfunction blink When this condition occurs the main control board drive coasts to a stop regardless of the selected stop type A hardware malfunction was detected on power up or reset 03011 VP Red 4 Hard P H aE Recycle the power If the fault does not clear replace the HW Malfunction blink When this condition occurs the main control board drive coasts to a stop regardless of the selected stop type A hardware malfunction was detected on power up or reset 03012 VP Red 5 Hard p a 4 Recycle the power If the fault does not clear replace the HW Malfunction blink When this condition occurs the main control board drive coasts to a stop regardless of the selected stop type Initialize parameters or e Perform a Recall Values operation 03014 VP Flashing Soft The parameter database is e Perform a Save Values operation EE Checksum red corrup
310. e motor speed rpm Maximum value 8 x base motor speed rpm Conversion 4096 base motor speed 32 Speed Ref 3 Parameter number 32 File group Control Speed Reference Enter the speed reference that the drive should use when speed Parameter type linkable destnaton reference 3 is selected in Logic Input Sts parameter 14 Display x x rpm Factory default 0 0 rpm Minimum value 8 x base motor speed rpm Maximum value 8 x base motor speed rpm Conversion 4096 base motor speed 33 Speed Ref 4 Parameter number 33 Enter the speed reference that the drive should use when speed reference 4 is selected in Logic Input Sts parameter 14 File group Parameter type Display Factory default Minimum value Maximum value Conversion Control Speed Reference linkable destination x x rpm 0 0 rpm 8 x base motor speed rpm 8 x base motor speed rpm 4096 base motor speed Parameters 11 19 34 Speed Ref 5 Parameter number 34 i File group Control Speed Reference Enter the speed reference that the drive should use when speed Parameter type Pehle GasirEiion reference 5 is selected in Logic Input Sts parameter 14 Display x x rpm Factory default 0 0 rpm Minimum value 8 x base motor speed rpm Maximum value 8 x base motor speed rpm Conversion 4096 base motor speed 35 Speed Ref 6 Parameter number 35 File group Control Speed Reference Sead the speed ea eat ae i should use when speed Parameter type Hebe Ces i
311. e rpm value for this step Scaling 4096 Parameter type Setup Base Speed Display x x rpm Factory default 0 0 rpm Minimum value 8 x base speed Maximum value 8 x base speed Conversion 4096 Base Motor Speed 2 Parameter number 259 38 Step 4 Value File group Profile Test Data Parameter 259 sets the time in seconds for time steps the Parameter type Setup counts in units for encoder steps and the TB3 input to trigger on Display x xS x X X units for TB Input steps Scaling Factory default 0 0 0 0 0 Time Step 10 x desired value 10 1 0 sec Minimum value 0 0 0 0 0 Encoder Step 10 1 0 units Maximum value 3276 7 5 3276 7 TB Input Step dependent on L Option Mode Sel See P241 Conversion 0 1 0 sec x TBin 10 1 unit 2 Parameter number 260 of Step 4 Type File group Profile Test Data Parameter 260 selects the type of step to be used Parameter type Setup 0 Not Used This forces an End Action Display x 1 Time Step operate at speed shown in P258 for time in P259 Factory default 0 2 TB Input Step operate at speed shown in P258 until this Minimum value 0 input goes true Maximum value 3 3 Encoder Step operate at speed shown in P258 for units in Conversion P259 261 Parameter number 261 Step 5 Speed File group Profile Test Data Parameter 261 sets the rpm value for this step Scaling 4096 Parameter type Setup Base Speed Display X X rpm Factory default 0 0 rpm Minimum value 8 x base speed Maximum value 8 x
312. e scale parameter The default value of the scale parameter allows a total range of 4096 2048 to 2048 This allows only 50 base speed in each direction By setting a scale factor of 2 in An In 2 Scale parameter 101 the digital input is multiplied by 2 This provides a range of 4096 or 100 base speed in both directions If you want a range of 2 times base speed the scale factor would be 4 base speed is 4096 2 times base speed is 8192 2048 times 4 is 8192 An In 2 Offset parameter 100 remains at the default value of zero allowing the input range to be 10V The range of the offset parameter is t 20V DC as shown in Figure 9 2 In this example the filter parameter An In2 Filter BW parameter 183 is not used The filter parameter is a low pass filter that helps to reduce the affects of noise on the system Figure 9 2 Potentiometer with 10V Range to Control 0 to 100 Base Speed Speed An In 2 Offset Par 100 0 An In 2 Scale An In Filter BW An In 2 Value Ref 7 Par 101 Par 183 CPar 36 gt 2048 X2 0 10V 2048 2048 0 10V 2048 PANO i 20V a048 4096 ee E N 0 Potentiometer 10V A 10V Digital Value 2048 2048 Scale X2 0 X2 Final Value in Par 99 4096 4096 For a second example a 0 to 10 volt potentiometer adjusts the torque reference from 100 to 100 To do this you need to adjust both the scale and offset parameters By linking An In 1 Value parameter 96 to Torque Ref 1 parameter
313. e specified fuses are suitable for branch short circuit protection and provide excellent short circuit protection for the drive The fuses offer a high interrupting capacity and are fast acting Refer to the European selections in Chapter 3 for A1 A4 frames and Chapter 4 for B H frames Circuit Breakers For those installations that are not required to meet the U S NEC UL CSA requirements additional devices are available as input circuit breakers The Bulletin 140 and KTA3 devices meet the circuit breaker requirements They can be used in non U S installations where local national codes allow if they are installed per their installation instructions ATTENTION The 1336 PLUS II does not provide input power short circuit protection Specifications for the recommended fuse or circuit breaker to provide drive input power protection against short circuits are provided Recommended AC Line Circuit Breakers User Supplied IEC Installations per IEC947 2 UL CSA Installations Bulletin 140 Circuit Breaker HMCP Circuit Breaker Maximum Rated Service Short _ Max Short Rated Vt na tn MCP Trip Drive Galatea NURI Circuit Capability Catalog N Setti Circuit Amps Catalog Number kW HP atalog Number 400 415V atalog Number Setting 150V 1336E AQF05 0 37 0 5 140 MN 0400 100 000 HMCPS007C0 H 65 000 1336E AGF07 0 56 0 75 140 MN 0400 100 000 HMCPS015E0C E 65 000 1336E AQF10 0 75 1 140 MN 0630 100 000 HMCPS015E0C E 65
314. e the transformer tap Selecting Verifying Fan Voltage To change a transformer tap follow these instructions ATTENTION To avoid a shock hazard assure that all power to the drive has been removed before proceeding 1 Ensure that all power has been removed to the drive Locate the transformer in the lower left corner of the drive chassis Note lead placement tap being used 3 Determine the correct tap from Figure 4 7 and verify 4 Ifthe present tap is incorrect remove the insulating sleeve from the correct tap 5 Remove the wire lead presently connected 6 Place the wire lead on the selected tap 7 Replace the insulating sleeve on the unused tap Figure 4 7 Fan Tap Locations 200 240V AC Input Voltage 380 480V AC Input Voltage 500 600V AC Input Voltage 200 Volt Tap use for 200 220V 380 Volt Tap 500 Volt Tap use for 380 400V use for 500V 415 Volt Tap use for 415V 240 Volt Tap 460 Volt Tap 575 Volt Tap use for 230 240V use for 460 480V use for 575 600V Mounting and Wiring Information Specific to Frames B C D E F G and H 4 11 Input Fusing Requirements The following are the input fusing requirements for frames B C D E F G and H Maximum Recommended AC Input Line Fuse Ratings fuses are user supplied North American Drive Catalog kW HP 200 240V 380 480V 500 600V Installations Number Rating Rating Rating Rating 1336E _ _ 007 5 5 7 5 40A 20A 15
315. ect in Func 3 Eval Sel parameter 206 1 Func 3 Mask Val was added in Version 2 xx File group Application Prog Function Parameter type linkable destination Conversion 1 1 If Func 3 Eval Sel parameter 206 is 0 or 6 11 then Display x Factory default 1 Minimum value 32767 Maximum value 32767 If Func 3 Eval Sel parameter 206 is 1 5 then Display bits Factory default 11111111 11111111 Minimum value 00000000 00000000 Maximum value 11111111 11111111 If Func 3 Eval Sel parameter 206 is 12 15 then Display x Factory default 65535 Minimum value 0 Maximum value 65535 Refer to Chapter 10 Using the Function Block for more information Parameters 11 65 206 1 Parameter number 206 Funct 3 Eval Sel File group Application Prog Function Funct 3 Eval Sel lets you choose how you want to evaluate Parameter type destination Function In3 parameter 204 Display x 1 Func 3 Eval Sel was added in Version 2 xx Factory gerani Y Minimum value 0 Maximum value 17 Conversion 1 1 Refer to Chapter 10 Using the Function Block for more information Value Description Description Value Description 0 None l V 12 Unsign I lt V Pass the value directly on to the Check to see if Function In3 is Check to see if the unsigned value function block equal to Func 3 Mask Val of Function In3 is less than the 1 Mask I Not V value of Func 3 Mask Val Mask specific bits Check to see if Function In3is not 13 Unsign I lt V 2 All Bits On
316. ective digital range of 32767 Factory default 42 000 Minimum value 16 000 Maximum value 16 000 Conversion 2048 1 000 105 An Out 1 Value Parameter number 105 Use An Out 1 Value to convert a 32767 digital value to a 10 volt output This is the value of the analog output number 1 File group Parameter type Display Factory default Minimum value Maximum value Conversion Interface Comm Analog Outputs linkable destination x 0 32767 32767 1 1 Parameters 11 35 106 An Out 1 Offset Parameter number 106 File group Interface Comm Analog Outputs Use An Out 1 Offset to set the offset applied to the raw analog Parameter type ene desineiton output 1 The offset is applied after the scale factor Display x xxx Volts Factory default 0 000 volts Minimum value 20 000 volts Maximum value 20 000 volts Conversion 205 1 000 107 An Out 1 Scale Parameter number 107 File group Interface Comm Analog Outputs Use An Out 1 Scale to set the scale factor or gain for analog Parameter type ee ESER output 1 A 32767 digital value is converted by the scale factor Display GES This allows an effective digital range of 2048 which is then Factory default 0 500 offset to provide a 10 volt range Tine aici 1 000 Maximum value 1 000 Conversion 32767 1 000 108 An Out 2 Value Parameter number 108 i File group Interface Comm Analog Outputs Use An Out 2 Value to convert a 32767 digital value to a 10 Parame
317. ed Regulate torque generated from the speed the torque generated from the 2 Torque Reg are compared speed External Torque 4 Max Trq Spd Selects the largest value when the torque reference and the torque generated from the speed are compared 69 Torque Ref 1 Parameter number 69 File group Control Torque Reference Use Torque Ref 1 to supply an external motor torque reference to Parameter type mere deiei the drive To select the external torque reference set Spd Trq Display DOG Mode Sel parameter 68 to a value of 2 Factory default 0 0 Minimum value 800 0 Maximum value 800 0 Conversion 4096 100 0 70 Slave Torque Parameter number 70 5 J D File group Control Torque Reference Use Slave Torque to specify the gain value that is multiplied to Parameter type Heie TSi Torque Ref 1 parameter 69 Display DOE Factory default 100 00 Minimum value 200 00 Maximum value 200 00 Conversion 4096 1 00 71 Min Flux Level Parameter number 71 p File group none Use Min Flux Level to set the smallest level of flux used to Parameter type Meie deete convert a torque to a current reference above base speed Display O Setting Min Flux Level to a value less than 100 such as 25 Factory default 100 0 will increase the speed regulator gains to compensate for the Winimurnteaitie 12 5 loss of gain bandwidth that occurs above base speed due to field MEn Ee 100 0 weakening Reducing Min Flux Level below 100 may result in unstable operation ab
318. ed Tol 11 15 password C 10 Pos Mtr Cur Lim 9 7 11 27 13 9 B 22 B 23 Pos Torque Lim 11 27 B 21 B 22 power applying 6 2 before applying 6 1 connecting to drive 2 25 input fusing 2 27 requirements for frames A1 A4 3 4 requirements for frames B G 4 11 isolation type transformer requirements 2 27 line reactor requirements 2 27 understanding limits B 21 wiring 2 17 frames A1 A4 3 1 frames B G 4 1 precharge checking status of 12 19 common bus 11 12 configuring faults warnings for 12 18 disable multiple 11 12 explained 12 15 force exit 11 12 options for 11 12 timeout 11 15 11 16 12 4 12 18 process trim enable 11 22 explained B 11 overview B 10 preset integrator option 11 22 PTrim Feedback 11 21 B 11 PTrim Filter BW 11 22 PTrim Hi Limit 11 23 B 12 PTrim Ki 11 22 B 11 PTrim Kp 11 23 B 11 PTrim Lo Limit 11 23 B 12 PTrim Out Gain 11 24 PTrim Output 11 21 B 11 PTrim Preload 11 22 B 11 PTrim Reference 11 21 B 11 PTrim Select 11 22 B 11 select speed inputs 11 22 set output option 11 22 trim limiter 11 22 trim speed reference 11 22 trim torque reference 11 22 programmable relay Relay Config 1 11 36 Relay Config 2 11 56 Relay Config 3 11 57 Relay Config 4 11 58 Relay Setpoint 1 11 37 Relay Setpoint 2 11 56 Relay Setpoint 3 11 57 Relay Setpoint 4 11 58 wiring 2 23 PTrim Feedback 11 21 B 11 PTrim Filter BW 11 22 PTrim Hi Limit 11 23 B 12
319. ed value of Function In2 is greater than or equal to the value of Func 2 Mask Val Invert Pass the opposite value on to the function block Absolute Pass a positive value on to the function block 11 64 Parameters 204 i 1 Parameter number 204 Function In3 File group Application Prog Function Use Function In3 to provide input into the function block that is Parameter type linkable destination provided with the 1336 IMPACT drive You can choose to either Conversion 1 1 evaluate the input value or pass the value directly to the function Func 3 Eval Sel parameter 206 is 0 or 6 11 then block Display x To evaluate Function In3 you need to also use Func 3 Mask Val Factory default 0 parameter 205 and Func 3 Eval Sel parameter 206 Minimum value 32767 To pass the value directly to the function block enter a value of O Maximum value 32767 into Func 3 Eval Sel If Func 3 Eval Sel parameter 206 is 1 5 then Display bits 1 Function In3 was added in Version 2 xx Factory default 00000000 00000000 Minimum value 00000000 00000000 Maximum value 11111111 11111111 If Func 3 Eval Sel parameter 206 is 12 15 then Display x Factory default 0 Minimum value 0 Maximum value 65535 Refer to Chapter 10 Using the Function Block for more information 205 Func 3 Mask Val Parameter number 205 Use Func 3 Mask Val to enter a mask or value to compare Function In3 parameter 204 to according to the value you sel
320. eeded otherwise excessive inrush current could open or weaken the line fuses Before you can enable the inverter all drive types must complete a first time precharge This is required even if you have set the disable precharge function by setting bit 14 of Bus Brake Opts parameter 13 A filtered or slow average of the bus voltage is developed as a reference or bus voltage tracker to determine if a line drop out has occurred If a 150 volt or greater drop in present bus voltage compared to the filtered bus voltage occurs the drive can start a ridethrough The ridethrough function e disables the drive e restarts a precharge e waits for the bus to return to within 75 volts of the bus voltage tracker s voltage value before starting again file Fault Setup group Fault Config Troubleshooting 12 17 You can use bits 0 4 of Bus Brake Opts to control the slew rate of the bus voltage tracker Refer to the section on the bus voltage tracker later in this chapter for additional information Understanding Ridethrough Ridethrough provides current inrush protection and extended logic operating time if the power lines drop out while the drive is running The drive is immediately disabled when it senses that the incoming power lines dropped out bus capacitor voltage drop The energy stored in the bus capacitors keeps the logic supplies running for an extended time If the power lines return before the logic power supplies lo
321. een the drive and the bottom surface IMPORTANT A4 Frame drives should not be mounted on a combustible surface However if the drive must be mounted on a combustible surface 6 35 mm 0 25 in spacers must be provided under the mounting feet of the drive F Frame drives require a minimum of 152 4 mm 6 0in between the drive back and mounting wall if drives are mounted with the sides touching another device or wall A minimum of 76 2 mm 3 0 in is required on the sides if the back of the drive is mounted against a wall or other device The alternate mounting methods shown in Figure 2 2 cannot be used for Frames F G or H To mount your drive you need to ATTENTION You must be careful to prevent debris such as metal shavings and conduit knockouts from falling into the drive while performing any installation work on or around the drive A hazard of personal injury and or equipment damage exists if foreign material lodges inside the drive 1 Get the dimensions for your drive from the frame specific chapters 2 Drill the holes at the appropriate spot as determined from the drive dimensions 3 Bolt the drive to the mounting surface Mounting and Wiring Your 1336 IMPACT Drive 2 11 User Supplied Enclosures If you are supplying your own enclosure for the 1336 IMPACT drive you can mount your drive within an enclosure or you may mount the drive to let the heatsink extend outside the enclosure F Frame drives with the suf
322. efault 0 0 rpm Minimum value 8 x base sp Maximum value 8 x base sp Conversion 4096 base sp Parameter number 292 oe Step 15 Value File group Profile Test Data Parameter 292 sets the time in seconds for time steps the Parameter type Setup counts in units for encoder steps and the TB3 input to trigger on Display x xS X X X units for TB Input steps Scaling Factory default 0 0 0 0 0 Time Step 10 x desired value 10 1 0 sec Minimum value 0 0 0 0 0 Encoder Step 10 1 0 units Maximum value 3276 7 5 3276 7 TB Input Step dependent on L Option Mode Sel See P241 Conversion 10 1 0 sec x TBin 10 1 unit Parameter number 293 ase Step 15 Type File group Profile Test Data Parameter 293 selects the type of step to be used Parameter type Setup 0 Not Used This forces an End Action Display x 1 Time Step operate at speed shown in P291 for time in P292 Factory default 0 2 TBS Input Step operate at speed shown in P291 until this Minimum value 0 input goes true Maximum value 3 Conversion None 3 Encoder Step operate at speed shown in P291 for units in P292 11 84 Parameters Parameter number 294 294 Step 16 Speed File group Profile Test Data Parameter 294 sets the rpm value for this step Scaling 4096 Parameter type Setup Base Speed Display rpm Factory default 0 0 rpm Minimum value 8 x base sp Maximum value 8 x base sp Conversion 4096 base motor speed Parameter number 295
323. el par 173 Trans Dgn Config par 172 Autotune Torque par 164 Autotune Speed par 165 Autotune Status Autotune Status par 156 Inverter Dgn1 par 174 Inverter Dgn2 par 175 Autotune Errors par 176 Autotune Results Stator Resistnce par 166 Leak Inductance par 167 Flux Current par 168 Slip Gain par 169 Total Inertia par 157 Spd Desired BW par 161 Numerical Parameter Listing No Name Page 1 Language Select 11 10 2 Nameplate HP 11 10 3 Nameplate RPM 11 10 4 Nameplate Amps 11 10 5 Nameplate Volts 11 10 6 Nameplate Hz 11 10 7 Motor Poles 11 11 8 Encoder PPR 11 11 9 Service Factor 11 11 10 PWM Frequency 11 11 11 Inverter Amps 11 11 12 Inverter Volts 11 11 13 Bus Brake Opts 11 12 14 Logic Input Sts 11 13 15 Drive Inv Status 11 13 16 Run Inhibit Sts 11 14 17 Logic Options 11 14 18 Stop Dwell Time 11 14 19 Zero Speed Tol 11 15 20 Fault Select 1 11 15 21 Warning Select 1 11 16 22 Fault Select 2 11 16 23 Warning Select 2 11 17 24 Absolute Overspd 11 17 25 Motor Stall Time 11 17 26 Motor Overload 11 17 27 Line Undervolts 11 17 28 Speed Ref 1 Frac 11 18 29 Speed Ref 1 11 18 30 Speed Scale 1 11 18 31 Speed Ref 2 11 18 32 Speed Ref 3 11 18 33 Speed Ref 4 11 18 34 Speed Ref 5 11 19 35 Speed Ref 6 11 19 36 Speed Ref 7
324. en the signed input value is less than the value of Func X Mask Val parameter 199 202 or 205 Send a true value when the signed input value is less than or equal to the value of Func x Mask Val parameter 199 202 or 205 Send a true value when the signed input value is greater than the value of Func x Mask Val parameter 199 202 or 205 Send a true value when the signed input value is greater than or equal to the value of Func x Mask Val parameter 199 202 or 205 Send a true value when the unsigned input value is less than the value of Func x Mask Val parameter 199 202 or 205 Send a true value when the unsigned input value is less than or equal to the value of Func x Mask Val parameter 199 202 or 205 Send a true value when the unsigned input value is greater than the value of Func x Mask Val parameter 199 202 or 205 Send a true value when the unsigned input value is greater than or equal to the value of Func x Mask Val parameter 199 202 or 205 Send an inverted value through to the function block Send an absolute value through to the function block gt You should set up Func I Eval Sel Func 2 Eval Sel and Func 3 Eval Sel before setting up the other parameters This adjusts the units used for the Function In x and Func x Mask Val parameters Func 1 Mask ValCi9g99 10001101 0001001 The drive looks at only the bits that are set in Func 1 Mask Valif _ modes 2 3 4
325. ence precharge ridethrough conditions and braking Use bits 0 through 4 to set the slew rate for the bus voltage tracker The bus voltage tracker slowly tracks changes in the actual bus voltage If the actual bus voltage drops 150 volts or more below the current value of the bus voltage tracker the drive automatically disables modulation and enters precharge Bits 0 through 4 select the sensitivity of the bus voltage tracker to changes in the actual bus voltage If none of the bits 0 through 4 are set the slew rate is 0 05V second The precharge function of the drive limits the current to the bus capacitors when power is initially applied to the drive The precharge function is completed after a minimum 300 millisecond time delay and bus voltage at least 30 volts greater than the undervoltage setpoint and a stable bus voltage Ridethrough provides extended logic operating time if the power lines drop out while the drive is running If the precharge function is enabled ridethrough also provides inrush current protection by starting a precharge in case the incoming power returns The bits are defined as follows Bit 0 1 Description Slew Rate 1 Set to choose a slew rate of 10V second Slew Rate 2 Set to choose a slew rate of 5V second Slew Rate 3 Set to choose a slew rate of 0 5V second Slew Rate 4 Set to choose a slew rate of 0 05V second Slew Rate 5 Set to choose a slew rate of 0 005V second
326. ent damage caused by improper fusing use only the recommended line fuses specified in the tables in the frame specific chapters Branch circuit breakers or disconnect switches cannot provide this level of protection for drive components Unbalanced Distribution Systems The drive is designed for use with conventional three phase supplies that are symmetrical with respect to ground Surge suppression devices are included to protect the drive from lightning induced overvoltages between line and ground For this reason we recommend a neutral grounded system The drive works with a grounded phase but you may want to use an isolation transformer to provide a supply balanced with respect to ground Ungrounded Distribution Systems All 1336 IMPACT drives are equipped with a MOV Metal Oxide Varistor The MOV provides voltage surge protection and phase to phase plus phase to ground protection which is designed to meet IEEE 587 The MOV circuit is designed for surge suppression only transient line protection not continuous operation With ungrounded distribution systems the phase to ground MOV connection could become a continuous current path to ground MOV line to line and line to ground voltages should not exceed the input voltage rating shown in Appendix A Specifications Exceeding these values may cause physical damage to the MOV Figure 2 7 MOV Ratings R Joules A L Three Phase s Joules A AC input 7 Joules A 4
327. eplace wiring SCANport expander SCANport adapters and main control board e Complete drive if required If you do not want this condition to be reported as a fault change bit 9 in Fault Select 1 parameter 20 to 0 12 12 Troubleshooting Fault Code LED Fault ao f and Text information Type Description Suggested Action 06042 SP 2 Timeout VP Flashing red Soft The SCANport adapter at port 2 has been disconnected and the logic mask bit for port 2 is set 1 If the adapter was not intentionally disconnected e Check the wiring to the SCANport adapters e Replace wiring SCANport expander SCANport adapters and main control board e Complete drive if required If you do not want this condition to be reported as a fault change bit 10 in Fault Select 1 parameter 20 to 0 06043 SP 3 Timeout VP Flashing red Soft The SCANport adapter at port 3 has been disconnected and the logic mask bit for port 3 is set 1 If the adapter was not intentionally disconnected e Check the wiring to the SCANport adapters e Replace wiring SCANport expander SCANport adapters and main control board e Complete drive if required If you do not want this condition to be reported as a fault change bit 11 in Fault Select 1 parameter 20 to 0 06044 SP 4 Timeout VP Flashing red Soft The SCANport adapter at port 4 has been disconnected and the logic mask bit for port 4 is set 1 If th
328. equest the last parameter number EE Command Write Activate the specified EE function Read Full Parameter Request all known attributes for the requested parameters Parameter Value Read Request the value for a specific parameter Parameter Value Write Write a value to a specific parameter Fault Command Write Clear faults clear the fault queue and reset Fault Queue Size Read the number of fault entries allowed in the fault queue Trip Fault Read Request which fault queue entry tripped the drive Fault Queue Entry Read Full Read the contents of the specified fault queue entry Warning Command Write Clear faults and clear the warning queue Warning Queue Size Read the number of fault entries allowed in the warning queue Warning Queue Entry Read Full Read the contents of the specified warning queue entry Link Command Write Clear all links Read Parameter Link Request the parameter link information for a specific parameter Write Parameter Link Write the parameter link information for a specific parameter Product Diagnostic Value Access a simple parameter link checksum Setting Up the Analog I O Parameters for SCANport The following figure shows the six SCANports that are available for use with the SCANport analog I O and the drive parameters that you can use to control this data file nterface Comm group SCANport
329. er 278 selects the type of step to be used Parameter type Setup 0 Not Used This forces an End Action Display x 1 Time Step operate at speed shown in P276 for time in P277 Factory default 0 2 TB3 Input Step operate at speed shown in P276 until this Minimum value 0 input goes true See P241 Maximum value 3 3 Encoder Step operate at speed shown in P276 for units in Conversion P277 27 Parameter number 279 Step 11 Speed File group Profile Test Data Parameter 279 sets the rpm value for this step Scaling 4096 Parameter type Setup Base Speed Display X X rpm Factory default 0 00 rpm Minimum value 8 x base speed Maximum value 8 x base speed Conversion 4096 base sp 2 Parameter number 280 ao Step 11 Value File group Profile Test Data Parameter 280 sets the time in seconds for time steps the Parameter type Setup counts in units for encoder steps and the TB3 input to trigger on Display x xS X X X units for TB Input steps Scaling Factory default 0 0 0 0 0 Time Step 10 x desired value 10 1 0 sec Minimum value 0 0 0 0 0 Encoder Step 10 1 0 units Maximum value 3276 7 5 3276 7 TB Input Step dependent on L Option Mode Sel See P241 Conversion 10 1 0 sec x TBin 10 1 unit 2 Parameter number 281 gi Step 11 Type File group Profile Test Data Parameter 281 selects the type of step to be used Parameter type Setup 0 Not Used This forces an End Action Display x 1 Time Step operate at speed shown in P279 for tim
330. eration Current levels below this Display N value never result in an overload trip For example a service Factory default 1 15 factor of 1 15 implies continuous operation up to 115 of Minimum value 1 00 nameplate motor current MENTALE 2 00 Conversion 4096 1 00 10 PWM Frequency Parameter number 10 gt F File group Motor Inverter Inverter Enter the drive carrier frequency in Hz The drive carrier Parameter type desirei frequency depends on your application and drive size The drive Display ne carrier frequency affects the audible noise level of your motor Factory default 4000 Hz Minimum value 1000 Hz Maximum value from the drive type Conversion 1 1 11 Inverter Amps Parameter number 11 i File group Motor Inverter Inverter Inverter Amps provides the current rating of the inverter The Parameter type eons drive automatically sets Inverter Amps at power up Display x x amps Factory default not applicable Minimum value 0 1 amps Maximum value from drive type Conversion 10 1 0 12 Inverter Volts Parameter number 12 i File group Motor Inverter Inverter Inverter Volts is the drive nameplate voltage rating of the inverter Parameter type SOWA The drive automatically sets Inverter Volts at power up Display nve Factory default not applicable Minimum value 75 volts Maximum value 575 volts 1 1 11 12 Parameters 13 Bus Brake Opts Bus Brake Opts lets you choose options for the bus filter refer
331. erence lar ay Speed Trim 0 To Torque Reference GA PTrim Select Select Torque Command Spd Sts To Speed PI Regulator Freq Limit Nameplate Hz file Application group Process Trim PTrim Reference gt PTrim Feedback gt Control Block Diagrams B 11 Understanding Process Trim Process trim lets you adjust the speed or torque of the motor PTrim Reference parameter 49 contains the setpoint input for the processor under control PTrim Feedback parameter 50 contains the input for the process variable that is being controlled These values are compared The regulator adjusts PTrim Output parameter 48 so that the difference between PTrim Reference and PTrim Feedback approaches 0 Figure B 1 shows the process trim cycle Figure B 1 Process Trim Motor Regulator PTrim Output Process The process trim PI proportional integral regulator takes inputs from PTrim Preload parameter 53 PTrim Ki parameter 54 PTrim Kp parameter 55 and PTrim Select parameter 51 PTrim Select lets you select specific options for the process trim regulator The following options are available To select Set this this option bit Trim the speed reference 0 Trim the torque reference 1 Configure as outer speed trim loop Set bit 2 to pre configure the PTrim Reference parameter 49 and PTrim Feedback parameter 50 values to 2 use the speed ramp output and
332. ess applications You must visually check for this condition on encoderless systems If your motor does rotate during this test consult the factory Ind Sign Err A sign error fault occurs when the average voltage is negative If you receive a sign error you need to 1 Run the test again 2 Consider replacing the circuit boards Ind 0 Cur If this bit is set you need to 3 1 Set the rated motor current in Nameplate Amps parameter 4 to the correct value 2 Run the test again 3 Consider replacing the control board Ind A D Ovfl The motor terminal voltage measuring circuit is not working properly You need to 1 Determine if the motor is connected 2 Check cable connections between the gate drive and control boards 3 Consider replacing the circuit boards 4 Investigate any noise problems Ind En Drop 5 The drive enable was lost during the inductance test Consider running the test again and monitor the drive enable bit 9 of Drive Inv Status parameter 15 and or the Inv En LED on the main control board Running the Resistance Test The drive requires a motor resistance measurement to determine the references for the regulators that control torque The motor resistance test measures the motor resistance and displays it in Stator Resistnce parameter 166 The test runs for approximately 10 30 seconds file Autotune group Autotune Results When running this test you should be awa
333. ess to electrically live parts that may result in personal injury and or equipment damage When a drive mounted HIM is supplied with enclosed NEMA Type 1 IP 20 drives but has been removed from its mounting cradle for remote operation you must install the blank cover plate in place of the HIM The HIM contains a display panel and a control panel The display panel lets you program the drive and view the various operating parameters The control panel lets you control different drive functions Using the Human Interface Module HIM Figure C 1 shows an example of a HIM Figure C 1 Example of a HIM D Display Panel Press this key ESC Al Al ALLEN BRADLEY Control Panel j Human Interface Module HIM wW The display panel provides the following keys This key is To Go back one level in the menu tree that the HIM uses to organize information referred to as The Escape key Alternate which display line top or bottom is currently active Increment increase the selected value If no value is selected use this key to scroll through the groups or parameters currently selected The Select key The Increment key Decrement decrease the selected value If no value is selected use this key to scroll through the groups or parameters currently selected The Decrement key Select the group or parameter that is curre
334. eter 265 sets the time in seconds for time steps the Parameter type Setup counts in units for encoder steps and the TB3 input to trigger on Display x xS x X X units for TB Input steps Scaling Factory default 0 0 0 0 0 Time Step 10 x desired value 10 1 0 sec Minimum value 0 0 0 0 0 3276 7 5 3276 7 0 1 0 sec x TBin 10 1 unit Encoder Step 10 1 0 units Maximum value TB Input Step dependent on L Option Mode Sel See P241 Conversion 2 Parameter number 266 a8 Step 6 Type File group Profile Test Data Parameter 266 selects the type of step to be used Parameter type Setup 0 Not Used This forces an End Action Display x 1 Time Step operate at speed shown in P264 for time in P265 Factory default 0 2 TBS Input Step operate at speed shown in P264 until this Minimum value 0 input goes true Maximum value 3 3 Encoder Step operate at speed shown in P264 for units in Conversion P265 Parameter number 267 aor Step 7 Speed File group Profile Test Data Parameter 267 sets the rpm value for this step Scaling 4096 Parameter type Setup Base Speed Display X X rpm Factory default 0 0 rpm Minimum value Maximum value Conversion 8 x base speed 8 x base speed 4096 Base Motor Speed 268 Parameter number 268 Step 7 Value File group Profile Test Data Parameter 268 sets the time in seconds for time steps the Parameter type Setup counts in units for encoder steps and the TB3 input to trigger
335. ethod must be limited Check with the motor vendor for DC braking application guidelines You may also want to consider using external motor thermal protection You can use DC hold when the 1336 IMPACT drive is set up for encoderless operation and some level of resisting torque is desired at near zero speed After the motor is stopped DC current is applied to the motor Although speed and torque are not controlled the DC current results in resisting torque when the motor shaft is rotated As the motor speed increases towards the rated slip for the motor a very high resisting torque can be produced Only use DC hold for encoderless operation where torque control at zero speed cannot be guaranteed For encoder operation full torque and speed control is provided at zero speed and you should use the normal torque or speed controls Using Up to 400 Motor Current file Control group Control Limits Applications 9 7 ATTENTION A hazard of electric shock or motor movement does exist When you stop the drive using DC hold power is not removed from the motor You may want to provide an alternate way to disconnect power completely from the motor ATTENTION DC hold runs for an indefinite period of time DC hold becomes active only after you have commanded a stop When the stop function completes the DC hold function starts The DC hold continues until you command a start disable the drive enable removed or command
336. ewed 46 38 25 62 from INSIDE Enclosure 587 0 23 11 494 5 19 47 338 6 13 33 i T Ka 1826 7 19 All Dimensions in Millimeters ae e and Inches l yy A A A kv yy vy SESS Sea a Te aaa 16 Required ios ee ee ea ee l 4 3 0 171 Dia for 10 32 x 9 7 0 38 Self Tap 4 0 0 159 for 10 32 x 9 7 0 38 Threaded AM 1 Shading indicates approximate size of drive inside enclosure Minimum dimension allowed More space will 84 1 3 31 improve fan effectiveness and heat dissipation i j 4 23 4 24 Mounting and Wiring Information Specific to Frames B C D E F G and H Heat Sink Through the Back Mounting Frame E 508 01 20 00 489 0 19 25 1270 541 lt 5 00 2 13 Sa wee 2 j ry P i p l l e 1422 41 56 00 i 1095 8 43 14 r k t 1270 6 00 l l l f 26 Required 4 3 0 171 Dia for 10 32 x 9 7 0 38 Self Tap bon 58 4 0 0 159 for 10 32 x 9 7 0 38 Threaded 0 28 i A E E ESI EOE i A f Back of Enclosure 1 Shading indicates approximate size M Drive K ra of drive inside enclosure 1 Minimum dimension allowed More space will improve fan effectiveness and heat dissipation 132 33 5 21 Chapter Objectives Jumper 1 Chapter 5 Using the L Option Chapter 5 provides information to help you set up and u
337. external speed Display x x rpm trim has been added Factory default base motor speed rpm Minimum value 6 x base motor speed rpm Maximum value 0 0 rom Conversion 4096 base motor speed 62 Max Fwd Spd Trim Parameter number 62 SP File group Application Process Trim Use Max Fwd Spd Trim to limit the maximum value of the speed Parameter type ieie desicion reference after the process trim Display x x rpm Factory default base motor speed rpm Minimum value 0 0 rpm Maximum value 6 x base motor speed rpm Conversion 4096 base motor speed 63 Scaled Spd Fdbk Parameter number 63 File grou Control Speed Feedback Scaled Spd Fdbk is a scaled version of speed feedback The AE RS type gt SG inverse of either Speed Scale 1 parameter 30 or Speed Scale 7 Display ne parameter 37 is used Factory default not applicable Minimum value 32767 Maximum value 32767 Conversion 1 1 64 Fdbk Device Type Parameter number 64 File group Control Feedback Device ee K to choose the source for motor speed Parameter type ESEON eedbac romi G ollowing options Display x Value Description Factory default 1 1 Encoderless Minimum value 1 Use this mode if you do not have an encoder Maximum value 3 2 Encoder l Conversion 1 1 3 x E it you do Havel encoder Refer to Chapter 9 Applications for information about the Use this mode to simulate a motor advantages and disadvantages of encoderless and encoder 4 Encoderless W Deadband modes Use this mode if you do not
338. f NEC310 A 6 Specifications Software Block Diagram Classes 7 and 8 may have their respective circuits pulled in the same conduit or layered in the same tray Note Encoder cables run in a bundle may experience some amount of EMI coupling The circuit application may dictate separate spacing Classes 9 10 and 11 may have their respective circuits pulled in the same conduit or layered in the same tray Communication cables run in a bundle may experience some amount of EMI coupling and corresponding communications faults The application may dictate separate spacing All wires of classes 7 through 11 must be shielded per the recommendations In cable trays steel separators are advisable between the class groupings If conduit is used it must be continuous and composed of magnetic steel Spacing of communication cables classes 2 through 6 is Conduit Spacing Through Air 2 inches 230 1 5 inches 4 inches 460 575 3 inches 8 inches proportional to 6 inches per 1000 proportional to 12 inches per 575 volts 1000 volts General Notes Steel conduit is recommended for all wiring classes Classes 7 11 Spacing shown between classes is the minimum required for parallel runs less than 400 feet Greater spacing should be used where possible Shields for shielded cables must be connected at one end only The other end should be cut back and insulated Shields for cables from a cabinet to an exter
339. face Comm SCANport Analog Use SP An In2 Select to select which SCANport analog device is Parameter type linkable destination used in SP An In2 Value parameter 137 Display Factory default 6 Minimum value 1 Maximum value 6 Conversion 1 1 Value Description Value Description Value Description 1 SP 1 3 SP 3 5 SP5 Use SCANport device 1 Use SCANport device 3 Use SCANport device 5 2 SP 2 4 SP 4 6 SP 6 Use SCANport device 2 Use SCANport device 4 Use SCANport device 6 137 SP An In2 Value Parameter number 137 File grou Interface Comm SCANport Analo Use SP An In2 Value to view the analog value of the SCANport Sit A type b Suan device selected in SP An In2 Select parameter 136 You need Display is to link SP a In2 Value to a parameter such as Speed Ref 1 Factory default not applicable parameter 29 Minimum value 32767 Maximum value 32767 Conversion 1 4 Parameters 11 45 138 SP An In2 Scale Parameter number 138 File group Interface Comm SCANport Analog Use SP An In2 Scale to scale SP An In2 Value parameter 137 Parameter type eh EEst Display EX XXX Factory default 0 125 Minimum value 1 000 Maximum value 1 000 Conversion 32767 1 000 139 SP An Output Parameter number 139 j t File group Interface Comm SCANport Analog Use SP An Output to view the analog value that is sent to all Parameter type mebe destination SCANport devices Display i Note Ifa link is made or changed you may have to power
340. ference overview B 19 selecting B 22 Torque Limit Sts 11 30 B 21 torque options 11 30 Torque Ref 1 11 26 B 22 Total Inertia 11 48 13 10 13 11 Trans Dgn Config 11 51 13 3 troubleshooting encoderless 12 29 Run Inhibit Sts 11 14 start up 12 27 U up down counter 10 14 V Vd Max 11 51 voltage reflection reduction 2 5 Vq Max 11 51 W Warning Select 1 8 7 11 16 12 18 Warning Select 2 11 17 12 5 to 12 6 12 24 Warning Status 1 11 71 Warning Status 2 11 72 warnings 12 2 Bus Cycle gt 5 12 15 bus drop 12 15 Bus Undervit 12 15 configuring 11 16 11 17 12 4 to 12 6 External Fit In 12 11 l 10 Inv Overload 12 9 Inv Overtemp Pnad 12 9 InvOvid Pend 12 9 MA Input 12 11 Math Limit 12 11 explained 12 24 Mtr Stall 12 8 MtrOvrld Pend 12 8 MtrOvrld Trp 12 8 Open Circuit 12 15 Param Limit 12 11 explained 12 22 to 12 24 Prechrg Time 12 15 Ridethru Time 12 15 SP 1 Timeout 12 12 SP 2 Timeout 12 13 SP 3 Timeout 12 13 SP 4 Timeout 12 13 SP 5 Timeout 12 13 SP 6 Timeout 12 13 SP Error 12 13 Spd Fdbk Loss 12 11 viewing queue with HIM 12 6 Warning Select 2 12 5 to 12 6 wiring the power 2 17 Z Zero Speed Tol 11 15 www rockwellautomation com Power Control and Information Solutions Headquarters Americas Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee WI 53204 2496 USA Tel 1 414 382 2000 Fax 1 414 382 4444 Europe Middle East Africa Rockwell Automation
341. fixes BPR and CPR Standalone and RPR and WPR Common bus have the following enclosure requirements A Dimensions of enclosure needed to accomodate the drive are nominally 90 by 35 by 20 in B A1200 cfm enclosure ventilating fan is required to be installed by the customer or installer C For the BPR and CPR only additional mounting instructions specifying the relative locations of the drive and choke so that factory supplied interconecting cables can be utilized are supplied If you have a G frame do not mount the drive with the heatsink extended outside of the enclosure If you have an H frame and you are supplying your own piped in cooling for the 1336 IMPACT drive enclosures or are calculating room cooling requirements refer to the following table NEMA Type 1 enclosures from the factory will have exhaust fans and will not require additional enclosure cooling but may require room ambient cooling so as not to exceed 40 C The H frame drive has been tested only as a complete unit including the enclosure The enclosure is an integral part of the cooling package The enclosure dimensions are provided in Chapter 4 The required fan volume is 2600 CFM and air enters at the front bottom of the enclosure and exits out the top Any change to this configuration is at the customers risk Air must not be restricted at top or bottom of the enclosure to ensure good air flow over the capacitor and bus bars as well as to assist the heat
342. g 25 79 47 24 16 74 24 80 46 22 11 54 2 50 3 00 178 0 Ibs 4 20 Mounting and Wiring Information Specific to Frames B C D E F G and H Open Dimensions Frame F Roll In Chassis All Dimensions in Millimeters and Inches ee 635 0 z 25 00 6 6 H A 1543 3 DANGER 60 76 D Allen Bradley 3 ol o o N z q sal DANGER UU E lTollelle a o o Ue C o TT o R Li S L2 T L3 re U M1 V M2 W M3 o C 2 6 5 0 717 6 Mounting and Wiring Information Specific to Frames B C D E F G and H Heat Sink Through the Back Mounting Frame B1 B2 n oy 435 41 17 14 410 2 16 15 308 6 12 15 Cutout as Viewed from INSIDE Enclo
343. g 1 it 3 Clear Fault it 4 Forward it 5 Reverse it6 Jog 2 Start Jog Mask Par 126 Clr Fit Res Mask Par 127 Dir Ref Mask Par 125 it 12 Speed Ref A it 13 Speed Ref B it 14 Speed Ref C it 15 Reset Drive Dir Ref Mask Par 125 Clr Fit Res Mask Par 127 DWDOWWWWWWDWIBDWAWWWIWDW Dir Ref Owner Par 128 Start Stop Owner Par 129 Jog1 Jog2 Owner Par 130 Ramp CIFit Owner Par 131 Flux Trim Owner Par 132 Drive Inv Status Par 15 Bit 0 Run Ready Bit 8 At Set Speed Bit 1 Running Bit 9 Enable LED Bit 2 Command Dir Bit 10 Stopped Bit 3 Rotating Dir Bit 11 Stopping Bit 4 Accelerating Bit 12 At Zero Spd Bit 5 Decelerating Bit 13 Speed Ref A Bit 6 Warning Bit 14 Speed Ref B Bit 7 Faulted Bit 15 Speed Ref C it 7 Current Limit Stop it 8 Coast to Stop it 9 Speed Ramp Disable it 10 Flux Enable Magnetizing Flux it 11 Process Trim Enable CBA 000 No Change 001 Speed Ref 1 010 Speed Ref 2 011 Speed Ref 3 100 Speed Ref 4 101 Speed Ref 5 110 Speed Ref 6 111 Speed Ref 7 No Change Speed Ref 1 Speed Ref 2 Speed Ref 3 Speed Ref 4 Speed Ref 5 Speed Ref 6 Speed Ref 7 The owner parameters 128 through 132 are covered in the next section SCANport has two parts control and analog I O The SCANport control
344. g Select 1 The bits are defined as follows Bit Description 0 RidethruTime A bus ridethrough timeout occurred 1 Prechrg Time A bus precharge timeout occurred 2 Bus Drop A bus drop of 150 volts occurred 3 Bus Undervit A bus undervoltage occurred 4 Bus Cycles gt 5 More than 5 ridethroughs occurred in a row 5 Open Circuit Fast flux up current is lt 50 Bit 6 7 10 11 File group Parameter type Display Factory default Minimum value Maximum value Conversion Fault Setup Fault Config linkable destination bits 01111110 00100011 00000000 00000000 01111111 00111111 Ve Refer to Chapter 12 Troubleshooting for additional information Description Bit Reserved 12 Leave 0 mA Input A loss of input connection 13 occurred after it was established SP 1 Timeout Loss of communication with 14 SCANport device 1 occurred SP 2 Timeout Loss of communication with 15 SCANport device 2 occurred SP 3 Timeout Loss of communication with SCANport device 3 occurred Description SP 4 Timeout Loss of communication with SCANport device 4 occurred SP 5 Timeout Loss of communication with SCANport device 5 occurred SP 6 Timeout Loss of communication with SCANport device 6 occurred SP Error Too many errors on the SCANport communication 11 15 11 16 Parameters 21 Warning Select 1 Parameter number 21 Use Warning Select 1 to specify how the drive should handle Ti type E e certain conditi
345. g operation at carrier frequencies above 2 kHz Multiply values by 0 85 for high line conditions If these tables indicate that your motor cables are not over the maximum cable length for your motor you probably do not need a terminator or output reactor Mounting and Wiring Your 1336 IMPACT Drive 2 3 Table 2 A Maximum Motor Cable Length Restrictions 380V 480V Drives All Cable Lengths Given in meters feet No External Devices w 1204 TFB2 Term w 1204 TFA1 Terminator pacity a Motor Motor Motor Motor Drive Drive kW Motor kW B or Frame hp hp A2 B3 1329 1329R4 HR L A or B23 1329 A2 B3 1329 A2 1329 Any Any Any 3 Cable Type Any Cable Type Cable Type Any Any Any Cable Cable Cable Any Cable Shida Unshid Cable sniaf Unshid Shia Unshid Cable Cable Cable 12 2 133 5 1114 3 91 4 30 5 61 0 30 5 61 0 182 9 22 9 182 9 0 37 0 5 10 87 0 5 40 440 875 300 100 200 100 200 00 75 600 Ai 0 75 1 12 2 335 114 3 914 30 5 30 5 30 5 30 5 182 9 229 182 9 075 01 40 110 375 300 100 100 100 100 600 75 600 0 37 0 5 12 2 335 114 3 91 4 ees 30 5 61 0 30 5 61 0 182 9 22 9 182 9 40 110 375 300 WET 100 200 100 200
346. g parallel runs Unshielded cable should be 4 conductor with the ground lead connected directly to the drive ground terminal PE and the motor frame ground terminal Shielded Cable You should use shielded cable if sensitive circuits or devices are connected or mounted to the machinery driven by the motor You must connect the shield to the drive chassis Make the connection at both ends to minimize the external magnetic field If you use cable trays or large conduits to distribute the motor leads for multiple drives use shielded cable to reduce or capture the noise from the motor leads and to minimize cross coupling of noise between the leads of different drives Connect to the ground PE connections at both the motor and the drive end Mounting and Wiring Your 1336 IMPACT Drive 2 19 Some installations require armored cable instead of shielded cable Refer to the following table Condition Insulation Type Example Pvc THHN Dry XLPE XHHW 2 Wet XLPE XHHW 2 1 For input voltages in excess of 230 V AC motor cables greater than 15 m 50 ft or wire with less than 15 mil of insulation wire with XLPE insulation is recommended Contact Rockwell Automation if you have questions Armored Cable Armored cable also provides effective shielding Ideally you should ground armored cable only at the drive PE and motor frame Some armored cable has a PVC coating over the armor to prevent incidental contact with groun
347. ge Torque regulation To 5 of rated motor torque encoderless 2 with an encoder Power loss ridethrough capability 2 seconds Flying start Can start into a spinning motor Inverter overload capability Constant torque 150 of rated drive output for 1 minute Motor overload capability Adjustable to up to 400 of motor rating for 1 minute Programmable accel decel rates From 0 to 6553 seconds Current limit Programmable to 400 of rated motor current not to exceed 150 of the drive output limit Control Force Technologies Field oriented control current regulated sine code PWM with programmable carrier frequency HP Drive Rating Carrier Frequency 1 3 4 kHz 1 12 kHz 7 5 30 4 kHz 1 12 kHz 40 60 4 kHz 1 12 kHz 75 125 2 kHz 1 6 kHz 150 250 2 kHz 1 6 kHz 300 500 2 kHz 1 4 kHz 600 650 1 5 kHz 1 4 kHz 700 800 1 kHz 1 4 kHz Refer to the derating guidelines in Appendix D Derating Guidelines Output voltage range 0 to rated voltage Output frequency range 0 to 250 Hz Incremental dual channel isolated with differential transmitter 100 KHz maximum quadrature 90 27 25 C Encoder Supply power 12 volts 500mA Input 5 volts 2 5 volts minimum 10mA minimum or 12 volts 9 5 volts minimum 10mA minimum Independently programmable acceleration and deceleration times Program from 0 to 6553 Accel decel z seconds in
348. gital value of 1024 to the range This allows full range deflection on the 0 to 10 volt meter with 5 volts indicating zero speed Applications 9 11 Figure 9 4 Analog Output 1 100 Speed Indication 100 100 Base Speed 0 Speed Base Speed Motor Speed An Out 1 Value An Out 1 Scale An Out 1 Offset Par 107 foes x0 25 5V 1024 f 2048 10V 4096 100 Speed 1024 2048 10V 100 Base Speed 0 0 1024 5V 0 Speed 4096 100 Speed 1024 0 OV 100 Digital Range From Drive 4096 0 4096 Scaled by 0 25 1024 0 1024 Offset by 5V Adding 1024 1024 1024 1024 Digital Value 0 0 2048 Meter Voltage 0 Volts 5 Volts 10 Volts Base Speed 100 0 100 Using 4 20 mA Inputs Outputs The 1336 IMPACT drive provides a 4 20 mA input and a4 20 mA output You can use the parameters that are available for the 4 20 mA input and output in the same way that you would use the analog input and output parameters For example you can use a scale offset and or filter parameter to adjust the input value and a scale and or offset parameter to adjust the output value Two advantages for using the 4 20 mA are e The current supply is regulated to adjust the voltage as needed to keep a constant current moving through the system e Noise in the system does not affect current as much as it does voltage Figure 9 5 shows an example of a 1336 IMPACT drive that is used as a master drive to control three o
349. gt Ca01 Motor Speed Function In2 Enter 1024 C202 gt Func 2 Mask Val In2 is true if Motor Speed gt 1024 Func 3 Eval Sel Andini Then this en If In2 is Timer is output is used Output 1 False False In3 0 False True In6 Not used Function In3 True False In7 Ramp Disable True True In8 Ramp Disable Stop Enter 0 This value is not used Func 3 Mask Val Enter 0 C207 D Function In4 Logic Cmd Input Enter 0 17 minutes 10 seconds gt C208 gt Function In5 Enter 0 This value is not used C209 gt Function In6 Enter 00000010 00000000 C210 Function In7 Enter 00000010 00000001 gt C211 Function In8 State Machine Function Block This works as shown in Figure 10 11 10 10 Using the Function Block Figure 10 11 Speed Profiler Using the State Machine Function Block At point A a start command has been received and the motor speed can begin to follow the specified acceleration ramp Speed At point B the motor speed has reached 1024 internal units Because internal In2 Motor Speed parameter 81 gt 1024 becomes true while In1 units Motor Speed gt 4096 is still false the state machine uses In7 Ramp Disable as the output sent to Function Output parameter 213 which is 4000 linked to Logic Cmd Input parameter 197 The motor speed increases using the current limit At point C In1 Motor Speed
350. h for cases where there is an unstable bus By changing the rate used for the bus voltage tracker you can make your system more or less sensitive to changes in the actual bus voltage For example if your drive currently enters precharge after the motor exits regeneration you may need to change your slew rate Figure 12 2 shows an example of the filtered bus voltage reference Figure 12 2 Example Bus Voltage Line Volts Bus voltage tracker 150V Actual bus voltage Time At point A the motor was in regeneration so the value of the bus voltage tracker slowly increased At point B the motor was no longer in regeneration and the bus voltage had dipped below the nominal range If the drive compared point B with point A the drive would have seen a bus drop of 150V and entered precharge However because the drive compared point B with the bus voltage tracker the bus drop was less than 150V and the drive continued operating At point C the bus voltage had dropped 150V and the drive entered a precharge state Bus Brake Opts provides the following options for changing the slew rate This bit With this text Sets the slew rate to 10V second This option is the most sensitive to changes in the actual bus voltage 1 Slew Rate 2 5V second Slew Rate 3 0 5V second Slew Rate 4 0 05V second 0 005V second This option is the least sensitive to changes in the actual bus voltage 0 Slew Rate 1 4 Slew
351. he Allen Bradley Publication Index SD499 documents are available on CD ROM or in multi languages A glossary of industrial automation terms and abbreviations ooo Inglistiel Automation AG 7 1 Terms and Abbreviations The following terms and abbreviations are specific to this product For a complete listing of Allen Bradley terminology refer to the Allen Bradley Industrial Automation Glossary This term Has the following definition Bandwidth is the frequency range from 0 to the point at which the magnitude response of the speed bandwidth regulator is 0 707 of or 3db below its zero frequency steady state value The bandwidth indicates the rise time or speed of response of the speed regulator 27f where f is Hz or cycles per second destination parameter read and write parameters Destination parameters accept data from other parameters The drive uses this data to perform the desired functions An example of a destination parameter is Speed Ref 1 parameter 29 which can accept a speed reference from a device such as a PLC Throughout this manual the following symbol indicates a destination parameter Destination parameters may also be called sink scene Display units are the units that are displayed on the Human Interface Module HIM Display units are units such as Hz volts and rpm and are converted to and from drive units by the HIM Drive units are the actual values of the parameters as stored within the
352. he fault in position 12 occurred 3 Enter a value of 11212 in Test Select 2 4 Look at the value of Test Data 2 to see the number of minutes and seconds after power up that the fault in position 12 occurred To clear the fault queue select Clear Queue from the Fault Queue options To view the warning queue select Warning Queue from the Control Status options The remaining steps are the same as for the fault queue Using the Password Mode Password mode lets you enable password protection and change the password By default the password is 0 which disables password protection To use Password mode Press any key from the status display Choose Mode is shown Press INC or DEC to show Password Press ENTER Press INC or DEC until Modify is displayed Press ENTER Enter Password is displayed Press INC or DEC to scroll to your desired new password With a Series A Version 3 0 or Series B HIM SEL moves the cursor 7 Press ENTER to save your password Aw Fw Nh 8 Press ENTER again to return to Password mode 9 Press INC or DEC until Logout is displayed 10 Press ENTER to log out of Password mode Using the Human Interface Module HIM C 11 With a Series A Version 3 0 or Series B HIM you can program Password mode to be displayed when drive power is applied To do this you need to press the Increment and Decrement keys simultaneously while the Password display is shown Once you set the password the Progr
353. heck the cabinet filters drive fans and heatsinks Check the thermal sensor and sensor wiring connector An inverter ov rteinberat r is Reduce the load or duty cycle if possible 02049 VP Flashing Soft pending The inverter heatsink Lower the value of EWM Frequency parameter 10 Inv Overtemp Pnd red temperature is approaching the Check the roof fan direction of rotation H frame only trip level Rotation should be counter clockwise when viewed from the top If you do not want this condition to be reported as a fault change bit 1 in Fault Select 2 parameter 22 to 0 An aed overload is 7 Reduce the load or duty cycle if possible pon Ing Ginvertercurrent nas If you do not want this condition to be reported as a fault 02061 VP Flashing been in excess of 105 of f invOvid Pend ed Soft Inverter Amps parameter 11 too change bit 13 in Fault Select 2 parameter 22 to 0 long Continued operation at this Refer to the Understanding the IT Inverter Protection load level will cause an overload Section in Appendix B for more information Inverter IT overload The Reduce the load or duty cycle if possible 02063 VP Flashing inverter current has been in a Inv Overload red Soft excess of 105 of Inverter Amps If you do not want this condition to be reported as a fault parameter 11 too long change bit 15 in Fault Select 2 parameter 22 to 0 Check the cabinet filters drive fans and heatsinks Check the thermal sensor a
354. hen Total Inertia Spd Desired BW And Error Filtr BW parameter 157 is parameter 161 is set to parameter 162 is set to inertia lt 0 3 seconds 25 radians second 125 radians second 0 3 seconds lt inertia lt 2 seconds 16 radians second 80 radians second 2 seconds lt inertia lt 5 seconds 8 radians second 40 radians second 5 seconds lt inertia lt 20 seconds 1 6 radians second 25 radians second inertia gt 20 seconds 0 8 radians second 25 radians second In many cases the automatic selection by the drive for the bandwidth setting provides acceptable performance and no further adjustments are required However if you want a faster response to speed reference and less speed disturbance to changes in load increase the bandwidth Conversely if you want a slower response decrease the bandwidth Mid range settings at half the maximum bandwidth value are a good place to start when adjusting the bandwidth The drive sets the regulator Kp and Ki gains when the bandwidth adjustment is made Important If you set the speed regulator bandwidth too high the motor and load could chatter If set too low response will be sluggish 13 12 Understanding the Auto tuning Procedure file Control group Speed Regulator To use manual tuning 1 Adjust Kp Speed Loop parameter 159 to set how quickly the drive responds to changes in reference and load Higher values of gain result in faster response to reference changes a
355. her Kp Speed Loop or Ki Speed Loop the 1336 IMPACT drive places the bandwidth value at zero This turns off the automatic calculation of gains based on the setting of Spd Desired BW parameter 161 The regulator then uses the custom Ki and Kp gain values that you entered To return to automatic tuning of Ki and Kp enter a non zero bandwidth in Spd Desired BW If possible you should use automatic tuning Adjusting the Kf Gain In addition to the Ki and Kp regulator gains a third gain term has file Control ae been included This gain is represented by Kf Speed Loop group Speed Regulator parameter 160 The Kf gain affects speed overshoot in response to a step change in speed reference You can adjust the Kf gain parameter at any time independent from the proportional and integral gains The drive chooses the default setting of Kf based on Fdbk Device Type parameter 64 when the inertia test is performed A Kf setting of 1 0 makes the control act like a conventional proportional integral type regulator You can set the Kf gain manually based on overshoot When Kf is Then The speed loop acts like a normal PI loop with the overshoot equaling approximately 13 This is the default setting for 19 encoder based systems 0 7 The overshoot is typically less than 1 0 7 is the recommended operating point This is the default setting for i encoderless systems 0 5 The response becomes underdamped with n
356. here it will not be exposed to a corrosive atmosphere Relative humidity 5 to 95 non condensing Altitude 1000m 3300 ft without derating Shock 15g peak for 11 ms duration 1 0 ms Vibration 0 152 mm 0 006 inches displacement 1g peak Specifications This category Has these specifications Electrical Input voltage rating See the derating curves for voltages above nominal 200 240V AC standalone 3 phase 10 15 nominal 380 480V AC standalone 3 phase 10 15 nominal 500 600V AC standalone 3 phase 10 15 nominal 513 621V DC common bus 10 15 nominal 776V DC common bus 10 15 nominal Input power rating 2 134 KVA 230V 2 437 KVA 380V 2 555 KVA 460V 2 3 578 695 KVA 500 600V Input frequency 50 60 Hz 3 Hz Standard output voltage Three voltage ranges are available Each voltage range is line dependent and can power a motor between the following voltages 200 240V AC line dependent 380 480V AC line dependent 500 600V AC line dependent If the voltage required for your application is not shown contact Allen Bradley for specific information Note Due to internal voltage drops in the power structure and voltage margins required for regulation the drive is unable to produce full output voltage at base speed If full horsepower is required at or above base speed an increase in current is
357. ied or an auxiliary circuit Important Depending on the circuitry connected additional fusing may be required ATTENTION The installation of auxiliary circuits must comply with the national codes and standards NEC VDE BSA etc and local codes regarding wire type conductor sizes branch circuit protection and disconnect devices Failure to do so may result in personal injury and or equipment damage The auxiliary circuit can be utilized to a maximum current capacity of 8 amperes RMS The maximum and minimum wire size accepted by TB9 is 4 0 and 0 8 mm 12 and 18 AWG Use Copper wire Only with a minimum temperature rating of 75 degrees C Maximum torque is 0 90 1 81 Nm 8 16 lb in If you have a B H frame drive you can connect the 1336 IMPACT drive to a network using either an isolated gateway such as a GD1 or GD2 communications module or an internal gateway such as a GM1 or GM2 communications module If you have an Al A4 frame you can connect the 1336 IMPACT drive to a network using an isolated gateway If you are using an isolated gateway connect the module to the drive by plugging the communications module cable into the bottom of the drive If you are using an internal gateway connect the module to the drive at the connector labeled GATEWAY on your board Installing an Interface Board Connecting the Power to the Drive Mounting and Wiring Your 1336 IMPACT Drive 2 25
358. im crake type PP meae Eire regulator If Ki process trim is 1 0 the process trim PI regulator Display A output equals 1 pu in 1 second for 1 pu process trim error Factory default 1 000 Minimum value 0 000 Maximum value 16 000 Conversion 4096 1 000 Refer to the Trim Control Overview section in Appendix B Control Block Diagrams for more information 11 23 55 PTrim Kp Parameter number 55 Use PTrim Kp to control the proportional gain of the process trim ee type ee SR regulator If the Kp process trim is equal to 1 0 the process trim Display sae PI regulator output equals 1 pu for 1 pu process trim error Factory default 1 000 Minimum value 0 000 Maximum value 16 000 Conversion 4096 1 000 Refer to the Trim Control Overview section in Appendix B Control Block Diagrams for more information 56 Reserved Parameter number 56 File group Leave this parameter set to 0 Parameter type Display Factory default Minimum value Maximum value Conversion 57 Reserved Parameter number 57 File group Leave this parameter set to 0 Parameter type Display Factory default Minimum value Maximum value Conversion 58 PTrim Lo Limit Parameter number 58 Use PTrim Lo Limit to specify the low limit of the process trim Seth type Teta eee ee ae regulator output value The output of the process trim regulator is Display Ayes limited by adjustable high and low limits Factory default 100 0 Minimum value 800 0 Max
359. imum value 800 0 Conversion 4096 100 0 Refer to the Trim Control Overview section in Appendix B Control Block Diagrams for more information 59 PTrim Hi Limit Parameter number 59 Use PTrim Hi Limit to specify the high limit of the process trim regulator output value The output of the process trim regulator is limited by adjustable high and low limits File group Parameter type Display Factory default Minimum value Maximum value Conversion Application Process Trim linkable destination x X 100 0 800 0 800 0 4096 100 0 Refer to the Trim Control Overview section in Appendix B Control Block Diagrams for more information 11 24 Parameters 60 PTrim Out Gain Parameter number 60 File group Application Process Trim The output of the process trim regulator is scaled bya gain factor Parameter type Mete ISi This occurs just before the upper and lower limit Use PTrim Out Display 15 56 Gain to PN the gain value to use A negative gain value Factory default 1 000 inverts the process trim output Minimu ae 8 000 Maximum value 8 000 Conversion 4096 1 000 Refer to the Trim Control Overview section in Appendix B Control Block Diagrams for more information 61 Max Rev Spd Trim Parameter number 61 ae ns File group Application Process Trim Use Max Rev Spd Trim to limit the minimum value of the speed Parameter type Hebe desiren reference after the process trim output and the
360. ing a speed error value to the speed PI regulator The speed PI regulator uses the Kp proportional and Ki integral gains to adjust the torque reference value that is sent to the motor to try to get the actual speed of the motor as close to the speed you specified as possible This can be shown as Speed Regulator ee The Kp and Ki gains are set during the auto tune procedure Once you find gains that provide a good speed of response for your system without making your system unstable you should not change the Kp and Ki parameters The Kp and Ki gains are covered in the Inertia Test portion of Chapter 13 Understanding the Auto tuning Procedure The following information about Kp is also provided to show what happens if you are not using the proper gains for your system If Kp is Then The response time decreases This means that it takes the regulator a Too low __ longer time to get the speed feedback value close to the speed reference value that you specified A torque ripple can be produced If you have an encoder on your Too high system the torque ripple can be produced typically when Kp is around If you do not have an encoder on your system the maximum is less 9 50 If you do noth d he maximum is than 50 0 The speed PI regulator is strictly an integral regulator This causes unstable operation The following information is provided about Ki If Ki is Then The time that i
361. ing bus voltage regulation with the speed profile feature is Not Recommended If bus regulation is enabled the motor may not reach commanded speed and could cause an over travel condition on the speed profile steps Relay Output Configuration When Speed Profiling is enabled parameter 191 Relay 4 Config is set to 39 Profile Pos This relay will energize when each encoder step reaches the step position within the set tolerance p 244 Motor Current Limits Parameter 73 Negative Motor Current is set to 200 If the drive runs into a current or torque limit during a timed step the programmed travel time will be increased For TB3 input and encoder steps the time to travel a given distance will be increased if this situation occurs Torque Mode Set Parameter 68 Torque Mode to a value of 1 TB Input Mode Parameter 116 should be set to a value of 31 Feedback device is Encoder Parameter 64 Fdbk Device Type is set to a value of 2 Profile Command amp Control Applications 9 21 Once a profile is properly configured a command sequence is initiated by setting the first two bits of the Profile Enable parameter 235 g Parameter Number 235 Profile Enable Parameter Type Read Write Bit 7 Bits Bit4 Bits Bit2 Bit1 Bito Enable Run Sequence Hold Enc VelBlend Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Bit 0 the first bit sets the Home positio
362. ing the Speed Regulator Tuning the speed regulator refers to setting three regulator gains Ki Kp and Kf to get the desired drive response to changes in speed reference and load The 1336 IMPACT drive uses a modified PI proportional integral controller for the speed regulator You can adjust the setting of the regulator gains either automatically or manually The Kp proportional and Ki integral gain settings for the speed regulator affect the stability of the regulator and the response to changes in speed reference and load disturbances You can adjust the Ki and Kp gains automatically by selecting a speed bandwidth You can also set these gains manually The automatic method is preferable as it is easier and also sets the Kf Speed Loop parameter 160 Fdbk Filter Sel parameter 65 and Error Filtr BW parameter 162 according to the Fdbk Device Type parameter 64 To use automatic tuning 1 Run the inertia test to get the correct value for Total Inertia parameter 157 If you cannot run the inertia test perhaps because of mechanical limitations you can manually enter the inertia value Total Inertia is defined as the time in seconds the drive takes to accelerate the motor and load from zero to rated motor speed at rated motor torque If measurements are made at less than rated conditions extrapolate the results to rated conditions 2 Following the inertia test the drive adjusts the maximum range and present setting of
363. installation combines a drive with sensitive devices or circuits program the lowest possible drive PWM frequency You can install 1336 IMPACT drives with an RFI filter The RFI filter controls radio frequency conducted emissions into the main supply lines and ground wiring If you follow the cabling and installation instructions described in this manual interference problems are unlikely when the drive is used with conventional industrial electronic circuits and systems You should use the optional RFI filter if e You must conform to a standard such as EN 55011 VDE0875 BSI or FCC e You need to achieve very low emission levels e You are installing sensitive devices or circuits on the same AC supply e The motor cable exceeds 50 meters 164 feet Beyond this length capacitance to ground increases the supply emissions Mounting and Wiring Your 1336 IMPACT Drive 2 29 Important The conformity of the drive and filter to any standard does not assure that the entire installation conforms Other factors can influence the total installation and only direct measure can verify total conformity Installing an RFI Filter To install the RFI filter follow the instructions provided with the filter In addition you should note the following information e Connect the RFI filter between the incoming AC supply line and the drive power input terminals e Install the filter on the same mounting plate as the drive if possible The filter
364. ion In9 11 73 Function Output1 11 69 Function Output2 11 69 Function Sel 11 68 Fwd Speed Limit 11 20 13 9 B 7 Id Offset 11 73 Int Torque Ref 11 73 Inverter Amps 11 11 Inverter Dgn1 11 52 13 4 Inverter Dgn2 11 52 13 4 Inverter Volts 11 11 Iq 11 31 B 26 Iq Offset 11 73 Jog Speed 1 11 19 Jog Speed 2 11 19 Jog1 Jog2 Owner 11 42 Kf Freq Reg 11 53 Kf Speed Loop 11 49 13 11 13 13 B 18 B 37 Ki Freq Reg 11 53 Ki Speed Loop 11 48 13 12 B 18 B 37 Kp Freq Reg 11 53 Kp Speed Loop 11 48 13 12 B 18 B 37 L Option In Sts 11 38 L Option Mode 9 14 11 37 Language Select 11 10 Leak Inductance 11 50 Line Undervolts 11 17 12 16 12 19 Logic Cmd Input 11 60 Logic Input 9 7 Logic Input Sts 8 1 to 8 3 11 13 B 5 Logic Options 11 14 B 7 mA In Filter BW 11 54 mA Input Offset 11 34 mA Input Scale 11 34 mA Input Value 11 34 mA Out Offset 11 36 mA Out Scale 11 36 mA Out Value 11 35 Max Fwd Spd Trim 11 24 Max Mtr Current 9 8 11 59 Max Rev Spd Trim 11 24 Min Flux Level 11 26 13 11 B 21 Min Speed Limit 11 69 Mop Increment 9 14 11 38 Mop Value 9 14 11 38 Motor Current 11 29 Motor Flux 11 30 B 21 Motor Frequency 11 30 B 26 Motor Overload 11 17 Motor Poles 11 11 B 26 Motor Power 11 30 Motor Speed 11 28 Motor Stall Time 11 17 B 29 Motor Torque 11 29 Motor Voltage 11 29 Motor Voltage 11 73 11 74 11 75 11 76
365. ion Prog Function Use Function In4 to provide input to the function block that is Parameter type linkable destination provided with the 1336 IMPACT drive Conversion jel For the timer delay and state machine function blocks Function If Function Sel parameter 212 is 0 8 then In4 is used to specify how long after the timer off input is received Display XXX XX minutes before turning off the timer output When used for these modes Factory default 0 00 minutes the timer off signal must be present for as long as you specify in Minimum value 0 00 minutes Function In4 For the up down counter function block Function In4 specifies how much to add to the value when Function In1 parameter 198 indicates that a rising edge has occurred For the multiply divide function block Function In4 specifies whether the function should be performed as a per unit function or as a math function For the scale function block Function In4 is the upper word of the value that you want to use as either the minimum or maximum value for the output The lower word of this value is specified in Function In5 parameter 208 1 Function In4 was added in Version 2 xx Maximum value 655 35 minutes If Function Sel parameter 212 is 9 12 then Display x Factory default 0 Minimum value 0 Maximum value 65535 If Function Sel parameter 212 is 13 then Display x Factory default 0 Minimum value 32767 Maximum value 32767 Refer to Chapter 10 Using the
366. ion about Error Filtr BW is located in Chapter 13 Understanding the Auto tuning Procedure Adjusting the Motor Speed with Changes in Load Droop Gain For some applications you may want the motor speed to droop with an increase in load In these cases you can use Droop Percent parameter 46 to specify the percent of base speed that the speed reference is reduced when at full load torque Control Block Diagrams B 19 Torque Reference Overview You can use the following block diagram to view how the drive uses the torque reference parameters Limit Selection Bus Options Power Limits Pos Brake Regen DL Torque Limit Bus Regulator PositiveTorque Pi Limit Regen Power ower cmi Limit Fs Full Wave Autotune Voltage Rectify Torque PI Regulator 5 High Bus Brake Opts Limit Speed Feedback Ne g DC Bus Voltage Torque Limit Inverter Volts Negative Torque Power Limit Motor Power Limit 800 1 63 10 high line 5 Chopper Margin 1 70 10 high line 10 Chopper Margin Bus Opts 35 High Limit Torque Selection Slave Torque Spd Trq Mode Sel Torque Select 0 Anae 1 2 3 Speed PI Regulator amp 5 Torque Ref 1 Fdbk Filter Sel Notch when value 4 Fim Notch when value 4 Trim Control Torque Trim C185 Notch Filtr Freq C186 Notch Filtr Q Torque Mode Select B 20 Control Block Diagrams Torque Reference Overvie
367. irs By Pass Contactors Please read the following Attention regarding by pass contactors ATTENTION An incorrectly applied or installed system can result in component damage or reduction in product life The most common causes are e Wiring AC line to drive output or control terminals e Improper by pass or output circuits not approved by Allen Bradley e Output circuits which do not connect directly to the motor e Incorrect or inadequate AC supply e Excessive ambient temperature Contact Allen Bradley for assistance with application or wiring Hard Wiring Your I O Mounting and Wiring Your 1336 IMPACT Drive 2 21 Before you can transfer data to or from the drive you need to hard wire the analog inputs the analog outputs the output relays and the L Option optional The terminal block locations for the reference signal connections are in the frame specific chapters The terminal blocks accept wire with the following specifications Wire information Description Minimum wire size 0 06 mm 30 AWG Maximum wire size 3 3 mm 12 AWG Maximum torque 0 79 N m 7 Ib in Recommended control signal wire is Thig Belden wire or Should have these specifications equivalent 8760 0 750 mm 18 AWG twisted pair shielded 8770 0 750 mm 18 AWG 3 conductor shielded 9460 0 750 mm 18 AWG twisted pair shielded The location of the terminal blocks is frame specific Refer to the app
368. is applied to 50 of the ramp time Speed Ramp Out 50 i 0 Time in seconds The S curve is applied to 100 of the ramp time Spe d ee Ramp Out 100 a Time in seconds To by pass the acceleration and deceleration ramps use a communications module or an L Option board to set bit 9 of Logic Input Sts parameter 14 You can also by pass the ramps by setting the appropriate Accel Decel Time parameters parameters 42 43 44 and 45 to zero B 10 Control Block Diagrams Trim Control Overview You can use the following block diagram to view how the drive uses the process trim parameters to modify the speed and torque reference values that the motor uses Lt O eH aoa a Ramp Output PTrim Select Select Speed Input C512 SE PTrim Filter BW Fi PTrim Reference ty Low GD a Filter PTrim Feedback Motor Speed PTrim Hi Limit from Speed A Feedback 7 Process Trim Process Trim PI Speed Input Select Regulator PTrim Preload CEOD PTrim Ki C54 K 4096 r Limit PTrim Kp C55 Kp 4096 PTrim Out Gain C60 Output Gain 4096 GD PTrim Lo Limit PTrim Select Set Output C513 a PTrim Select Preset Integ C51 4 E PTrim Select 5 Ti Enable Logic rocess Trim Input Sts 6 GD Speed Trim Max Fwd PTrim Select Spd Trim Trim Limiter C515 tint a d Max Rev Spd Trim E gt Process Trim PTrim Select Select Speed Output PTrim Output Zero Ref
369. is condition is ignored both bits clear If you receive a Math Limit fault 03058 or warning 03090 the drive has limited a mathematical operation This typically occurs when a calculation add subtract multiply or divide results in a value that exceeds the range of the drive s number system Most numeric quantities are restricted to 800 which is expressed internally as a 16 bit number in the range of 32767 For example suppose Speed Ref 1 parameter 29 is 300 of base motor speed 12 288 decimal and Speed Scale 1 parameter 30 is 3 0 When the drive is run in speed mode with Speed Ref 1 selected the speed reference calculation will encounter a math limit condition In this example when Speed Ref 1 is scaled by Speed Scale 1 the result becomes too large to express as a valid number and must be internally limited 300 of base motor speed multiplied by a 3 0 scale factor would result in a speed reference value of 900 base motor speed 12288 x 3 36864 The 1336 IMPACT drive handles this condition by limiting the scaled speed reference value to eight times base motor speed 32767 A math limit condition would indicate that a positive overflow has occurred If the calculation produced a negative result then a negative overflow would be indicated Figure 12 3 Example of a Math Limit on Scaled Speed Ref 1 Positive Overflow Speed Scale 1 AD 30 o gt 800 32767 Speed Ref 1 C27 gt 200 12288 Scal
370. is correct press ENTER to return to the top line Press ENTER again Digital Config 10 Complete ENTER Press ENTER Configuring the Analog Section Follow these steps to configure the analog section Step At this prompt You need to Go to 1 Setup Reference Press ENTER if you do not want to configure the analog section Step 11 Analog PPR IO N If yes press INC or DEC to toggle the N to a Y Press ENTER Step 2 To connect the inputs press INC or DEC to toggle the N to a Y Press ENTER to connect Ps Connect Inputs inputs to Speed Reference 1 speed Reference 2 Torque Reference Current or 4 Step 3 i to References N 20 mA If no press ENTER Step 6 Press INC or DEC to toggle the N to a Y to configure Speed Reference 1 Press ENTER You can connect Speed Reference 1 to any ONE of the following the HIM Configure Speed pot Analog In1 Analog In2 the 4 20 mA input the MOP input the Pulse Input or the 3 Reference 1 N gateway Depending on which input you choose you may be prompted for an offset and Step 4 scale value If no press ENTER Press INC or DEC to toggle the N to a Y to configure Speed Reference 2 Press ENTER You can connect Speed Reference 2 to any ONE of the following the HIM Configure Speed pot Analog In1 Analog In2 the 4 20 mA input the MOP input the Pulse Input or the 4 Reference 2 N gateway Depending on which input you choose you may be prompted for additional Step 5 information If no
371. it Access Area 298 5 11 75 aN i 381 0 op 9 0 ia ig Holes Top 42 9 15 00 15 9 0 63 Dia 2 Mtg Hol 1 69 Bottom Mounting and Wiring Information Specific to Frames B C D E F G and H 4 19 The following are the dimensions for the IP65 54 NEMA 4 12 enclosures See Detail A ii c Sos 12 4 0 49 F lt TI f H See Detail B Allen Bradley E B y EEN 7 9 0 31 gt lt A 12 7 0 50 A a 71 0 28 Dia 12 7 0 50 14 3 0 56 Dia Pon 0 56 Dia Typical Top and Bottom Detail A ae j a 12 7 0 50 Dia Heatsink 19 1 0 75 n 19 1 0 75 Dia A All Dimensions in Millimeters and Inches Detail B Frame Approx Reference A B C D E F G a Ship Weight 5 5 kW 7 5 HP at 200 240V AC B1 5 5 11 kW 7 5 15 HP at 380 480V AC 5 5 7 5 kW 7 5 10 HP at 500 600V AC 7 5 11 kW 10 15 HP at 200 240V AC B2 15 22 kW 20 30 HP at 380 480V AC 11 15 kW 15 20 HP at 500 600V AC 655 0 650 0 425 0 629 9 625 1 293 0 635 762 44 7kg 25 79 25 59 16 74 24 80 24 61 11 54 2 50 3 00 98 5 lbs 655 0 900 0 425 0 629 9 875 0 293 0 635 76 2 56 5kg 25 79 35 43 16 74 24 80 34 45 11 54 2 50 3 00 124 5 Ibs 655 0 1200 0 425 0 629 9 1174 5 293 0 63 5 76 2 80 7k
372. it definitions of Warning Select 1 Factory default 0000 0000 0000 0000 parameter 21 and Warning Select 2 parameter 23 When a bit Minimum value 0000 0000 0000 0000 is 1 the condition is true otherwise the condition is false Maximum value 1111 1111 1111 1111 1 Warning Status 2 was added in Version 3 xx conversion f tal Refer to Chapter 12 Troubleshooting for more information Bit Condition Bit Condition Bit Condition 0 SpdFdbk Loss 6 Ext Fault In 12 Reserved 1 Inv Overtemp 7 Reserved 13 InvOvid Pend 2 Reserved 8 Reserved 14 Reserved 3 MtrOvid Pend 9 Param Limit 15 Inv Overload 4 MtrOvid Trip 10 Math Limit 5 Mtr Stall2 11 Reserved 225 1 Parameter number 225 Spd Reg Output File group Monitor Drive Inv Status Spd Reg Output shows the torque reference value that appears Parameter type source at the output of the Speed PI Regulator It is the input to the Display X XX Yo torque selection and is used as the drive s torque reference value Factory default 0 0 when Spd Trq Mode Sel parameter 68 is set to 2 Minimum value 300 0 F Maximum value 300 0 1 Spd Reg Output was added in Version 3 xx Canvorslon 4096 100 Iq motor 226 1 Parameter number 226 Spd Error File group Monitor Drive Inv Status Spd Error contains a value that is the difference between the Parameter type source whole number portion of the speed regulator s reference input Display X XX rpm and the speed feedback Factory default 0 0 rpm 1 Speed Error was ad
373. ith the the 1336 IMPACT drive For the timer delay function block Function In6 specifies the value to pass to Function Output 1 parameter 213 when the timer delay output is true For the state machine function block Function In6 is used for the output if the evaluation of Function In2 parameter 201 is false and the evaluation of Function In1 parameter 198 and the timer on function are true For the up down counter function block Function In6 specifies whether the output is a double word if Function In6 is true or a word if Function In6 is false For the scale function block Function In6 is the upper word of the value that you want to use as either the minimum or maximum value for the output The lower word of this value is specified in Function In7 parameter 210 1 Function In6 was added in Version 2 xx File group Application Prog Function Parameter type linkable destination Conversion 1 1 If Function Sel parameter 212 is 0 10 or 12 then Display bits Factory default 00000000 00000000 Minimum value 00000000 00000000 Maximum value 11111111 11111111 If Function Sel parameter 212 is 11 then Display x Factory default 0 Minimum value 0 Maximum value 65535 If Function Sel parameter 212 is 13 then Display x Factory default 0 Minimum value 32767 Maximum value 32767 Refer to Chapter 10 Using the Function Block for more information Parameters 11 67 210 Function In7 Parameter number A
374. ition until the hold bit is cleared When released hold bit cleared it will continue to the next step Decelerating to Position and the Error Trim Gain The Error trim parameter is actually a Dynamic Gain Limit for those familiar with position control This gain comes into play only when the shaft is nearing the target As the Error gets very small the gain increases to allow fine adjustment 9 28 Applications Accel Rate Speed When the Trim Gain parameter is above a value of 2 0 the profile control will decelerate as it approaches the target at approximately the programmed Decel rate P44 If the shaft overshoots the target area it will back up If this is unacceptable the Error Trim Gain parameter can be lowered to eliminate this overtravel As the value of this parameter is lowered it will begin to round off the end of the decel ramp Fig 9 13 The end of the target approach can be made as smooth as desired using this method Figure 9 13 Example Encoder Step Trim Step 1 Speed Approximate Decel Rate P44 Value Tolerance Rounding _p lt P P244 Time Target Position 100 Revs Continuing to lower the trim gain value will cause this rounding to begin earlier in the Decel ramp This will also cause the time to target position to extend longer Step Position Error The control will position the motor within the tolerance on each step before proceeding to the next step
375. itive values indicate motoring power and negative values indicate regenerative power B 24 Control Block Diagrams Torque Block Overview You can use the following block diagram to view how the drive uses the torque block parameters o Drive Iq Enable j Iq Max 8192 Synchronous To Stationary From Torque Reference Transformation Drive Enable Max 3072 DC to AC Conversion Flux Current On R Limiter Scaler Encoder Feedback Conditioning Counter 2 2 Hardware Delta Counts 1024 Poles PPR 4 Counters Digital Encoder Counter 1 Encoder PPR Slip Gain Encoderless Feedback Conditioning Motor Frequency rotor D electrical or stator freq Control Block Diagrams B 25 Torque Block Overview Continued Voltage at 1A 2 5V Peak With Rated i Motor Amps Through the Motor Gate Drive Feedback CKT 1A Feedback Li I I I Current Sensor 1 Burden Resistor Li I aoa Gaia Ss an ae ara ee e A a Voltage Across Burden 2 5V with Drive Providing Peak Rated Drive Amps Current Regulator Command I JY gg ee a a a Feedback Current Sensor Burden Resistor Voltage at 1C 5V Peak With Rated Motor Amps Through the Motor Voltage Across Burden 2 5V with Drive Providing Peak Rated Drive Amps Total Current Motor Cur U Fdbk Inver
376. its par 246 Error Trim Gain par 237 Profile CMD Frac par 247 Profile CMD MSW par 248 Units Traveled par 245 Value Tolerance par 244 Profile End Actions End Action Sel par 238 End Action Speed par 239 End Action Go To par 240 End Action Input par 241 End Action Comp par 242 End Action Value par 243 Bus Reg Control Bus Brake Option par 13 Step 1 Speed par 249 Step 1 Value par 250 Step 1 Type par 251 Step 2 Speed par 252 Step 2 Value par 253 Step 2 Type par 254 Step 3 Speed par 255 Step 3 Value par 256 Step 3 Type par 257 Step 4 Speed par 258 Step 4 Value par 259 Step 4 Type par 260 Step 5 Speed par 261 Step 5 Value par 262 Step 5 Type par 263 Step 6 Speed par 264 Step 6 Value par 265 Step 6 Type par 266 Step 7 Freq par 267 Step 7 Value 268 Step 7 Type 269 Step 8 Freq 270 Step 8 Value 271 Step 8 Type 272 Step 9 Speed 273 Step 9 Value 274 Step 9 Type 275 Step 10 Speed 276 Step 10 Value 277 Step 10 Type 278 Step 11 Speed 279 Step 11 Value 280 Step 11 Type 281 Step 12 Speed 282 Step 12 Value 283 Step 12 Type 284 Step 13 Speed 285 Step 13 Value 286 Step 13 Type 287 Step 14 Speed 288 Step 14 Value 289 Step 14 Type 290 Step 15 Speed 291 Step 15 Value 292 Step 15 Type 293 Step 16 Speed 294 Step 16 Value 295 Step 16 Type 296 Autotune Setup Autotune Dgn S
377. ke Opts parameter 13 e Line Undervolts parameter 27 In addition Test Select 1 parameter 93 and Test Data 1 parameter 92 contain software testpoints that provide additional precharge information 12 18 Troubleshooting file Fault Setup group Fault Config file Application group Bus Reg Control Configuring the Faults and Warnings for Precharge You can use Fault Select 1 and Warning Select 1 to enable fault warning conditions when the appropriate bit is set 1 If a bit is clear 0 in Fault Select 1 you can choose to have the condition reported as a warning by setting the bit in Warning Select 1 The following are the bits that pertain to precharge This bit With this text When set generates a fault when 0 RidethruTime The ridethrough time exceeds 2 seconds 1 Prechrg Time The precharge time exceeds 30 seconds The bus voltage drops 150 volts below the bus tracker 2 Bus Drop voltage This is the level where the drive would normally enter ridethrough The bus voltage drops below the level set in Line Undervolts parameter 27 This is the level where the drive would enter ridethrough if it occurs before a 150 volt drop in bus voltage 3 Bus Undervit At least 5 ridethrough cycles have occurred within a 20 second period This indicates a converter problem or a problem with incoming power Consider checking the incoming power for a phase loss 4 Bus Cycles gt 5
378. l Reset Defaults is displayed 2 Press ENTER to restore all parameters to their original factory setting 3 Press Escape Reprogram Fault is displayed 4 Press the Stop key to reset the fault If Input Mode was previously set to a value other than 1 cycle drive power to reset Uploading a Parameter Profile To upload a parameter profile from the drive to the HIM you must have a Series B HIM 1 From the EEProm mode prompt press INC or DEC until Drive gt HIM is displayed 2 Press ENTER A profile name up to 14 characters is displayed on line 2 of the HIM 3 Change this name or enter a new name Use SEL to move the cursor to the left Use INC or DEC to change the characters 4 Press ENTER An informational display is shown This display indicates the drive type and firmware version 5 Press ENTER to start the upload The parameter number currently being uploaded is displayed on line 1 of the HIM Line 2 indicates the total progress Press ESC to stop the upload 6 Press ENTER when COMPLETE is displayed on line 2 If line 2 reports ERROR refer to the Troubleshooting section Using the Human Interface Module HIM Downloading a Parameter Profile To download a parameter profile from the HIM to a drive you must have a Series B HIM Important The download function is only available when a valid profile is stored in the HIM 1 From the EEProm mode prompt press INC or DEC until HIM gt Drive is displayed
379. l functions 8 6 Flux Trim Owner 11 43 I O image 8 8 Jog1 Jog2 Owner 11 42 logic evaluation block 8 2 Logic Input Sts parameter 8 1 to 8 3 loss of communications 11 15 11 16 12 4 fault 8 7 masking functions 8 6 to 8 7 parameter interactions 8 3 Ramp CIFit owner 11 43 receiving analog input 8 15 setting SP Errors 8 8 setting up parameters 8 14 SP 2 Wire Enable 11 54 SP An In1 Scale 11 44 SP An In1 Select 11 44 SP An In1 Value 11 44 SP An In2 Scale 11 45 SP An In2 Select 11 44 SP An In2 Value 11 44 SP An Output 11 45 SP Enable Mask 11 39 Start Jog Mask 11 40 Start Stop Owner 11 42 supported messages 8 13 used with Flex I O Module 8 12 used with RIO Communications Module 8 12 used with SLC to SCANport module 8 10 used with the DeviceNet Communications Module 8 13 used with the Serial Communications Module 8 11 using the capabilities 7 10 S Curve Percent 11 21 B 8 Service Factor 11 11 Slave Torque 11 26 B 22 Slip Gain 11 50 B 26 software block diagram A 6 SP 2 Wire Enable 8 4 11 54 SP An In1 Scale 8 15 11 44 SP An In1 Select 8 15 11 44 SP An In1 Value 8 15 11 44 SP An In2 Scale 11 45 SP An In2 Select 11 44 SP An In2 Value 11 44 SP An Output 8 15 11 45 SP Enable Mask 11 39 Spd Desired BW 11 49 13 10 13 11 B 18 Spd Error 11 72 Spd Reg Output 11 72 Spd Trq Mode Sel 7 12 11 26 B 22 specifications A 1 A 5 speed adjusting for changes in load B 18
380. lane with a positive electrical bond and in close proximity to one another Star Washers Flat Washer Three Phase O Input Bolt Access Wwy Panel To Motor 1 Cable Supplied with Filter lt 1 Conduit To Motor 1 1336 IMPACT 1336 IMPACT Frames A1 A4 2 Frames B amp C 2 1 Input power source to filter and output power filter to drive and drive to motor wiring must be in conduit or have shielding armor with equivalent attenuation Shielding armor must be bonded to the metal bottom plate See requirements 5 amp 6 on page E 1 2 Refer to the Filter Selection table on page E 2 for frame references and corresponding catalog numbers CE Conformity E 5 Filter Mounting Continued Important Drive and filter must be mounted to a common back plane with a positive electrical bond Spacing is Filter Mounting determined by Conduit Box Bracket Three Phase Three Phase Input Access Panel and Input Terminal Block Lower Access Panel To Motor Ninn amp ZA To Motor i AA w we Filter Mounting Bracket Nipple Fitting 1336 IMPACT 1336 IMPACT Through the Wall Mounting Conventional Mounting Frames D amp E Frames D amp E 1 Input power source to filter and output power filter to drive and drive to motor wiring must be in conduit
381. lashing green Warning The SCANport adapter at port 6 has been disconnected and the logic mask bit for port 6 is set 1 If the adapter was not intentionally disconnected e Check the wiring to the SCANport adapters e Replace wiring SCANport expander SCANport adapters and main control board e Complete drive if required If you do not want this condition to be reported as a warning change bit 14 in Warning Select 1 parameter 21 to 0 06079 SP Error VP Flashing green Warning SCANport communications have been interrupted If the adapter was not intentionally disconnected e Check the amount of noise on the system e Check the wiring to the SCANport adapters e Replace wiring SCANport expander SCANport adapters and main control board e Complete drive if required If you do not want this condition to be reported as a warning change bit 15 in Warning Select 1 parameter 21 to 0 12 14 Troubleshooting Fault Code LED Fault ao A and Text information Type Description Suggested Action Monitor the AC line for high line voltage or transient conditions The DC bus voltage has Increase the deceleration time or install the dynamic 12016 exceeded the maximum value brake option because motor regeneration can also cause CP Solid red Hard When this condition occurs the bus overvoltages Refer to the description of Bus Options Overvoltage V drive co
382. latile memory to store the drive parameters links and user text owner parameters The 1336 IMPACT drive lets one or more control devices or adapters own start jog direction and other control functions To avoid conflict some owners are exclusive For example only one device can issue a forward direction speed command Others have multiple control For example all devices can jog the drive Devices can for example jog the drive in the forward direction only if the jog mask parameter allows for it parameter A parameter is a memory location used to store drive data Each parameter is assigned a number and a name per unit numbering Per unit numbering is a numbering system that defines a specific numeric value as representing 100 of a particular quantity being measured The number 4096 is used in many places in the drive to represent one per unit precharge Precharge limits the current into the drive when the incoming power is first applied radians per second Radians per second are the units used to measure bandwidth 2zf where f is Hz or cycles per second ridethrough Ridethrough automatically turns off the drive and starts a precharge when a power interrupt occurs If the power returns within two seconds the drive automatically starts SCANport device A SCANport device is a generic term that is used to refer to any device that you can connect to the SCANport communications network
383. lay GE Factory default not applicable Minimum value 12 5 Maximum value 100 0 Conversion 4096 100 0 89 Motor Frequency Parameter number 89 File group Monitor Motor Status Use Motor Frequency to view the actual value of motor stator Parameter type TURE frequency in Hz Display X XXX HZ Factory default not applicable Minimum value 250 000 Hz Maximum value 250 000 Hz Conversion 128 1 000 90 Motor Power Parameter number 90 Motor Power is the calculated product of torque reference ae type baat ee es times motor speed feedback A 125 millisecond filter is applied to Display x x PWR this result Positive values indicate motoring power negative Factory default not applicable values indicate regenerative power Minimum value 800 0 Maximum value 800 0 Conversion 4096 100 0 Parameters 11 31 Iq Parameter number 91 File grou none Iq shows the value of torque current reference that is present EaP ee Parameter type source at the output of the current rate limiter 100 is equal to 1 per unit Display se pu Fatedimotor torque Factory default not applicable Minimum value 800 0 Maximum value 800 0 Conversion 4096 100 0 Test Data 1 Parameter number 92 File grou Monitor Testpoints Use Test Data 1 to view a data value that corresponds to the oleae awh SAIS ESE ioe fet in i Select 1 ee 93 Test Data lisa Parameter type a iagnostic tool used to view internal drive parameters Display i
384. le group Control Accel Decel Use S Curve Percent to create an adjustable S curve ramp Parameter type linkable destination S Curve Percent controls the level of filtering that is applied tothe Display X X output of the acceleration and deceleration ramp Factory default 0 0 Minimum value 0 0 If S Curve Percent is Maximum value 100 0 eels Then the S Curve is Conversion 10 1 0 0 Not used Refer to the Speed Reference Selection Overview in Appendix B 50 Applied for half of the ramp time Control Block Diagrams for more information 100 Applied for the entire ramp 1 S Curve Percent was added in Version 2 xx 48 PTrim Output Parameter number 48 File grou Application Process Trim PTrim Output represents the scaled and limited output of the P sate et a type bE TRE process trim function You can use PTrim Output as a parameter Display R OP ae Sie say speed or oe ae sis vs Factory default not applicable Has ee reference n need to select either bit O or bi amn 800 0 in PTrim Select parameter 51 MEiN 800 0 Conversion 4096 100 0 Refer to the Trim Control Overview section in Appendix B Control Block Diagrams for more information 49 PTrim Reference Parameter number 49 3 3 File group Application Process Trim PTrim Reference is the reference input value for process trim Parameter type fakes TSE PTrim Reference and PTrim Feedback parameter 50 are Display ees compared and used to update PTrim Output parameter 48 Factory default
385. lect 2 parameter 23 to 0 05048 Spd Fdbk Loss VP Flashing red Soft A loss of feedback occurred Check the encoder wiring Verify that the encoder signals are free of noise If you do not want this condition to be reported as a fault change bit 0 in Fault Select 2 parameter 22 to 0 05054 External Fit In VP Flashing red Soft The external fault input from the L Option board is open Check the external circuit for cause of an open input signal If you do not want this condition to be reported as a fault change bit 6 in Fault Select 2 parameter 22 to 0 05080 Spd Fdbk Loss VP Flashing green Warning A loss of feedback occurred Check the encoder wiring Verify that the encoder signals are free of noise If you do not want this condition to be reported as a warning change bit 0 in Warning Select 2 parameter 23 to 0 05086 External Fit In VP Flashing green Warning The external fault input from the L Option board is open Check the external circuit for cause of an open input signal If you do not want this condition to be reported as a warning change bit 6 in Warning Select 2 parameter 23 to 0 06041 SP 1 Timeout VP Flashing red Soft The SCANport adapter at port 1 has been disconnected and the logic mask bit for port 1 is set 1 If the adapter was not intentionally disconnected e Check the wiring to the SCANport adapters e R
386. llow the steps in A thru C A Set required Step Speed parameters Param 255 258 etc etc An RPM value will be entered in these parameters B Set the Step Type parameters Param 257 260 etc etc 1 Entering a value of 1 in a Step Type Parameter selects a Time Step value outputted in seconds 2 Entering a value of 2 selects a TB3 Input Step This option can only be used with an L Option Card The speed will be outputted until the selected TB3 terminal transitions from low to high input 3 Entering a value of 3 selects an Encoder Step Value outputted in units 4 Entering a value of 0 selects Not Used which forces an End Action C Set required Step Value parameters Param 256 259 etc etc This value will be in seconds encoder counts or TB3 inputs depending on the selection made in the corresponding Step Type parameter For Example Entering a value of 1 in Parameter 257 will require a time in seconds entry in Parameter 256 As mentioned previously a number of parameters were adjusted to configure Speed Profiling These modifications were performed automatically when the Speed Profile Configuration option was selected from the Startup menu In the following section we will identify all the automatic changes that were made An explanation of operation is provided to allow you to make a decision on whether each step should be manually modified to meet your desired setup Accel Decel Rates Parameter 42 Accel Rate 1
387. log Output 1 Analog Output 2 Analog Section Analog PPR 10 N and the HIM status display If yes press INC or DEC to get Y Then press ENTER If no press ENTER Step 5 5 Startup Complete Press ENTER Running the Quick Motor Tune Procedure When you have finished the start up procedure and pressed ENTER you are placed at the following prompt Start Ur Come le ted To continue press ENTER To go back to the start up routine 1 Press either INC or DEC to toggle Completed to Reset Sequence 2 Press ENTER The 1336 IMPACT drive retains any information that you have already entered Choosing Reset Sequence lets you re enter the start up routine The Quick Motor Tune procedure helps you set up your basic drive parameters verify that your motor and encoder if used leads are connected correctly and run the auto tune tests You should set this information up the first time you run the start up procedure Follow these steps to complete the Quick Motor Tune procedure Starting Up Your System 6 9 Step At this prompt You need to Go to Decide if you want to enter the nameplate motor data ee e If no press INC or DEC to get N Then press ENTER If yes press ENTER You are asked to provide the following motor information for e Nameplate HP the horsepower rating e Nameplate Volts the voltage rating Enter Nameplate e Nameplate Amps the current rating 1
388. lower shorted Bit 10 Maximum value Conversion 11111111 11111111 1 1 Refer to Chapter 13 Understanding the Auto tuning Procedure for more information Description Bit Description U Offset 11 V Lo Open Current fdbk ph U offset too big Transistor V lower open W Offset 12 W Up Open Current fdbk ph W offset too big Transistor W upper open U Up Open 13 W Lo Open Transistor U upper open Transistor W lower open U Lo Open 14 U Open Transistor U lower open Current feedback phase U open V Up Open 15 W Open Transistor V upper open Current feedback phase W open Parameters 11 53 176 Autotune Errors Parameter number 176 Autotune Errors shows the results of the auto tune tests The test ae type pcotnewetune San results are divided into four categories slip calculations leakage Display bits inductance tests resistance tests and flux current tests If a fault Factory default not applicable occurred during the auto tune tests the appropriate bit is set in Mne 00000000 00000000 Autotune Errors f no bits are set the drive passed all of the Maximum valie 11111111 11111111 auto tune tests ontorelon ri The bits are defined as follows Refer to Chapter 13 Understanding the Auto tuning Procedure for more information Bit Description Bit Description Bit Description 0 Slip lt 0 Resistance Tests Flux Current Tests Slip is O or negative 6 Res gt 0 Spd 11 Filx Atune Lo Induct
389. ls through the linear parameter list until it finds a parameter that you can link 3 Use INC or DEC to scroll through the parameter list until you come to the destination parameter that you want to link In this example you would use INC or DEC until you reach parameter 139 The display should be similar to the following SP An Quteut ELEELEA 4 Press SEL The display should now be similar to the following ot Linked ER BESS EE 5 Press INC or DEC to go to the parameter that you want to provide the information In this case parameter 8 Motor Torque 6 Press ENTER 7 Press ESC when you have finished to exit the Set Links mode Starting Up Your System 6 13 Using the Pre Defined Links The following are the pre defined links Source To Destination SP An In1 Value To C29 gt Sheed Ref 1 An In 1 Value gt To C31 Sheed Ref 2 Motor Speed gt To Ci gt AnOut1 Value Motor Power To C108 AnOut2 Value Motor Speed To C139 SP An Output The default configuration assumes that a Human Interface Module HIM terminal is connected to SCANport Speed Ref 1 is connected to SP An InI Value which is assumed to be the HIM port Removing a Link To remove a link you need to ATTENTION Be careful when removing links If the source parameter has already written a value to the destination parameter the destination parameter retains the value until you explicitly remove it For some parameter
390. lse Source I 1 Supply A Relay 1 Relay 3 Shield 3 Default At Speed Default Not Fault Voltage Clearance Relay 2 Relay 4 Default Enable Default Not Warning Run Alarm NOTE Analog I O is differential non isolated I O A negative does not indicate common Mounting and Wiring Information Specific to Frames A1 A2 A3 and A4 The terminal blocks provide the following This Terminal Provides these Terminal Which Provide Access to this Signal Block Numbers 4 7 10 Shield ground E 1 2 3 DC power supply So kot voltage 5 6 8 9 0 to 10V DC output PE AN EN 2100 Ohms 11 12 4 20 mA DC output Output impedance 20 Ohms 3 6 9 12 Shield Ground 1 2 4 5 0 to 10V DC input Input impedance 20K Ohms 7 8 4 20 mA input Input impedance 130 Ohms TB7 Pulse input for frequency reference 5V DC Jumper J8 Set to 1 2 10 11 12V DC Jumper J8 Set to 2 3 Scale Factor Pulse PPR must be set 10mA minimum 12 Logic Earth Ground Shield 1 2 3 Programmable contacts TB10 4 5 6 Resistive rating 115VAC 30VDC 5 0A 7 8 9 Inductive rating 115VAC 30VDC 2 0A 40 11 Voltage clearance Provides physical space between the logic earth ground and other i signals on the terminal block Input Fusing Requirements The following are the input fusing requirements for frames Al A4 Maximum Recommended AC Input Line Fuse Ratings Fuses are User Supplied Europea
391. lt 9 a Gs D lt _ 99 gt lt 102 gt lt 123 gt Speed Ref 1 Motor Speed Specifications A 11 Analog I O Parameters for Frames B H TB10 J10 10V 1 Com 2 Analog ase Offset Scale Filter BW Speed Ref 2 nuti 5 aa eee Offset Scale Filter BW nalog 7 o g L190 Lot Lea e Shield Offset Scale Filter BW fii m gt A Shield Pulse In PPR Pulse Pulse In Scale lt 123 gt Source t Pulse In Offset Anal t Motor Speed nalog OORT Siela Shield Analog z Motor P ower Output2 v gt hiel 4 20mA 3 ie Offset Scale Ouiputi lt a e TB11 J11 Relay 1 Supply Relay 2 114 Relay Config 1 115 Relay Setpoint 1 187 Relay Config 2 188 Relay Setpoint 2 189 Relay Config 3 190 Relay Setpoint 3 191 Relay Config 4 192 Relay Setpoint 4 Relay 3 Relay 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 y 8 9 Voltage Clear ance We SP An Int Sel P ar 133 SPT Value Speed Ref 1 SP An In1 Scale P ar 135 SP An In2 Sel P ar 136 SP An Ini Value ie SP An In2 Scale P ar 136 Motor Speed A 12 Specifications Notes Chapter Objectives Appendix B Control Block Diagrams Appendix B provides descriptions of the control block diagrams The overview of this topic Starts on page Motor control board B 2 Speed reference selection B 4 Trim control B 10 Speed feedback B 13 Speed PI regulator B 16 Torque reference B 19 Torque block B 24 Drive fault detec
392. ltered Is JX Service Factor C9 Motor Overload C26 100 Calculations Configurable Faults Fdbk Device Type Encoder 2 Edge Level Detect L K 15 gt Motor Stalled Drive Inv Status I2T Trip Code 1052 Motor Overload Function 12T 12T Pending Code 1051 You can use the following block diagram to view how the drive detects faults 1 Fault Code 5048 Fault Code 1053 Motor Overload Warning Select 1 Ga GD Fault Select 2 Warning Select 2 C0 Fault Select 1 Fault Select 1 parameter 20 Fault Select 2 parameter 22 Warning Select 1 parameter 21 Warning Select 2 parameter 23 Warning Condition Fault Condition Fault Code Bit a ooj oa ajon o RUN Description Ridethru Time Prechrg Time Bus Drop Bus Undervlt Bus Cycles gt 5 Open Circuit Reserved Reserved mA Input SP 1 Timeout SP 2 Timeout SP 3 Timeout SP 4 Timeout SP 5 Timeout SP 6 Timeout SP Error Fault Code Bit ste f 20 OIN OO APIO DM O af WP oO Description SpdFdbk Loss Inv Overtemp Reserved MtrOvid Pend MtrOvld Trip Mtr Stall Ext Fault In Reserved Reserved Param Limit Math Limit Reserved Reserved InvOvid Pend Reserved Inv Overload B 28 Control Block Diagrams Drive Fault Detection Overview Continued Non Configurable Faults 15 Volt fi T T a 200 msec Fault Code 3026 Analog Scale 4 13V 18V i Delay M
393. ltr Freq 185 11 55 SP An In2 Scale 138 11 44 Notch Filtr Q 186 11 55 SP An In2 Select 136 11 44 Pos Mtr Cur Lim 72 11 27 SP An In2 Value 137 11 45 Pos Torque Lim 74 11 27 SP An Output 139 11 44 Profile Enable 235 2 72 SP Enable Mask 124 11 44 Profile Status 236 2 72 Spd Desired BW 161 11 45 PTrim Feedback 50 11 21 Spd Error 226 11 39 PTrim Filter BW 52 11 22 Spd Reg Output 225 11 49 PTrim Hi Limit 59 11 23 Spd Trq Mode Sel 68 11 72 PTrim Ki 54 11 22 Speed Ref 1 29 11 72 PTrim Kp 55 11 23 Speed Ref 1 Frac 28 11 26 PTrim Lo Limit 58 11 23 Speed Ref 2 31 11 18 PTrim Out Gain 60 11 24 Speed Ref 3 32 11 18 PTrim Output 48 11 21 Speed Ref 4 33 11 18 PTrim Preload 53 11 22 Speed Ref 5 34 11 18 PTrim Reference 49 11 21 Speed Ref 6 35 11 18 PTrim Select 51 11 22 Speed Ref 7 36 11 19 Pulse In Offset 122 11 39 Speed Scale 1 30 11 19 Pulse In PPR 120 11 38 Speed Scale 7 37 11 19 Pulse In Scale 121 11 38 Start Dwell Spd 193 11 18 Pulse In Value 123 11 39 Start Dwell Time 194 11 19 PWM Frequency 10 11 11 Start Jog Mask 126 11 59 PwrUp Fit Status 219 11 70 Start Stop Owner 129 11 59 Ramp CIFIt Owner 131 11 43 Stator Resistnce 166 11 40 Regen Power Lim 76 11 27 Step 1 Speed 249 11 42 Relay Config 1 114 11 36 Step 1 Value 250 11 50 Relay Config 2 187 11 56 Step 1 Type 251 11 76 Relay Config 3 189 11 57 Step 2 Speed 252 11 77 Relay Config 4 191 11 58 Step 2 Value 253 11 77 Relay Setpoint 1 115 11 37 Step 2 Type 254
394. lue 32767 Conversion 1 1 97 An In 1 Offset Parameter number 97 Use An In 1 Offset to set the offset applied to the raw analog Settee type Gor aoe iil value of the analog input 1 before the scale factor is applied This Display aii lets you shift the range of the analog input Factory default 0 000 volts Minimum value 19 980 volts Maximum value 19 980 volts Conversion 205 1 000 98 An In 1 Scale Parameter number 98 File group Interface Comm Analog Inputs Use An In 1 Scale to set the scale factor or gain for analog Parameter type ene tsini input 1 The value of analog input 1 is converted to 2048 and Display ES then the scale is applied This provides an effective digital range Factory default 2 000 of t3267 Minimum value 16 000 Maximum value 16 000 Conversion 2048 1 000 99 An In 2 Value Parameter number 99 i File group Interface Comm Analog Inputs Use An In2 Value to view the converted analog value of the input Parameter type SoU at analog input 2 Display i Factory default not applicable Minimum value 32767 Maximum value 32767 Conversion 1 1 11 34 Parameters 100 An In 2 Offset Parameter number 100 File group Interface Comm Analog Inputs Use An In 2 Offsetto set the offset applied to the raw analog Parameter type linkable destnaioh value of analog input 2 before the scale factor is applied This lets Display x xxx volts you shift the range of the analog input Factory default 0 000 volts Minim
395. m Gateway Data In Use Data In B2 to view the SCANport to drive image that is Parameter type aaa received from some device on SCANport This image may be Display ix referred to as the SCANport I O image or a datalink in the Factory default not applicable manual for your communications module MI EE 32767 Maximum value 32767 Conversion 1 1 11 46 Parameters 144 Data In C1 Parameter number 144 File grou Interface Comm Gateway Data In Use Data In C1 to view the SCANport to drive image that is ae type y SOUE received from some device on SCANport This image may be Display B referred to as the SCANport I O image or a datalink in the Factory default not applicable manual for your communications module IMinimurmbeaice 32767 Maximum value 32767 Conversion 1 1 145 Data In C2 Parameter number 145 File grou Interface Comm Gateway Data In Use Data In C2 to view the SCANport to drive image that is ne lone type y TURE received from some device on SCANport This image may be Display 259 referred to as the SCANport I O image or a datalink in the Factory default not applicable manual for your communications module MAn E 32767 Maximum value 32767 Conversion 1 1 146 Data In D1 Parameter number 146 File grou Interface Comm Gateway Data In Use Data In D1 to view the SCANport to drive image that is BRAE type SRE received from some device on SCANport This image may be Display As referred to as the SCANport I O image or a
396. m valie 32767 Maximum value 32767 Conversion 1 1 Refer to Chapter 10 Using the Function Block for more information 234 o 1 Parameter number 234 Motor Voltage File group Monitor Motor Status Use Motor Voltage to view the actual line to line fundamental Parameter type source RMS value of motor voltage as a percentage This data is Display X X averaged and updated every 50 milliseconds Factory default NA Minimum value 0 1 Motor Voltage was added in Version 3 xx Makim mA alde 800 Conversion 4096 motor volts 11 74 Parameters 2 Parameter number 235 3s Profile Enable File group Profile Command Profile Enable is the command word for speed profiling Parameter type Setup Bit 0 Sets the home position and must be set to 1 for profiling to Display Bits operate Factory default 0 Bit 1 Must be set to run the sequence of the speed profile that is Minimum value 000Fhex programmed Maximum value Fhex Bit 2 When set to 1 causes the transition from one step to the Conversion next to be held until the bit is set to 0 Bit 3 Is used with the sequential encoder steps and prevents the speed from dropping to zero at the end of each step Bits 4 7 Reserved Parameter number 236 aae Profile Status File group Profile Command Profile Status indicates the state of the profiling routine Parameter type Setup Bits 0 4 Indicate the binary value of active step 1 16 Display Bits Bit 5 Enabled when set to 1
397. math limit faults 12 24 Start up troubleshooting procedures 12 27 Miscellaneous troubleshooting procedures 12 28 Encoderless troubleshooting procedures 12 30 ATTENTION Do not troubleshoot or maintain the 1336 IMPACT drive unless you are familiar with your drive system and the associated machinery You may be injured and or the equipment may be damaged if you do not comply During the start up procedure you should have recorded board jumper settings for each board board software version numbers and the drive and motor nameplate data in Table 6 A If this information was not recorded record it before beginning any troubleshooting sequences For initial troubleshooting you need a programming device to read fault codes You should also have the following equipment available before starting any troubleshooting procedures e digital multimeter DMM capable of 1000V DC 750V AC with one megohm minimum input impedance e clamp on ammeter AC DC with current ratings to 2X rated current output of the 1336 IMPACT AC drive e dual trace oscilloscope with differential capability digital storage two X10 and one X100 calibrated probes optional but recommended 12 2 Troubleshooting Fault Warning Handling ATTENTION Potentially fatal voltages may result from improperly using an oscilloscope and other test equipment The oscilloscope chassis may be at potentially fatal voltage if not properly grounded Allen Bradley does not recommend
398. may interact with the field weakening control This may result in a bus overvoltage fault If this occurs increase Decel Time 1 parameter 44 and or Decel Time 2 parameter 45 as needed Because flux braking increases motor losses the duty cycle used with this method must be limited Check with the motor vendor for flux braking or DC braking application guidelines You may also want to consider using external motor thermal protection Using DC Braking DC braking only becomes active during a stop not including coast stop and is not active during normal decelerations Other stopping methods may perform better depending on the motor and the load being stopped To enable DC braking 1 Set bit 9 DC Brake in Bus Brake Opts parameter 13 2 Clear bit 10 Brake Regen in Bus Brake Opts 3 Clear bit 5 Bus High Lim in Bus Brake Opts When DC braking is enabled and you command a stop DC current is applied to the motor This increases motor losses and may result in a shorter motor deceleration time DC Brake Current parameter 79 controls the magnitude of DC current applied The magnitude has a maximum range of 70 of the drive rated current Current limit and IT protection for times greater than 60 seconds can further reduce the applied DC Brake Time parameter 80 Typically you will measure the stopping time that you should enter in DC Brake Time Because DC braking increases motor losses the duty cycle of stopping with this m
399. meter 208 as a time in minutes For this example Function In5 is set to 0 25 minutes which is 15 seconds When the time expires the motor speed ramps up to the specified speed When the start is removed or a stop command is issued the stop command is sent to the drive and the ramp is disabled causing a current limit stop to zero speed This example is shown in Figure 10 5 Using the Function Block 10 7 Figure 10 5 Delayed Start with a Ramp to Speed Example Signal Event Occurred 1 0 y Time Speed Timer On 0 Time To set up this application you need to enter the values shown in Figure 10 6 Figure 10 6 Timer Delay Function Block Func 1 Eval Sel Function Sel L Option In Sts Enter 00000001 In4 OQ minutes Int Or In2 In5 0 25 minutes If _ Then True In6 00000000 00000010 gt Out 1 False In7 00000001 00000001 gt Out 1 Function Enter 0 Output 1 Enter 0 This value is not used Enter 00000000 00000010 Function In6 Enter 00000010 00000001 Timer Delay Function Block Function In7 Enter 0 for Function In3 parameter 204 Func 3 Mask Val parameter 205 Func 3 Eval Sel parameter 206 and Function In8 parameter 211 as these parameters are not used for this function block This works as shown in Figure 10 7 10 8 Using the Function Block Figure 10 7 Delayed Start with a Ramp to Speed Example Signal Start s Issued 0 1 Tim
400. meters are incorrectly set electrical noise is was present motor phasing could be incorrect or other problems exist Flx Cur gt MCur 13 The flux current is greater than 100 motor nameplate current This may be due to incorrect parameter settings an undersized drive for the motor or a motor problem 14 Flx En Drop The drive enable was lost during the flux test FIx Hi Load 15 Too much load is on the motor Reduce the load to get a valid flux number If you disconnect the load for this test you must reconnect it before running the inertia test gt If you have problems while running the flux test you may need to verify that parameters are set properly You should then run the stator resistance and leak inductance tests again and verify that the results are typical as described in these sections The following parameters directly effect the flux test Parameter Parameter Value Comments Name Number Rev Speed Limit 40 Set this to the limit of the application If set to 0 the motor may not accelerate Fwd Speed Limit 41 Set this to the limit of the application If set to O the motor may not accelerate file Control m aati Pos Mtr Cur Lim 72 Set this to the limit of the application If set too group Control Limits low the motor may not accelerate Neg Mtr Cur Lim 73 Set this to the limit of the application If set too low the motor may not accelerate Regen Power Lim 76 If set too high you may trip out on a Bus Overvolts Autotune Torqu
401. motor speed rpm Conversion 4096 100 overspeed 25 Motor Stall Time Parameter number 25 File grou Fault Setup Fault Limits Enter the length of time that the drive must be in current limit and Ler type ET CESNET at zero speed before the drive indicates a Mtr Stall fault fault Display EEE number 01053 You can use bit 5 of Fault Select 2 Factory default 10 EEIE parameter 22 and Warning Select 2 parameter 23 to configure Mia Ee 01 IIE how the drive should report a Mtr Stall fault Maximum value 32767 seconda Conversion 10 1 0 26 Motor Overload Parameter number 2 26 File grou Fault Setup Fault Limits Enter the level of current that will cause a Motor Overld Trp fault Se dios type re desiren fault number 01052 after 60 seconds You can use bit 4 of Fault Display lh Select 2 parameter 22 and Warning Select 2 parameter 23 to Factory default 200 0 configure how the drive should report a Motor Overld Trp Mua Eere 110 0 Maximum value 400 0 Conversion 4096 100 lq for 60 seconds 27 Line Undervolts Parameter number 27 File grou Fault Setup Fault Limits Enter the minimum threshold as a percentage of the line voltage Spates type as CESEN that is compared with DC Bus Voltage parameter 84 as a check Display sh for a bus undervoltage condition Factory default 61 5 Minimum value 10 0 Maximum value 90 0 Conversion 1024 100 0 Refer to Chapter 12 Troubleshooting for additional information 11 18 Parameters
402. n Ramp Applying this input disables the ramp function When the ramp function is disabled the acceleration and deceleration times are set to 0 Reset Applying this input resets the drive Applying this input issues both a start command and a direction command to the drive Removing this input stops the Run forward drive The stop follows the stop type 1 specified in Logic Options parameter 17 Applying this input issues both a start command and a direction command to the drive Removing this input stops the Run reverse drive The stop follows the stop type 1 specified in Logic Options parameter 17 Speed selects 3 These inputs choose the speed command source for the drive Speed torque selections 3 These inputs take exclusive control of Spd Trq Mode Sel parameter 68 This lets you switch between the speed and torque modes of the drive Start 2 Applying this input issues a start command for the drive to begin accelerating to the commanded speed A stop command is required to stop the drive The stop follows the stop type in Logic Options Note All jogs must be low to start A transition from jog to start without a start transition is allowed the drive is jogging you set a start remove the jog and the drive starts Removing this input issues a stop command for the drive The drive stops according to the programmed stop mode Not Stop Clear Fault based on Logic Options paramete
403. n Set to indicate that a chopper brake common bus or regenerative capability is present 0 The bus voltage controller is on 1 The bus voltage controller is off unless bit 5 is set 1 Refer to Chapter 9 Applications 11 Prech Exit Set to force an exit from precharge after the precharge timeout 12 En Comm Bus Set to enable common bus precharge External fault input is used as precharge enable 13 Dis Prech Tm Set to disable bus precharge and undervoltage faults while the drive is disabled 14 Dis Mult Pre Set to disable all precharges after the first power up 15 Dis Ridethru Set to disable all ridethroughs Parameters 11 13 14 Logic Input Sts Parameter number 14 i P File group Monitor Drive Inv Status Use Logic Input Sts to view drive logic operation If a bit is set 1 Parameter type TUE that function is enabled If a bit is clear 0 that function is Display bits disabled not active Factory default not applicable Minimum value 00000000 00000000 The bits are defined as follows Maximum value 11111111 11111111 Conversion 1 1 Bit Description Bit Description Bit Description 0 Normal Stop 5 Reverse 10 Flux Enable A ramp stop is selected A reverse was commanded Flux is enabled 1 Start 6 Jog 2 11 Process Trim A start is in progress A jog 2 is in progress Process trim is enabled CBA 2 Jog 1 7 Cur Lim Stop 12 Speed Ref A 0 0 0 No Change A jog 1 is in progress A current limit stop is
404. n to use as the coarse adjustment An In 2 Value parameter 99 receives input from a 10V pot An In 2 Offset parameter 100 is set to 0 because no offset is needed The 10V input is corverted to 2048 internal drve units An In 2 Scale parameter 101 is set to 0 2 to scale the value to 409 This input is passed to Function In2 to use as the fine speed adjustment In addition you need to set bit 11 Bipolar Sref in Logic Options parameter 17 Using the Maximum Minimum The maximum minimum function lets you select either the larger of Function two values or the smaller of two values The maximum minimum function block is shown in Figure 10 15 Using the Function Block 10 13 Figure 10 15 Maximum Minimum Function Block Func 1 Eval Sel Function Sel Func 3 Mask Val gt Maximum Speed PLC Minimum Maximum User Speed Function Block UsertControlled Pot Q 10 Int In2 gt max Out Function output Int In2 lt min Out K 213 gt gt In3 If Then False min gt Out1 True max gt Outi Maximum Minimum Function Block In1 is compared to In2 The value passed to Function Output 1 parameter 213 depends on In3 If In3 is Then this value is passed to Function Output 1 False The smaller value True The larger value As an example you could use the ma
405. n Bradley E A 73031 gt lt 12 7 0 50 aa 7 1 0 28 Dia 12 7 0 50 a 143 0 56 Dia Typical Top and Bottom i Detail A 12 7 0 50 Dia 19 1 0 75 a 19 1 0 75 Dia Detail B All Dimensions in Milimeters and Inches Frame Approx Ship Reference A B c D F F a N Weight A1 430 0 525 0 350 0 404 9 500 1 250 0 N A N A 16 8 kg 16 93 20 67 13 78 15 94 19 69 9 84 37 0 Ibs 430 0 525 0 350 0 404 9 500 1 250 0 17 9 kg ae 16 93 20 67 13 78 15 94 19 69 9 84 WA NA 39 4 Ibs 430 0 525 0 350 0 404 9 500 1 250 0 18 6 kg He 16 93 20 67 13 78 15 94 19 69 9 84 WA NA 41 0 Ibs A4 655 0 650 0 425 0 629 9 625 1 293 0 63 5 76 2 39 5 kg 25 79 25 59 16 74 24 80 24 61 11 54 2 50 3 00 87 0 Ibs 3 8 Mounting and Wiring Information Specific to Frames A1 A2 A3 and A4 Heat Sink Through the Back Mounting Frames A1 through A3 210 01 8 25 196 0 98 0 7 72 3 86 Cutout All Dimensions in Millimeters and Inches 10 Required 4 3 0 171 Dia for 10 32 x 12 7 0 5 Self Tap 4 0 0 159 for 10 32 x 12 7 0 5 Threaded aoe Back of Enclosure A1 50 8 2 00 A2 71 4 2 81 A3 98 8 3 85 1 Shading indicates approximate size of drive inside enclosure Mounting and Wiring Information Specific to Frames A1 A2 A3 and A4 Heat Sink Through the Back Mounting Frame A4
406. n If you do not want this condition to be reported as a fault RidethruTime red nee iene within 2 seconds change bit 0 in Fault Select 1 parameter 20 to 0 Refer to the Understanding Precharge and Ridethrough 12033 CP Flashing Soft The precharge function could not Faults section for more information Prechrg Time red complete within 30 seconds If you do not want this condition to be reported as a fault change bit 1 in Fault Select 1 parameter 20 to 0 Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or line power interruption 12034 CP Flashing The bus voltage dropped 150V Refer to the Understanding Precharge and Ridethrough Soft A Bus Drop red below the bus tracker voltage Faults section for more information If you do not want this condition to be reported as a fault change bit 2 in Fault Select 1 parameter 20 to 0 Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or line power interruption F The DC bus voltage fell below the Refer to the Understanding Precharge and Ridethrough 12035 CP Flashing ne p 5 S Soft minimum value 388V DC at Faults section for more information Bus Undervit red y 460V AC input If you do not want this condition to be reported as a fault change bit 3 in Fault Select 1 parameter 20 to 0 or decrease the bus undervoltage setpoint Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or line 2 least 5 ee cycles power interruption 12036 CP Flashing awe pease a wil aco Sepong Refer to the Understanding Precharge an
407. n Installations The recommended fuse is Cl gG general industrial ass North American Installations 200 240V Rating 380 480V 500 600V Rating Rating Drive Catalog Number kW HP Rating 0 37 0 56 0 5 0 75 1336E _ _ F05 07 applications and motor circuit protection BS88 British Standard Parts 1 amp 2 EN60269 1 Parts 1 amp 2 type gG or equivalent should be used for these drives Fuses that meet BS88 Parts 1 amp 2 are acceptable Typical designations include but may not be limited to the following Parts 1 amp 2 AC AD BC BD CD DD ED EFS EF FF FG GF GG GH UL requirements specify 1336E __ F10 0 75 1 that UL Class CC T or J fuses must be used for all drives in this 1336E __ F15 1336E _ _ F20 1 2 1 5 section 1336E __ F30 10A Typical designations 3 1336E __ F50 include 10A Type CC KTK 1336E _ _ F75 15A FNQ R Type J JKS LPJ Type T JJS JIN 1336E __ F100 20A 1 Both fast acting and slow blow are acceptable Mounting and Wiring Information Specific to Frames A1 A2 A3 and A4 3 5 Dimensions The following shows the dimensions for frames A1 A4 lt A Z A Y D gt j lt C Max i A _ p ALLEN BRADLEY PA
408. n and initializes the Profile sequence The home position is required only for the Home End Action and proper display of the Units Traveled parameter output 246 The Home End Action will be discussed in further detail in the Encoder section Transitioning Bit 1 the second bit actually initiates the profile sequence Both bits 0 amp 1 must be set to initiate a sequence Setting the Run Sequence bit 1 will not start the profile if the Enable bit 0 is clear Setting the Enable bit will initialize speed profiling and set the Home position but the sequence of steps will not begin until the Run Sequence bit 0 first bit is set IMPORTANT Parameter 235 Profile Enable is independent of the Drive Start Stop control Bit 1 Run Sequence of parameter 235 must be toggled in addition to issuing a Drive Start command for Speed Profiling to operate Setting the Hold Bit bit 2 will prevent a sequence from incrementing to the next step 9 22 Applications Sequence State Status Once the sequence has been initiated the state of the sequence will be reflected in the Profile Status parameter 236 The lower 5 bits will tell us which state the control is commanding You will observe bit 0 set for 10 seconds in Step 1 It will then clear and bit 1 second bit will be set for 10 seconds indicating Step 2 Profile Status Parameter Number 236 Parameter Type Read Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
409. n1 174 11 52 Droop Percent 46 11 21 Inverter Dgn2 175 11 52 Enc Pos fdbk Hi 228 11 72 Inverter Volts 12 11 11 Enc Pos Fdbk Low 227 11 72 lq Offset 230 11 73 Encoder PPR 8 11 11 lq 91 11 31 End Action Sel 238 11 74 Jog Speed 1 38 11 19 End Action Speed 239 11 74 Jog Speed 2 39 11 19 End Action Go To 240 11 74 Jog1 Jog2 Owner 130 11 42 End Action Input 241 11 75 Kf Freq Reg 179 11 53 End Action Comp 242 11 75 Kf Speed Loop 160 11 49 End Action Value 243 11 75 Ki Freq Reg 177 11 53 Error Filtr BW 162 11 49 Ki Speed Loop 158 11 48 Error Trim Gain 237 11 74 Kp Freq Reg 178 11 53 Fast Flux Level 78 11 28 Kp Speed Loop 159 11 48 Fault Select 1 20 11 15 L Option In Sts 117 11 38 Fault Select 2 22 11 16 L Option Mode 116 11 37 Fault Status 1 221 11 71 Language Select 1 11 10 Fault Status 2 222 11 71 Leak Inductance 167 11 50 Fdbk Device Type 64 11 24 Line Undervolts 27 11 17 Fdbk Filter BW 67 11 25 Logic Cmd Input 197 11 60 Fdbk Filter Gain 66 11 25 Logic Input Sts 14 11 13 Fdbk Filter Sel 65 11 25 Logic Options 17 11 14 Flux Current 168 11 50 mA In Filter BW 184 11 54 Flux Trim Owner 132 11 43 mA Input Offset 103 11 34 Freq Track Filtr 180 11 54 mA Input Scale 104 11 34 FStart Select 216 11 69 mA Input Value 102 11 34 FStart Speed 217 11 70 mA Out Offset 112 11 36 Func 1 Eval Sel 200 11 62 mA Out Scale 113 11 36 Func 1 Mask Val 199 11 61 mA Out Value 111 11 35 Func 2 Eval Sel 203 11 63 Max
410. nal not to the enclosure bus bar Ground the encoder connections if you are using an encoder Ground the control and signal wiring Connect the TE terminal block Connect the ground bus to adjacent building steel or a floor ground loop Solidly ground the RFI filter if you need to use one These steps are explained in greater detail in the following sections Mounting and Wiring Your 1336 IMPACT Drive 2 15 Connecting the Drive to the System Ground Connect the drive to the system ground at the power ground PE terminal provided on the power terminal block TB1 Ground impedance must conform to the requirements of national and local industrial safety regulations such as NEC VDE 0160 and BSI You should inspect and test the ground impedance at appropriate and regular intervals Even if you have a floating secondary the building must have a safety earth ground In any cabinet you should use a single low impedance ground point or ground bus bar You should e Ground all circuits independently and directly to this ground point or bus bar e Directly connect the AC supply ground conductor to this ground point or bus bar Defining the High Frequency Ground Current Paths You need to define the paths through which the high frequency ground currents flow Defining these paths helps to assure that noise sensitive circuits do not share a path with high frequency ground currents and to minimize the area enclosed by these pa
411. nal device must be connected at cabinet end Shields for cables from one cabinet to another must be connected at the source end cabinet Splicing of shielded cables if absolutely necessary should be done so that shields remain continuous and insulated from ground Power wire is selected by load 16 AWG is the minimum recommended size for control wiring The following figures show the parameter linking and interactions within the 1336 IMPACT drive For more information about parameter linking refer to Chapter 6 Starting Up Your System oa fF OON ow Aa wo N aon Aa OQO N Specifications SCANport SCANports s SP An In1 Sel Par 133 e SP An Ini Scale Par 135 gt __ SP An In1 Value Par 134 _ gt SCANports j 1 _ gt 2 SP An Output Par 139 3 gt SP An In2 Sel Par 136 f 6 gt SP An In2 Scale Par 138 SP An In2 Value Par 137 r _ r SCANport Image In SCANport Image Out Data In A1 Par 140 Data Out A1 Par 148 Data In A2 Par 141 Data Out A2 Par 149 Data In B1 Par 142 Data Out B1 Par 150 Data In B2 Par 143 Data Out B2 Par 151 Data In C1 Par 144 Data Out C1 Par 152 Data In C2 Par 145 Data Out C2 Par 153 Data In D1 Par 146 Data Out D1 Par 154 Data In D2 Par 147 Data Out D2 Par 155 O a fF wONH A 7 A 8 L Option Board Logic Cmd Input Specifications SCANport 1 SP Enable Mask Par 124 SCANport 2 SCANport 3
412. nd Test Data 1 parameter 92 Viewing the Calculated Undervoltage Value of Bus Voltage To view the value of the calculated undervoltage 1 Enter a value of 100 into Test Select 1 2 Monitor Test Data 1 You can use this to check the actual bus voltage that causes an undervoltage condition Checking the Status of the Precharge To view the precharge status enter a value of 12 into Test Select 1 and then monitor Test Data 1 for the precharge status The precharge status is bit encoded as follows This bit When set indicates that The precharge function has been completed and the precharge device 9 should be on The drive can be enabled only after this bit is set The drive is in ridethrough Precharge must be completed and the bus 1 must return to within 75 volts of the bus voltage tracker before normal drive operation can resume A precharge initiated condition is in ridethrough 3 A precharge has been requested due to an external fault input 4 The converter is ready for precharge and the controller may start its precharge function The external precharge board is ok if present 5 The measured bus voltage is not stable there is a variation of greater than 25 volts and the precharge cannot finish 6 The DC bus voltage is less than line undervolts 12 20 Troubleshooting file Application group Fast Flux Up This bit When set indicates that The
413. nd less speed disturbance due to changes in load Excessive values of Kp gain cause the motor and load to chatter as noise in the speed feedback signal becomes amplified Large adjustments in the Kp gain require you to adjust the Ki gain to maintain stability Adjust Ki Speed Loop parameter 158 to determine how quickly the drive recovers from speed and load changes Increasing the Ki gain causes the drive to recover faster from a load disturbance Adjusting Ki gain also removes any steady state long term instabilities Excessive values of Ki gain cause the system to become oscillatory and unstable For higher bandwidth systems systems with bandwidths over 3 to 5 radians second Ki is larger than Kp For low bandwidth systems Kp is larger than Ki Verify affects of the Kp and Ki gain adjustments using a small step change in speed reference and or load Large changes more than a few percent cause the regulator to enter a limit condition and make checking the response difficult You may need to repeatedly adjust the Kp and Ki gain to get the desired response as these two gains interact with each other Make only small adjustments at a time and then check the results Figure 13 1 Speed Regulator Small Reference Step Response 50 to 53 Step Speed 53 51 50 0 Time Figure 13 2 Speed Regulator Step Load Disturbance Response Speed Time Understanding the Auto tuning Procedure 13 13 Important When you change eit
414. nd sensor wiring connector An inverter overtemperature is Reduce the load or duty cycle if possible 02081 VP Flashing Warnin pending The inverter heatsink Lower the value of RWM Froguanty parameter 10 Inv Overtemp Pnd green ing temperature is approaching trip Check the roof fan direction of rotation H frame only It level should be counter clockwise when viewed from the top If you do not want this condition to be reported as a warning change bit 1 in Warning Select 2 parameter 23 to 0 An inverter IT overload is pending The inverter current has Reduce the load or duty cycle if possible 02093 VP Flashing Warning been in excess of 105 of If you do not want this condition to be reported as a InvOvid Pend green Inverter Amps parameter 11 too warning change bit 13 in Warning Select 2 long Continued operation at this parameter 23 to 0 load level will cause an overload Inverter IT overload The Reduce the load or duty cycle if possible 02095 VP Flashing Warnin g inverter current has been in If you do not want this condition to be reported as a Inv Overload green excess of 105 of Inverter Amps warning set bit 15 in Warning Select 2 parameter 23 to parameter 11 too long 0 A hardware malfunction was detected on power up or reset 03008 VP Red 1 Hard i R a p Recycle the power If the fault does not clear replace the HW Malfunction blink bch AS main control board of the selected stop type A hardwar
415. ne set of inputs IN4 and IN4 IN3 and IN3 IN2 and IN2 IN1 and IN1 10V DC Power Supply C m A Reference Pot 2 5 k Q Minimum _ To TE Signal Ground Terminal Block The typical analog input connections for bidirectional operation can be shown as follows Frames B H TB10 3 TB10 2 TB10 1 TB10 4 TB10 5 TB10 6 Forward Reverse O 10V DC Power Supply COM Power Supply Common 10V DC Power Supply IN Analog In ADC IN Analog In Shield Note Connect to only one set of inputs IN4 and IN4 IN3 and IN3 IN2 and IN2 IN1 and IN1 Reverse Relay al Reverse B ce Forward D Reference Pot 2 5 k Q Minimum E F To TE Signal Ground Terminal Block If you are wiring a remote pot to your system you may want to refer to Chapter 9 Applications and Appendix B Control Block Diagrams for additional information 2 10V Impedance 100 ohms DAC ee ee ou ae ou Pt 4 20mA Impedance 273 ohms Shield Programmable Default is set to At Speed Supply Programmable Default is set to Enable Run Mounting and Wiring Your 1336 IMPACT Drive 2 23 Analog Outputs There are two analog outputs that have a range of 10V and one 4 20mA output with a digital resolution of 12 bits The typical analog output connections can be shown as follows 10 0
416. ning The SCANport adapter at port 3 has been disconnected and the logic mask bit for port 3 is set 1 If the adapter was not intentionally disconnected e Check the wiring to the SCANport adapters e Replace wiring SCANport expander SCANport adapters and main control board e Complete drive if required If you do not want this condition to be reported as a warning change bit 11 in Warning Select 1 parameter 21 to 0 06076 SP 4 Timeout VP Flashing green Warning The SCANport adapter at port 4 has been disconnected and the logic mask bit for port 4 is set 1 If the adapter was not intentionally disconnected e Check the wiring to the SCANport adapters e Replace wiring SCANport expander SCANport adapters and main control board e Complete drive if required If you do not want this condition to be reported as a warning change bit 12 in Warning Select 1 parameter 21 to 0 06077 SP 5 Timeout VP Flashing green Warning The SCANport adapter at port 5 has been disconnected and the logic mask bit for port 5 is set 1 If the adapter was not intentionally disconnected e Check the wiring to the SCANport adapters e Replace wiring SCANport expander SCANport adapters and main control board e Complete drive if required If you do not want this condition to be reported as a warning change bit 13 in Warning Select 1 parameter 21 to 0 06078 SP 6 Timeout VP F
417. nk A2 1 Datalink B1 Datalink B2 Datalink C1 1 Datalink C2 Datalink D1 Datalink D2 Message Handler Logic Evaluation Block SP An In2 Value p 137 Data In A1 p 140 Data In A2 Data In B1 8 words maximum p 144 Input Image Block Transfer Logic Status Feedback Datalink A1 1 Datalink A2 1 Datalink B1 1 Datalink B2 1 Datalink C1 1 Datalink C2 1 Datalink D1 1 Datalink D2 1 Message Handler Drive Inv Status p 15 SP An Output p 139 Data Out A1 p 148 Data Out A2 p 149 Data Out B1 p 150 Data Out B2 p 151 Data Out C1 p 152 p 153 p 154 p 155 8 words maximum Data Out C2 p 153 Data Out D1 p 154 Data Out D2 p 155 1 Optionally enabled using DIP switches on the module Flex I O Module The following figure shows how the I O image table for the programmable controller relates to the 1336 IMPACT drive when a Flex I O Module is used SCANport Flex 1203 FM1 1336 IMPACT Drive Adapter and 1203 FB1 Modules Logic Command Logic Evaluation Block RIO Reference SP An In2 Value p 137 DeviceNet ControlNet Others Logic Status Drive Inv Status p 15 Feedback SP An Output p 139 Using the SCANport Capabilities 8 13 DeviceNet Communications Module The following figure shows how the I O image table for a DeviceNet scanner relates to the 1336 IMPACT drive when a DeviceNet Communications Module is used SCANport 1203 Gx5 1336 IMPACT Driv
418. not getting any speed feedback information You need to e Check the connection between the encoder and the motor e Run the phase rotation test again and escape out to the status display at the first question Check the motor speed It should ramp to 3 Hz 90 rpm for a 60 Hz 4 pole motor If the motor speed is 0 rpm you should Check the encoder wiring Check the encoder itself The drive completes the auto tune tests but you want a better response Adjust Accel Time 1 parameter 42 and Decel Time 1 parameter 44 before you change the values of any of the bandwidth Ki or Kp parameters If you are having problems with how your 1336 IMPACT drive is operating refer to this table for possible solutions before calling for help The drive does not respond to start or jog commands Then you should Make sure the power is applied Check if the port is enabled in SP Enable Mask parameter 124 Check if start is enabled in Start Jog Mask parameter 126 Check if Start Stop Owner parameter 129 and Jog1 Jog2 Owner parameter 130 are both 0 If not open start and or jog inputs and close stop inputs Check if the drive is faulted Check Run Inhibit Sts parameter 16 for possible cause You cannot clear faults Check if the port is enabled in SP Enable Mask parameter 124 Check if clear faults is enabled in Cir Fit Res Mask parameter 127 Check if clear fault owners in Ramp CIFIit O
419. nsfer messages explicit messages unscheduled messages etc are programmed to frequently write parameter data to a drive the EEPROM Non Volatile Storage will quickly exceed its life cycle and cause the drive to malfunction Do not create a program that frequently writes messages to a drive Datalinks do not write to the EEPROM and should be used for frequently changed parameters Using the SCANport Capabilities This message Lets you Continuous Parameter Value Read Read a continuous list of parameters beginning with the starting parameter number Continuous Parameter Value Write Write to a continuous list of parameters beginning with the starting parameter number Scattered Parameter Value Read Read a scattered list of parameters Scattered Parameter Value Write Write to a scattered list of parameters and return the status of each parameter Continuous Parameter Link Read Read a continuous list of links beginning with the starting parameter number Continuous Parameter Link Write Write a continuous list of links beginning with the starting parameter number Scattered Parameter Link Read Read a scattered list of parameter links Scattered Parameter Link Write Write a scattered list of parameter links Read Product Number Request the product number from a device Product Text String Read Request the product text from a device Last Parameter Number Read R
420. nt 10 gt In3 g In6 In7 20 1 0 In2 represents the minimum input value and In3 represents the maximum input value 10 Int 10 gt X 20 100 0 1 0 Input Output Range Range In2 n4 In5 10 5 0 Int 10 gt In3 g n6 In7 10 10 32767 In2 represents the maximum input value and In3 represents the minimum input value Notice that the In4 In5 combination is smaller than the In6 In7 combination This is valid and if In1 is equal to In2 the output will still be In4 Ind The output is also specified as a double word with the high word in Function Output I and the low word in Function Output 2 10 22 Using the Function Block As an example of the scale function block you could ensure that the speed reference is kept to within a 10 range To do this you need to enter the values shown in Figure 10 26 Figure 10 26 Example of the Scale Function Block Func 1 Eval Sel 200 gt Function Sel QD Func 1 Mask Val Func 2 Eval Sel 6 utput Range In4 Ind Function In2 100 0 Function Output 1 Enter 0 This value is not used Func 2 Mask Val He In7 Func 3 Eval Sel 5 Cou Function In3 Enter 0 This value is not used Func 3 Mask Val Enter 100 207 Function In4 Enter 0 208D Function In5 Function Output 2 Enter 0 for parameter 211 as Enter 1 this parameter is not used Function In6 Enter 0 GO Scale Function
421. nt commands for the motor are set at near zero levels Little if any torque is produced at the motor A simulated motor speed is calculated based on the level of internal torque reference and total inertia The speed regulator responds as if the motor were present and connected to the drive Bus Brake Opts parameter 13 lets you choose a braking decelerating method The following options are available This method Dynamic braking Bus regulator Flux braking An increase in the motor flux to increase the motor losses DC braking DC current to increase the motor losses Uses To select this method you need to An external braking device The full drive power is available for stopping You must use this method if a linear and controlled speed deceleration is required The other braking methods result in non linear stop profiles Set bit 10 Brake Regen in Bus Brake Opts Regen Power Lim parameter 76 to reduce the Clear bit 10 Brake Regen and bit 6 Flux Braking in regenerative torque to limit the bus voltage in the device Bus Brake Opts Set bit 6 Flux Braking and clear bit 10 Brake Regen in Bus Brake Opts Set bit 9 DC Brake and clear bit 10 Brake Regen in Bus Brake Opts Choose the braking decelerating method that works best for your motor and load You may also want to review the standard stop types that are available for the drive These are covered in the Speed Reference Selection Overview se
422. ntain up to 32 faults The 1336 IMPACT drive reports the faults using the following format Fault name Wy NO e el me TL Te FA 22s TL ed WL L L Fault queue Fault code Trip indicator Position in indicator number fault queue The trip indicator is only present if this fault caused the drive to trip The last number 1 indicates this fault s position within the fault queue C 10 Using the Human Interface Module HIM A marker is placed in the queue when the first fault occurs after a power up sequence This power up marker is as shown Po eer Me Te UL ROR The 1336 IMPACT drive keeps track of the time that has elapsed since power up The drive uses this information as a time stamp so that you can tell when a fault occurred in relation to when the drive was powered up To view the time stamp you need to use Test Data 2 parameter 94 and Test Select 2 parameter 95 You need to enter one value into Test Select 2 to view the time in hours since power up and another value to view the minutes and seconds These values are listed in the Test Select 2 description in Chapter 11 Parameters As an example if you want to know when the fault in position 12 occurred in relation to when the drive was powered up you would need to do the following 1 Enter a value of 11112 in Test Select 2 parameter 95 2 Look at the value of Test Data 2 parameter 94 This value represents the number of hours after power up that t
423. ntly active or enter the selected parameter value into memory The top line of the display automatically becomes active to let you choose another parameter or group The HIM provides the following keys for the The Enter key control panel section Press this key To Start operation if the hardware is enabled and no other control devices are sending a Stop command You can disable this key by using Start Jog Mask parameter 126 This key is referred to as The Start key Initiate a stop sequence if the drive is running The drive stops according to the stop type specified in Logic Options parameter 17 Clear the fault and reset the drive if the drive has stopped due to a fault Jog the motor at the specified speed Release the key to stop the jog The Stop key The Jog key Change the motor direction The appropriate Direction Indicator light will light to indicate direction The Change Direction key Increase or decrease the HIM speed command An indication of this command is shown on the visual Speed Indicator Press both keys simultaneously to store the current HIM speed command in HIM memory Cycling power or removing the HIM from the drive sets the speed command to the value stored in HIM memory These arrows are only available with digital speed control The Up Arrow and Down Arrow keys Using the Human Interface Module HIM C 3 The control panel section also provides the follo
424. o as the SCANport A N or a datalink in the manual for your Factory default 40 communications module Minimum valie 32767 Maximum value 32767 Conversion 1 1 154 Data Out D1 Parameter number 154 File grou Interface Comm Gateway Data Out Use Data Out D1 to view the drive to SCANport image that is 2NR S Mee oe i Ra Parameter type linkable destination sent to some device on SCANport This image may be referred to Display ny as the SCANport sheen or a datalink in the manual for your Factory default 40 communications module Minimunivalue 32767 Maximum value 32767 Conversion 1 1 155 Data Out D2 Parameter number 155 Use Data Out D2 to view the drive to SCANport image that is sent to some device on SCANport This image may be referred to as the SCANport I O image or a datalink in the manual for your communications module File group Parameter type Display Factory default Minimum value Maximum value Conversion Interface Comm Gateway Data Out linkable destination x 0 32767 32767 eal 11 48 Parameters 156 Autotune Status Parameter number 156 File group Autotune Autotune Status Autotune Status provides information about the auto tune Parameter type Se procedure Display bits Factory default not applicable Minimum value 00000000 00000000 Maximum value 00110000 11111111 The bits are defined as follows Conversion 1 1 Refer to Chapter 13 Understanding the Auto tuning Procedure for more informati
425. o overshoot 0 5 is the lowest recommended value Checking the Auto tune Status You can use Autotune Status parameter 156 to view various conditions related to the auto tune feature Files MUE Autotune Status is defined as follows group Autotune Status If this bit is set Then 0 Executing A test is currently executing A Complete The test has finished executing 2 Fail The test failed 3 Abort A stop command was issued before the test completed 4 Flux active The drive must not be running when auto tune is requested 5 Not Ready The ready input is not present Not Zero Spd Generally this bit is set in two cases Ifthe motor rotates during this test an improper result is likely Make sure the motor decoupled from load or process 6 is not rotating just before or during the test e If the motor is not rotating during this test then investigate electrical noise creating encoder transitions Improper encoder grounding or a noisy encoder power supply could cause noise If your motor does rotate during this test consult the factory 13 14 Understanding the Auto tuning Procedure If this bit is set Then 7 Running The drive is currently running 8 11 Reserved Timeout 12 The inertia test has run for one minute without measuring at least a 5 change in motor speed Possible excessive load Try running a higher level of Autotune Torque parameter 164 No Trq Lim Th
426. o set up a scale function With this function block you enter the input range and the output range and the scale function block scales the input so that it stays within those ranges The scale function block is shown in Figure 10 25 Func 1 Eval Sel Func 3 Mask Val Input Output Range Range In2 n4 In5 10 100 0 Int 10 gt In3 gt In6 In7 5 1 0 In2 represents the maximum input value and In3 represents the minimum input value 100 0 Function In4 207 gt Function Ins C208 gt Function In6 C209 gt Function In C210 gt Using the Function Block 10 21 Figure 10 25 Scale Function Block Function Sel QD Input Range 13 Ini Output Range In2 gt n4 In5 Function Output 1 In3 g In6 In7 Function Output 2 Scale Function Block In1 is the input value In2 and In3 specify the range that you want to use for the maximum and minimum values for In1 In4 and In5 represent a double word that corresponds to the output value that you want to use when In1 is equal to In2 In4 is the high word and In5 is the low word Likewise In6 and In7 represent a double word that corresponds to the output value that you want to use when In1 is equal to In3 Therefore it does not matter which value In2 or In3 you use for either the maximum or minimum The following are some examples Input Output Range Range In2 gt n4 Ind 10 100 0 I
427. of 4096 4096 base motor speed Figure 7 4 Example of Offset and Scale for Analog Inputs Range of the analog Range of the analog input after the offset input in internal is applied drive units Drive Output Offset 10 Analogto 2048 4096 Digital gt 0 gt 0 y Converter 10 10 2048 Because you already have the By multiplying 2048 by 2 correct range to you do you get the 4096 range not need an offset you were looking for The offset is 0 because the analog input and the internal range are both ranges When the 10V range is converted to internal units you get a range of 2048 To get the internal range of 4096 you can use a scale factor of 2 2 x 2048 4096 The 1336 IMPACT drive provides analog input filter parameters for you to use if the analog values are unstable The filter parameters use a low pass filter to create a more stable value You will lose some of the available bandwidth by using these parameters Determining the Offset and Scale Values for an Analog Output To determine the offset and scale values for an analog output you need to know the following e the range that you want for the analog output for example 5V to 5V or OV to 10V e the range that the drive is using for the internal units for example 2048 to 2048 or 0 to 4096 Setting Up the Input Output 7 7 Determining the offset and scale parameters for analog outputs can be confusing You need to calculate the
428. offset before you can calculate the scale However because the drive applies the scale first and then the offset you need to take the inverse of your results For example if you calculated a scale factor of 2 and you were trying to convert from 4096 drive units to a 10V output you would actually want to use a scale factor of 1 2 or 0 5 Figure 7 5 shows an example of the scale and offset values for an analog output parameter Figure 7 5 Example of Scale and Offset for Analog Outputs Range of the analog Range of the drive output before the output in internal offset is applied units after the scale is applied Internal Units Digital to 1024 Scale 4096 Analog Converter 0 0 25 Add drive 1024 5V 1024 4096 By adding 5 to both By multiplying 4096 by 0 25 5 you get the 0 10V you get 1024 which when range your meter requires converted equals 5V Figure 7 5 is used to help explain the offset and scale values for analog output To determine the offset and scale values you need to 1 Compare the output range to the internal units range In the example shown in Figure 7 5 you would compare the ranges represented by A and B If the ranges are Then you Go to The same that is both both 0 to n or both 0 to n Do not need an offset Step 4 Different Need an offset Step 2 In the example shown in Figure 7 5 the ranges were different so we used Step 2
429. ofile Enable command parameter 235 when controlling Profile operation via input mode 32 to avoid unwanted interactions The three profile control TB3 inputs are or ed with the Profile Enable command parameter 235 to determine the command state of the Profile Control Encoder Steps Applications 9 25 Setting the Profile Enable input terminal TB3 26 will initialize the profile control and set the current motor position as the Home position This setting of the Profile Enable bit will be reflected in the Profile status parameter P236 bit 5 Setting the Start input terminal TB3 19 will start the drive This is the same as pressing the green start button on a HIM terminal Setting the Run Cycle input terminal TB3 27 will initiate a Profile Sequence and will be reflected in the Status parameter P236 bit 6 When the profile has completed an entire step sequence this input Run Sequence 27 will have to be cleared and toggled high again to begin another sequence Input Step Hold Setting the Step hold input terminal TB3 28 will prevent the profile from continuing to the next step When the hold input is released cleared it will continue to the next state Two input terminals 22 and 23 are available for controlling step transitions if desired Input End Actions When an input End Action is selected the profile Control will command the End Action speed P239 until the selected TB3 input goes high The control will
430. olution and therefore a decreased signal to noise ratio for the current feedback All other drive operations remain the same The duty cycle for operation above 100 load for example 400 motor current must be limited to thermally protect the motor Check with the motor vendor for duty cycle guidelines You may want to consider using external motor thermal protection Important The maximum current limits that you specify in Pos Mtr Cur Lim and Neg Mtr Cur Lim set the maximum minimum values for Pos Torque Lim parameter 74 and Neg Torque Lim parameter 75 If you lower the values of Pos Mtr Cur Lim and Neg Mtr Cur Lim you will clamp the values of Pos Torque Lim and Neg Torque Lim If you later raise the value of Pos Mtr Cur Lim and Neg Mtr Cur Lim the values of Pos Torque Lim and Neg Torque Lim remain at the lower value The following section provides information to help you understand and use the scale and offset parameters for analog I O This is an alternate method for determining values for your scale and offset parameters Understanding the Scale and Offset Parameters for Input In example 1 a potentiometer with a range of 10V DC has been connected at analog input 2 An In 2 Value parameter 99 has been linked to Speed Ref 7 parameter 36 in the drive which gives the potentiometer control of speed reference 7 Applications 9 9 To calibrate the pot to control 100 base speed in both directions you need to adjust th
431. on What is the L Option The L Option is a plug in option card that provides control inputs to the drive The six versions of the L Option are 5 Can you attach This option is compatible with these Allen Bradley PLC This option Is a an encoder modules L4 Contact closure interface No 1771 OYL 1171 OZL L7E2 Contact closure interface Yes L5 24V AC DC interface No 1771 OB 1771 OB16 1771 OBB 1771 OBD 1771 OBN 1771 OQ 1771 OQ16 1771 OYL L8E2 24V AC DC interface Yes 1171 OZL L6 115V AC interface No 1771 OA 1771 OAD 1771 OW 1771 OWN L9E2 115V AC interface Yes 1 The L4 L5 and L6 options each have nine control inputs You can select the function of each input through an L Option mode which is covered later in this chapter 2 The L7E L8E and L9E options are similar to the L4 L5 and L6 options with the addition of encoder feedback inputs 3 Contact the factory for the recommended series revision level Important We do not recommend using an L4E LSE or L6E with the 1336 IMPACT drive What Functions are Available Using the L Option The L Option lets you choose a combination of the following functions Control function Description Accel decel rates 2 Digital potentiometer These inputs let you select the acceleration and deceleration times the drive uses When single source inputs are used Accel Time 2 Decel Time 2 are selected when this input is high
432. on Bit Description Bit Description Bit Description 0 Executing 4 Flux Active 8 11 Reserved Auto tune is currently executing The motor has flux Leave 0 1 Complete 5 Not Ready 12 Timeout Auto tune has completed The drive is not ready to start Auto tune timed out The inertia 2 Fail auto tune test failed to accelerate the load An error was encountered 6 Not Zero Spd 13 No Trq Lim 3 Abort The drive cannot start auto tune The inertia test failed to reach the Auto tune was aborted by a stop 7 Running torque limit command The motor is running 14 15 Reserved Leave 0 157 Total Inertia Parameter number 157 Total Inertia represents the time in seconds for a motor coupled Ene group REE e ar to a load to accelerate from zero to base speed at rated motor Parameter type aernetian torque The drive calculates Total Inertia during the auto tune Display sou aI procedure when the auto tune routines are run Factory default 2 00 second The 1336 IMPACT drive uses Total Inertia and Spd Desired BW Minimum value 0 01 second parameter 161 to calculate the speed loop gains Maximum value 655 00 second parameters 158 and 159 If you cannot run the auto tune inertia Conversion 100 1 00 test you should estimate Total Inertia and set it manually 158 Ki Speed Loop Parameter number 158 Use Ki Speed Loop to control the integral error gain of the speed Tahir type SR Aa te ye seo regulator Display sep The 1336 IMPACT drive automatically adjusts Ki Speed Loop Fa
433. on 4096 100 0 Changing Neg Mir Cur Lim affects Neg Torque Lim parameter 75 If you lower Neg Mtr Cur Lim you may also lower the range of Neg Torque Lim If you later raise Neg Mtr Cur Lim Neg Torque Lim may remain at the lower value due to the range change You cannot change this value while the drive is running Pos Torque Lim Parameter number 74 E h limit f a f i Th File group Control Control Limits nter t e torque limit for positive torque reference values The Parameter type linkable cdastinatien positive motor torque reference will not be allowed to exceed this Display x x value Pos Mtr Cur Lim parameter 72 affects the maximum Factory default 200 0 value of Pos Torque Lim Minimum value 0 0 Maximum value calculated Conversion 4096 100 0 Neg Torque Lim Parameter number 75 whats File group Control Control Limits Enter the the torque limit for the negative torque reference Parameter type linkable destination values The negative motor torque reference will not be allowed Display KX to exceed this value Neg Mtr Cur Lim parameter 73 affects the Factory default 200 0 minimum value of Neg Torque Lim Minimum value calculated Maximum value 0 0 Conversion 4096 100 0 Regen Power Lim Parameter number 76 File group Control Control Limits Enter the maximum power level that is transferred from the motor Parameter type linkable destination to the DC bus If you are using an external d
434. on Display x xS X X X units for TB Input steps Scaling Factory default 0 0 0 0 0 Time Step 10 x desired value 10 1 0 sec Minimum value 0 0 0 0 0 Encoder Step 10 1 0 units Maximum value 3276 7 5 3276 7 TB Input Step dependent on L Option Mode Sel See P241 Conversion 10 1 0 sec x TBin 10 1 unit 269 Parameter number 269 Step 7 Type File group Profile Test Data Parameter 269 selects the type of step to be used Parameter type Setup 0 Not Used This forces an End Action Display x 1 Time Step operate at speed shown in P267 for time in P268 Factory default 0 2 TB3 Input Step operate at speed shown in P267 until this Minimum value 0 Maximum value 3 input goes true 3 Encoder Step operate at speed shown in P267 for units in P268 Conversion 11 80 Parameters 27 Parameter number 270 9 Step 8 Speed File group Profile Test Data Parameter 270 sets the rpm value for this step Scaling 4096 Parameter type Setup Base Speed Display X X rpm Factory default 0 0 rpm Minimum value 8 x base speed Maximum value 8 x base speed Conversion 4096 Base Motor Speed 271 Parameter number 271 Step 8 Value File group Profile Test Data Parameter 271 sets the time in seconds for time steps the Parameter type Setup counts in units for encoder steps and the TB3 input to trigger on Display x xS x X X units for TB Input steps Scaling Factory default 0 0 0 0 0 Time Step 10 x desired value 10 1 0
435. onditions that have been configured Parameter type source to report as drive fault conditions Each configuration bit matches Display Bits the bit definitions of Fault Select 1 parameter 20 and Fault Factory default 0000 0000 0000 0000 Select 2 parameter 22 When a bit is 1 the condition is true Minimum value 0000 0000 0000 0000 otherwise the condition is false Maximum value 1111 1111 1111 1111 1 Fault Status 1 was added in Version 3 xx gonversion a Refer to Chapter 12 Troubleshooting for more information Bit Condition Bit Condition Bit Condition 0 Ridethru Time 6 Reserved 12 SP 4 Timeout 1 Prechrg Time 7 Reserved 13 SP 5 Timeout 2 Bus Drop 8 mA Input 14 SP 6 Timeout 3 Bus Undervlt 9 SP 1 Timeout 15 SP Error 4 Bus Cycles gt 5 10 SP 2 Timeout 5 Open Circuit 11 SP 3 Timeout 222 1 Parameter number 222 Fault Status 2 File group Monitor Fault Status Fault Status 2 shows fault conditions that have been configured Parameter type source to report as drive fault conditions Each configuration bit matches Display Bits the bit definitions of Fault Select 1 parameter 20 and Fault Factory default 0000 0000 0000 0000 Select 2 parameter 22 When a bit is 1 the condition is true Minimum value 0000 0000 0000 0000 otherwise the condition is false Maximum value 1111 1111 1111 1111 1 Fault Status 2 was added in Version 3 xx gonversion TEN Refer to Chapter 12 Troubleshooting for more information Bit Condition Bit Condition Bit Condition 0
436. one set of motor leads ATTENTION To avoid a possible shock hazard caused by induced voltages ground unused wires in the conduit at both ends For the same reason if a drive sharing a conduit is being serviced or installed disable all drives using this conduit to eliminate the possible shock hazard from cross coupled drive motor leads 2 20 Mounting and Wiring Your 1336 IMPACT Drive Observe all applicable safety and national and local regulations when selecting the appropriate wire size for your system Due to the drive overload capacity the conductors for the transformer primary and secondary must be sized at a minimum for 125 of the maximum motor current The motor conductors must also be rated for 125 of the full load motor current The distance between the drive and motor may affect the size of the conductors used To protect against interference use shielded type wire in control circuits A shielded wire is required for all signal wires The recommended conductor size must be a minimum of 0 82mm 16 AWG The best interference suppression is obtained with a wire having an individual shield for every twisted pair Figure 2 4 shows the recommended cable shielding Figure 2 4 Cable Shielding Recommendations soa HY aoe saa gT z eH CN E E 2 Conductor Shielded Cable Shield Connection 2 Conductor Shielded Cable Multi Conductor Shielded Cable with Individual Shielded Twisted Pa
437. onfiguring the Pulse Input file nterface Comm group Digital Config Setting Up the Input Output 7 11 The pulse input lets an external source provide the drive with a digital reference or trim signal Pulse input is a differential input with a maximum frequency of 100kHz The parameters available for pulse input include To Use this parameter Pulse In PPR Set the number of pulses per one revolution parameter 120 Pulse In Scale Apply a scale to the external source parameter 121 Pulse In Offset Add or subtract a fixed amount to or from Pulse In Value parameter 122 Pulse In Value View the pulse input value parameter 123 By using the pulse input you can have an external source provide the drive with a digital reference or trim signal This can be useful if you have a system with multiple drives and you want encoder magnetic pickup or a lead drive that provides a pulse to supply the reference for any secondary drives called follower drives You could use this reference to ensure that all drives run at the same speed or to ensure that the speed of the follower drives is related to the speed of the reference Basically the drive performs the following functions 1 Uses the values that you enter into Pulse In PPR and Pulse In Scale to perform some calculations Pulse In Scale can be any value from 0 01 to 10 00 2 Applies the Pulse In Offset value 3 Places the result in Pul
438. ons Each bit within this parameter matches the bit Display bits definitions of Fault Select 1 parameter 20 If you set a bit to 1 Factory default 00000000 00011100 and the corresponding bit in Fault Select 1 is clear 0 the drive Miniuni ae 00000000 00000000 reports a warning when that condition occurs If both NEREAK 01111111 00111111 corresponding bits in Fault Select 1 and Warning Select 1 are 0 the drive ignores the condition when it occurs The bits are defined as follows Conversion 1 1 Refer to Chapter 12 Troubleshooting for additional information Bit Description Bit Description Bit Description 0 RidethruTime 6 7 Reserved 12 SP 4 Timeout A bus ridethrough timeout Leave 0 Loss of communication with occurred 8 mA Input SCANport device 4 occurred 1 Prechrg Time A loss of input connection 13 SP 5 Timeout A bus precharge timeout occurred after it was established Loss of communication with occurred 9 SP 1 Timeout SCANport device 5 occurred 2 Bus Drop Loss of communication with 14 SP 6 Timeout A bus drop of 150 volts occurred SCANport device 1 occurred Loss of communication with 3 Bus Undervlt 10 SP 2 Timeout SCANport device 6 occurred A bus undervoltage occurred Loss of communication with 15 SP Error 4 Bus Cycles gt 5 SCANport device 2 occurred Too many errors on the More than 5 ridethroughs 11 SP 3 Timeout SCANport communication occurred in a row Loss of communication with 5 Open Circuit SCANport device 3 occurred F
439. ons require a rising edge to take effect Using the SCANport Capabilities 8 9 Within the 1336 IMPACT drive the I O image table resembles the following 1336 IMPACT Drive Logic Evaluation Block Logic Input Sts p 14 SP An In2 Sel p 136 Data In A1 p 140 Data In A2 p 141 Data In B1 p 142 gt SP An In2 Scale p 138 gt SP An In2 Value p 137 am Speed Ref 2 p 31 Pins Link Data In B2 p 143 Data In C1 p 144 Speed Ref 1 p 28 Data In C2 p 145 Data In D1 p 146 p 147 Data In D2 p 147 Drive Inv Status p 15 SP An Output p 139 Data Out A1 p 148 Data Out A2 p 149 Data Out B1 p 150 Data Out B2 p 151 Data Out C1 p 152 p 153 p 154 p 155 Link Qe Motor Speed p 81 Qe Motor Current p 83 Link Data Out C2 p 153 Data Out D1 p 154 Data Out D2 p 155 You need to make the links that are shown in order to get the I O image table data sent to and from the specific parameters within the drive The following examples are provided to show how the 1336 IMPACT drive interfaces with some of the available adapters These are only examples You should still refer to the appropriate manual for your gateway for additional information Using the SCANport Capabilities SLC to SCANport Module The following figure shows how the I O image table for the SLC programmable controller relates to the 1336 IMPACT drive In this example the d
440. onstant values linkable destination This value can be either links to another parameter or a constant value 4 Display These are the units that you see on the HIM display such as bits Hz seconds volts etc 5 Factory default This is the value assigned to each parameter at the factory The factory default for source parameters is listed as not applicable because source parameters receive their values from other parameters 6 Minimum value This is the lowest setting possible for the parameter 7 Maximum value This is the highest setting possible for the parameter 8 Conversion These are internal units used to communicate through the serial port and to scale values properly when reading or writing to the drive 9 Enums These are the textual descriptions that are associated with individual bits gt In the following descriptions base motor speed is equal to the value of Nameplate RPM parameter 3 11 10 Parameters 1 Language Select Parameter number 1 File group none Use Language Select to choose between a primary language Parameter type Hete Asirci and an alternate language Select Display x e 0 to choose the primary language Factory default 0 e 1 to choose the alternate language Minimum value 0 Maximum value 1 Conversion 1 1 2 Nameplate HP Parameter number 2 N late HP ins th ith h h File group Motor Inverter Motor Nameplate lameplate contains the value of the motor orsepower t at eame
441. op 5 Reverse 10 Flux Enable A ramp stop is selected A reverse was commanded Flux is enabled 1 Start 6 Jog 2 11 Process Trim A start is in progress A jog 2 is in progress Process trim is enabled CBA 2 Jog 1 o 7 Cur Lim Stop 12 Speed Ref A 0 0 0 No Charge A jog 1 is in progress A current limit stop is 13 Speed Ref B 0 0 1 Speed Ref 1 3 Clear Fault selected Speed Ref C 0 1 0 Speed Ref 2 A clear fault is in progress 8 Coast Stop 15 Reset Drive 0 1 1 Speed Ref 3 4 Forward A coast stop is selected The drive has been 1 0 O Speed Ref 4 A forward was commanded 9 Spd Ramp Dis commanded to reset 1 0 1 Speed Ref 5 Ramps are disabled 1 1 0 Speed Ref 6 1 1 1 Speed Ref 7 Parameters 11 61 198 1 Parameter number 198 Function In1 File group Application Prog Function Use Function In1 to provide input into the function block that is Parameter type linkable destination provided with the 1336 IMPACT drive You can choose to either Conversion 1 1 evaluate the input value or pass the value directly to the function f Func 1 Eval Sel parameter 200 is 0 or 6 11 then block Display x To evaluate Function In1 you need to also use Func 1 Mask Val Factory default 0 parameter 199 and Func 1 Eval Sel parameter 200 Minimum value 32767 To pass the value directly to the function block enter a value of O Maximum value 32767 into Func 1 Eval Sel If Func 1 Eval Sel parameter 200 is 1 5 then Display bits 1 Function In1 w
442. operation for large horsepower 40 hp and larger standalone drives the precharge starts the SCR phase advance and completes precharge when the bus is stable For all other drive types precharge is completed after a stable bus voltage is achieved and the precharge device SCR or relay by passes the precharge resistor For common bus operation set bit 12 in Bus Brake Opts parameter 13 The drive current and voltage ratings stored in EEProm determine the standalone operation With the default configuration the following conditions are needed to complete precharge e astable bus voltage for a minimum of 300 milliseconds e abus voltage greater than the value set in Line Undervits parameter 27 e a valid control status from the precharge board if present You can modify the default configuration for common bus drives by using the external fault input and the precharge exit option e You can use the external fault input with a cabinet disconnect switch to force precharge when the disconnect is opened and the drive is disabled This may reduce current stress when the disconnect is closed again e You can use the exit precharge option to let the precharge complete after the precharge timeout period 30 seconds when the bus voltage is not stable All other conditions must be met This is often used in the case of common or shared bus configurations where other drive s may be causing bus voltage variations Only use this option where n
443. options TB3 input Compare and Home End will be discussed in more detail in a later section There are a variety of functions that must be configured before a Speed Profile can be used with a drive For this reason additional functionality was added to the Start Up procedure to simplify this configuration If you have not entered the motor parameters or tuned the motor yet please use the Quick Tune procedure of the Start Up sequence at this time If you are not familiar with the Start Up and Quick Motor Tune features of the IMPACT please review section 6 8 through 6 11 in this manual When the motor tune is complete bypass the Digital section and the Analog Reference section of start up to reach Speed Profile Configuration Initial Setup Requirements Applications 9 19 Speed Profile Configuration 1 Enter a YES to the Configure Speed Prof question 2 Say YES to the Encoder operation for the drive question 3 Set counts per unit Parameter 245 for the encoder 4 x PPR P8 For a 1024 encoder enter 4096 4 Set Value Tolerance parameter 244 For now it can be left at its default value of 20 counts 5 Select a Stop End Action Parameter 238 End Action Sel Five possible end actions are available as detailed in P 238 6 We have already activated 2 steps in the Speed Profile Introduction so you can enter a NO to activating further steps However if you want to add more steps to your profile reply YES and fo
444. or 5 are selected in Func 1 Eval Sel Using the Timer Delay Function Using the Function Block 10 5 Figure 10 2 shows how the input parameters for function input 1 work together The input parameters for function inputs 2 and 3 work in the same manner Figure 10 2 Input 1 Parameters for the Function Block Func 1 Eval Sel None Mask All Bits On All Bits Off Any Bit On Any Bit Off l V Not V igned I lt V igned I lt V igned I gt V igned I gt V Unsign lt V Unsign lt V Unsign gt V Unsign gt V Function In1 OOANODAKRWM O Function Block Oo Func 1 Mask Val V Inverse Absolute For example if Function InI parameter 198 is 10001001 0001000 Func I Mask Val parameter 199 is 10001101 0001001 and Func 1 Eval Sel parameter 200 is set to 5 any bit off then a value of true is passed to the function block If Func 1 Eval Sel is set to 3 all bits off then a value of false is passed to the function block Figure 10 3 shows how this works Figure 10 3 Example of Function Input 1 Parameters Func 1 Eval Sel If parameter 200 5 any bit off then result is True Function Block If parameter 200 3 all bits off Function In1 10001001 0001000 then the result is False These two bits are different If you want to pass the value of Function In directly to the function block without evaluating it set Func 1 Eval Sel to 0 Function In4 parameter 207 Function In5 par
445. or frames B H to be These functions are listed in the description of Relay Config 1 parameter 114 in Chapter 11 Parameters 2 Relay Config 1 Enter the appropriate value At Set Speed When the value is correct press ENTER to return to the top line Press ENTER again If you selected gt Speed lt Speed Current lt Current Step 3 Otherwise Step 4 Press SEL 3 Relay Setpoint 1 Use INC or DEC to enter the setpoint threshold for either speed or current Step 4 X X When the value is correct press ENTER to return to the top line Press ENTER again Press ENTER if you want to set up the L Option information Step 5 Configure the L 4 Options Board Y If you do not want to set up the L Option use INC or DEC to toggle the Y to an N Press Step 6 ENTER Press SEL Use INC or DEC to select the L Option mode that you want to use Refer to Chapter 5 and the description of L Option Mode parameter 116 in Chapter 11 Parameters 5 i i mode When the value is correct press ENTER to return to the top line Step 6 Press ENTER again Important Depending on the option mode that you chose you are asked specific questions about how you want to set up your L Option board Choose how you want your drive to stop You have three choices coast ramp or current limit For more information about these stop types refer to the Speed Reference Selection 7 Make Stop 1 Type Overview in Appendix B Control Block Diagrams Step 7 COAST Stop N Press
446. or have shielding armor with equivalent attenuation Shielding armor must be bonded to the metal bottom plate See requirements 5 amp 6 on page E 1 2 Refer to the Filter Selection table on page E 2 for frame references and corresponding catalog numbers E 6 CE Conformity Filter Mounting Continued Important A positive electrical bond must be maintained All Dimensions in Millimeters and Inches between the enclosure and filter including brackets fans and drive To assure a positive electrical bond any paint near all mounting points must be removed Important Cooling fans are required for proper drive operation Refer to the User Supplied Enclosures section in Chapter 2 for CFM recommendations Typical Connection to Drive 75 0 2 95 Mounting Brackets AC Input Terminals See ras 831 32 72 Pa Important This information represents the d Let method used to mount 1336 RFB 475 590 amp 670 os TGAN filters in an Allen Bradley supplied EMC enclosure User supplied EMC enclosures must follow all of the guidelines shown Illustrations are only intended to identify structural mounting points and hardware shapes You must design and gt fabricate steel components based on the actual mounting Qy configuration calculated loads and enclosure specifications Refer to Chapter 2 for drive mounting requirements Typical Bracket for Stabili
447. ore purchasing your IMPACT drive you should read this section and understand which features your HIM supports and which are not supported If your HIM is older than Then your HIM does not support Version 1 07 Series B e The ability for the HIM to remove one decimal point from parameters with values too large to display Version 1 07 Series B enhancement The reset function The ability to change the process display Version 1 06 Series B e Enhanced parameter value changing e A number accelerator As you hold a button down longer to change a value parameter the number will increase incrementally faster Version 1 06 Series B enhancements Version 1 04 Series B e The ability to download information to a different size drive Version 1 01 Series B Version 1 04 Series B enhancement e The copy cat function e The ability to escape out of the Search and Link functions The display of the trip fault for the fault display Support for the start up procedure Removing the HIM Using the Human Interface Module HIM C 13 If your HIM is older than Then your HIM does not support Version 1 04 and 1 01 Series B enhancements The ability to display enums The ability to change any digit of parameter values The first fault displayed anywhere in the menu structure The ability to change any digit of a password value by using the Select key e The choice of process variables if m
448. ore than one process is available e The ability to clear all links Additional parameter text for links e The Search menu structure The Control Status menu structure The ability to enable disable the logic mask e The menu for the fault queue e The menu for the warning queue The file group structure Version 3 00 Series A To determine what version of the HIM you have turn your module over remove it from the drive first if necessary The version is located on the back of the HIM For handheld operation you can remove the module and place it up to 10 meters 33 feet from the 1336 IMPACT drive ATTENTION Some voltages present behind the drive front cover are at incoming line potential To avoid an electric shock hazard use extreme caution when removing replacing the HIM Important Removing a HIM or other SCANport device from a drive while power is applied causes a Serial Fault unless SP Enable Mask parameter 124 or Fault Select I parameter 20 have been set to disable this fault or Control Logic from the Control Status menu has been disabled only available on a Series A version 3 0 or Series B HIM Setting bit 1 of SP Enable Mask to 0 disables Serial Fault from a HIM on port 1 It also disables all HIM control functions except Stop Setting bit 9 of Fault Select 1 to 0 disables the serial fault from the HIM on port 1 but still allows HIM control ATTENTION Hazard of personal injury or equipment d
449. osition 23 occurred If you enter this value for Test Parameters 11 33 Then the value in Test Data 2 parameter 94 represents the Select 2 parameter 95 hours minutes seconds 11124 11224 The time since power up that the fault in position 24 occurred 11125 11225 The time since power up that the fault in position 25 occurred 11126 11226 The time since power up that the fault in position 26 occurred 11127 11227 The time since power up that the fault in position 27 occurred 11128 11228 The time since power up that the fault in position 28 occurred 11129 11229 The time since power up that the fault in position 29 occurred 11130 11230 The time since power up that the fault in position 30 occurred 11131 11231 The time since power up that the fault in position 31 occurred 11132 11232 The time since power up that the fault in position 32 occurred 58144 Drive software version example 101 58146 Drive power structure type 58220 Speed regulator output 58228 Speed error reference feedback 58230 Unfiltered speed feedback 4096 Nameplate RPM 58250 Internal torque reference 4096 rated motor torque 58296 Inverter temperature feedback degrees Celsius 96 An In 1 Value Parameter number 96 File group Interface Comm Analog Inputs Use An In 1 Value to view the converted analog value of the input Parameter type motes at analog input 1 Display si Factory default not applicable Minimum value 32767 Maximum va
450. oth bit 0 and bit 1 Neither bit O nor bit 1 Both the speed and the torque references remain unaffected Understanding Encoder Switchover Control Block Diagrams Speed Feedback Overview B 13 You can use the following block diagram to view how the drive uses the speed feedback parameters Speed Speed Scaled Spd Scale1 Scale 7 Fdbk FdbkDevice FdbkFilter Type Speed Sel Reference Select To Speed PI Regulator Encoderless Encoder Simulator Encoder Motor Speed Signal Encoderless Processing w Deadband To PTRIM Fdbk Fdbk pi Lees Filter Filter Gain BW To Motor Overload Function Feedback 12T Device Absolute Select Overspeed Selecting Your Feedback Device Type ie d You can use Fdbk Device Type parameter 64 to choose your feedback device type You have the following options group Feedback Device If you want to use Select this this feedback device type value Encoderless This is the default feedback device 1 Encoder Encoders are only available through the L Option board 2 Motor simulation This is useful for testing drive operation and interface 3 checkout when the motor is not available or cannot be used B 14 Control Block Diagrams If you want to use Select this this feedback device type value Encoderless w dead band Limits operation of drive below a reference value of 1Hz Drive Speed and
451. ou need to complete the L Option Board following steps to use the encoder 1 Ground the encoder the cable shield Ground the encoder to the following If your drive is a n location on the control board A1 A2 A3 or A4 frame J7 pin 9 6 or 3 B C D E F G or H frame TB10 pin 20 17 12 9 or 6 2 Set the encoder voltage jumper to match the encoder used J1 J2 5V 12V on the L Option board 3 Connect phase A phase A NOT phase B and phase B NOT 4 Connect the power to the encoder Requirements for the Contact Figure 5 4 shows the wiring diagram for the L4 Option board Closure Interface Board L4 Figure 5 4 L4 Option Board Wiring Diagram f Pi e o Typical 0 1uf 0 1 uf tie tie 10 7k 10 7k Not Used Isolated eVW e 5V Isolated Ground IGND 19 20 22 ws 222 2 22 2 2 2 2 22 2 2 2 2 Circuits used with the L4 Option board must be able to operate with low true logic Reed type input devices are recommended In this state External circuits must Be capable of a sinking current of approximately 10 mA to pull low the terminal voltage low to 3 0V DC or less high Let the terminal voltage rise to a voltage of 4 0 5 0V DC 5 12 Using the L Option Requirements for the 24V Figure 5 5 shows the wiring diagram for the L5 Option board AC DC Interface Board Figure 5 5 Requiremen
452. ounter function lets you increment or decrement a Function value The up down counter function block is shown in Figure 10 18 Func 3 Mask Val C205 D Using the Function Block 10 15 Figure 10 18 Up Down Counter Function Block Func 1 Eval Sel eines Function Output 1 In1 Count up rising edge In2 Count down rising edge In3 Load counter with 0 In4 Up increment In5 Down increment Function Output 2 In6 If Then Output is False A word True A double word Function In4 C207 gt n7 Clr Value Function In5 208 gt Function In6 209 gt Up Down Counter Function in OO Function Block When a rising edge occurs on In1 the output is incremented by the value in In4 and on In2 the output is decremented by the value in In5 The output can be either a word or a double word For the double word for Input 6 If In6 is Then the output is False A word value passed to Function Output 1 A double word value with the high word passed to Function Output 1 ine and the low word passed to Function Output 2 To clear the counter set In3 which loads the counter with the In7 value As long as In3 is set the counter remains at the In7 value even if In1 or In2 is toggling As an example of the up down counter function block you could create a shuttle When you press the start button a start forward command is sent to the drive the shuttle begin
453. oup Motor Inverter Motor Nameplate lameplate Hz contains t e value o the requency rating of t Parameter type ESti motor that you entered during the start up routine This value is Display veut typically located on the motor nameplate Factory default 60 0 Hz Minimum value 1 0 Hz Maximum value 250 0 Hz Conversion 10 1 0 Parameters 11 11 Conversion 7 Motor Poles Parameter number 7 File group Motor Inverter Motor Nameplate Motor Poles contains the number of motor poles The drive Motor Inverter Motor Constants calculates this value during the Quick Motor Tune portion of the Parameter type desietan start up routine Display x poles Factory default 4 poles Note Encoder PPR Minimum value 2 poles Must be greater than 64 of Motor Poles g Maximum value 40 poles Conversion 1 1 8 Encoder PPR Parameter number 8 File group Motor Inverter Encoder Data Encoder PPR contains the pulse per revolution rating of the Gonital zendbacbevice feedback device when you use an encoder to determine motor Parameter type aeeinetion speed Display X ppr Factory default 1024 ppr Note Encoder PPR Must be greater than 64 Minimum value calculated of Motor Poles Maximum value 20000 ppr Conversion 1 1 9 Service Factor Parameter number 9 ws File group Motor Inverter Motor Nameplate Enter the minimum level of current that causes a motor overload Parameter type Glaser 2T trip under continuous op
454. ource explained 6 12 SP 2 Wire Enable 8 4 11 54 SP An In1 Scale 8 15 11 44 SP An In1 Select 8 15 11 44 SP An In1 Value 8 15 11 44 SP An In2 Scale 11 45 SP An In2 Select 11 44 SP An In2 Value 11 44 SP An Output 8 15 11 45 SP Enable Mask 11 39 Spd Desired BW 11 49 13 10 13 11 B 18 Spd Error 11 72 Spd Reg Output 11 72 Spd Trq Mode Sel 7 12 11 26 B 22 Speed Ref 1 11 18 Speed Ref 1 Frac 11 18 Speed Ref 2 11 18 Speed Ref 3 11 18 Speed Ref 4 11 18 Speed Ref 5 11 19 Speed Ref 6 11 19 Speed Ref 7 11 19 Speed Scale 1 11 18 Speed Scale 7 11 19 Start Dwell Spd 11 59 B 5 Start Dwell Time 11 59 B 5 Start Jog Mask 11 40 Start Stop Owner 11 42 Stator Resistnce 11 50 Stop Dwell Time 11 14 Test Data 1 11 31 check for fluxing time 12 20 for calculated undervoltage 12 19 for precharge status 12 19 Test Data 2 11 31 for math limit fault 12 25 to 12 27 for parameter limit fault 12 22 Test Select 1 11 31 check for fluxing time 12 20 for calculated undervoltage 12 19 for precharge status 12 19 Test Select 2 11 32 for math limit fault 12 25 to 12 27 for parameter limit fault 12 22 Torque Limit Sts 11 30 B 21 Torque Ref 1 11 26 B 22 Total Inertia 11 48 13 10 13 11 Trans Dgn Config 11 51 13 3 uploading profile C 7 Vd Max 11 51 Vq Max 11 51 Warning Select 1 8 7 8 8 11 16 12 4 to 12 5 12 18 Warning Select 2 11 17 12 24 Warning Status 1 11 71 Warning Status 2 11 72 Zero Spe
455. ove base speed when in encoderless mode Conversion 4096 100 0 Parameters 11 27 Pos Mtr Cur Lim Parameter number 72 E he llowabl iti File group Control Contro Limits nter the largest allowal e positive motor stator current up to Parameter type A aA 200 or 400 as determined by Max Mtr Current Display Sao parameter 195 Values over 150 of the inverter rated current Factory default Oo or 135 for the 460V 800HP H frame may not be attainable Minimumvalue ae Bit 0 in Torque Limit Sts parameter 87 indicates when Pos Mtr Medina Ae Rae ae Cur Limis actively restricting current ontorelon 4096 100 0 Changing Pos Mtr Cur Lim affects Pos Torque Lim parameter 74 If you lower Pos Mtr Cur Lim you may also lower the range of Pos Torque Lim If you then raise Pos Mtr Cur Lim Pos Torque Lim may remain at the lower value due to the range change You cannot change this value while the drive is running Neg Mtr Cur Lim Parameter number 73 Enter the llowabl File group Control Control Limits nter the largest allowal e negative motor stator current up to Parameter type n 200 or 400 as determined by Max Mtr Current Display Soe parameter 195 Values over 150 of the inverter rated current Factory default 200 0 or 135 for the 460V 800HP H frame may not be attainable Minimum value EE Bit 0 in Torque Limit Sts parameter 87 indicates when Neg Mtr MEIEN 0 0 Cur Lim is actively restricting current Gonverci
456. par 123 Data In C2 par 145 ere 0 Data In D1 par 146 Data In D2 par 147 Inverter Volts par 12 Analog Inputs An In 1 Value par 96 Motor Constants An In 1 Offset par 97 An In 1 Scale par 98 An In 1 Filter par 182 An In 2 Value par 99 An In 2 Offset par 100 An In 2 Scale par 101 An In 2 Filter par 183 mA In Value par 102 mA In Offset par 103 mA In Scale par 104 mA Input Filter par 184 Gateway Data Out Data Out A1 par 148 Data Out A2 par 149 Data Out B1 par 150 Data Out B2 par 151 Data Out C1 par 152 Data Out C2 par 153 Data Out D1 par 154 Data Out D2 par 155 Analog Outputs An Out 1 Value par 105 An Out 1 Offset par 106 An Out 1 Scale par 107 An Out 2 Value par 108 An Out 2 Offset par 109 An Out 2 Scale par 110 mA Out Value par 111 mA Out Offset par 112 mA Out Scale par 113 SCANport Config SP Enable Mask par 124 Dir Ref Mask par 125 Start Jog Mask par 126 Clr Fit Res Mask par 127 SP 2 Wire Enable par 181 SCANport Status Dir Ref Owner par 128 Start Stop Owner par 129 Jog1 Jog2 Owner par 130 Flux Trim Owner par 132 Ramp CIFit Owner par 131 Flux Current par 168 Slip Gain par 169 Motor Poles par 7 Stator Resistnce par 166 Leak Inductance par 167 lt O
457. parameter 197 Setting the SCANport Faults gt Using the SCANport Capabilities 8 7 The SCANport device number is determined by the SCANport connection it is plugged into For a mask parameter If a bit is Then the control function is Clear 0 Disabled Set 1 Enabled You can specify how you want to be notified if SCANport loss or communication errors occur Setting the Loss of Communications Fault You can specify how you want to be notified if SCANport loses the connection to a port If you want a communications Then loss to be Set the appropriate bit in Fault Select 1 parameter 20 Reported as a fault corresponding to the SCANport device number Reported as a Set the appropriate bit in Warning Select 1 parameter 21 warning and clear the bit in Fault Select 1 Clear the appropriate bit in both Fault Select 1 and Warning Ignored Select 1 The following table shows which bits correspond to which ports To specify this device Set this bit SCANport device 1 9 SCANport device 2 10 SCANport device 3 11 SCANport device 4 12 SCANport device 5 13 SCANport device 6 14 For example if you want a fault condition to be reported if communication is lost with device 3 you would set bit 11 of Fault Select 1 ATTENTION Hazard of personal injury or equipment damage exist If you initiate a command to start motor rotation command a start or jog and then disconnect
458. parameter 94 If Test Data 2 is zero go on to step 3 If Test Data 2 is non zero there is a problem in the speed reference area and the drive could not achieve the correct reference value The drive used the largest possible reference instead The following table provides more specific information If Test Data 2is Then 1 bit 0 When Speed Scale 1 parameter 30 was applied to Speed Ref 1 parameter 29 a positive overflow occurred 2 bit 1 When Speed Scale 1 parameter 30 was applied to Speed Ref 1 parameter 29 a negative overflow occurred 4 bit 2 When Speed Scale 7 parameter 37 was applied to Speed Ref 7 parameter 36 a positive overflow occurred 8 bit 3 When Speed Scale 7 parameter 37 was applied to Speed Ref 7 parameter 36 a negative overflow occurred 256 bit 8 A positive overflow occurred during the trimmed speed reference sum of Speed Ramp Output and Speed Trim 512 bit 9 A negative overflow occurred during the trimmed speed reference sum of Speed Ramp Output and Speed Trim To fix a problem in this area reduce the maximum level of the speed reference or reduce the value of the speed scale parameter 3 Enter a value of 10506 into Test Select 2 4 Look at the value of Test Data 2 If Test Data 2 is zero go to step 5 If Test Data 2 is non zero there is a problem in the speed feedback area The problem may be with the encoder or wiring resulting in invalid motor speeds The
459. parameter used for linking Differences occur because of the direction of information flow The drive sends a digital value in drive units which must be matched to the voltage of the monitoring device Similar to analog inputs the analog output converts a 2048 value to 10V DC Thus when the drive sends 100 base speed equal to 4096 it must be scaled by 0 5 to be in the proper range 4096 0 5 2048 The offset can be 20V DC even though the physical limit is 10V DC This lets you offset the signal anywhere within the entire range In Figure 9 4 An Out I Value parameter 105 is used as an example to show the scale and offset parameters At An Out 1 Value a meter with a range of 0 to 10V DC has been connected An Out 1 Value has been linked to Motor Speed parameter 81 For the meter to indicate speed in both directions adjust the scale and offset parameters as shown in Figure 9 4 Working in the opposite direction as the analog inputs apply the scale factor first The drive sends a 4096 digital value to indicate 100 speed feedback for a total digital range of 8192 The meter having an analog range of 0 to 10V DC requires a digital range of 2048 To do this apply a scale factor of 0 25 8192 0 25 2048 To have the 0 to 10V DC meter indicate 100 feedback you need to apply an offset Offset parameters for analog outputs again adds the corresponding digital value to the range In this case an offset of 5 volts adds a di
460. pecified in Fwd Speed Limit parameter 41 and Rev Speed Limit parameter 40 You can use Absolute Overspd parameter 24 to specify how much faster than the maximum speeds specified in Fwd Speed Limit and Rev Speed Limit the drive can go before generating an Absolute Overspd fault The Inv Overtemp Pnd and Inv Overtemp Trp Faults Inv Overtemp Pnd is a configurable fault that is controlled through bit 1 of Fault Select 2 and Warning Select 2 The drive monitors the heatsink temperature If the temperature reaches around 80 C you will get an Inv Overtemp Pnd fault Inv Overtemp Trp is a non configurable fault You will get an Inv Overtemp Trp fault if the temperature of the heatsink is not between 20 C and 100 C For both faults the cause may be a sensor either open or shorted a blocked or inoperative inverter cooling fan or extended operation of the drive beyond the current rating B 32 Inverter Overload Overview A C4 Nameplate Amps Convert Motor to Inverter Units Inverter l 100 x fils 00 x M Fol Convert Inverter to Motor Units x 150 x Convert Inverter to Motor Units Control Block Diagrams You can use the following block diagram to view how the drive uses the parameters for inverter overload Flux Current Flux Current Torque Limit Sts NTC Foldback Protection 87 JTH IT LIMIT C RISE x Transistor RJC Z Error To Motor 30
461. pecify how you want the drive to stop the motor when a stop command is issued You have three options Is specified in this This type bit of Logic Input And can be represented by the following of stop diagram Sts Speed Stop command issued Coast 8 N Time This results in inverter shut off Speed Stop command issued Current 7 X Limit Time This results in the fastest possible stop Speed Stop command issued Normal 0 Jf as Ramp Time You determine the length of time By default the normal stop bit 0 is used To view which type of stop is currently selected for your drive check to see which bit of Logic Input Sts is set 0 7 or 8 If multiple bits are set the priority is bit 8 coast stop bit 7 current limit stop and then bit 0 normal stop The braking method if any that you have selected also affects how your drive stops Refer to Chapter 9 Applications and the description of Bus Brake Opts parameter 13 in Chapter 11 Parameters for information about the available braking methods file Control group Drive Logic Select file Control group Control Limits Control Block Diagrams B 7 Choosing a Direction For motors forward and reverse are arbitrary directions For this section forward is considered counterclockwise from the shaft end of the motor The 1336 IMPACT drive lets you change whether the motor is rotating in a forwar
462. peed 4 Power 2 Motor current 5 Torque 3 Motor voltage 6 Frequency Press INC or DEC to change the value of process variable 1 Press SEL Press INC or DEC to change the value of process variable 2 GO od os Press ENTER You should see a display similar to the following 6 00 SPFFO 8 00 MTE CURE If you want the Process Display to appear when drive power is applied simultaneously press the increment and decrement keys while the Process Display is active To exit Process mode press the Escape key Using the Human Interface Module HIM C 7 Using the EEProm Mode You can use EEProm mode to save values recall values reset values to the factory defaults upload a parameter profile from the drive to the HIM or download a parameter profile To perform any of these functions you need to first enter EEProm mode by selecting it from the Choose Mode prompt Saving Values Recalling Values The 1336 IMPACT drive automatically saves the values of the parameters when you make a change Therefore you should not need to use these functions in most situations However you can use these functions to try to fix problems with the checksum value If you have a problem with the checksum you can 1 Select Recall Values 2 Select Save Values 3 Check the values of the parameters Resetting the Default Values To reset the values of all parameters to the factory default values 1 From the EEProm mode prompt press INC or DEC unti
463. pplication Prog Function Use Function In8 to provide input to the function block that is Parameter type linkable destination provided with the 1336 IMPACT drive Display bits For the state machine function block Function In8 is used for the Factory default 00000000 00000000 output if the evaluation of Function In2 parameter 201 is true Minimum value 00000000 00000000 and the evaluation of Function In1 parameter 198 and the timer on function are true 1 Function In8 was added in Version 2 xx 11111111 11111111 1 1 Maximum value Conversion Refer to Chapter 10 Using the Function Block for more information 11 68 Parameters 212 i 1 Parameter number 212 Function Sel File group Application Prog Function Use Function Selto select which function you would like the Parameter type destination function block to perform Display X j Factory default 0 1 Function Sel was added in Version 2 xx eee Minimum value 0 Maximum value 27 Conversion 1 1 Value Description 0 Or Tmr Take the OR of input 1 and input 2 and use the result for the timer input Nor Tmr Take the NOR of input 1 and input 2 and use the result for the timer input And Tmr Take the AND of input 1 and input 2 and use the result for the timer input Nand Tmr Take the NAND of input 1 and input 2 and use the result for the timer input Or And Tmr Take the result of input 1 OR ed with input 2 and AND with input 3 Then use the result for the
464. precharge function cannot complete because the measured bus 7 voltage is less than 75 volts below the bus voltage tracker This only applies to precharging after a ridethrough 8 The precharge device has been commanded ON 9 Not used 10 An exit from precharge was requested 11 Precharge was skipped due to an enable dropout 12 An initial first precharge is executed 13 A high horsepower drive type is being used Enabling Fast Flux Up You can use fast flux up to achieve rated flux conditions and consequently high torque as fast as possible after an enable Under default conditions no fast flux up the drive brings the motor to rated flux conditions in a time proportional to the rotor time constant of the motor These times range from 50 milliseconds for small motors to several seconds for large motors If a high load is attempting to be started no acceleration occurs until that time has elapsed Enabling fast flux up can decrease that time by a factor of 5 to 10 You can enable the fast flux up function of the drive by setting bit 8 of Bus Brake Opts parameter 13 In this case 1 An amount of motor current set by Fast Flux Level parameter 78 is applied to the flux producing axis for a time estimated to produce rated flux in the motor The value of Fast Flux Level is set to 200 by default You can reduce this value if it causes an undesirable torque pulsation The time required to reach rated flux increases when you
465. proximately two thirds base speed and then coasts for several seconds This cycle may repeat several times The motor then decelerates to a low speed before disabling file Autotune group Autotune Setup If the motor will not accelerate increase Autotune Torque parameter 164 until the motor accelerates Autotune Speed parameter 165 changes the speed to which the motor accelerates Important You must run the transistor diagnostics phase rotation inductance and resistance tests before running this test To run the motor flux test 1 Set bit 4 in Autotune Dgn Sel parameter 173 2 Enable the drive The drive enable light turns off when the test is complete Understanding the Auto tuning Procedure 13 9 file Autotune group Autotune Results Typical values for rated motor flux range from 20 to 50 as displayed in Flux Current parameter 168 Several faults have been added to identify some problems that can occur in the flux test If the drive trips while the flux test is being performed check bits 11 through 15 of Autotune Errors parameter 176 If this bit is set Then Flx Atune Lo 11 The auto tune speed setpoint is set too low The lowest value that should be used for the auto tune speed setpoint is 30 of the minimum rated speed You should increase the value of Autotune Speed parameter 165 Flx Flux lt 0 12 One or more of the para
466. put power short circuit fusing Specifications for the recommended fuse size and type to provide drive input power protection against short circuits is provided in the tables in the frame specific chapters Branch circuit breakers or disconnect switches cannot provide this level of protection for drive components The input fusing requirements are frame size specific Please refer to the appropriate chapter Any method of disconnecting the drive that you wire to drive output terminals M1 M2 and M3 must be able to disable the drive if opened during drive operation If opened during drive operation the drive may fault You should remove the Drive Enable before the contactor is opened When the Drive Enable is removed the drive stops modulating ATTENTION The 1336 IMPACT drive control circuitry includes solid state components If hazards due to accidental contact with moving machinery or unintentional flow of liquid gas or solids exists an additional hardwired stop circuit may be required to remove AC line power to the drive When AC input power is removed there is a loss of inherent regenerative braking effect and the motor coasts to a stop An auxiliary braking method may be required 2 28 Mounting and Wiring Your 1336 IMPACT Drive Electrical Interference EMI RFI Do I Need an RFI Filter Immunity The immunity of 1336 IMPACT drives to externally generated interference is good Usually no special precautions are required
467. r 17 and the selected stop mode if applicable If the drive has faulted removing this input clears the fault if Cir Fit Res Mask parameter 127 is enabled Stop mode selects 2 Applying this input indicates that the L Option stop input follows stop type 2 in Logic Options parameter 17 Removing this input indicates that the L Option stop input follows stop type 1 in Logic Options Note Stop mode only affects the L Option stop Stops commanded from a terminal such as a Human Interface Module HIM follow stop type 1 in Logic Options Speed Profiling Mode 31 amp 32 allow Speed Profiling to be accomplished through digital inputs Refer to Chapter 9 Applications for more information on this feature AOUN Available only with three wire control single source Available only with three wire control multi source Must be asserted for operation Must be applied for operation if L Option Mode parameter 116 is not 1 or disable the fault in Fault Select 2 parameter 22 and Warning Select 2 parameter 23 5 Available only with two wire control 5 4 Using the L Option Setting Up the L Option Board To use the L Option board you need to 1 2 Choose the L Option input mode that is best for your application Record the selected mode number Selected Mode Number Wire the L Option board according to the input mode you selected Enter the input mode number during the digital set up portion of the s
468. r fine positioning will reduce the time between encoder steps This subsequently reduces the overall cycle time The blend mode will reduce the position accuracy since the drive may be moving at a relatively fast rate The encoder sample interval is fixed at 12 5 ms The control will not backup to maintain a position It will automatically continue to the next step when the position is at or beyond the target Any errors would accumulate throughout the sequence Figure 9 14 Velocity Blend Mode Example Motor Speed 1 gt Relay 4 Output Chi 5 00V Ch2 200mV Ch1 Ch3 10 0V Notice that each step is a precise movement and the control brings the motor to zero speed at the end of each step When the step is within tolerance value the relay output activates Once the next step is initiated the relay opens out of tolerance Motor Speed Relay 4 Output Ch1 5 00V Ch2 200mV Chi Ch3 10 0V Notice that the step velocities are blended together in this mode The position accuracy at each step is limited but with an encoder home end action the starting posi is very accurate 9 30 Applications Notes Chapter Objectives What is a Function Block Chapter 10 Using the Function Block Chapter 10 provides information for helping you to use the function block that is included with the 1336 IMPACT drive
469. rciion reference 6 is selected in Logic Input Sts parameter 14 Display x x rpm Factory default 0 0 rpm Minimum value 8 x base motor speed rpm Maximum value 8 x base motor speed rpm Conversion 4096 base motor speed 36 Speed Ref 7 Parameter number 36 j File group Control Speed Reference she the speed bee les i ae should use when speed Parameter type eble dasineion reference 7 is selected in Logic Input Sts parameter 14 Display x x rpm Factory default 0 0 rpm Minimum value 8 x base motor speed rpm Maximum value 8 x base motor speed rpm Conversion 4096 base motor speed 37 Speed Scale 7 Parameter number 37 i ba File group Control Speed Reference Enter the gain multiplier used to scale Speed Ref 7 Parameter type incabletdectinaton parameter 36 Display X XXXX Factory default 1 0000 Minimum value 3 9999 Maximum value 3 9999 Conversion 8192 1 0000 38 Jog Speed 1 Parameter number 38 i File group Control Speed Reference ae eb aie ballet the drive should use when Jog 1 Parameter type linkable destnatlon is selected in Logic Input Sts parameter 14 Display x x rpm Factory default 100 0 rpm Minimum value 8 x base motor speed rpm Maximum value 8 x base motor speed rpm Conversion 4096 base motor speed 39 Jog Speed 2 Parameter number 39 Enter the speed reference that the drive should use when Jog 2 is selected in Logic Input Sts parameter 14 File group Parameter type Display Factory default
470. re of the following e The motor should not rotate during this test although rated voltages and currents are present and the possibility of rotation exists For encoderless systems you must visually verify that the motor does not rotate e This test is run at rated motor current and by passes the normal current limit functions Before running the resistance test make sure that you have entered the correct motor nameplate information To run the motor resistance test 1 Set bit 3 in Autotune Dgn Sel parameter 173 2 Enable the drive The drive enable light turns off when the test is complete When a reading is obtained in Stator Resistnce perform the flux test file Autotune group Autotune Setup 13 8 Understanding the Auto tuning Procedure Typical values for per unit motor resistance are in the range of 1 to 3 as displayed in Stator Resistnce The value in Stator Resistnce increases as the length of wiring runs increase group Autotune Status Several faults have been included to identify some problems that can occur in the resistance measuring routine If the drive trips during the resistance test check bits 6 through 10 of Autotune Errors file Autotune parameter 176 If this bit is set Then Res gt 0 Spd The motor is not at zero speed Generally this bit is set in two cases e Ifthe motor rotates during this test an improper result is likely Make sure the motor
471. re shown in Figure 3 1 Figure 3 1 Terminal Block Locations TB3 TB1 Power Terminal Block TB4 7 10 Control amp Signal Wiring TB3 Control Interface Option PEDEEREERA Ekl Control Interface 122222000000 TB10 3 2 Mounting and Wiring Information Specific to Frames A1 A2 A3 and A4 The drive connections for TB1 are shown in Figure 3 2 Figure 3 2 Drive Connections for Frames A1 A4 200 240V 0 37 3 7 kW 0 5 5 HP Terminal Designations 380 480V 5 5 7 5 kW 7 5 10 HP Terminal Designations 380 480V 0 37 3 7 kW 0 5 5 HP Terminal Designations 500 600V 0 75 7 5 kW 1 10 HP Terminal Designations GRD GAD RS T dC DO UV W GRD GRD R S T DC DC BRKe U v w tu 3 Tt a3 73 u 3 3 m 3 13 A A Dynamic Brake A A A COM R T Option j j ot To Motor aes DC Input Line To Matar Required 1 1 Required Branch Required 1 T Required Branch Input Fusing Circuit Disconneci Input Fusing Circuit Disconneci T T T f T T AC Input Line AC Input Line 2 Dynamic Brake 1 User supplied 2 Before wiring your dynamic brake for the A4 frame double check the terminals You should attach the terminal on the brake to the DC terminal on your drive and the terminal on the brake to the
472. red BW parameter 161 are appropriate for your system Enter a value of 10508 into Test Select 2 Look at the value of Test Data 2 If Test Data 2 is zero go to step 9 If Test Data 2 is non zero there is a problem in the torque reference area These conditions indicate excessive levels of torque reference The 1336 IMPACT drive uses a maximum internal torque reference of 800 and further limits this torque by the drive s torque and current limit settings If Test Data 2is hen An overflow occurred when Slave Torque parameter 70 19024 bit 10 was applied to Torque Ref 1 parameter 69 4096 bit 12 An add overflow occurred for Torque Ref 1 Torque Trim 8192 bit 13 An add overflow occurred for the torque sum mode A divide overflow occurred for the torque to current Tera BINA conversion divide by flux To fix a problem in this area determine if the torque reference levels are excessive and possibly reduce the maximum level of torque reference Enter a value of 10509 into Test Select 2 Start Up Troubleshooting Procedures Troubleshooting 12 27 10 Look at the value of Test Data 2 If the value of Test Data 2 is zero no problems occurred in this area If the value of Test Data 2 is non zero there is a problem in the process trim area These conditions are generally due to using reference quantities or gains that are too large to represent in the drive s number system The dri
473. reduce this value 2 The flux current is reset to nominal 3 The drive is allowed to start producing torque 4 Use Test Select 1 parameter 93 to check the approximate fluxing time Enter a value of 86 into Test Select 1 to display the fluxing time in Test Data 1 parameter 92 The time delay is given in seconds x 0 000977 If the flux time is 0 no fast flux up occurs and the drive starts normally If at least 50 of the commanded current is not measured you can configure the drive to fault at this time using Fault Select 1 Open Circuit Forcing the Drive to Complete a Precharge In some cases the precharge may not complete due to external bus disturbances Setting bit 11 in Bus Brake Opts forces the precharge to complete at the precharge interval default 30 seconds This may cause precharge damage and should only be used when large inrush currents cannot occur Understanding the Bus Voltage Tracker Troubleshooting 12 21 Bus Brake Opts parameter 13 also lets you select a rate called a slew rate for the bus voltage tracker The bus voltage tracker slowly tracks changes in the actual bus voltage If the actual bus voltage drops 150 volts or greater below the current value of the bus voltage tracker the drive automatically disables modulation and enters precharge Important You should only use the bus voltage tracker if you are having ridethrough problems The bus voltage tracker adjusts the bus sensitivity to ridethroug
474. regulator Torque The trim control and Torque Ref 1 parameter 69 You can also use q Slave Torque parameter 70 to scale Torque Ref 1 Spd Trq Mode Sel provides the following options Set this bit If you want 0 Zero torque to be used A The source for the drive torque reference to come from the speed regulator 2 The source for the drive torque reference to come from an external torque 3 To compare the values of the speed regulator output with the torque reference sum and select the smaller value 4 To compare the values of the speed regulator output with the torque reference sum and select the larger value 5 To use the numeric sum of the speed regulator output plus the torque reference sum You can view the values of the speed regulator output and the torque reference sum To view the value of the speed regulator output 1 Set Test Select 2 parameter 95 to 58220 2 View the value of the speed regulator output in Test Data 2 parameter 94 file Monitor group Testpoints To view the value of the torque reference sum 1 Set Test Select 2 parameter 95 to 9730 2 View the value of the speed regulator in Test Data 2 parameter 94 file Control group Speed Feedback file Control group Control Limits Control Block Diagrams B 23 If Fdbk Filter Sel parameter 65 is set to 4 then the output is passed through a notch filter before being use
475. rely on flexible cables and should not include any form of plug or socket that would permit inadvertent disconnection You should periodically check the integrity of this connection Additional information about the optional RFI filter is located in Appendix E CE Conformity The input and output power connections are different between the different frame sizes If you have this frame size A1 A2 A3 or A4 Refer to this chapter Chapter 3 B C D E F G or H Chapter 4 The following table provides generic terminal information Terminal Description PE Power earth ground R L1 S L2 T L3 AC line input terminals DC DC DC bus terminals U T1 V T2 W T3 Motor connection ATTENTION Thenational codes and standards such as NEC VDE and BSI and local codes outline provisions for safely installing electrical equipment Installation must comply with specifications regarding wire type conductor sizes branch circuit protection and disconnect devices Failure to do so may result in personal injury and or equipment damage Important For maintenance and set up procedures you may operate the drive without having a motor connected 2 18 Mounting and Wiring Your 1336 IMPACT Drive The following table provides information about the maximum minimum wire size and maximum torque used for the various frame sizes oe Pa If you have this The
476. rement Speed Ref 1 and start commanded Ref 1 and start commanded Shuttle closes switch B increment Speed Ref 2 is commanded Shuttle closes switch G increment Speed Ref 2 is commanded Shuttle closes switch C increment Speed Ref 3 is commanded Shuttle closes switch F increment Speed Ref 3 is commanded Shuttle closes switch D increment Speed Ref 4 is commanded Shuttle closes switch E increment Speed Ref 4 is commanded Shuttle closes switch E increment Speed Ref 5 is commanded Shuttle closes switch D increment Speed Ref 5 is commanded Shuttle closes switch F increment Speed Ref 6 is commanded Shuttle closes switch C increment Speed Ref 6 is commanded Shuttle closes switch G increment Speed Ref 7 is commanded counter set Shuttle closes switch B increment Speed Ref 7 is commanded counter set to to zero speed ref no change zero speed ref no change Shuttle closes switch H reverse direction and stop commanded Shuttle closes switch A forward direction and stop commanded Using the Multiply Divide The multiply divide function block multiplies the value of In1 with Function the value of In2 and then divides the result by the value of In3 The multiply divide function block is shown in Figure 10 22 Figure 10 22 Multiply Divide Function Block Func 1 Eval Sel Function Sel 12 Int x In2 In3 Function In2 C201 Ina If Then Function Output 1 False Use per unit math Func 2 Mask Val C202 True Use stan
477. rent feedback phase U offset tests 0 Current feedback phase W offset tests 1 Shorted power transistor tests Ground fault tests Open transistor open motor open current feedback open gate drive and open bus fuse tests 4 Power transistor U upper for all tests 6 Power transistor U lower for all tests 7 Power transistor V upper for all tests 8 Power transistor V lower for all tests 9 Power transistor W upper for all tests 10 Power transistor W lower for all tests 11 Bits 5 and 12 through 15 are reserved You must leave these bits 0 Even though you set bits 6 through 11 to disable the individual tests you will still get a fault with the other tests if there is an open in an individual section To test specific modules within the power structure you can disable any transistor or any combination of transistors You must leave all transistors enabled under most conditions Use sound judgement to verify that power transistor fault conditions do not exist before disabling tests Inverter DgnI parameter 174 and Inverter Dgn2 parameter 175 contain the results of the transistor diagnostic tests Important Serious component failures may occur if unverified power transistor fault conditions are ignored or tests are disabled before you proceed to run the drive under load 13 4 Understanding the Auto tuning Procedure Inverter DgnI parameter 174 is defined as follows When this bit is set
478. rive is connected to channel 1 of the SLC module in enhanced mode If this were an example of basic mode only the O 1 2 O 1 3 1 2 and I 1 3 entries would be used Backplane SCANport SLC SLC to 1336 IMPACT Drive 1O Image SCANport Module Output Image Logic Command Reference Datalink A1 2 Datalink A2 2 Datalink B1 2 Datalink B2 2 Datalink C1 2 Datalink C22 Datalink D1 2 Datalink D22 Logic Evaluation Block SP An In2 Value p 137 Data In A1 p 140 Data In A2 p 141 Data In B1 p 142 Data In B2 p 143 Data In C1 p 144 Data In C2 p 145 Data In D1 p 146 Data In D2 p 147 Input Image Logic Status Feedback Datalink A1 2 Datalink A2 2 Datalink B1 2 Datalink B2 Datalink C1 Datalink C22 Datalink D1 Datalink D2 2 Drive Inv Status p 15 SP An Output p 139 Data Out A1 p 148 Data Out A2 p 149 Data Out B1 p 150 Data Out B2 p 151 Data Out C1 p 152 Data Out C2 p 153 Data Out D1 p 154 Data Out D2 p 155 Message Message Handler 1 Available only in enhanced mode 2 Optionally enabled via the G file in the SLC processor Using the SCANport Capabilities 8 11 Serial Communications Module The following figure shows how the I O image table for the programmable controller relates to the 1336 IMPACT drive when a Serial Communications Module is used SCANport 1203 Gx2 1336 IMPACT Drive DF1 DH485 to SCANport N40 0 63 BTW Emulation N41 01 Logic Command
479. rmation are available The Profile Enable Parameter P235 enables the profile defines the home position begins the actual sequence and allows for a profile Hold Refer to page 9 21 In addition it defines how to transition between each profile step An enable bit sets the Home position and must be set to 1 for the profile feature to operate Home position is redefined any time this bit is toggled to a 1 A run Sequence bit is used to actually begin the sequence operation once a start command has been given to the drive An Encoder Velocity Blend bit defines if the drive will come to zero speed between each step or blend the step value and make a smooth transition from one step speed to another An example of this is shown below Encoder Step Profile Time Step TB Input Step or Unblended Operation APNI Blended Encoder Step Profile 1000 Normal 50o with Hod f Hold Input Speed Profiling Operation Applications 9 17 Each step is defined by three configuration parameters A The Speed in rpm during the step Step Speed B The Step Value Step Value C The Type of Step to perform time based digital input activated or encoder count based Step Type Parameter No __ 249 SPEED 250 VALUE 251 TYPE The Profile control will output the selected Step Speed until the conditions of the Step Type and Valu
480. rocedure The 1336 IMPACT drive runs the auto tune routines as part of the Quick Motor Tune routine Important You can skip this chapter if your drive passed the auto tune tests performed during the Quick Motor Tune routine You should only need to read this chapter if your drive faulted during any of the auto tune tests This topic Starts on page A description of auto tuning 13 1 Running the power structure and transistor diagnostics 13 2 tests Running the phase rotation test 13 5 Running the sequential torque tuning tests 13 6 Running the inertia test 13 9 Checking the auto tune status 13 13 Auto tuning is a procedure that involves running a group of tests on the motor drive combination Some tests check the drive hardware and other tests configure drive parameters to maximize the performance of the attached motor ATTENTION You must apply power to the drive and connect the motor for the auto tune tests Some of the voltages present are at incoming line potential To avoid electrical shock hazard or damage to equipment only qualified service personnel should perform the following procedures Important If you stop the drive once the resistance inductance flux and inertia tests begin the drive will fault 13 2 Understanding the Auto tuning Procedure file Autotune group Autotune Setup Running the Power Structure and Transistor Diagnostics Tests file Control group Drive
481. ropriate chapter Chapter 3 or 4 for the location of your terminal blocks ATTENTION Ifyou install control and signal wiring with an insulation rating of less than 600V route this wiring inside the drive enclosure to separate it from any other wiring and uninsulated live parts If you do not separate these wires you may damage your equipment or have unsatisfactory drive performance Connecting the Analog Inputs The 1336 IMPACT drive has the following analog inputs Quantity Description Input impedance 2 Range of 10V 20K Ohms 1 4 20 mA 130 Ohms These inputs are differential inputs with noise rejection filtering Each input has a gain and offset adjustment The A D converter is a 12 bit device where an input value of 10V results in a digital value of 2048 Likewise an input value of 10V results in a digital output value of 2048 For an analog input to function you must link the analog input parameters to an appropriate drive parameter as well as define the scaling and offset parameters 2 22 Mounting and Wiring Your 1336 IMPACT Drive Frames The typical analog input connections for unidirectional operation are shown as follows mamoow rY A1 A4 J4 3 J4 2 J4 1 J7 1 J7 2 J7 3 10V DC Power Supply Connect to either A or C COM Power Supply Common only one IN Analog In ADC IN Analog In Shield Note Connect to only o
482. rsion 65535 1 0 161 Spd Desired BW Parameter number 161 File group Control Speed Regulator Use Spd Desired BWto specify the speed loop bandwidth and to determine the dynamic behavior of the speed loop As you increase the bandwidth the speed loop becomes more responsive and can track a faster changing speed reference Autotune Autotune Results Parameter type linkable destination Display x xx radians second Factory default 5 00 radians second As you adjust the bandwidth setting the 1336 IMPACT drive Minimum value 0 00 radians second calculates and changes Ki Speed Loop parameter 158 and Ko Maximum value calculated Speed Loop parameter 159 gains A zero bandwidth setting lets Conversion 100 1 you adjust the speed loop gains independent of bandwidth for custom tuning applications Note You must have the correct Total Inertia parameter 157 entered before adjusting the speed loop bandwidth Total Inertia is measured by the autotune startup routine Parameter number 162 File group Control Speed Regulator 162 Error Filtr BW Use Error Filtr BW to set the bandwidths of two cascaded low pass filters in the Kf error path of the speed PI regulator ees type vera cel Factory default 500 0 radians second Minimum value calculated Maximum value 1500 0 radians second Conversion 10 1 0 163 Reserved Parameter number 163 k File group Leave this parameter set to 0 Parameter type Display Factory default Minimum value Ma
483. rstanding the Bus Regulator The bus regulator limits the maximum bus voltage for systems that do not have brake or regen regenerative capabilities If bit 10 of Bus Brake Opts Then parameter 13 is Set 1 to indicate that the system has a brake or regen capability The drive uses the value of Regen Power Lim parameter 76 The bus regulator limits the maximum bus voltage by Clear 0 to indicate that the automatically adjusting the value of Regen Power Lim system does not have a In this case you should use a default value of 25 If brake or regen capability the drive system has significant losses you can decrease this value until bus voltage faults occur Refer to Chapter 9 Applications for more information on using the bus regulator for braking Understanding the Power Limits The power limits let you set limits on the maximum power limits in the positive and negative directions Without these limits you could receive a Bus Overvoltage Trip which is a hardware fault The power limits first perform a full wave rectify to separate the input from the bus regulator into a positive value and a negative value Once these values are separated the minimum maximum selection functions compare the values from the full wave rectify with the value of Autotune Torque parameter 164 and the value of either Pos Torque Lim parameter 74 or Neg Torque Lim parameter 75 to determine which value is closest to zero
484. rstanding the Parameter Limit Faults section later in this chapter If you do not want this condition to be reported as a fault change bit 9 in Fault Select 2 parameter 22 to 0 03058 Math Limit VP Flashing red Soft A math limit has occurred Examine the math limit testpoints to determine the exact cause Refer to the Understanding the Math Limit Faults section later in this chapter If you do not want this condition to be reported as a fault change bit 10 in Fault Select 2 parameter 22 to 0 03072 mA Input VP Flashing green Warning A loss of 4 20mA input has occurred Check your wiring and connections If you do not want this condition to be reported as a warning change bit 8 in Warning Select 1 parameter 21 to 0 03089 Param Limit VP Flashing green Warning A parameter limit has occurred Examine the parameter limit testpoints to determine the exact cause Refer to the Understanding the Parameter Limit Faults section later in this chapter If you do not want this condition to be reported as a warning change bit 9 in Warning Select 2 parameter 23 to 0 03090 Math Limit VP Flashing green Warning A math limit has occurred Examine the math limit testpoints to determine the exact cause Refer to the Understanding the Math Limit Faults section later in this chapter If you do not want this condition to be reported as a warning change bit 10 in Warning Se
485. rt Capabilities Notes Chapter 9 Chapter Objectives Choosing a Motor Feedback Source Applications Chapter 9 provides applications for using the 1336 IMPACT drive This Topic Starts On Page Choosing a motor feedback source 9 1 Choosing an optional braking decelerating method 9 3 Using DC hold 9 6 Using up to 400 motor current 9 7 Understanding the scale and offset parameters for analog I O 9 8 Using 4 20 mA inputs outputs 9 11 Using a remote pot 9 12 Using MOP 9 14 Using Flying Start 9 14 Using Speed Profiling 9 16 The 1336 IMPACT drive has four sources for motor speed feedback e encoder feedback e encoderless speed estimate e encoderless speed estimate w deadband e motor simulation To select either the encoder or the encoderless speed estimate you need to make the selection in the Quick Start routine and run the autotune routines To choose the motor simulation mode use Fdbk Device Type parameter 64 To use an encoder mode you must have an L7E L8E or LOE L Option board Refer to Chapter 5 Using the L Option for information about the L Option board Important If you are using your 1336 IMPACT drive for hoist like applications we strongly recommend that you use an encoder 9 2 Applications How Do Encoderless and Encoder Feedback Modes Differ The following table compares the encoderless mode to the encoder feedback mode Category Encoderless Mode
486. s The hardware detects that any of four wires A A NOT B B NOT is missing Quadrature Phase The Mtr Stall Fault Mtr Stall is a configurable fault controlled through bit 5 of Fault Select 2 and Warning Select 2 A Mtr Stall fault occurs when the motor is not running zero speed and the drive is in a limit condition the drive is putting out maximum torque current or power file Monitor This condition Is indicated by roup Drive Inv Status a YA group The motor is not running Bi A Status parameter 15 Torque Limit Sts parameter 87 having a The drive is in a limit condition val other than 0 You can use Motor Stall Time parameter 25 to enter the length of time that the drive must be in current limit and at zero speed before the drive indicates a Mtr Stall fault file Fault Setup i group Fault Limits The MtrOvrid Pnd and MtrOvrid Trp Faults I7T MtrOvlid Pnd and MtrOvld Trp are configurable faults controlled through bits 3 and 4 of Fault Select 2 and Warning Select 2 The faults are generated when points are reached on the motor overload curve You can use Service Factor parameter 9 and Motor Overload parameter 26 to change the curve The following curves do not apply to the H frame Information for the H frame is not available at the time of printing B 30 Control Block Diagrams Motor Overload I2T Curves for a Service Factor of 100 Percent Rated Motor Curren
487. s and return to step 1 4 For encoder based systems with the motor turning in the positive direction check that Motor Speed parameter 81 is positive If the value is not positive swap encoder leads TB3 32 and TB3 34 and go back to step 1 Motor Speed is 0 during this test if an encoder is not present Bits 2 through 5 of Autotune Dgn Sel control the sequential torque control tuning tests If during any of the next tests bit O negative or zero slip of Autotune Errors parameter 176 is set then Nameplate RPM parameter 3 is less than the motor synchronous speed determined from Nameplate Hz parameter 6 and Motor Poles parameter 7 For example a 4 pole 60 Hz motor has a synchronous speed of 1800 rpm Here a motor nameplate rpm of 1750 rpm results in 50 rpm or 1 67 Hz of slip Running the Inductance Test A measurement of the motor inductance is required to determine the references for the regulators that control torque This test measures the motor inductance and displays it in Leak Inductance parameter 167 When running this test you should be aware of the following e The motor should not rotate during this test although rated voltages and currents are present and the possibility of rotation exists For encoderless systems you must visually verify that the motor does not rotate e This test is run at rated motor current and by passes the normal current limit functions Before running the inductance test m
488. s configure the drive to either indicate a Math Limit warning or to not report the condition Math Limit warnings are reported when bit 10 in Fault Select 2 parameter 22 is clear and bit 10 in Warning Select 2 parameter 23 is set The Math Limit condition is not reported when both bits are cleared If you are having problems with the start up procedure refer to this table for possible solutions before calling for help If Then The start up procedure is not supported on a Series A You powered up your drive Human Interface Module HIM To verify that you have a and cannot access the Series A HIM check the series letter located on the start up routine back side of the HIM or check the HIM version when you first power up your drive You got a Feedback Loss You have specified that an encoder is on the system but Fault it has been disconnected 12 28 Miscellaneous Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Procedures Then The motor does not turn during the phase rotation test Remove the load from the motor and try running the auto tune tests again Afterwards you will need to attach the load again and run the inertia test manually Refer to Chapter 13 Understanding the Auto tuning Procedure for additional information During the phase rotation test you were asked to swap the encoder leads You changed the leads and ran start up again You were asked to swap the leads again The drive is
489. s this may produce undesirable results 1 From the Choose Mode prompt use INC or DEC to select Links Press INC or DEC to select Set Links Use INC or DEC to scroll through the parameter list until you come to the destination parameter that you want to link Press SEL Enter 0 Press ENTER Press ESC when you have finished to exit the Set Links mode YN Sa oe 6 14 Starting Up Your System Where Do I Go From Here Your drive should now be up and communicating with your terminal device s To change the way the drive operates by default you can modify some of the default settings You can use the following table as a Starting point If you want to Then refer to Use the L Option Chapter 5 Understand how analog I O works Chapter 7 Understand how to use pulse input Chapter 7 Use the programmable relay Chapter 7 Modify your SCANport configuration Chapter 9 Use a communication gateway Chapter 9 Select a braking method Chapter 9 Use a remote pot Chapter 9 Use the MOP Chapter 9 Use Speed Profiling Chapter 9 Understand precharge and ridethrough Chapter 12 Adjust the Kp Ki and or Kf gains Chapter 13 Understand the auto tune procedures Chapter 13 Understand the process trim routine Appendix B Understand the speed reference selection process Appendix B Understand the NTC and IT protection mechanisms Appendix B Learn more about the Human Interface Module HIM Appendix C
490. s all available functions and options You should use this start up procedure to get your basic system running and then adjust any remaining parameters that you need for your particular application 6 8 Starting Up Your System To begin the start up procedure from the Choose Mode Startup prompt you need to follow these steps Step At this prompt You need to Then go to Choose Mode 1 Start Up Press the ENTER key Step 2 Decide if you want to run the Quick Motor Tune routine The quick motor tune routine f includes entering your basic drive motor nameplate data verifying that your motor and Running the Quick 2 Quick Motor Tune encoder if used leads are connected correctly and running the auto tune tests ae rocedure Procedure Y If yes press the ENTER key If no press INC or DEC to get N Then press ENTER Step 3 Decide if you need to configure the digital input and output parameters The digital section ae er includes the set up information for the programmable relay and the L Option board Configuring the Config Digital Digital Sect 3 f gital Section Section N If yes press INC or DEC to get Y Then press ENTER If no press the ENTER key Step 4 Decide if you need to configure the analog input and output parameters The analog section includes the set up information for the following inputs and outputs Speed Gdnfidunngik onfiguring the i Setup Reference Reference 1 Speed Reference 2 Torque Reference Ana
491. s are 3 wire latched If you want a SCANport device to use a 2 wire start unlatched you need to set the appropriate bit in SP 2 Wire Enable parameter 181 To use a 2 wire start for Set this bit SCANport device 1 1 SCANport device 2 SCANport device 3 SCANport device 4 SCANport device 5 SCANport device 6 Logic Cmd Input parameter 197 NIOJ oO AJOJN Notes Regarding 2 and 3 Wire Operation When using 3 wire operation e Start is momentary latched e A low to high transition on the start input is required to start the drive e All 2 3 wire start inputs must be low before a low to high transition will start the drive e Stop input unlatches and stops the drive e To make 3 wire starts operate like a 2 wire start you need to wire OR the start and stop inputs e The drive will not start if the stop input is open the enable input is open or the drive is faulted Use Drive Inv Status parameter 15 bit 0 Run Ready to know when the drive is ready to start When using 2 wire operation e Run Fwd Rev is maintained unlatched e A low to high transition on either Run Fwd Rev input is required to start the drive Using the SCANport Capabilities 8 5 e All 2 3 wire start inputs must be low before a low to high transition will start the drive e Closing both Run Fwd and Rev will start the drive in the last direction it was running e Opening all Run Fwd Rev inputs stops the drive If any of
492. s are the functions that control the motor such as start stop and jog The control can come from up to six SCANport devices Logic Cmd Input parameter 197 and one L Option Board simultaneously The control is based on an ownership mechanism that lets certain functions have only one owner and other functions to have multiple owners Control of these functions can come from only one device Any device can control these functions Start Sto Speed reference rae Jog Clear fault Direction Reset drive Flux enable Local Process trim enable Speed ramp disable 8 4 Using the SCANport Capabilities Ownership is when a SCANport device commands a function As long as that function is commanded that device is the owner of that function For example if device 1 is commanding a forward direction which is a one owner function no other device can change the direction until device 1 stops commanding the forward direction If device 1 is sending a start command which is a multiple owner function other devices can also command a start If device 1 stops commanding the start the drive does not stop running if another device is still commanding the start A rising edge is required for start and jog functions If a jog or start is still commanded after the drive is stopped start and jog functions will not operate from any device until the jog or start commands are removed By default start commands from SCANport device
493. s sizes of drives Throughout this manual the frame sizes are frequently referred to instead of the kW or horsepower rating The following frame sizes are currently available for the 1336 IMPACT drive If your drive falls into this three phase drive rating Then your frame reference is 200 240V 380 480V 500 600V 0 37 0 75 kW 0 37 1 2 kW Ad 0 5 1 hp 0 5 1 5 hp 1 2 1 5 kW 1 5 2 2 kW 2 A2 1 5 2 hp 2 3 hp 2 2 3 7 kW 3 7 kW ia E 3 5 hp 5 hp a 5 5 7 5 kW 0 75 3 7 kW Ai 7 5 10 hp 1 10hp 5 5 11kW 5 5 22 kW 5 5 15 kW B 7 5 15hp 15 30 hp 15 20 hp 15 22 kW 30 45 kW 18 5 45 kW c 20 30 hp 40 60 hp 25 60 hp 30 45 kW 45 112 kW 56 93 kW D 40 60 hp 60 150 hp 75 125 hp 56 75 kW 112 187 kW 112 224 kw E 75 125 hp 150 250 hp 150 300 hp 224 336 kW F 300 450 hp 224 448 kw 224 448 kw G 300 600 hp 300 600 hp 522 597 kw 522 597 kw H 700 800 hp 700 800 hp 1 kW and hp are constant torque Once you have determined your frame reference write it here You can disregard information that is specific to other frame references Hardware Overview TB4 TB7 Pulse Input Jumper J8 Overview 1 5 Figures 1 1 and 1 2 show where the terminal blocks and L Option connectors are located Figure 1 1 Control Board for Frames A1 A2 A3 and A4
494. s the condition when it occurs For example if there is a loss of feedback and bit 0 in both Fault Select 2 and Warning Select 2 is 0 the drive ignores the loss of feedback You can use the HIM to view the fault and warning queues To view the fault queue you need to 1 Press the Escape key until you reach the Choose Mode level 2 Use the Increment or Decrement key to scroll through the Choose Mode options until Control Status is displayed 3 Press the Enter key 4 Use the Increment or Decrement key to scroll through the Control Status options until Fault Queue is displayed 5 Press the Enter key 6 Press the Enter key when View Queue is displayed The fault queue can contain up to 32 faults The 1336 IMPACT drive reports the faults using the following format Fault name TTT 7 eH MON e TT tel nie TTL Yo FOS LTE tert YL L L Fault queue Fault code Trip indicator Position in indicator number fault queue What Are the Fault Descriptions Troubleshooting 12 7 The trip indicator is only present if this fault caused the drive to trip The last number 1 indicates the position of this fault within the fault queue A marker is placed in the queue when the first fault occurs after a power up sequence This power up marker is as shown PHT EE Maley TL LL Fe GU The 1336 IMPACT drive keeps track of the time that has elapsed since power up The drive uses this information as a time stamp
495. s to move from A to H and the drive follows the first preset speed As the shuttle passes each switch the value of In1 is incremented and a new speed reference is used The speed references are set using Speed Ref 1 parameter 29 through Speed Ref 7 parameter 36 When the shuttle reaches relay H then a stop command is issued and the value of In1 is decremented When you press the start button again a start reverse command is sent to the drive and the shuttle moves from H to A following the preset speeds as they are incremented by each switch Figure 10 19 shows an example of a shuttle 10 16 Using the Function Block Figure 10 19 Example of a Simple Shuttle Te E inc inc inc inc inc inc Speed Ref 1 Speed Ref 2 Speed Ref 3 Speed Ref 4 Speed Ref 5 Speed Ref 6 Speed Ref 7 25 rpm 50 rpm 100 rpm 500 rpm 250 rpm 125 rpm 40 rpm Speed em ff ye ie 7 tae inc inc inc inc inc inc Speed Ref 7 Speed Ref 6 Speed Ref 5 Speed Ref 4 Speed Ref 3 Speed Ref 2 Speed Ref 1 40 rpm 125 rpm 250 rpm 500 rpm 100 rpm 50 rpm 25 rpm Speed To set up the function block for this example you would need to enter the values shown in Figure 10 20 Using the Function Block 10 17 Figure 10 20 Up Down Counter Function Block Func 1 Eval Sel Function Sel 2 Int Func 2 Eval Sel In1 Count up rising edge 0 In2 Count down rising edge In3 Load counter with 0 In4 Up increment In5 Down increment Logic Cmd In6 0
496. se In Value The drive can use the value placed in Pulse In Value to for example control the speed of a second motor For example you could have a system with two drives The lead drive has a 1024 PPR encoder with a base speed of 1750 rpm For this application the second drive or follower uses the lead drive s encoder but the application needs the follower to run at half the speed of the lead drive Figure 7 7 Pulse Input Configuration Speed Pulse In Offset Pulse In Value Ref 1 To set up the follower drive you would need to 1 Set Pulse In PPR parameter 120 to 1024 2 Set Pulse In Scale parameter 121 to 0 50 7 12 Setting Up the Input Output Configuring the L Option I O file nterface Comm group Digital Config file Control group Accel Decel file nterface Comm group Digital Config 3 Set Pulse In Offset parameter 122 to 0 4 Create a link from Speed Ref 1 parameter 29 to Pulse In Value parameter 123 The L Option input modes configure the L Option inputs Chapter 5 Using the L Option describes the input modes The modes let you set up the input to meet the requirements of your application L Option Mode parameter 116 sets the mode and takes effect on a power cycle or reset The stop type available in modes 3 13 and 16 only affects the L Option stop input Two wire run forward and run reverse use Stop Type 1 when the circuit is opened SCANport devices use
497. se on the system e Check the wiring to the SCANport adapters e Replace wiring SCANport expander SCANport adapters and main control board e Complete drive if required If you do not want this condition to be reported as a fault change bit 15 in Fault Select 1 parameter 20 to 0 06073 SP 1 Timeout VP Flashing green Warning The SCANport adapter at port 1 has been disconnected and the logic mask bit for port 1 is set 1 If the adapter was not intentionally disconnected e Check the wiring to the SCANport adapters e Replace wiring SCANport expander SCANport adapters and main control board e Complete drive if required If you do not want this condition to be reported as a warning change bit 9 in Warning Select 1 parameter 21 to 0 Troubleshooting 12 13 Fault Code and Text 06074 SP 2 Timeout LED Information VP Flashing green Fault Type Warning Description The SCANport adapter at port 2 has been disconnected and the logic mask bit for port 2 is set 1 Suggested Action If the adapter was not intentionally disconnected e Check the wiring to the SCANport adapters e Replace wiring SCANport expander SCANport adapters and main control board e Complete drive if required If you do not want this condition to be reported as a warning change bit 10 in Warning Select 1 parameter 21 to 0 06075 SP 3 Timeout VP Flashing green War
498. se power you can configure the drive to resume operation without system intervention default The ridethrough timeout is set for two seconds This means that the drive is configured to fault default setting and not auto restart if the dropout lasts more than two seconds ATTENTION You must determine safe auto restart and fault configurations at the system and user level Incorrect selection s may result in safety concerns and or drive damage Fault Select I parameter 20 and Warning Select I parameter 21 let you specify how you want the drive to report specific precharge and ridethrough information Ridethrough also protects the drive from excessive inrush current when the power returns by entering a precharge mode when ridethrough is initiated After precharge has finished the drive can complete ridethrough and resume normal drive operation The drive is enabled again after the bus rises to within 75 volts of the bus voltage tracker value ATTENTION Ifyou are using an external logic power supply the drive may be able to stay in an indefinite ridethrough state If the power returns to the drive much later the drive automatically restarts You must therefore handle the control of enable faults time outs drive configuration and safety issues at the system level Use the following parameters to configure the precharge and ridethrough functions e Fault Select 1 parameter 20 e Warning Select I parameter 21 e Bus Bra
499. se the L Option This topic Starts on page A description of the L Option 5 2 A list of the available functions 5 3 Setting up the L Option board 5 4 Using an encoder with the L Option board 5 11 Individual board requirements 5 11 Important If you are using an L Option board you must wire the L Option board before you start your drive If you do not have an L Option board installed verify that two jumpers are installed at connector J5 for frames Al A4 or J2 for frames B H one at pins 3 and 4 and the other at pins 17 and 18 You can skip the remainder of this chapter Jumper 2 a O Spares Connector Jumper 1 gt Jumper 2 gt Le L Option ni Connectors E gt Spare jumpers are located at J12 and J13 for Frames Al A4 and J17 and J18 for Frames B H ATTENTION If you are using an L8E or L9E for the encoder but do not want to use the L Option inputs you need to place jumpers on J5 stop and J6 enable on the L Option board However these jumpers must not be present if you use the L Option inputs as the jumpers cause the stop and enable functions to be permanently enabled 5 2 Using the L Opti
500. sink fans to maintain the 8OOHP rating Mounting and Wiring Your 1336 IMPACT Drive Use the information in the following table along with the enclosure manufacturer s guidelines for sizing Catalog Number Base Derate Amps Derate Curve 3 Heat Dissipation Drive Watts Heatsink Watts Total Watts 200 240V drives AQF05 2 3 Figure D 1 13 15 28 AQF07 3 0 Figure D 1 15 21 36 AQF10 4 5 Figure D 1 17 32 49 AQF15 6 0 Figure D 1 21 42 63 AQF20 8 0 Figure D 1 25 56 81 AQF30 12 0 Figure D 1 33 72 105 AQF50 18 0 Figure D 1 42 116 158 A007 27 2 none 156 486 642 A010 33 7 Figure D 2 200 721 921 A015 48 2 Figure D 3 205 819 1024 A020 64 5 Figure D 4 210 933 1143 A025 78 2 Figure D 5 215 1110 1325 A030 80 0 None 220 1110 1330 A040 120 3 Figure D 6 361 1708 2069 A050 149 2 Figure D 7 426 1944 2370 A060 180 4 Figure D 8 522 2664 3186 A075 240 0 Figure D 9 606 2769 3375 A100 291 4 Figure D 10 755 3700 4455 A125 327 4 Same as B250 902 4100 5002 380 480V drives BRF05 1 2 Figure D 1 12 9 21 BRF07 1 7 Figure D 1 13 15 28 BRF10 2 3 Figure D 1 15 20 35 BRF15 3 0 Figure D 1 16 27 43 BRF20 4 0 Figure D 1 19 36 55 BRF30 6 0 Figure D 1 23 54 77 BRF50 10 4 Figure D 1 29 84 113 BRF75 13 9 Figure D 1 70 230 300 BRF100 24 0 Figure D 1 89 331 420 B015 27 2 Figure D 11 117 486 603 B020 33 7 Figure D 2 140 628 768 B025 41 8 Figure D 12 141 720 861 B030 48 2 Figure D 3 141 820 961 BX040 58 7 Figure D 13 175 933 1108 B
501. source parameter read only parameters Source parameters provide realtime information that is available for other devices to use These devices can include PLC controllers operator interface devices and programming terminals throughout this manual the following symbol indicates a source parameter Common Techniques Used in this Manual file Control group Speed Reference Allen Bradley Support P 5 The following conventions are used throughout this manual e Bulleted lists provide information not procedural steps e Numbered lists provide sequential steps or hierarchical information e Italic type is used for parameter and chapter names This type of paragraph contains tips or notes that have been added to call attention to useful information This information is provided as a navigational tool Use this information to locate parameters in the file group structure For example to access a parameter in this section you would first locate the Control file and then the Speed Reference group Allen Bradley offers support services worldwide with over 75 Sales Support Offices 512 authorized Distributors and 260 authorized Systems Integrators located throughout the United States alone plus Allen Bradley representatives in every major country in the world Local Product Support Contact your local Allen Bradley representative for e sales and order support e product technical training e warranty
502. ss filter on the analog Parameter type input 1 This filter adjusts the bandwidth to get better filtering By Display using the low pass filter you lose some bandwidth but the value Factory default becomes more stable Minimum value Maximum value linkable destination x x radians per second 0 0 radians per second 0 0 radians per second 1 An In1 Filter BW was added in Version 2 xx py dias Par ECNE Conversion 10 1 183 1 Parameter number 183 An In2 Filter BW File group Interface Comm Analog Inputs Use An In2 Filter BW to use a low pass filter on the analog Parameter type input 2 This filter adjusts the bandwidth to get better filtering By Display using the low pass filter you lose some bandwidth but the value Factory default becomes more stable Minimum value Maximum value linkable destination x x radians per second 0 0 radians per second 0 0 radians per second 1 An In1 Filter BW was added in Version 2 xx 200 oradas per econd Conversion 10 1 184 i 1 Parameter number 184 mA In Filter BW File group Interface Comm Analog Inputs linkable destination x x radians per second 0 0 radians per second Use mA In Filter BW to use a low pass filter on the 4 20 mA Parameter type input This filter adjusts the bandwidth to get better filtering By Display using the low pass filter you lose some bandwidth but the value Factory default becomes more stable 1 mA In Filter BW was added in Version 2 xx Minimum value
503. stand how the HIM displays the bits When the appropriate parameter is displayed you will see two rows of 8 bits represented by zeros and ones The top row contains from left to right bits 15 through bit 8 and the bottom row contains bits 7 through bit 0 To Press this key Display the enum text definition for bit O Select Continue scrolling through the bits Select for each bit Return to the parameter Escape Refer to Appendix C Using the Human Interface Module HIM for additional information 12 4 Troubleshooting file Fault Setup Configuring Faults and Warnings Group 1 You can configure which of the following faults you want to trip the drive by using Fault Select 1 parameter 20 and Warning Select 1 parameter 21 Fault Select I and Warning Select I both have the following bit definitions This bit With this text Is defined as group Fault Config 0 RidethruTime A bus ridethrough timeout occurred 1 Prechrg Time A precharge timeout occurred 2 Bus Drop A bus voltage drop of 150V below the bus tracker voltage This is covered in detail later in this chapter 3 Bus Undervit paras i oe ie n below the value set in Line 4 Bus Cycles gt 5 i 5 ridethroughs occurred within a 20 second 5 Open Circuit ae current is less than 50 of 8 mA Input A loss of input connection after it was established 9 SP 1 Timeout A communication loss with SCANport device 1 10 SP 2
504. support e support service agreements Technical Product Assistance If you need to contact Allen Bradley for technical assistance please review the information in the Troubleshooting chapter first If you are still having problems then call your local Allen Bradley representative P 6 Notes Chapter Objectives What Features Does the 1336 IMPACT Drive Provide Chapter 1 Overview Chapter 1 provides an overview of your 1336 IMPACT drive This topic Starts on page An overview of the provided features 1 1 A description of the frame designators 1 4 A hardware overview 1 5 The 1336 IMPACT AC drive is a microprocessor controlled digital AC drive with the following features standard 0 37 to 485 kW 0 5 to 650 hp at 0 250 Hz constant torque configured 522 to 597 kW 700 to 800 hp at 0 250 Hz constant torque high performance digital speed loop microprocessor controlled field oriented current loop simplified programming through the use of a parameter table that features data entries in engineering units with English descriptions user friendly interface with easy commissioning and set up non volatile parameter storage extensive diagnostics including both logic board and power structure tests 32 entry fault queue and 32 entry warning queue with markers for clear fault and power up and with time stamps enclosed construction multiple communication interfaces for SCANport access comple
505. sure 283 2 11 i i i All Dimensions in Millimeters and Inches YY r 8 Required 4 3 0 171 Dia for 10 32 x 12 7 0 5 Self Tap 4 0 0 159 for 10 32 x 12 7 0 5 Threaded Saini ama aaa a a I A 7 uw Back of Enclosure A a Pa 129 3 5 09 ei 1 Shading indicates approximate size of drive inside enclosure 4 21 4 22 Mounting and Wiring Information Specific to Frames B C D E F G and H Heat Sink Through the Back Mounting Frame C 273 1 635 0 25 00 508 0 20 00 660 41 381 0 26 00 15 1 Shading indicates approximate size of drive inside enclosure 10 75 Cutout All Dimensions in Millimeters and Inches 4 3 0 171 Dia for 10 32 x 12 7 0 5 Self Tap 4 0 0 159 for 10 32 x 12 7 0 5 Threaded Back of Enclosure 129 3 5 09 Mounting and Wiring Information Specific to Frames B C D E F G and H Heat Sink Through the Back Mounting Frame D Detail E 9 9 0 39 P 375 21 AA 362 2 14 77 F _ 3564 _ 146 a 4 6 0 18 gt lt 14 02 zi o4 7 irga 0 4 i K j See Detail 1118 6 26 7 i 44 04 1 05 i 1054 4 A 41 51 962 7 37 90 A 867 4 34 15 N 806 7 773 9 31 76 30 47 4 B d A 680 5 26 79 1178 11 650 8 Cutout as Vi
506. t e Verify the parameters e Reset the drive If the fault still occurs replace the board 03015 VP Flashing A Hardware malfunction Hes Recycle the power If the fault does not clear replace the Soft main control board B frames through H frames or the HW Malfunction red occurred 7 drive A frames 03022 VP Flashing Soft The main control board has been Issue a Reset Defaults command to set the drive Diff Drv Type red initialized on a different size drive parameters back to the default values 03023 Asoftwaremalfunction Has Recycle the power If the fault does not clear replace the VP Solid red Hard main control board If the fault still occurs replace the SW Malfunction occurred gate driver board A software malfunction has 03024 ein Recycle the power If the fault does not clear replace the d y wer gt SW Malfunction Meso red Mard When this condition occurs the main control board drive coasts to a stop regardless of the selected stop type The motor speed has exceeded the speed limit plus Absolute If operating in torque mode check if the load is allowing 03025 VP Flashing Soft Overspd parameter 24 settings excessive motor speed Absolute Overspd red When this condition occurs the Check if the setting of Absolute Overspd parameter 24 drive coasts to a stop regardless or the speed limits parameters 40 and 41 are too low of the selected stop type The analog supply tolerance voltage is outsi
507. t 200 190 180 170 160 150 140 130 Set by Service Factor parameter 9 120 110 100 10 vA 100 Seconds to trip 1000 10000 60 second overload limit 200 Motor Over set by Motor Overload 175 Motor Over parameter 26 150 Motor Overl Percent Rated Motor Current Motor Overload I2T Curves for a Service Factor of 110 200 190 180 170 160 150 140 135 130 Set by Service Factor parameter 9 120 110 100 10 Fa 100 1000 10000 Seconds to trip 60 second overload limit 200 Motor Overload set by Motor Overload 175 Motor Overload parameter 26 150 Motor Overload file Control group Control Limits Control Block Diagrams B 31 The Analog Spply Tol Fault Analog Spply Tol is a non configurable fault It indicates that the voltages from the analog power supply are out of the appropriate range 13V to 18V If you receive an Analog Spply Tol fault you most likely have a problem with your power supply The Absolute Overspd Fault Absolute Overspd is a non configurable fault that occurs when the speed feedback regulator indicates that the speed of the motor is greater than the maximum values s
508. t 4 parameter 192 on the selected function block 15 At Zero Spd 39 Profile Position The motor is at zero speed 192 1 Parameter number 192 Relay Setpoint 4 File group Interface Comm Digital Config Relay Setpoint 4 lets you specify the setpoint threshold for either Parameter type linkable destination speed or current Relay Setpoint 4 is only active if Relay Config 4 Display x x parameter 191 is set to a value of 25 26 27 or 28 Factory default 0 0 i A Minimum value 800 0 1 Relay Config 4 was added in Version 2 xx Maximum Valve 800 0 Conversion 4096 100 0 Parameters 11 59 193 1 Parameter number 193 Start Dwell Spd File group Control Drive Logic Sel Start Dwell Spd lets you set the speed that the drive immediately Parameter type linkable destination outputs when a start command is issued No acceleration ramp Display x x rpm is used You must enter a time value in Start Dwell Time Factory default 0 0 rpm parameter 194 Minimum value 0 1 x base motor speed 1 Start Dwell Spd was added in Version 2 xx Maximum vale 0 xiba se motorspeed Conversion 4096 base motor speed Refer to the Speed Reference Selection Overview section in Appendix B Control Block Diagrams for more information 194 Paal Parameter number 194 Start Dwell Time File group Control Drive Logic Sel Start Dwell Time lets you specify how long you want the drive to Parameter type linkable destination continue using Start Dwell Spd p
509. t Select 2 parameter 22 Clear bit 9 in Fault Select 2 and set bit 9 in Warning Select 2 parameter 23 Make sure that bit 9 is clear in both Fault Select 2 and Warning Select 2 Report the condition as a warning Ignore the condition The drive performs a parameter limit check regardless of how you configure it to report the condition Using the Parameter Limit Testpoints When a parameter limit fault or warning occurs you need to look at two software testpoints Test Data 2 parameter 94 and Test Select 2 parameter 95 to identify which parameter s is being limited If Test Data 2 is non zero the value indicates which parameter limit condition has occurred A bit position is assigned to each limit condition Therefore a value of 1 corresponds to bit 0 2 for bit 1 4 for bit 2 and so forth Typically only a single parameter limit condition will occur at a time If multiple conditions do occur you need to interpret the testpoint value as a combination of more than one bit for example bits 0 and 1 decimal value 1 2 3 To view the testpoints 1 Enter a value of 10503 into Test Select 2 parameter 95 2 Look at the value of Test Data 2 parameter 94 If Test Data 2 is zero go on to step 3 If Test Data 2 is non zero use the following table to determine which parameter is being limited If Test Then this Has been Data 2 is parameter limited to Rev Speed Limit oe 1 bit 0 parameter
510. t takes to recover from a speed or load disturbance increases This means that the regulator takes a longer time to get the Too low speed feedback value close to the speed reference value that you specified Too high Your system will not be stable and it may oscillate 0 The speed PI regulator is strictly a proportional regulator B 18 Control Block Diagrams file Control group Speed Regulator Using the Kf Gain In addition to the Kp and Ki gains the speed PI regulator also uses a Kf gain The Kf gain affects the speed overshoot in response to a step change in speed reference You can adjust the Kf gain parameter at any time independent from the proportional and integral gains without affecting the stability of the system Chapter 13 Understanding the Auto tuning Procedure provides more information about the Kf gain Scaling the Speed Pi Regulator Gains Kf Speed Loop parameter 160 Kp Speed Loop parameter 159 and Ki Speed Loop parameter 158 are available for scaling the gains The scaling used for each of these parameters is in eighths 8 1 0 Using the Error Filter Bandwidth Error Filtr BW parameter 162 provides a low pass filter for applications that require more noise filtering When using Error Filtr BW keep the value of the parameter between 3 and 5 times greater than the value of Spd Desired BW parameter 161 which represents the bandwidth of the speed loop Additional informat
511. tall detection e peak output current monitoring to protect against excessive current at the output due to a phase to ground or phase to phase short e ground fault monitoring e DC bus voltage monitoring to protect against undervoltage or overvoltage conditions e power structure heatsink temperature monitoring e motor overspeed e internal voltage reflection reduction mechanism How Do Read the Catalog Number 1336E First Position Bulletin Number Letter AQ BR CW BP BX D RX AQ Second Position Voltage Voltages 200 240 AC or 310VDC 380 480 AC or 5132620VDC 500 600 AC or 775VDC or 200 240 AC 380 480 AC 380 480 AC F Frame Special Rating 500 600 AC 310VDC 513 620VDC Special Rating 775VDC Overview 1 3 Knowing your catalog number for the 1336 IMPACT drive can help you sort out what options you have as well as helping you communicate this information to the Allen Bradley support personnel The catalog numbers all have the following form F05 Third Position Nominal HP Rating Code F05 F07 F10 HiS F20 F30 F50 F75 F100 007 010 015 020 025 030 040 050 060 075 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 650 700C 800C kW HP 0 37 0 5 0 56 0 75 0 75 1 1 2 1 5 1 5 2 2 2 3 3 7 5 5 5 7 5 7 5 98 125 112 150 149 200 187 250 224 300 261 350 298 400 336 450 373 500 600 650 700 800
512. tart up procedure The input mode is then used for the value of L Option Mode parameter 116 This step is covered in Chapter 6 Starting Up Your System Choosing the L Option Mode To choose the L Option mode that is best for your application you need to 1 2 3 Determine the type of start stop direction control you want Determine the remaining control functions that you want Use Table 5 A Figure 5 1 and Figure 5 2 to determine the input mode number Using the L Option Table 5 A shows the available combinations Figure 5 1 and Figure 5 2 also show the available combinations Table 5 A Available Control Functions Control Function 1st Accel 1st Decel Input Mode o o N wo A a 16 17 18 19 20 21 N N 23 24 N a N o 27 28 29 30 31 32 2nd 1st Decel 2nd Accel 2nd Decel Common Enable Flux Enable Forward Jog Local MOP Dn MOP Up Not Ext Fault Not Stop Clr Fit Proc Trim Ramp Reset Reverse Rev Fwd 3 Run Fwd Run Rev Spd Sel 14 Spd Sel 24 Spd Sel 34 Spd Trq 1 Spd Trq 2 Spd Trq 3 Start Status Stop Type Profile Enable Step Trigger E w A a o N Run Sequence Position Hold 1 The L Option uses the
513. tatus SCANport Status You can use the lower byte of Ramp CIFIt Owner bits 0 through Interface Comm SCANport Status 7 to see which SCANport device s are presently issuing a valid Parameter type Pattee Clear Fault command You can use the higher byte bits 8 Display bits through 15 to see which SCANport device s are presently Factory default not applicable issuing a valid ramp command You can choose between Minimum value 00000000 00000000 0 Ramp clear fault input not present Maximum value 11111111 11111111 1 Ramp clear fault input present Conversion 1 1 The bits are defined as follows Refer to Chapter 8 Using the SCANport Capabilities for more information Bit Description Bit Description Bit Description 0 ClrFit L Opt 5 CIrFit SP 5 11 Ramp SP 3 The L Option board owns the SCANport device 5 owns the SCANport device 3 owns the Clear Fault Clear Fault Ramp 1 ClrFit SP 1 6 ClrFit SP 6 12 Ramp SP 4 SCANport device 1 owns the SCANport device 6 owns the SCANport device 4 owns the Clear Fault Clear Fault Ramp 2 ClrFit SP 2 7 ClrFit P197 13 Ramp SP 5 SCANport device 2 owns the Logic Cmd Input parameter 197 SCANport device 5 owns the Clear Fault owns the Clear Fault Ramp 3 CIrFit SP 3 8 Ramp L Opt 14 Ramp SP 6 SCANport device 3 owns the The L Option owns the Ramp SCANport device 6 owns the Clear Fault 9 Ramp SP 1 Ramp 4 ClrFit SP 4 SCANport device 1 owns the 15 Ramp P197 SCANport device 4 owns the Ramp Logic Cmd Input parameter 197
514. te encoder interface through the L Option board quadrature A A NOT B B NOT with encoder supply 12V two 12 bit resolution analog inputs for 10V two 12 bit resolution analog outputs for 10V one 12 bit resolution 4 20mA input one 12 bit resolution 4 20mA output 5 or 12V DC pulse input bumpless speed torque control programmable output contacts relay function blocks flux braking DC braking and bus regulation DC hold 200 400 motor curve 1 2 Overview e S Curve e autostart auto restart power up start e start and stop dwells e analog input filters e process trim e fast flux up e 2 3 wire control e feedback filters light heavy lead lag and notch e Flying Start Options The 1336 IMPACT drive provides the following options e DriveTools which is PC Windows based programming software compatible with the 1336 IMPACT drive and also other Allen Bradley 1336 and 1395 products e dynamic braking e AC motor contactor e L Option board with or without an encoder interface Human Interface Module HIM e Graphics Programming Terminal GPT e gateway modules Bulletin 1203 communications modules Protective Features The 1336 IMPACT drive uses the following protective measures e programmable motor overload protection CT investigated by UL to comply with NEC Article 430 e inverter overload protection IT e overspeed detection even when operating as a torque follower e programmable s
515. ted 1 TB3 terminal 23 is selected When an input step is executed it will command the Step Speed until the associated TB3 input is true When the associated input goes high the Control will move to the next step Figure 9 11 Input Step Transitions Motor Speed P81 Step 2 Speed 1600 RPM Step 3 Speed 1200RPM__ Step 4 Speed Step 1 800 RPM Step 5 Speed Speed 400 RPM 400 RPM Step 6 Step 7 Speed Speed VW fee E ee Me Me se a ll 0 RPM 400 RPM Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Done Begin Sequence TB3 19 TB3 22 TB3 23 TB3 26 TB3 27 TB3 28 TB3 19 The example in Figure 9 11 shows a profile sequence utilizing Input Mode 31 to control transitions from one step speed to the next Since there are 16 steps and a maximum of 6 inputs available for use multiple steps can reference the same digital inputs Note When two steps reference the same input you must make certain they are not adjacent to each other Note that step 1 and step 7 are both utilizing the same input terminal 19 For Example If Step 1 and Step 2 referenced the same input the profile control would command Step 1 speed until it saw the input go true Upon entering Step 2 it would see the same input high and immediately 12 5 ms go to Step 3 Using Mode 32 Digital input mode 32 duplicates the function of the first three bits of the Profile Enable command parameter 235 to determine the command state of the Profile Control It is best to clear the Pr
516. tep Trig Step Trig Ext Fit Profile Ena Run Seq Pos Hold Enable 4 Spd Trq Select 3 2 1 Speed Ref 1 0 0 0 Zero Torque Speed Ref 2 0 0 1 Speed Reg Speed Ref 3 0 1 0 Torque Reg Speed Ref 4 0 1 1 Min Tro Spd Speed Ref 5 1 0 0 Max Trq Spd Speed Ref 6 1 0 1 Sum Tro Spd Speed Ref 7 1 1 0 Reserved No Change 1 1 1 Reserved In modes 5 9 10 and 15 the MOP value is not reset to 0 when you stop In modes 27 28 29 and 30 the MOP value is reset to 0 when you stop A 10 Specifications 10V Com 10V Shield Analog Output 1 Shield Analog Output 2 Shield 4 20mA Output 1 Ce je ee a as is Relay 1 Supply Relay 2 Relay 3 Relay 4 Voltage Clear ance Voltage Clear ance TE ees rome aANoarwh Analog I O Parameters for Frames A1 A4 TB4 J4 Offset Scale Offset Scale Offset Scale Offset Scale Filter BW s7 28 Offset Scale Filter BW 00 11 Offset Scale Filter BW Pulse In PPR Pulse In Scale Pulse In Offset lt 114 Relay Config 1 115 187 Relay Config 2 188 Relay Setpoint 2 189 Relay Config 3 190 Relay Setpoint 3 191 Relay Config 4 192 Relay Setpoint 4 Relay Setpoint 1 SP An In1 Sel P ar 133 ie SP An In1 Scale P ar 135 SP An In2 Sel P ar 136 i SP An In2 Scale P ar 136 SP An Output SP An In1 Value SP An Ini Value Motor Speed Motor P ower AoD w gt C Speed Ref 2
517. ter 125 Check if Direction owner in Dir Ref Owner parameter 128 has any bit set If so remove the command direction Check to make sure that bit 11 in Logic Options parameter 17 is clear 0 You cannot change the speed reference Check if the port is enabled in SP Enable Mask parameter 124 Check if Reference is enabled in Dir Ref Mask parameter 125 Check if Reference owner in Dit Ref Owner parameter 128 has any bit set If so remove the command reference If bit 0 for the L Option control is set you need to do one of the following to remove ownership Clear bit 0 in Dir Ref Mask parameter 125 If L Option Mode parameter 116 is 2 3 8 9 23 24 or 26 close the L Option inputs for speed references 1 2 and 3 The drive does not run correct torque Set the drive defaults and run start up again to tune the drive Check Spd Trq Mode Sel parameter 68 and Slave Torque parameter 70 The drive cannot control current and trips on an overcurrent fault If you are using an encoder check that you have entered the current PPR into Encoder PPR parameter 8 The MOP does not work Check L Option Mode parameter 116 Make sure that Mop Value parameter 119 is linked to a speed reference The pulse input does not work Make sure that the pulse input jumper is set correctly Make sure that the input is differential and not single ended Check the values of Pulse In PPR
518. ter Amps B 26 Control Block Diagrams file group Motor Inverter Motor Constants file group Monitor Motor Status file group Motor Inverter Motor Nameplate Encoder Data The Limiter Scaler function takes input from Zq parameter 91 the torque reference and Flux Current parameter 168 and performs limit checks and scaling on the two values The Limiter Scaler function outputs the synchronous or electrical values of the torque command Iq and the flux current Id These values Iq and Id are converted to stationary values To convert the values the conversion routine also takes input from the feedback device If the feedback ae Then device is Encodeiless The value of Motor Frequency parameter 89 is integrated to get the proper units and then used for the conversion The drive uses the values of Motor Poles parameter 7 and Encoder PPR parameter8 to adjust the value coming from the Encoder encoder The value of Slip Gain parameter 169 is integrated to get the proper units and then added to the value from the encoder Once the values are converted to stationary values they are sent to the current regulator Control Block Diagrams B 27 Drive Fault Detection Overview we Encoder a Quad Loss Phase Loss _yp Torque Limitsts lt _87 Drive Inv Zero Speed Staus lt 15 D 12 Motor Stall C25 xx x Sec Time Fi
519. ter the values shown in Figure 10 30 Figure 10 30 Hysteresis Function Block Func 1 Eval Sel Function Sel Motor Speed Function In1 Enter 0 This value is not used Func 1 Mask Val Func 2 Eval Sel 9 Enter Value of bandwidth for high speed C201 gt gt Function In2 Spd Enter 0 This value is not me T z a Function Desired Y Int gt In4 In2 gt Out 1 Output 1 BW Func 3 Eval Sel Int lt In5 In3 gt Out 1 In5 lt In1 lt In4 No change Enter Value of bandwidth for low speed gt C204 gt gt Function In3 Enter 0 This value is not used 205 gt gt Func 3 Mask Val Function In4 Enter Value for high speed Function In5 Hysteresis Function Block Enter Value for low speed p 10 26 Using the Function Block Using the Band Function The band function lets you select a value based on whether Input 1 is within a range or outside of a range Figure 10 31 shows the parameters that are used for the band function and how these parameters are evaluated Figure 10 31 Band Function Block Func 1 Eval Sel Function Sel 15 Function In2 CID In5 lt In1 lt In4 Func 2 Mask Val C202 gt If Then Function True In2 gt Out 1 Output 1 False In3 gt Out 1 Function In4 C207 gt Function In5 C208 gt Band Function Block Using the Logical Add Subtract The logical add subtract function lets you use a logic
520. ter type finkabie desinanon volt output This is the value of the analog output number 2 Display dis Factory default 0 Minimum value 32767 Maximum value 32767 Conversion 1 1 109 An Out 2 Offset Parameter number 109 File group Interface Comm Analog Outputs Use An Out 2 Offset to set the offset applied to the raw analog Parameter type Hebe desicion output 2 The offset is applied after the scale factor Display Poa vole Factory default 0 000 volts Minimum value 19 980 volts Maximum value 19 980 volts Conversion 205 1 000 110 An Out 2 Scale Parameter number 110 File group Interface Comm Analog Outputs Use An Out 2 Scale to set the scale factor or gain for analog Parameter type Title desicion output 2 A 32767 digital value is converted by the scale factor Display GG This allows an effective digital range of 2048 which is then Factory default 0 500 offset to provide a 10 volt range Minimum value 1 000 Maximum value 1 000 Conversion 32767 1 000 111 mA Out Value Parameter number 111 Use mA Out Value to convert a 32767 digital value to a 4 20 mA output This is the value of the mA output File group Parameter type Display Factory default Minimum value Maximum value Conversion Interface Comm Analog Outputs linkable destination x 0 32767 32767 1 1 11 36 Parameters 112 mA Out Offset Parameter number 112 od File group Interface Comm Analog Outputs Use eas tia to the es ee the raw
521. terminal 380 480V 224 448 kW 300 600 HP Terminal Designations 500 600V 187 448 kW 250 600 HP Terminal Designations Brake terminals are located on the DC choke behind the U terminal Access the DC Choke from the right side of the chassis O O 1 T S L3 L2 N A A Connect the DC Brake P A A to the Bus to the drive Required S Input Fusing L L L U Connect the DC Brake Required Branch M1 to the Bus to the drive Circuit Disconnect T Refer to the Troubleshooting Guide for information on accessing the DC Bus Inductor AC Input Line f A lt lt s lt lt s i 1 typical terminal layout located at top of drive 1 User supplied 4 5 4 6 Mounting and Wiring Information Specific to Frames B C D E F G and H Figure 4 5 Drive Connections for Frame H 380 480V 522 597 kW 700 800 HP Terminal Designations 500 600V 522 597 kW 700 800 HP Terminal Designations Connect the BC Brake to the Link Choke at the bottom of Bay 2 Connect the DC Brake Connect the DC Brake to the Bus to the drive to the Bus to the drive lt O O Required i Input Fusing 7 7 T Required Branch M1 M2 M3 ircuit Disconnect
522. th 0 to n or both 0 to n Do not need an offset Step 3 Different Need an offset Step 2 In the example shown in Figure 7 3 the ranges were different so we used Step 2 2 Calculate the offset For example if you need a 0 to 10V input and you have a 4096 internal range offset the 0 to 10V range to get a range In this case an offset of 5 works because subtracting 5 from both 0 and 10 gives you a 5 to 5 range 3 Convert the analog input range to a digital range based on 10V being equal to 2048 For example This analog value Is converted to this digital value 10 2048 5 1024 0 0 5 1024 10 2048 7 6 Setting Up the Input Output 10V pot file nterface Comm group Analog Outputs 4 Compare the output of the digital to analog conversion C with the internal drive units B If the values are Then you Go to Identical Do not need to scale the value Step 6 Different Need to scale the value Step 5 In Figure 7 3 the values were different so we used Step 5 5 Calculate the scale For example if the output of the digital to analog conversion is 1024 and the internal drive units are 4096 the scale value should be 4 4 x 1024 4096 6 Enter the offset and scale values into the appropriate parameters Figure 7 4 shows another example of an analog input In this example you have an analog input range of 10V and you want an internal range
523. the speed down to 0 4 Measures the slope of the increase and decrease to determine the inertia Once the torque is applied how the test measures the inertia depends on whether bit 10 of Bus Brake Opts parameter 13 is set If bit 10 is set the speed is ramped down to 0 after the motor reaches the speed specified in Autotune Speed At the same time the torque becomes a negative value and remains negative until the speed reaches 0 This is shown as 7 Speed With arbrake Slope used to find inertia Autotune Speed parameter 165 Dwell Time ma 0 Torque Autotune Torque parameter 164 Dwell Time l 0 Time Autotune Torque parameter 164 77777777777 If bit 10 is not set the speed coasts down to 0 after the motor reaches the speed specified in Autotune Speed The torque also becomes 0 at this point This is shown as i Speed sone Slope used to find inertia Autotune Speed parameter 165 Dwell Time i Tite f i 0 g i i i Torque i 1 Autotune Torque parameter 164 Dwell Time i 0 Time file group Control Speed Regulator file group Control Speed Regulator Speed Feedback Control Limits file group Autotune Autotune Status Control Block Diagrams B 37 Once the inertia is determined the value is placed in Total Inertia parameter 157 The value of Spd Desired
524. then command zero speed An Input End Action is selected by entering a value of 2 in the End Action parameter 238 The input terminal used to trigger the zero speed command is selected by parameter 241 The step trigger inputs are the only valid choices for signaling the end of the Profile Sequence Remember six inputs are available in Mode 31 but only two inputs are valid in Mode 32 Setting a Step Type parameter to a value of 3 defines it as an Encoder Step Adjustable Encoder Step Units Adjustment of the Counts Per Unit parameter allows you to define the Units for Encoder Steps in increments that are meaningful for a particular application For Example An application translates four motor shaft revolutions via gearing into one linear foot of movement The Counts Per Unit parameter could be adjusted so that the Encoder Step Value parameters are entered in units equating to one foot Encoder Units and the Counts Per Unit Parameter The rotational distance of each encoder step unit is determined by Counts Per Unit parameter 245 When determining the value of the Counts Per Unit parameter it is important to understand that a typical encoder produces a value that is 4 times greater than the encoder PPR rating This is because the drives are designed to utilize quadrature encoders With a quadrature encoder the counter will increment on the rising edge of each of the four input signals A A B B 9 26 Applications
525. ther 1336 IMPACT drives Notice that you can have a maximum of three slave drives 9 12 Applications Using a Remote Pot Figure 9 5 An Example of a 4 20 mA Application 1336 IMPACT drive 4 20mMA In 4 20mA In 1336 IMPACT drive 1336 IMPACT drive 4 20mA Out 4 20MA In 4 20mA In Master Drive 1336 IMPACT drive 4 20mMA In 4 20mA In Slave Drives Maximum of 3 For some applications you may want to wire a remote pot to your 1336 IMPACT drive This section provides two examples of how you might wire a remote pot to your drive and configure the appropriate parameters These are only examples For more specific information about Refer to Wiring the analog inputs Chapter 2 Setting up your analog parameters Chapter 7 Specifying direction Appendix B The first example is shown in Figure 9 6 In this example a 10V pot is wired to a D frame drive to provide speed control This example could apply to any B H frame drive However if you are using an Al A4 frame drive you would use terminal block TB7 shown in Figure 3 3 Applications 9 13 Figure 9 6 An Example of a Remote 10V Pot Wired to a D Frame Drive An In 1 Offset An In1 Scale An In1 Filter An In1 Value Link Speed Ref 1 gt wD ase KB De ao 0 2 0 4096 TB10 Tee eS eee PS eo eer eer ee Er ee T CEEE EEEE EER Bi 10V Remote Pot 10V
526. ths You must separate current carrying ground conductors Control and signal ground conductors should not run near or parallel to a power ground conductor Connecting the Ground Conductor of the Motor Cable Connect the ground conductor of the motor cable drive end directly to the drive ground terminal not to the enclosure bus bar Grounding directly to the drive and filter if installed provides a direct route for high frequency current returning from the motor frame and ground conductor At the motor end you should also connect the ground conductor to the motor case ground If you use shielded or armored cables connect the shield to the drive chassis and the motor frame 2 16 Mounting and Wiring Your 1336 IMPACT Drive Making the Encoder Connections If you want to use an encoder you need to use an L Option board If you do not have an L Option board you cannot use an encoder To make the encoder connections you must 1 Route the connections in grounded steel conduit or shield cable in a wire tray If cables are run in a wire tray you must separate the signal and encoder wire from the power cables preferably with a steel divider 2 Ground the conduit at both ends 3 Ground the cable shield only at the drive For additional information about using an encoder refer to Chapter 5 Using the L Option Grounding the Discrete Control and Signal Wiring To ground the control and signal wiring you need to 1 Groun
527. timer input And Or Tmr Take the result of input 1 AND input 2 and OR with input 3 Then use the result for the timer input Tmr Or And Use input 1 for the timer input and OR with input 2 Then AND with input 3 Tmr And Or Use input 1 for the timer input and AND with input 2 Then OR with input 3 StateMachine Change the output value based on the value of input 1 timer and input 2 Add Sub Add input 1 and input 2 Refer to Chapter 10 Using the Function Block for more information Value Description 10 11 12 13 15 16 17 18 19 Max Min Compare input 1 with input 2 and based on input 3 output whichever value is larger or smaller Counter Count up input 1 or down input 2 Mult Div Multiply input 1 and input 2 and then divide by input 3 Scale Scale the value of input 1 from one range to another Hysteresis Create Hysteresis band In4 Hi In5 Lo for Input 1 Band Create Band In4 Hi In5 Lo for Input 1 Or Add Take the OR of input 1 and input 2 and use the result for the add sub input Nor Add Take the NOR of input 1 and input 2 and use the result for the add sub input And Add Take the AND of input 1 and input 2 and use the result for the add sub input Nand Add Take the NAND of input 1 and input 2 and use the result for the add sub input Value Description 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 Or And Add Take the result of input 1 OR
528. ting PPR rating 11 11 Feedback Loss Fault 12 27 filtering RFI E 3 flux braking 9 5 to 9 6 enabling 11 12 motor currents B 23 Flux Current 11 50 B 26 flux See fast flux up Flux Trim Owner 11 43 flying start using 9 14 9 16 9 17 frame designators defined 1 4 Freq Track Filtr 11 54 Fstart Select 11 69 Fstart Speed 11 70 Func 1 Eval Sel 10 4 11 62 Func 1 Mask Val 11 61 Func 2 Eval Sel 10 4 11 63 Func 2 Mask Val 11 63 Func 3 Eval Sel 10 4 11 65 Func 3 Mask Val 11 64 function block add subtract 10 10 to 10 12 band 10 26 evaluating inputs 10 4 hysteresis 10 23 to 10 25 logical add subtract 10 26 to 10 27 logical multiply divide 10 27 to 10 28 maximum minimum 10 12 to 10 14 multiply divide 10 18 to 10 20 overview 10 1 fo 10 3 scale 10 20 to 10 23 state machine 10 8 to 10 10 timer delay 10 5 to 10 8 up down counter 10 14 Function In1 11 61 Function In10 11 73 Function In2 11 62 Function In3 11 64 Function In4 11 65 Function In5 11 66 Function In6 11 66 Function In7 11 67 Function In8 11 67 Function In9 11 73 Function Output1 11 69 Function Output2 11 69 Function Sel 11 68 functions determining ownership 8 5 masking 8 6 ownership of 8 3 fusing requirements A1 A4 frames 3 4 B H frames 4 11 Fwd Speed Limit 11 20 13 9 B 7 G gains integral 13 10 B 17 Kf 13 13 B 18 Ki 13 10 B 17 Kp 13 10 B 17 proportional 13 1
529. tion B 27 Inverter overload B 32 Speed loop auto tune B 35 Through put time B 38 Throughout this appendix This symbol Indicates lt 15 gt A source parameter 7D A destination parameter A particular bit For example the following symbols identify bit 6 Jog l Ramp En in Logic Options B 2 Control Block Diagrams Motor Control Board Overview The following is an overview of how the drive processes information Speed Loop Auto tune Page B 35 TorqueTrim Torque Limit R ante Trim 7 Speed Ref ererence erences Control Control Regulator 2 Jogs i Page B 4 Page B 10 can a Page B 16 Process Trim TorqueCommand Speed Feedback Control Encoderless Page B 13 Sheet Connection Symbols Speed Ramp Output APN Speed PI Regulator Output AN Speed Reference A Current Processor Command A Of AN Torque Trim AN Filtered Is Reference AN _ Speed Trim A Trim Error AN iq Reference AN _ Torque Limit High A _ Stator Current Reference A _ Active Logic Command A _ Torque Limit Low A Logic Control Word AN _ Torque Command AN Active Torque Mode AN Speed Feedback Control Block Diagrams Drive Local Inputs Fault R Detection Fault and Warning Queues Page B 27 Torque Torque pleat Analog ae Eog Id REF AC Current External Converter Regulator Torque gt Page B 19
530. tional Cable Terminator Applications with non inverter duty motors or any motor with exceptionally long leads may require an output inductor or cable terminator An inductor or Bulletin 1204 terminator helps limit reflection to the motor to levels that are less than the motor insulation value Mounting and Wiring Your 1336 IMPACT Drive 2 9 Optional Output Reactor You can use the reactors listed in the 1336 IMPACT drive price list for drive input and output These reactors are specifically constructed to accommodate IGBT inverter applications with switching frequencies up to 20 kHz They have a UL approved dielectric strength of 4000 volts opposed to a normal rating of 2500 volts The first two and last two turns of each coil are triple insulated to guard against insulation breakdown resulting from high dv dt When using motor line reactors set the drive PWM frequency to its lowest value to minimize losses in the reactors Important By using an output reactor the effective motor voltage is lower because of the voltage drop across the reactors this may also reduce motor torque Common Mode Cores Common mode cores help reduce the common mode noise at the drive output and guard against interference with other electrical equipment such as programmable controllers sensors and analog circuits In addition reducing the PWM carrier frequency reduces the effects and lowers the risk of common mode noise interference The following ta
531. tor Overload e ae castes ee L acceptable increase the parameter 26 value of Motor Overload parameter 26 If you do not want this condition to be reported as a fault change bit 4 in Fault Select 2 parameter 22 to 0 The drive is in a limit condition for Check Torque Limit Sts parameter 87 to see which limit a period of time in excess of the has occurred Increase the appropriate limit parameter een XR E aii Soft value specified in Motor Stall or reduce the load Time parameter 25 with the If you do not want this condition to be reported as a fault motor at zero speed change bit 5 in Fault Select 2 parameter 22 to 0 Check for possible motor overheating If the motor temperature is excessive reduce the accel decel times parameters 42 45 or reduce the Motor overload pending The load p 01083 VP Flashing Warnin drive has reached 95 of the If th f ble i h MtrOvrid Pend green g level required for a motor Ine molortemperature is acceptapie Increase the overload trip see fault 01084 value of Motor Overload parameter 26 If you do not want this condition to be reported as a warning change bit 3 in Warning Select 2 parameter 23 to 0 Check for possible motor overheating If the motor temperature is excessive reduce the Motor overload tripped The drive accel decel times parameters 42 45 or reduce the 01084 VP Flashin has reached the level of load MtrOvrld Trp green g Warning accumulated motor c
532. torque regulators are clamped at zero 4 when speed reference is less than 1 Hz Refer to Chapter 9 Applications for additional information about the feedback device type selections Important Even though Fdbk Device Type lets you change the feedback device type you should use the start up procedure to change your feedback device The start up procedure automatically changes several related parameters and changing Fdbk Device Type manually will not re set these parameters Selecting Your Feedback Filter You can use Fdbk Filter Sel parameter 65 to select the type of feedback filter You can choose among the following filters file Control group Speed Feedback To select Select this this type of filter value gain No filter 0 db 0 rad sec gain A light 35 49 Odb radian feedback 1 filter 6 db l 35 49 rad sec gain A heavy 20 40 Odb radian feedback 2 filter 12 db l 20 40 rad sec Control Block Diagrams B 15 To select Select this this type of filter value gain 0 db For Par 66 between 0 A single pole aa Par 67 rad sec lead lag a 3 feedback filter gain BW 0 db l For Par 66 equal to 0 Par 67 rad sec Notice that Fdbk Filter Gain parameter 66 and Fdbk Filter BW parameter 67 are used for the single pole lead lag filter Fdbk Filter Gain lets you specify the Kn term of the single power lead lag filter If Kn is Then
533. trical Configuration 2 c cece eee eens E 3 Grounding ct ci htt ea a al eel aed nna eee aiaia E 3 Mechanical Configuration 00 0 0 ccc cece e eee eee E 4 Appendix F Who Should Use this Manual What Is the 1336 IMPACT Drive Purpose of this Manual Preface Preface Read this preface to become familiar with the rest of the manual This preface covers the following topics e who should use this manual e an overview of the 1336 IMPACT drive e the purpose of this manual e terms and abbreviations e conventions used in this manual e Allen Bradley support Use this manual if you are responsible for installing wiring starting programming or troubleshooting control systems that use the 1336 IMPACT drive This manual is intended for qualified service personnel responsible for setting up and servicing the 1336 IMPACT AC drive You must have previous experience with and a basic understanding of electrical terminology programming procedures required equipment and safety precautions before attempting to service the 1336 IMPACT drive The 1336 IMPACT drive is a high performance microprocessor based Field Oriented Control FOC AC drive that uses Force technologies The 1336 IMPACT drive was designed to be a low cost drive for standalone applications The drive is user friendly and has an easy to use start up sequence for simple out of the box installation This manual is a learning and reference guide for th
534. true Maximum value 3 Conversion None 3 Encoder Step operate at speed shown in P249 for units in P250 Parameters 11 77 Parameter number 252 292 Step 2 Speed File group Profile Test Data Parameter 252 sets the rpm value for this step Scaling 4096 Parameter type Setup Base Speed Display X x rpm Factory default 0 0 rpm Minimum value Maximum value 8 x base speed 8 x base speed Conversion 4096 Base Motor Speed 253 Parameter number 253 Step 2 Value File group Profile Test Data Parameter 253 sets the time in seconds for time steps the Parameter type Setup counts in units for encoder steps and the TB3 input to triggeron Display x xS x X X units for TB Input steps Scaling Factory default 0 0 0 0 0 Time Step 10 x desired value 10 1 0 sec Minimum value 0 0 0 0 0 3276 7 5 3276 7 0 1 0 sec x TBin 10 1 0 unit Encoder Step 10 1 0 unit Maximum value TB Input Step dependent on L Option Mode Sel See P241 Conversion 254 Parameter number 254 7 Step 2 Type File group Profile Test Data Parameter 251 selects the type of step to be used Parameter type Setup 0 Not Used This forces an End Action Display x 1 Time Step operate at speed shown in P252 for time in P253 Factory default 0 2 TBS Input Step operate at speed shown in P252 until this Minimum value 0 input goes true Maximum value 3 3 Encoder Step operate at speed shown in P252 for units in Conversion None P253
535. ts L5 L5 Option Board Wiring Diagram 510 zs 510 Typical Not Used eH 19 20 21 22 23 24 2 2 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 w 22 22 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 e 3 2 2 2 Common User Supplied i ji ji ji il T 24V AC DC Circuits used with the L5 Option board must be able to operate with high true logic Must generate a voltage of no more than In the low state this type of external circuit And leakage current must be less than DC 8V DC 1 5 mA into a 2 5K ohm load AC 10V AC 2 5 mA into a 2 5K ohm load Both AC and DC external circuits in the high state must generate a voltage of 20 to 26 volts and source a current of approximately 10 mA for each input Using the L Option 5 13 Requirements for the 115V AC Figure 5 6 shows the wiring diagram for the L6 Option board Interface Board L6 Figure 5 6 L6 Option Board Wiring Diagram 100 z 100 20k Typical Not Used ptt tlt f 2 26 27 28 29 30 3B 32 lt nO 4a OO TERRA Ee Common 1 Ii T Fuse User Supplied 115V AC use I e Circuits used with the L6 Option board must be able to operate with high true logic In this state Circuits must generate a voltage of No more than 30V AC Leakage current must be less than 10 mA low into a 6 5K ohm load high 90 115V AC 10 and source a current of approximately 20
536. ts 8 through 15 to Display bits see which SCANport device s are presently issuing a valid start Factory default not applicable command Youcan choose between Minimum value 00000000 00000000 0 Stop start input not present Maximum value 11111111 11111111 1 Stop start input present Conversion ISA The bits are defined as follows Refer to Chapter 8 Using the SCANport Capabilities for more information Bit Description Bit Description Bit Description 0 Stop L Opt 6 Stop SP 6 11 Start SP 3 The L Option board owns the SCANport device 6 owns the SCANport device 3 owns the stop stop start 1 Stop SP 1 7 Stop P197 12 Start SP 4 SCANport device 1 owns the Logic Cmd Input parameter 197 SCANport device 4 owns the stop owns the stop start 2 Stop SP 2 8 Start L Opt 13 Start SP 5 SCANport device 2 owns the The L Option owns the start SCANport device 5 owns the stop 9 Start SP 1 start 3 Stop SP 3 SCANport device 1 owns the 14 Start SP 6 SCANport device 3 owns the start SCANport device 6 owns the stop 10 Start SP 2 start 4 Stop SP 4 SCANport device 2 owns the 15 Start P197 SCANport device 4 owns the start Logic Cmd Input parameter 197 stop owns the start 5 Stop SP 5 SCANport device 5 owns the stop 130 Jog1 Jog2 Owner Parameter number 130 File group You can use the lower byte of Jog1 Jog2 Owner bits 0 through 7 to see which SCANport device s are presently issuing a valid jog 2 command You can use the higher byte bits 8 through
537. tware described in this manual Reproduction of the contents of this manual in whole or in part without written permission of the Allen Bradley Company is prohibited Throughout this manual we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death property ATTENTION Identifies information about practices or damage or economic loss Attentions help you e identify a hazard e avoid the hazard e recognize the consequences Important Identifies information that is especially important for successful application and understanding of the product Shock Hazard labels may be located on or inside the drive to h alert people that dangerous voltage may be present SCANport is a trademark of Rockwell Automation PLC is a registered trademark of Rockwell Automation COLOR KEYED is a registered trademark of Thomas amp Betts Corporation IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation Windows 95 is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation Overview Mounting and Wiring Your 1336 IMPACT Drive Mounting and Wiring Information Specific to Frames A1 A2 A3 and A4 Mounting and Wiring Information Specific to Frames B C D E F G amp H Using the L Option Table of Contents Who Should Use this Manual 20 c cece eee eee e eee eee 1 1 What Is the 1336 IMPACT Drive 2 c cece cece eee 1 1 Purpose of this
538. ty 1336 IMPACT Typical Mounting Frame G 1 Input power source to filter and output power filter to drive and drive to motor wiring must be in conduit or have shielding armor with equivalent attenuation Shielding armor must be bonded to the metal bottom plate See requirements 5 amp 6 on page E 1 2 Refer to the Filter Selection table on page E 2 for frame references and corresponding catalog numbers Required Knockout Assignments CE Conformity E 7 Dimensions are in Millimeters and Inches Frames A1 through A4 Control I O Filter Input Motor Output 22 2 28 6 0 88 1 13 3 Ples 22 2 0 88 1 Plc Frame D Filter Input Motor Output Control 1 0 SCANport 34 9 50 0 1 38 1 97 1 Plc 34 9 1 38 3 Ples 62 7 76 2 2 47 3 00 2 Ples Filter Input Frames B and C Control I O Motor Output i SCANport E 28 6 34 9 1 13 1 38 3 Ples 22 2 0 88 1 Plc Filter Input Frame E SCANport Control I O Side of Drive Motor Output 88 9 104 8 3 50 4 13 12 7 0 50 2P CS 3 Pics E 8 CE Conformity Notes Appendix F Spare Parts Information Current 1336 IMPACT drive spare parts information including recommended parts catalog numbers and pricing can be obtained from the following sources Allen
539. type ESON you entered during the start up routine This value is typically Display x x hp located on the motor nameplate Factory default 30 0 hp Minimum value 0 2 hp Maximum value 2000 0 hp Conversion 10 1 0 3 Nameplate RPM Parameter number 3 File grou Motor Inverter Motor Nameplate Nameplate RPM contains the value of the motor speed that you aera type RE entered during the start up routine This value is typically located Display x rpm on n motor aa This value should not be the Factory default 1750 rpm synchronous speed of the motor Mt AE 1 rpm Maximum value 15000 rpm Conversion 1 1 4 Nameplate Amps Parameter number 4 File group Motor Inverter Motor Nameplate Nameplate Amps contains the value of the current rating of the Parameter type desna on motor that you entered during the start up routine This value is Display x x amps PAN Sea on a motor bolle The drive uses this Factory default 0 2 amps information to properly tune to the motor Wahlen verre 0 1 amps Maximum value calculated Conversion 10 1 0 5 Nameplate Volts Parameter number 5 File group Motor Inverter Motor Nameplate Nameplate Volts contains the voltage rating of the motor that you Pam type Rees entered during the start up routine This value is typically located 1S Ry men Factory default 460 volts on the motor nameplate Minimum value 75 volts Maximum value 575 volts Conversion 1 1 6 Nameplate Hz Parameter number 6 N late H isih i fthe f ith File gr
540. ugh Faults 12 16 Understanding the Bus Voltage Tracker 0 0 e cece eee eee eee 12 21 Understanding the Parameter Limit Faults 0 0 00 eee eee 12 22 Understanding the Math Limit Faults 0 0 12 24 Start Up Troubleshooting Procedures 00 c eee e cece eens 12 27 Miscellaneous Troubleshooting Procedures 00 2 c cece eee 12 28 Encoderless Troubleshooting Problems ccc eee eee eee 12 30 Chapter 13 Chapter Objectives 0 c cece cece nee eee eee 13 1 What Is Auto tuning arris to sans Canto tad ian a dat eae tlt nee 13 1 Running the Power Structure and Transistor Diagnostics Tests 13 2 Running the Phase Rotation Test 00 cece cece eee eee eens 13 5 Running the Sequential Torque Tuning Tests 00 00 cece ee eae 13 6 Running the Inertia Testina caii iaasa i cece eee eee ene ees 13 9 Checking the Auto tune Status 0 6 ccc cece cent ene en eee 13 13 Specifications Control Block Diagrams Using the Human Interface Module HIM Derating Guidelines CE Conformity Spare Parts Information Table of Contents toc 4 Appendix A Chapter Objectives 000 0 c cece eee eens A 1 Specifications yas wines aa a wade es EAE AN E oy etnies A 1 Input Output RatingS 0 cece eee eee eee A 4 Cable and Wiring Recommendations 000 c cece eee eee eee A 5 Software Block Diagram 2 0 cece eee e eee A
541. um value 19 980 volts Maximum value 19 980 volts Conversion 205 1 000 101 An In 2 Scale Parameter number 101 File group Interface Comm Analog Inputs Use An In 2 Scale to set the scale factor or gain for analog Parameter type inkable des nalion input 2 The value of analog input 2 is converted to 2048 and Display OS then the scale is applied This provides an effective digital range Factory default 2 000 of 32767 Minimum value 16 000 Maximum value 16 000 Conversion 2048 1 000 102 mA Input Value Parameter number 102 i File group Interface Comm Analog Inputs Use mA Input Value to view the converted analog value of the Parameter type source milli amp input Display i Factory default not applicable Minimum value 32767 Maximum value 32767 Conversion ical 103 mA Input Offset Parameter number 103 File group Interface Comm Analog Inputs Use mA Input Offset to set the offset applied to the raw analog Parameter type inkabie desiinaron value of the milli amp input before the scale factor is applied This Display OSSEA lets you shift the range of the analog input Factory default 0 000 mA Minimum value 32 000 mA Maximum value 32 000 mA Conversion 128 1 000 104 mA Input Scale Parameter number 104 Ne i a File group Interface Comm Analog Inputs Enter the scale factor or gain for the milli amp input The milli amP Parameter type inkable desthanon input is converted to 2048 and then the scale is applied This Display BOSE provides an eff
542. um value 800 0 Conversion 4096 100 0 11 30 Parameters 87 Torque Limit Sts Parameter number 87 name File group Monitor Drive Inv Status Use Torque Limit Sts to view a bit coded summary of any Parameter type SOUE condition that may be limiting either the current or the torque Display bits reference Factory default not applicable Minimum value 00000000 00000000 Maximum value 01111111 11111111 Conversion 1 1 The bits are defined as follows Refer to Appendix B Control Block Diagrams for more information on the NTC and IT inverter foldbacks Value Description Value Description Value Description 0 Mtr Iq Lim 6 Atune Trq 12 Torque Lim Positive motor current limit Positive auto tune torque Negative torque limit 1 NTC Foldbak 7 Reserved 13 Trq Pwr Lim Positive NTC inverter foldback Leave 0 Negative torque power limit 2 IT Foldback 8 Mtr Iq Lim 14 Atune Trq Positive IT inverter foldback Negative motor current limit Negative auto tune torque limit 3 Flux Brake 9 NTC Foldbak 15 Reserved Iq limited due to flux braking Negative NTC inverter protection Leave 0 4 Torque Lim foldback Positive torque limit 10 IT Foldback 5 Trq Pwr Lim IT inverter protection foldback Positive torque power limit 11 Flux Brake Iq limited due to flux braking 88 Motor Flux Parameter number 88 o File group Monitor Motor Status Use Motor Flux to view the level of motor field flux calculated Parameter type SINE by the drive Disp
543. unintentional flow of liquid gas or solids exist an additional hardwired stop circuit is required to remove AC line power to the drive When AC power is removed there is a loss of inherent regenerative braking effect and the motor coasts to a stop An auxiliary braking method may be required Repeated Application Removal of Input Power ATTENTION The 1336 IMPACT drive is intended to be controlled by control input signals that start and stop the motor A device that routinely disconnects and then reapplies line power to the drive for the purpose of starting and stopping the motor is not recommended If you use this type of circuit a maximum of 3 stop start cycles in any 5 minute period with a minimum 1 minute rest between each cycle is required Ten minute rest cycles must separate these 5 minute periods to let the drive precharge resistors cool Refer to codes and standards applicable to your particular system for specific requirements and additional information Applying Power to Your Drive Recording Your Drive and Motor Information Starting Up Your System 6 3 When the pre power checks are completed apply incoming power System design determines how you apply power Make sure that you know the safety controls associated with your system before applying power Only apply power if you thoroughly understand the 1336 IMPACT drive and the associated system design Measure the incoming line voltage between L1 amp L2 L2 amp L
544. upload download parameters EEProm i between the HIM and the drive Search Search for parameters that are not at their default values Control Status Disable or enable the drive logic mask to let you remove the HIM while drive power is applied SP Enable Mask parameter 124 lets you disable the logic mask with a Series A HIM below version 3 0 You can also access the fault and warning queues from Control Status A clear function clears the queue It will not clear an active fault Refer to Chapter 12 Troubleshooting for more information about the fault and warning queues Password Protect the drive parameters against programming changes by unauthorized personnel When a password has been assigned you must have the correct password to access the Program EEProm modes and the Control Logic Clear Fault Queue menus You can choose any five digit number between 00000 and 65535 for the password C 4 1 Using the Human Interface Module HIM Figure C 3 HIM Menu Tree Operator Level Power Up and Status Display BoB ET E Choose Mode g a Mode Level Control f EEProm Search Status Password Display Process Program Link Start Up Save Values Recall Values Reset Defaults Drive to HIM HIM to Drive Not available before Version 1 06 Series B Parameters Links Control Logic Reset Drive Fault Queue Warning Queue
545. ur Lim par 72 Neg Mtr Cur Lim par 73 Pos Torque Limit par 74 Neg Torque Limit par 75 Regen Power Lim par 76 Current Rate Lim par 77 Max Mtr Current par 195 Min Speed Limit par 215 Absolute Overspd par 24 Motor Stall Time par 25 Motor Overload par 26 Line Undervolts par 27 Speed Torg Mode Spd Trq Mode Sel par 68 Speed Reference SCANport Status Dir Ref Owner par 128 Start Stop Owner par 129 Jog1 Jog2 Owner par 130 Ramp CIFit Owner par 131 Flux Trim Owner par 132 Fault Status Speed Ref 1 par 29 Speed Scale 1 par 30 Speed Ref 2 par 31 Speed Ref 3 par 32 Speed Ref 4 par 33 Speed Ref 5 par 34 Speed Ref 6 par 35 Speed Ref 7 par 36 Speed Scale 7 par 37 Jog Speed 1 par 38 Jog Speed 2 par 39 PwrUp Fit Status par 219 Nefg Fit Status par 220 Fault Status 1 par 221 Fault Status 2 par 222 Warning Status 1 par 223 Warning Status 2 par 224 Accel Decel Accel Time 1 par 42 Accel Time 2 par 43 Decel Time 1 par 44 Decel Time 2 par 45 S Curve Percent par 47 Torque Reference Torque Ref 1 par 69 Slave Torque par 70 Testpoints Test Data 1 par 92 Test Select 1 par 93 Test Data 2 par 94 Test Select 2 par 95 Speed Feedback Scaled Spd Fdbk par 63 Fdbk Filter Sel par 65 Fdbk Filter G
546. urrent Relay Setpoint 3 is only active if Relay Config 3 Display x x parameter 189 is set to a value of 25 26 27 or 28 Factory default 0 0 t Minimum value 800 0 1 Relay Setpoint 3 was added in Version 2 xx Makimum valua 800 0 Conversion 4096 100 0 11 58 Parameters 191 in Al Parameter number 191 Relay Config 4 File group Interface Comm Digital Config Use Relay Config 4 to select the function of terminals 7 8 and 9 Parameter type destination of either TB10 for frames A1 A4 or TB11 for frames B H Display x output Factory default 32 Minimum value 0 1 Relay Config 4 was added in Version 2 xx MENANG 36 Conversion 1 1 Relay Config 4 may be any one of the following values Value Description Value Description Value Description 0 Disabled 16 Not Zero Spd 29 Faulted The relay is disabled The motor is not at zero speed A fault has occurred 1 Run Ready 17 Flux Ready 30 Not Faulted The drive is ready to run The motor is ready to be fluxed up A fault has not occurred 2 Not Run Rdy 18 Not Flux Rdy 31 Warning The drive is not ready to run The motor is not ready to be fluxed up A warning has occurred 3 Running 19 Flux Up 32 Not Warning Commanded speed is not zero The drive feels the motor is fluxed up A warning has not occurred 4 Not Running 20 Not Flux Up 33 Enable Commanded speed is zero The drive feels the motor is not fluxed up Power is being applied to the 5 Stopping 21 Jogging motor
547. urrent over If the motor temperature is acceptable increase the time as set by Motor Overload value of Motor Overload parameter 26 parameter 26 If you do not want this condition to be reported as a warning change bit 4 in Warning Select 2 parameter 23 to 0 The drive isin a limi dition f Check Torque Limit Sts parameter 87 to see which limit e ay re n 2 limit con ee has occurred Increase the appropriate limit parameter 01085 VP Flashing a period o time in excess of the r reduce the load Mtr Stall green Warning value specified in Motor Stall iyu do OE MISEI this conditi n to beresonedasa Time parameter 25 with the you h wa bi E 19 s p eporega motor at zero speed warning change bit 5 in Warning Select 2 parameter 23 to 0 Troubleshooting 12 9 Fault Code and Text LED Information Fault Type Description Suggested Action Inverter overtemperature trip There is excessive temperature Check the cabinet filters drive fans and heatsinks Check the thermal sensor and sensor wiring connector Reduce the load or duty cycle if possible 02028 VP Flashing Soft at the heatsink Inv Overtemp Trp red When this condition occurs the Lower the value of PWM Frequency parameter 10 drive coasts to a stop regardless Check the roof fan direction of rotation H frame only of the selected stop type Rotation should be counter clockwise when viewed from the top C
548. using an oscilloscope to directly measure high voltages Use an isolated measuring device with a high voltage probe Contact Allen Bradley for recommendations e hand tachometer used to monitor motor speeds e programming device instruction manual When a problem occurs with your drive check the VP and CP lights on your drive Figure 12 1 shows the location of the VP and CP lights Figure 12 1 VP and CP LED Locations AAA ZAA l Language Module i l i gt tL fa PODDD seeeeeee0000 cp VP v1 lt INVEN t Green Red Red Green Green Frames A1 A4 INV EN VP CP lorrr a ea I al LL Red 0 a pada Frames B H The lights on the motor control board indicate the status of the velocity processor VP and current processor CP If the VP or CP LED is Then for that processor Solid green No fault occurred Flashing green A drive warning occurred Flashing red A drive soft fault occurred Solid red A drive hard fault occurred Troubleshooting 12 3 Faults fall into three basic categories To remove this fault you need to This type
549. ve Logic Start Stop Sequencing Fault Handler For example the time that it takes a speed reference to be converted to an output current can be determined as follows SCANport Reference Velocity Torque Control Adaptive F O C Control Commutation Total Time 4 ms 2 ms 1 ms 7ms The maximum amount of time would thus be 7 ms It may take fewer than 7 ms but will not take more than 7 ms Note also that it would take the same amount of time if an analog speed reference were used Chapter Objectives What Is the Human Interface Module HIM Appendix C Using the Human Interface Module HIM Appendix C provides information so that you can use your Human Interface Module HIM more effectively This topic Starts on page What is the Human Interface Module HIM C 1 How does the HIM work C 3 HIM compatibility information C 12 Removing the HIM C 13 The Human Interface Module HIM is the standard user interface for the 1336 IMPACT drive When the drive mounted HIM is supplied you can access it from the front of the drive The HIM provides a way to program the drive and to view the operating parameters The HIM also lets you control different drive functions ATTENTION When a drive mounted HIM is not supplied on enclosed NEMA Type 1 IP20 drives you must install the blank cover plate option HAB to close the opening in the front cover of the enclosure Failure to install the blank cover plate allows acc
550. ve attempts to let the process trim function but operation in a limited condition is likely If Test Then Occurred Data 2is A during 1 bit0 A subtract overflow The process trim error calculation The process trim bumpless calculation 2 bit 1 An overflow unable to preset output upon rise of enable with existing gains 4 bit 2 An add overflow The process trim integral calculation 8 bit 3 An add overflow The process trim output calculation To fix a problem in this area reduce the maximum level of PTrim Reference parameter 49 or adjust PTrim Ki parameter 54 and PTrim Kp parameter 55 Adjust PTrim Out Gain parameter 60 Refer to the Trim Control Overview section of Appendix B Control Block Diagrams for additional information about these parameters Math Limit Faults General Comments The math limit fault is similar to the parameter limit fault Both faults indicate that a request was made to do something that the drive cannot achieve The 1336 IMPACT drive attempts to honor the request by using the largest possible data value that is consistent with the requested data In many cases the drive functions under this limited condition until the data is brought back within a controllable range When a math limit fault occurs evaluate Test Select 2 and Test Data 2 to determine the specific cause The suggested action depends on the cause If drive operation is acceptable as it i
551. verload overview B 32 voltage rating 11 11 Inverter Amps 11 11 Inverter Dgn1 11 52 13 4 Inverter Dgn2 11 52 13 4 inverter overload 11 16 11 17 12 5 Inverter Volts 11 11 Iq 11 31 B 26 Iq Offset 11 73 IT inverter protection B 33 J jog selecting references B 5 Jog Speed 1 11 19 Jog Speed 2 11 19 Jog1 Jog2 Owner 11 42 K Kf Freq Reg 11 53 Kf Speed Loop 11 49 13 11 13 13 B 18 B 37 Ki Freq Reg 11 53 Ki Speed Loop 11 48 13 12 B 18 B 37 Kp Freq Reg 11 53 Kp Speed Loop 11 48 13 12 B 18 B 37 L L Option available functions 5 3 changing input mode 5 8 choosing mode 5 4 configuring 7 12 connections 5 6 to 5 7 description 5 2 encoder 5 11 examples of 5 9 to 5 10 requirements L4 5 11 L5 5 12 L6 5 13 L7E 5 14 L8E 5 15 L9E 5 16 wiring 5 8 L Option In Sts 11 38 L Option Mode 9 14 11 37 Language Select 11 10 Leak Inductance 11 50 Line Undervolts 11 17 12 16 12 19 links creating 6 12 C 11 pre defined 6 13 removing 6 13 C 12 understanding 6 12 Logic Cmd Input 11 60 Logic Input 9 7 Logic Input Sts 8 1 fo 8 3 11 13 B 5 Logic Options 9 7 11 14 B 7 logical add subtract function 10 26 to 10 27 logical multiply divide function 10 27 to 10 28 loss of communications 8 7 lug kits 4 6 M mA In Filter BW 11 54 mA input loss of connection 11 15 11 16 12 4 mA Input Offset 11 34 mA Input Scale 11 34 mA Input Value 11 34 mA Out Offset 11 36 m
552. w Continued Monitor Motor Status Motor Torque q I I 1 I T Li it Motor orque Limi 1 Moto q Flux Motor I Filter Power Min Flux Level i 1 Iq 100 l Speed Motor Feedback Speed i L e v v Pos Mtr Cur Lim Taat Fig corrent Current Limits Motor y gt Upper Iq Flux Inverter NTC Limit NL Limit Overload Page B 34 B IT Limit Flux Current Neg Mtr Cur Lim CDd Lowerlq Limit Select Flux Current Id Kis NI lq Current Rate Lim Iq lt 9 gt LX Torque a aa ad Reference To Current eA Limit Sts Vv Torque Limit a Current anil we Imi imi Id Torque Limit Status Limiter lt 3 gt Iq Limit Param NTC Limit ie Motor Flux Inverter IT Limit Limited Flux Flux Brake C71 Min Flux Level Power Lim Param Torque 100 Limits Autotune Lim Param Encoderless in Speed Mode D Torque Lim Paral I I is 8 9 The torque reference is divided into 6 areas bus regulator power limits torque selection torque limit and monitor motor status file group Application Bus Control file group Control Control Limits file group Autotune Autotune Setup file group Control Control Limits Control Block Diagrams B 21 Unde
553. wing indicators This indicator Provides information about This is referred to as The direction of motor rotation The Direction LED An approximate visual indication of the command speed This indicator is only available with digital speed control The shea Indicator HIM Operation When you first apply power to the 1336 IMPACT drive the HIM cycles through a series of displays These displays show the drive name HIM ID number and communication status When complete the status display shown in Figure C 2 is displayed Figure C 2 Initial Status Display The display shows the current status of the drive such as Stopped or Running or any faults that may be present p On a Series A Version 3 0 or Series B HIM see back of HIM for Series information you can replace the status display with either the Process display or the Password Login menu This is covered later in this appendix From this display press any one of the five display panel keys Choose Mode is displayed Press the Increment or Decrement key to scroll through the modes The following modes are available This mode Lets you Display View the value of any parameter You cannot modify any parameters in this mode Process Display two user selected processes Program Access the complete listing of parameters available for programming Reset all parameters to the factory default settings In addition with a Series B HIM you can
554. wner parameter 131 is set If set check stop owners in Start Stop Owner parameter 129 and remove stop conditions The fault is a hard fault which requires a power cycle or drive reset The motor does not turn or run at the correct speed Check which speed reference the drive is following in Drive inv Status parameter 21 bits 13 15 Check if Spd Trq Mode Sel parameter 68 is set correctly Check if Spd Desired BW parameter 161 is non zero Set the drive defaults and run start up again to tune the drive If drive is in encoderless w deadband mode check to see if reference is less than 1Hz Troubleshooting 12 29 Then you should The HIM pot does not control motor speed Check if SP An In1 Select parameter 133 or SP An In2 Select parameter 136 is set to the HIM port number Check if SP An In1 Scale parameter 135 or SP An In2 Scale parameter 138 is 0 125 Check if a Speed Ref 1 7 parameters 29 through 36 is linked to SP An In1 Value parameter 134 or SP An In2 Value parameter 137 Check which speed reference the drive is following in Drive inv Status parameter 21 bits 13 15 The speed reference should be set to the speed reference that SP An In1 Value parameter 134 or SP An In2 Value parameter 137 is linked to The drive will not change direction Check if the port is enabled in SP Enable Mask parameter 124 Check if Direction is enabled in Dir Ref Mask parame
555. ximum minimum function block to make sure that the speed in a mixing process does not exceed a specified limit Figure 10 16 shows this application Figure 10 16 Example of a Mixing Process This function block is set up to select the minimum of two values Smaller Value For this example the PLC is used to monitor the mixing process The user can control the speed of the mixing process up to the maximum speed specified by the PLC The maximum minimum function block is used to select whichever value is smaller the minimum the speed specified by the PLC or the speed specified by the pot To set up the function block for this application you would need to enter the values shown in Figure 10 17 10 14 Using the Function Block Figure 10 17 Maximum Minimum Function Block Func 1 Eval Sel Gateway SP An SP An In2 Sel In2 Scale SP An In2 Value Function Sel Func 1 Mask Val Func 2 Eval Sel An In 1 Offset Anin1Scale An In 1 Value Function 0 10V 10 In1 In2 lt min Outi Output 1 2 0 20 min 4096 In3 0 min gt Out Speed Func 2 Mask Val Ref 1 Func 3 Eval Sel Enter 0 for parameters 207 through 211 CD as these parameters are not used for this function block Enter 0 Function Ing Maximum Minimum Enter 0 This value is not used In3 Function Block Func 3 Mask Val Using the Up Down Counter The up down c
556. ximum value Conversion 164 Autotune Torque Parameter number 164 File group Autotune Autotune Setup Use Autotune Torque to specify the motor torque that is applied Parameter type destination to the motor during the flux current and inertia tests Display Paes Factory default 50 0 Minimum value 25 0 Maximum value 100 0 Conversion 4096 100 0 11 50 Parameters 165 Autotune Speed Parameter number 165 iih File group Autotune Autotune Setup Use Autotune Speed to set the maximum speed of the motor Parameter type Jesinalon during the flux current and inertia tests Display x X rpm Factory default base motor speed x 0 85 Minimum value base motor speed x 0 3 Maximum value base motor speed Conversion 4096 base motor speed Refer to Chapter 13 Understanding the Auto tuning Procedure for more information 166 Stator Resistnce Parameter number 166 _ File group Motor Inverter Motor Constants Enter the sum of the stator and cable resistances of the motor in Autotune Autotune Results per unit percent representation The auto tune procedure Parameter type destination measures the stator resistance during the quick motor tune Display XXK portion of start up Factory default 1 49 Minimum value 0 00 Maximum value 100 00 Conversion 4096 100 00 Refer to Chapter 13 Understanding the Auto tuning Procedure for more information 167 Leak Inductance Parameter number 167 File group Motor Inverter Motor
557. xx Maximum value 11111111 11111111 When set the bits are defined as the following Conversion 1 1 Bit Description Bit Description Bit Description 0 Flux Ready 6 Searching 12 Relay Setpt1 The motor is ready to be fluxed Flying start is syncing with motor Relay 1 has reached Relay up 7 Enc TrimLoss Setpoint 1 parameter 115 1 Flux Up Indicates encoder loss when 13 Relay Setpt2 The motor is fluxed up using Encoder switchover mode Relay 2 has reached Relay 2 DC Braking 8 At Limit Setpoint 2 parameter 188 DC braking is currently being The motor is at the At Limit set 14 Relay Setpt3 used point Relay 3 has reached Relay 3 Reserved 9 Func Output Setpoint 3 parameter 190 Leave 0 Function Output 1 15 Relay Setpt4 4 Bus Ridethru parameter 213 and or Function Relay 4 has reached Relay The drive is in a bus ridethrough Output 2 parameter 214 is non Setpoint 4 parameter 192 condition zero 5 Jogging 10 11 Reserved The drive is jogging Leave 0 197 Logic Cmd Input Parameter number 197 File group none Use Logic Cmd Input to change the logic evaluation block The Parameter type linkable destination bits that you change here are reflected in Logic Input Sts Display bits parameter 14 Factory default 00000000 00000000 F Minimum value 00000000 00000000 1 Logic Cmd Input was added in Version 2 xx Maximutivalue 44444444 14414114 The bits are defined as follows Conversion 1 1 Bit Description Bit Description Bit Description 0 Normal St
558. ynamic brake you Display KX should set Regen Power Limit to the default level of the drive Factory default 200 0 Minimum value 800 0 Maximum value 0 0 Conversion 4096 100 0 11 28 Parameters 77 Current Rate Lim Parameter number 77 File group Control Control Limits Enter the largest allowable rate of change for the current Parameter type incabletdectinetion reference signal This number is scaled in units of maximum per Display X X unit current every two milliseconds Factory default 20 0 Minimum value calculated Maximum value 200 0 Conversion 4096 100 0 78 Fast Flux Level Parameter number 78 h File group Application Fast Flux Up Enter the percent of rated motor current to be used to flux up the Parameter type desinaiion motor fast The larger the value the faster the motor reaches F a Display X X rated flux To enable the fast flux up feature you must set bit 8 in Factory default 200 0 Bus Brake Option parameter 13 M EE 100 0 Maximum value calculated Conversion 4096 100 0 Refer to the Enabling Fast Flux Up section of Chapter 12 Troubleshooting for more information 79 1 Parameter number 79 DC Brake Current File group Application DC Braking Hold Enter the percent of motor current to be used for DC braking the Parameter type linkable destination motor To enable DC braking you need to set bit 9 in Bus Brake Display X X Opts parameter 13 Factory default 50 0 i Minimum value
559. ze system wiring and other factors that affect system voltage and load impedance In most cases the software can properly determine if faults exist however there may be some installations where some faults cannot be properly checked In general test results are listed as failed if a questionable case is found You must review test results with respect to the whole drive system to properly interpret whether a real problem exists You can run the transistor diagnostics before a start by setting bit 8 of Logic Options parameter 17 Transistor diagnostics require motor current so a user start transition is required to run the tests To run the transistor diagnostics independently 1 In Autotune Dgn Sel parameter 173 set bit 0 to 1 2 Enable the drive file Autotune group Autotune Setup file Autotune group Autotune Status Understanding the Auto tuning Procedure 13 3 The green enable light D1 turns on very briefly approximately 300 ms and then turns off This runs only the transistor diagnostics and leaves the drive disabled after the diagnostics are complete Autotune Dgn Sel is automatically cleared to zero after the diagnostics have run Because the test results depend on your particular system you can disable tests that may give questionable or nuisance faults Use Trans Dgn Config parameter 172 to disable individual tests If you want to disable Then set this bit Cur

1336E-UM001 - Rockwell Automation

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents